Lenze 9300 Vector Manual 0-37-90kW v3 PDF

EDSVF9333V

.3|7

Ä.3|7ä
System Manual

9300 vector 0.37 ... 90 kW
EVF9321 ... EVF9333
Frequency inverter

Preface and general information 1
Contents
1 Preface
Contents
1.1 How to use this System Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-1

1.1.1 Information provided by the System Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-1
1.1.2 Products to which the System Manual applies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-3
1.2 Legal regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2-1
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  1-1

How to use this System Manual 1.1
Information provided by the System Manual 1.1.1
1.1 How to use this System Manual
1.1.1 Information provided by the System Manual
Target group This System Manual is intended for all persons who design, install,
commission, and adjust the 9300 vector frequency inverter.
Together with the System Manual (extension), document number
EDSV9383V-EXT and the catalogue it forms the basis for project planning for
the manufacturer of plants and machinery.
Contents The System Manual is the basis for the description of the 9300 vector
frequency inverter. Together with the System Manual (extension),
document number EDSVF9383V-EXT, a complete System Manual is
available:
ƒ The features and functions are described in detail.
ƒ Examples describe how to set the parameters for typical applications.
ƒ In case of doubt, the Operating Instructions delivered together with the
9300 vector frequency inverter always apply.
Contents of the System Manual Contents of the System Manual (extension)
1 Preface 1 Preface
2 Safety –
3 Technical data –
4 Installing the basic device –
5 Wiring the basic device –
6 Commissioning –
7 Parameter setting –
8 Configuration 2 Configuration
8.1 Description of function blocks 2.1 Configuring with Global Drive
Diameter calculator (DCALC) Control
Master frequency input (DFIN)
Master frequency output (DFOUT) 2.2 Basic configurations
Master frequency ramp function
generator (DFRFG) 2.3 How to use function blocks
Master frequency processing 2.4 Function blocks
(DFSET)
(Description of the other function
Internal motor control with V/f blocks)
characteristic control (MCTRL1)
Internal motor control with vector 2.5 Monitoring
control (MCTRL2)
8.2 Code table
8.3 Selection lists
8.4 Table of attributes
9 Troubleshooting and fault elimination –
10 DC-bus operation –
11 Safe standstill –
– 3 Application examples
– 4 Signal flow diagrams
12 Accessories –
13 Appendix 5 Appendix
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  1.1-1

1 Preface and general information
1.1 How to use this System Manual
1.1.1 Information provided by the System Manual
How to find information Use the System Manual as the basis. It contains references to the
corresponding chapters in the System Manual (extension):
ƒ Each chapter is a complete unit and informs entirely about a subject.
ƒ The Table of Contents and Index help you to find all information about
a certain topic.
ƒ Descriptions and data of other Lenze products (drive PLC, Lenze geared
motors, Lenze motors, ...) can be found in the corresponding
catalogues, Operating Instructions and Manuals. The required
documentation can be ordered at your Lenze sales partner or
downloaded as PDF file from the internet.
 Tip!
Current documentation and software updates for Lenze products
can be found on the Internet in the ”Downloads” area under
http://www.Lenze.com
1.1-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

How to use this System Manual 1.1
Products to which the System Manual applies 1.1.2
1.1.2 Products to which the System Manual applies
This documentation applies to 9300 frequency inverters as of version:

c d e
Type EVF 93xx – E V Vxxx 3x 7x
Product range
EVF Frequency inverter
Type no. / power

400 V 480 V
9321 0.37 kW 0.37 kW
9322 0.75 kW 0.75 kW
9323 1.5 kW 1.5 kW
9324 3.0 kW 3.0 kW
9325 5.5 kW 5.5 kW
9326 11 kW 11 kW
9327 15 kW 18.5 kW
9328 22 kW 30 kW
9329 30 kW 37 kW
9330 45 kW 55 kW
9331 55 kW 75 kW
9332 75 kW 90 kW
9333 90 kW 110 kW
Design
E Built-in unit (standard mounting)
C Cold plate technique
Version
V Vector-controlled frequency inverter
Variant
– Standard
V003 Cold plate
V004 Safe standstill
V024 Safe standstill and IT system
V100 IT system
Hardware version
Software version
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  1.1-3

Legal regulations 1.2
1.2 Legal regulations
Labelling Lenze controllers are unambiguously designated by the contents of the

nameplate.
Manufacturer Lenze Drive Systems GmbH, Hans-Lenze-Straße 1, D-31855 Aerzen,

Germany
CE conformity Conforms to the EC Low-Voltage Directive
Application as directed 9300 vector frequency inverter and accessories

ƒ must only be operated under the conditions prescribed in this System
Manual.
ƒ are components
– for open and closed loop control of variable speed drives with
asynchronous standard motor or asynchronous servo motors
– for installation in a machine
– for assembly with other components to form a machine.
ƒ comply with the requirements of the Low-Voltage Directive.
ƒ are not machines for the purpose of the Machinery Directive.
ƒ are not to be used as domestic appliances, but only for industrial
purposes.
Drives with 9300 vector frequency inverters
ƒ comply with the EMC Directive if they are installed according to the
guidelines of CE-typical drive systems.
ƒ can be used
– for operation on public and non-public mains
– for operation in industrial premises and residential areas.
ƒ The user is responsible for the compliance of his application with the
EC directives.
Any other use shall be deemed as inappropriate!
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  1.2-1

1 Preface and general information
1.2 Legal regulations
Liability The information, data, and notes in this System Manual met the state of the
art at the time of printing. Claims on modifications referring to controllers
and components which have already been supplied cannot be derived from
the information, illustrations, and descriptions.
The specifications, processes, and circuitry described in this System Manual
are for guidance only and must be adapted to your own specific application.
Lenze does not take responsibility for the suitability of the process and circuit
proposals.
The specifications in this System Manual describe the product features
without guaranteeing them.
Lenze does not accept any liability for damage and operating interference
caused by:
ƒ Disregarding the System Manual
ƒ Unauthorised modifications to the controller
ƒ Operating errors
ƒ Improper working on and with the controller
Warranty See terms of sales and delivery of the Lenze Drive Systems GmbH.
Warranty claims must be made to Lenze immediately after detecting the
deficiency or fault.
The warranty is void in all cases where liability claims cannot be made.
1.2-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Safety instructions 2
Contents
2 Safety instructions
Contents
2.1 General safety and application notes for Lenze controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-1
2.2 General safety and application instructions for Lenze motors . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2-1
2.3 Residual hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3-1
2.4 Definition of notes used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4-2
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  2-1

General safety and application notes for Lenze controllers 2.1
2.1 General safety and application notes for Lenze controllers
(According to: Low-Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC)
General Lenze controllers (frequency inverters, servo inverters, DC controllers) and

the accessory components can include live and rotating parts - depending on
their type of protection - during operation. Surfaces can be hot.
Non-authorised removal of the required cover, inappropriate use, incorrect
installation or operation, create the risk of severe injury to persons or
damage to material assets.
More information can be obtained from the documentation.
All operations concerning transport, installation, and commissioning as well
as maintenance must be carried out by qualified, skilled personnel (IEC
364/CENELEC HD 384 or DIN VDE 0100 and IEC report 664 or DIN VDE 0110
and national regulations for the prevention of accidents must be observed).
According to this basic safety information qualified, skilled personnel are
persons who are familiar with the assembly, installation, commissioning,
and operation of the product and who have the qualifications necessary for
their occupation.
Application as directed Drive controllers are components which are designed for installation in
electrical systems or machinery. They are not to be used as domestic
appliances, but only for industrial purposes according to EN 61000-3-2.
When installing the controllers into machines, commissioning (i.e. starting
of operation as directed) is prohibited until it is proven that the machine
corresponds to the regulations of the EC Directive 98/37/EC (Machinery
Directive); EN 60204 must be observed.
Commissioning (i.e. starting of operation as directed) is only allowed when
there is compliance with the EMC Directive (89/336/EEC).
The controllers meet the requirements of the Low-Voltage Directive
73/23/EEC. The harmonised standard EN 61800-5-1 applies to the
controllers.
The technical data as well as the connection conditions can be obtained from
the nameplate and the documentation. They must be strictly observed.
Warning: The controllers are products which can be installed in drive
systems of category C2 according to EN 61800-3. These products can cause
radio interference in residential areas. In this case, special measures can be
necessary.
Transport, storage Please observe the notes on transport, storage and appropriate handling.
Observe the climatic conditions according to EN 50178.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  2.1-1

2.1 General safety and application notes for Lenze controllers
Installation The controllers must be installed and cooled according to the instructions
given in the corresponding documentation.
Ensure proper handling and avoid mechanical stress. Do not bend any
components and do not change any insulation distances during transport or
handling. Do not touch any electronic components and contacts.
Controllers contain electrostatically sensitive components, which can easily
be damaged by inappropriate handling. Do not damage or destroy any
electrical components since this might endanger your health!
Electrical connection When working on live controllers, the valid national regulations for the
prevention of accidents (e.g. VBG 4) must be observed.
The electrical installation must be carried out according to the appropriate
regulations (e.g. cable cross-sections, fuses, PE connection). Additional
information can be obtained from the documentation.
Notes about installation according to EMC regulations (shielding, earthing,
filters and cable routing) are included in the documentation. These notes
also apply to CE-marked controllers. The compliance with limit values
required by the EMC legislation is the responsibility of the manufacturer of
the machine or system. The controllers must be installed in housings (e.g.
control cabinets) to meet the limit values for radio interferences valid at the
site of installation. The housings must enable an EMC-compliant
installation. Observe in particular that e.g. the control cabinet doors should
have a circumferential metal connection to the housing. Reduce housing
openings and cutouts to a minimum.
In the case of a malfunction (short circuit to frame or earth fault), Lenze
controllers can cause a DC residual current in the protective conductor. If an
earth-leakage circuit breaker (residual current device) is used as a protective
means in the case of indirect contact, only an e.l.c.b. of type B may be used
on the current supply side. Otherwise, another protective measure such as
separation from the environment through double or reinforced insulation or
disconnection from the mains by means of a transformer must be used.
Operation If necessary, systems including controllers must be equipped with additional

monitoring and protection devices according to the valid safety regulations
(e.g. law on technical equipment, regulations for the prevention of
accidents). The controller can be adapted to your application. Please observe
the corresponding information given in the documentation.
After a controller has been disconnected from the voltage supply, all live
components and power connections must not be touched immediately
because capacitors can still be charged. Please observe the corresponding
stickers on the controller.
All protection covers and doors must be shut during operation.
Note for UL approved systems with integrated controllers: UL warnings are
notes that only apply to UL systems. The documentation contains special UL
notes.
2.1-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

General safety and application notes for Lenze controllers 2.1
Safety functions Special controller variants support safety functions (e.g. ”safe torque off”,
formerly ”safe standstill”) according to the requirements of Annex I No. 1.2.7
of the EC Directive ”Machinery” 98/37/EC, EN 954-1 Category 3 and
EN 1037. Strictly observe the notes on the safety functions given in the
documentation on the respective variants.
Maintenance and servicing The controllers do not require any maintenance if the prescribed conditions
of operation are observed.
If the ambient air is polluted, the cooling surfaces of the controller may
become dirty or the air vents of the controller may be obstructed. Therefore,
clean the cooling surfaces and air vents periodically under these operating
conditions. Do not use sharp or pointed tools for this purpose!
Disposal Recycle metal and plastic materials. Ensure professional disposal of

assembled PCBs.
The product-specific safety and application notes given in these Operating
Instructions must be observed!
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  2.1-3

General safety and application instructions for Lenze motors 2.2
2.2 General safety and application instructions for Lenze motors
(According to: Low-Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC)
General Low-voltage machines have hazardous live and rotating parts and possibly
also hot surfaces.
Synchronous machines induce voltages at open terminals during operation.
All operations concerning transport, connections, commissioning and
maintenance must be carried out by qualified, skilled personnel (EN 50110-1
(VDE 0105-100) and IEC 60364 must be observed). Inappropriate use creates
the risk of severe injury to persons and damage to material assets.
Low-voltage machines may only be operated under the conditions that are
indicated in the section ”Application as directed”.
The conditions at the place of installation must comply with the data given
on the nameplate and in the documentation.
Application as directed Low-voltage machines are intended for commercial installations. They
comply with the harmonised standards of the series EN 60034 (VDE 0530).
Their use in potentially explosive atmospheres is prohibited unless they are
expressly intended for such use (follow additional instructions).
Low-voltage machines are components for installation into machines as
defined in the Machinery Directive 98/37/EC. Commissioning is prohibited
until the conformity of the end product with this directive has been
established (follow i. a. EN 60204-1)
Low-voltage machines with IP23 protection or less are only intended for
outdoor use when applying special protective features.
The integrated brakes must not be used as safety brakes. It cannot be ruled
out that factors which cannot be influenced, such as oil ingress due to a
defective A-side shaft seal, cause a brake torque reduction.
Transport, storage Damages must be reported immediately upon receipt to the forwarder; if
required, commissioning must be excluded. Tighten screwed-in ring bolts
before transport. They are designed for the weight of the low-voltage
machines, do not apply extra loads. If necessary, use suitable and adequately
dimensioned means of transport (e. g. rope guides).
Remove transport locking devices before commissioning. Reuse them for
further transport. When storing low-voltage machines, ensure a dry,
dust-free and low-vibration (veff ≤ 0.2 mm/s) environment (damages while
being stored).
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  2.2-1

2.2 General safety and application instructions for Lenze motors
Installation Ensure an even surface, solid foot/flange mounting and exact alignment if
a direct clutch is connected. Avoid resonances with the rotational frequency
and double mains frequency which may be caused by the assembly. Turn
rotor by hand, listen for unusual slipping noises. Check the direction of
rotation when the clutch is not active (observe section ”Electrical
connection”).
Use appropriate means to mount or remove belt pulleys and clutches
(heating) and cover them with a touch guard. Avoid impermissible belt
tensions.
The machines are half-key balanced. The clutch must be half-key balanced,
too. The visible jutting out part of the key must be removed.
If required, provide pipe connections. Designs with shaft end at bottom must
be protected with a cover which prevents the ingress of foreign particles into
the fan. Free circulation of the cooling air must be ensured. The exhaust air
- also the exhaust air of other machines next to the drive system - must not
be taken in immediately.
Electrical connection All operations must only be carried out by qualified and skilled personnel on
the low-voltage machine at standstill and deenergised and provided with a
safe guard to prevent an unintentional restart.This also applies to auxiliary
circuits (e. g. brake, encoder, blower).
Check safe isolation from supply!
If the tolerances specified in EN 60034-1; IEC 34 (VDE 0530-1) - voltage ±5 %,
frequency ±2 %, waveform, symmetry - are exceeded, more heat will be
generated and the electromagnetic compatibility will be affected.
Observe the data on the nameplate, operating notes, and the connection
diagram in the terminal box.
The connection must ensure a continuous and safe electrical supply (no
loose wire ends); use appropriate cable terminals. The connection to the PE
conductor must be safe. The plug-in connectors must be bolt tightly (to
stop).
The clearances between blank, live parts and to earth must not fall below
8 mm at Ur ≤ 550 V, 10 mm at Ur ≤ 725 V, 14 mm at Ur ≤ 1000 V.
The terminal box must be free of foreign particles, dirt and moisture. All
unused cable entries and the box itself must be sealed against dust and
water.
2.2-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

General safety and application instructions for Lenze motors 2.2
Commissioning and operation Before commissioning after longer storage periods, measure insulation
resistance. In case of values ≤ 1 kΩ per volt of rated voltage, dry winding.
For trial run without output elements, lock the featherkey. Do not deactivate
the protective devices, not even in a trial run.
Check the correct operation of the brake before commissioning low-voltage
machines with brakes.
Integrated thermal detectors do not provide full protection for the machine.
If necessary, limit the maximum current. Parameterise the controller so that
the motor will be switched off with I > Ir after a few seconds of operation,
especially at the risk of blocking.
Vibrationalseveritiesveff ≤ 3.5 mm/s(Pr ≤ 15 kW)or4.5 mm/s(Pr > 15 kW)are
acceptable if the clutch is activated.
If deviations from normal operation occur, e.g. increased temperatures,
noises, vibrations, find the cause and, if required, contact the manufacturer.
In case of doubt, switch off the low-voltage machine.
If the machine is exposed to dirt, clean the air channels regularly.
Shaft sealing rings and roller bearings have a limited service life.
Regrease bearings with relubricating devices while the low-voltage machine
is running. Only use the grease recommended by the manufacturer. If the
grease drain holes are sealed with a plug, (IP54 drive end; IP23 drive and
non-drive end), remove plug before commissioning. Seal bore holes with
grease. Replace prelubricated bearings (2Z bearing) after approx.
10,000 h - 20,000 h, at the latest however after 3 - 4 years.
The product-specific safety and application notes given in these Instructions
must be observed!
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  2.2-3

Residual hazards 2.3
2.3 Residual hazards
Protection of persons ƒ Before working on the controller, check that no voltage is applied to
the power terminals:
– Because the power terminals V, W, +UG and -UG remain live for at
least 3 minutes after disconnection from the mains.
– Because the power terminals L1, L2, L3; U, V, W, +UG and -UG remain
live with the motor stopped.
ƒ The discharge current to earth (PE) is >3.5 mA. EN 50178 requires a
fixed installation.
ƒ The heatsink of the controller has an operating temperature of > 80 °C:
– Contact with the heatsink results in burns.
ƒ If you use the ”flying-restart circuit” function (C0142 = 2, 3) for
machines with a low moment of inertia and minimum friction:
– After controller enable at standstill the motor may start or change
the direction of rotation for short periods as the flying restart process
is also executed when the speed is zero.
ƒ During parameter set transfer the control terminals of the controller
can have undefined states!
– Therefore the plugs X5 and X6 must be removed before the transfer
is executed. This ensures that the controller is inhibited and all
control terminals have the specified ”LOW” state.
Device protection ƒ Cyclic connection and disconnection of the supply voltage can overload
and destroy the input current limitation of the controller:
– In case of cyclic switching over a longer period of time at least 3
minutes have to pass between switch-off and switch-on!
Motor protection ƒ Some settings of the controllers can lead to motor overheating:
– For instance, longer DC-braking operations.
– Longer operation of self-ventilated motors at low speed.
Protection of the ƒ Drive systems can reach dangerous overspeeds (e.g. setting high field
machine/system
frequencies for motors and machines which are not suitable):
– The controllers are protected against those operating conditions. For
this purpose use additional components.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  2.3-1

2.4 Definition of notes used
2.4 Definition of notes used
The following pictographs and signal words are used in this documentation
to indicate dangers and important information:
Safety instructions Structure of safety instructions:
 Danger!
(characterises the type and severity of danger)
Note
(describes the danger and gives information about how to
prevent dangerous situations)
Pictograph and signal word Meaning

Danger of personal injury through dangerous electrical
voltage.
 Danger! Reference to an imminent danger that may result in death or
serious personal injury if the corresponding measures are
not taken.
Danger of personal injury through a general source of
danger.
 Danger! Reference to an imminent danger that may result in death or
serious personal injury if the corresponding measures are
not taken.
Danger of property damage.
 Stop! Reference to a possible danger that may result in property
damage if the corresponding measures are not taken.
Application notes Pictograph and signal word Meaning
 Note! Important note to ensure troublefree operation
 Tip! Useful tip for simple handling
 Reference to another documentation
2.4-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Technical data 3
Contents
3 Technical data
Contents
3.1 General data/operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-1

3.2 Operation with rated power (normal operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-1
3.2.1 Rated data for 400 V mains voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-1
3.3 Operation with increased rated power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3-1
3.4 Current characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4-1
3.5 Fuses and cable cross-sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5-1
3.5.1 Mains supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5-2
3.5.2 DC supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5-5
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  3-1

Technical data 3
General data/operating conditions 3.1
3.1 General data/operating conditions
Standards and application Field Values

conditions
Conformity CE Low-Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC)
Approvals UL508C Power Conversion Equipment
Underwriter Laboratories (File No. E132659)
for USA and Canada
(drive controller of variants V024 and V100 on mains with
earthed external conductor are not UL-approved)
Max. permissible At rated mains voltage and a switching frequency of ≤ 8 kHz without
cable cross-section additional output filter
shielded 50 m For compliance with EMC regulations, the permissible cable
unshielded 100 m lengths must be changed.
Vibration resistance Germanischer Lloyd, general conditions
Climatic conditions Class 3K3 to EN50178 (without condensation, average relative humidity
85%)
Degree of pollution VDE 0110 part 2 pollution degree 2
Permissible
temperature ranges
Transport -25 °C... +70 °C
Storage -25 °C... +55 °C
Operation EVF9321 ... EVF9326 0 °C ... +55 °C Reduce the rated output current
EVF9327 ... EVF9333 0 °C ... +50 °C by 2.5%/ °C above +40 °C
Permissible 0 ... 4000 m amsl Above 1000 m reduce the rated output current by
installation height 5 %/ 1000 m
Above 2000 m the use is only permitted in
environments with overvoltage category II
Mounting position Vertical
DC-bus operation Possible
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  3.1-1

3 Technical data
General electrical data Field Values

EMC Compliance with EN 61800-3/A11
Noise emission Requirements according to EN 50081-2, EN 50082-1,
IEC 22G-WG4 (Cv) 21
Compliance with the limit class A according to EN 55011
(industrial premises) using mains filter A
Compliance with the limit class B according to EN 55022
(residential area) using mains filter B and installation in control
cabinet
Noise immunity Requirements according to EN 61800-3 incl. A11
Requirements Standard Severities
ESD 61000 3, i. e. 8 kV for air
DXRA090-4-2 discharge
6 kV with contact
discharge
Cable-guided high 61000 150 kHz ... 80 MHz, 10
frequency DXRA090-4-6 V/m 80 % AM (1 kHz)
RF interference 61000 80 MHz ... 1000 MHz, 10
(Housing) DXRA090-4-3 V/m 80 % AM (1 kHz)
Burst 61000 3/4, i. e. 2 kV/5 kHz
DXRA090-4-4
Surge 61000 3, i. e. 1.2/50 μs,
(Surge on mains DXRA090-4-5 1 kV phase-phase, 2
cable) kV phase-PE
Insulation resistance Overvoltage category III to VDE 0110
Discharge current against > 3.5 mA
PE (to EN 50178)
Enclosure IP20
Shock protection to NEMA 250 type 1
Protection measures Short circuit, earth fault (earth-fault protected during mains
against connection, limited earth-fault protection during mains
connection), overvoltage, motor stalling, motor overtemperature
(input for PTC or thermal contact)
Protective insulation of Safe mains isolation: Double/reinforced insulation according to
control circuits EN 50178 for digital inputs and outputs
Permissible supply forms Operation on TT systems, TN systems or systems with earthed
neutral without additional measures
Operation on IT systems only with variant ”V024” or ”V100”
3.1-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Technical data 3
General data/operating conditions 3.1
Open loop and closed Field Values

loopcontrol
Control modes V/f characteristic control (linear, quadratic), vector control
Switching frequency 2 kHz, 4 kHz, 8 kHz or 16 kHz
Torque behaviour in case
of vector control
Maximum torque 1.8 × MN for 60 s when rated motor power = rated power of 9300
vector
Setting range to 1:10 in the range 6 ... 100 % fN
(1 : 20 with feedback)
Speed control without
feedback
Min. mechanical 1 % fN Torque 0 ... MN
motor frequency
Setting range 1 : 100 referring to fN and MN
Accuracy ± 0.5 % fN in the range 6 ... 100 % fN
Speed control without
feedback
Min. mechanical 0.1 % fN Torque 0 ... MN
motor frequency
Setting range 1 : 1000 referring to fN and MN
Accuracy ± 0.1 % von fN
Output frequency
Field - 600 Hz ... + 600 Hz
Absolute resolution 0.06Hz
Standardised Parameter data: 0.01 %,
resolution Process data: 0.006 % (= 214)
Digital setpoint selection
Accuracy ± 0.005 Hz (= ± 100 ppm)
Analog setpoint selection
Linearity ± 0.15 % Signal level: 5 V or 10 V
Temperature ± 0.1 % 0 ... 50 Nm
sensitivity
offset ±0%
Analog inputs/analog z 2 inputs (bipolar)
outputs z 2 outputs (bipolar)
Digital inputs/digital z 6 inputs (freely assignable)
outputs z 1 input for controller inhibit
z 4 outputs freely assignable)
z 1 incremental encoder input (500 kHz, TTL level); Design: 9-pole
Sub-D socket
z 1 master frequency input (500 kHz, TTL level or 200 kHz, HTL
level); design: 9-pole Sub-D socket; can be optionally used as
incremental encoder input (200 kHz, HTL level)
z 1 master frequency output (500 kHz, TTL level); Design: 9-pole
Sub-D socket
Cycle times
Digital inputs 1 ms
Digital outputs 1 ms
Analog inputs 1 ms
Analog outputs 1 ms (smoothing time: τ = 10 ms)
fN rated motor frequency
MN rated motor torque
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  3.1-3

3 Technical data
Safety relay KSR Field Values

Coil voltage at +20 °C DC 24 V (20 ... 30 V)
Coil resistance at +20 °C 823 Ω ±10 %
Rated coil power approx. 700 mW
Max. switching voltage AC 250 V, DC 250 V (0.45 A)
Max. AC switching capacity 1500 VA
Max. switching current (ohmic AC 6 A (250 V), DC 6 A (50 V)
load)
Recommended minimum load > 50 mW
Max. switching rate 6 switchings per minute
Electrical service life 105 switching cycle at 6 A
at 250 V AC
106 switching cycles at 1 A
(ohmic load)
107 switching cycles at 0.25 A
6 × 103 switching cycles at 6 A
106 switching cycles at 3 A at 24 V DC
1.5 × 106 switching cycles at 1 A (ohmic load)
Mechanical life time 107 switching cycles
3.1-4  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Technical data 3
Operation with rated power (normal operation) 3.2
Rated data for 400 V mains voltage 3.2.1
3.2 Operation with rated power (normal operation)
3.2.1 Rated data for 400 V mains voltage
Typical motor power Pr [kW] 0.37 0.75 1.5 3.0

Three-phase asynchronous motor
(4-pol.) Pr [hp] 0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0
9300 vector type EVF9321 EVF9322 EVF9323 EVF9324
Mains voltage Umains [V] 3/PE AC 320 V - 0 % ... 528 V + 0 % ; 45 Hz - 0 % ... 65 Hz + 0 %
Alternative DC supply UDC [V] DC 460 V - 0 % ... 620 V + 0 %
Data for operation on 3/PE AC 400 V or DC 565 V
Rated mains current
Without mains choke/mains filter Imains [A] 2.1 3.5 5.5 –
With mains choke/mains filter Imains [A] 1.5 2.5 3.9 7.0
Output power U, V, 2 and 4 kHz SN [kVA] 1.0 1.7 2.7 4.8
W with switching
frequency 8 kHz SN [kVA] 1.0 1.7 2.7 4.8
Output power +UDC, -UDC 1) PDC [kW] 1.9 0.7 0.0 2.0
Rated output current 2 and 4 kHz 4) Ir [A] 1.5 2.5 3.9 7.0
with switching 8 kHz Ir [A] 1.5 2.5 3.9 7.0
frequency
8 kHz sin Ir [A] 1.5 2.5 3.9 7.0
16 kHz Ir [A] 1.1 1.8 2.9 5.2
8/2 kHz 3) Ir [A] 1.5 2.5 3.9 7.0
Max. permissible 2 and 4 kHz Imax [A] 2.2 3.7 5.8 10.5
output current for 60 8 kHz Imax [A] 2.2 3.7 5.8 10.5
s at a switching
frequency 2) of 8 kHz sin Imax [A] 2.2 3.7 5.8 10.5
16 kHz Imax [A] 1.6 2.7 4.3 7.8
8/2 kHz 3) Imax [A] 2.2 3.7 5.8 10.5
Output voltage
Without mains choke/mains filter U M [V] 3~ 0 ... Umains / 0 ... 600 Hz
With mains choke/mains filter UM [V] 3~ 0 ... approx. 94 % Umains / 0 ... 600 Hz
Power loss (operation with IN) Pv [W] 50 65 100 150
Required mains choke Type – – – ELN3-0250H007
Dimensions H [mm] 350 350 350 350

b [mm] 78 78 97 97
T [mm] 250 250 250 250
Earth [kg] 4.9 4.9 5.8 6.0
Bold print = Lenze setting
1) Power supplied by the DC bus when operating with power-adapted motor
2) Currents for periodic load change: 60 s of overcurrent time with I
max and 120 s of base load time
with 75 % IN
3) Power-optimised operation with automatic switching frequency reduction. When the max.
permissible output current is exceeded, the switching frequency is reduced to 2 kHz.
4) Possible for some types in case of other operating conditions: Operation with increased rated
output current at the same load change (see chapter ”Operation with increased rated power”)
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  3.2-1

3 Technical data
Typical motor power Pr [kW] 5.5 11 15 22

(4-pol.) Pr [hp] 7.5 15 20 30
Rated mains current
Without mains choke/mains filter Imains [A] 16.8 – 43.5 –
W with switching
Rated output current 2 and 4 kHz IN [A] 4) 13.0 23.5 32.0 47.0
frequency
8 kHz sin Ir [A] 13.0 23.5 29.0 43.0
16 kHz Ir [A] 9.7 15.2 21.0 30.0
8/2 kHz 3) Ir [A] 13.0 23.5 32.0 47.0
s at a switching
16 kHz Imax [A] 14.5 22.9 31.0 46.0
8/2 kHz 3) Imax [A] 19.5 35.0 48.0 70.5
Output voltage
Without mains choke/mains filter UM [V] 3~ 0 ... Umains / 0 ... 600 Hz
Power loss (operation with IN) Ploss [W] 210 360 430 640
Required mains choke Type – ELN3-0120H025 – ELN3-0075H045
Dimensions H [mm] 350 350 350 350

b [mm] 135 135 250 250
T [mm] 250 250 250 250
Earth [kg] 7.8 7.8 18.0 18.0
with 75 % IN
3.2-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Technical data 3
Typical motor power Pr [kW] 30 45 55 75 90

(4-pol.) Pr [hp] 40 60 74 100 120
9300 vector type EVF9329 EVF9330 EVF9331 EVF9332 EVF9333
Rated mains current
Without mains choke/mains filter Imains [A] – – – – –
With mains choke/mains filter Imains [A] 55.0 80.0 100 135 165
Output power U, V, 2 and 4 kHz SN [kVA] 41.6 61.7 76.2 103.9 131.2
W with switching
frequency 8 kHz SN [kVA] 41.6 61.7 76.2 103.9 124.7
Output power +UDC, -UDC 1) PDC [kW] 0.0 5.1 0.0 28.1 40.6
Rated output current 2 and 4 kHz IN [A] 4) 59.0 89.0 110 150 180
with switching 8 kHz Ir [A] 59.0 89.0 110 147 147
frequency
8 kHz sin Ir [A] 47.0 59.0 76.0 92.0 100
16 kHz Ir [A] 35.0 46.0 52.0 58.0 63.0
8/2 kHz 3) Ir [A] 59.0 89.0 110 150 180
Max. permissible 2 and 4 kHz Imax [A] 89.0 134 165 225 270
output current for 60 8 kHz Imax [A] 89.0 134 165 221 221
s at a switching
frequency 2) of 8 kHz sin Imax [A] 70.0 88.0 114 138 150
16 kHz Imax [A] 53.0 69.0 78.0 87.0 94.0
8/2 kHz 3) Imax [A] 89.0 134 165 225 270
Output voltage
Power loss (operation with IN) Pv [W] 810 1100 1470 1960 2400
Required mains choke Type ELN3-0055H055 ELN3-0038H085 ELN3-0027H105 ELN3-0022H130 ELN3-0017H170
Dimensions H [mm] 350 510 591 680 680

b [mm] 250 340 340 450 450
T [mm] 250 285 285 285 285
Earth [kg] 18.0 36.0 38.0 70.0 70.0
with 75 % IN
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  3.2-3

3 Technical data

(4-pol.) Pr [hp] 0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0
Rated mains current
Without mains choke/mains filter Imains [A] 2.1 3.5 5.5 –
W with switching
Rated output current 2 and 4 kHz Ir [A] 1.5 2.5 3.9 7.0
frequency
8 kHz sin Ir [A] 1.5 2.5 3.9 7.0
16 kHz Ir [A] 1.1 1.8 2.9 5.2
8/2 kHz 3) Ir [A] 1.5 2.5 3.9 7.0
s at a switching
16 kHz Imax [A] 1.6 2.7 4.3 7.8
8/2 kHz 3) Imax [A] 2.2 3.7 5.8 10.5
Output voltage
Required mains choke Type – – – ELN3-0250H007
Dimensions H [mm] 350 350 350 350

b [mm] 78 78 97 97
T [mm] 250 250 250 250
Earth [kg] 4.9 4.9 5.8 6.0
with 75 % IN
3.2-4  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Technical data 3
Typical motor power Pr [kW] 5.5 11 18.5 30

(4-pol.) Pr [hp] 7.5 15 25 40
Rated mains current
Without mains choke/mains filter Imains [A] 16.8 – 43.5 –
W with switching
frequency
8 kHz sin Ir [A] 13.0 22.3 27.0 41.0
16 kHz Ir [A] 9.7 14.6 19.0 29.0
8/2 kHz 3) Ir [A] 13.0 22.3 30.4 44.7
s at a switching
16 kHz Imax [A] 14.5 21.8 29.0 43.5
8/2 kHz 3) Imax [A] 19.5 33.5 45.6 67.0
Output voltage
Required mains choke Type – ELN3-0120H025 – ELN3-0075H045
Dimensions H [mm] 350 350 350 350

b [mm] 135 135 250 250
T [mm] 250 250 250 250
Earth [kg] 7.8 7.8 18.0 18.0
with 75 % IN
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  3.2-5

3 Technical data
Typical motor power Pr [kW] 37 55 75 90 110

(4-pol.) Pr [hp] 49.5 74 100 120 148
Rated mains current
Without mains choke/mains filter Imains [A] – – – – –
With mains choke/mains filter Imains [A] 55.0 80.0 100 135 165
Output power U, V, 2 and 4 kHz SN [kVA] 49.9 69.8 91.4 124 158.2
W with switching
frequency 8 kHz SN [kVA] 49.9 69.8 91.4 124 149
Output power +UDC, -UDC 1) PDC [kW] 0.0 5.9 0.0 32.4 47.1
Rated output current 2 and 4 kHz Ir [A] 56.0 84.0 105 142 171
with switching 8 kHz Ir [A] 56.0 84.0 105 142 141
frequency
8 kHz sin Ir [A] 44.0 55.0 71.0 87.0 94.0
16 kHz Ir [A] 33.0 43.7 49.5 55.0 59.0
8/2 kHz 3) Ir [A] 56.0 84.0 105 142 171
Max. permissible 2 and 4 kHz Imax [A] 84.0 126 157 213 256
output current for 60 8 kHz Imax [A] 84.0 126 157 213 211
s at a switching
frequency 2) of 8 kHz sin Imax [A] 66.0 82.0 107 130 141
16 kHz Imax [A] 49.0 65.6 74.0 83.0 89.0
8/2 kHz 3) Imax [A] 84.0 126 157 213 256
Output voltage
Power loss (operation with IN) Pv [W] 810 1100 1470 1960 2400
Required mains choke Type ELN3-0055H055 ELN3-0038H085 ELN3-0027H105 ELN3-0022H130 ELN3-0017H170
Dimensions H [mm] 350 510 591 680 680

b [mm] 250 340 340 450 450
T [mm] 250 285 285 285 285
Earth [kg] 18.0 36.0 38.0 70.0 70.0
with 75 % IN
3.2-6  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Technical data 3
Operation with increased rated power 3.3
3.3 Operation with increased rated power
Under the operating conditions described here, the drive controller can be
operated in continuous operation with a more powerful motor. The overload
capacity is reduced to 120 %.
Typical applications are pumps with quadratic load characteristic or fan.
 Note!
Operation with increased rated power is only allowed:
ƒ In the listed mains voltage range
ƒ With the listed switching frequencies
ƒ With the specified fuses, cable cross-sections and mains
chokes or mains filters

(4-pol.) Pr [hp] 0.75 1.5 2.9 5.4
Rated mains current with mains Imains [A] 1.7 2.8 5.0 8.8
choke/mains filter
Output power U, V, W with switching SN [kVA] 1.3 2.1 3.8 6.5
frequency 2 and 4 kHz
with switching
frequency 8/2 kHz 3) Ir [A] 1.8 3.0 5.5 9.2
output current for
60 s at a switching 8/2 kHz 3) Imax [A] 2.2 3.7 5.8 10.5
frequency 2)
Output voltage with mains UM [V] 3~ 0 ... approx. 94 % Umains / 0 ... 600 Hz
choke/mains filter
Required mains choke Type ELN3-0700H003 ELN3-0450H004 ELN3-0250H007 ELN3-0160H012
Dimensions H [mm] 350 350 350 350

b [mm] 78 78 97 97
T [mm] 250 250 250 250
Earth [kg] 4.9 4.9 5.8 6.0
with 75 % IN
3) Operation with automatic switching frequency reduction. When the max. permissible output
current is exceeded, the switching frequency is reduced to 2 kHz.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  3.3-1

3 Technical data
3.3 Operation with increased rated power
Typical motor power Pr [kW] 7.5 22 30 37.5

(4-pol.) Pr [hp] 10 30 40 50
9300 vector type EVF9325 EVF9327 EVF9328 EVF9329 4)
Rated mains current with mains Imains [A] 15.0 39.0 50.0 60.0
choke/mains filter
Output power U, V, W with switching SN [kVA] 11.1 29.8 39.5 46.4
with switching
frequency 8/2 kHz 3) Ir [A] 15.0 43.0 56.0 66.0
output current for
60 s at a switching 8/2 kHz 3) Imax [A] 19.5 48.0 70.5 89.0
frequency 2)
choke/mains filter
Dimensions H [mm] 350 350 350 350

b [mm] 135 250 250 250
T [mm] 250 250 250 250
Earth [kg] 7.8 18.0 18.0 18.0
with 75 % IN
4) Max. permissible ambient temperature during operation: + 35 °C
3.3-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Technical data 3
Operation with increased rated power 3.3
Typical motor power Pr [kW] 55 75 90 110

(4-pol.) Pr [hp] 74 100 120 148
9300 vector type EVF9330 EVF9331 4) EVF9332 EVF9333 4)
Rated mains current with mains Imains [A] 97.0 119 144 185
choke/mains filter
Output power U. V, W with switching SN [kVA] 74.8 91.5 110 142
Rated output current 2 and 4 kHz Ir [A] 100 135 159 205
with switching
frequency 8/2 kHz 3) Ir [A] 100 135 159 205
Max. permissible 2 and 4 kHz Imax [A] 134 165 225 270
output current for
60 s at a switching 8/2 kHz 3) Imax [A] 134 165 225 270
frequency 2)
choke/mains filter
Dimensions H [mm] 510 591 680 680

b [mm] 340 340 450 450
T [mm] 285 285 285 285
Earth [kg] 36.0 38.0 70.0 70.0
with 75 % IN
4) Max. permissible ambient temperature during operation: + 35 °C
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  3.3-3

Technical data 3
Current characteristics 3.4
3.4 Current characteristics
On some operating conditions, the maximum output current is limited for

the devices EVF9326 ... EVF9333:
ƒ For output frequencies fout < |5 Hz| and a heatsink temperature
ϑK > 40° C.
ƒ The current limitation depends on the chopper frequency.
0 1
IOUT K < 40 °C IOUT
Imax Imax
K = 80 °C
I0max I0max
0 0
0 5 fout [Hz] 0 5 fout [Hz]
9300vec132
Fig. 3.4-1 Current derating characteristics

 Operation with chopper frequency fchop = 16/8/2 kHz, 2 kHz, 4 kHz, 8 kHz or
8/2 kHz (C0018 = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 6)
The current limitation follows the characteristic
At output frequencies fout < |5 Hz| and heatsink temperatures
ϑK = 40 ... 80 °C the current limit is adjusted steplessly in the range c.
 Operation with chopper frequency fchop = 16 kHz (C0018 = 5)
The current limitation follows the characteristic and does not depend on the
heatsink temperature
9300 I0max [A] 1) I0max [A] 2)

vector
C0018 = 0, 1, 2, 6 C0018 = 3 C0018 = 4 C0018 = 5
Umains Umains Umains Umains
400 V 480 V 400 V 480 V 400 V 480 V 400 V 480 V
EVF9326 35.0 21.6 21.6 32.0 22.7 21.6 11.2 10.6
EVF9327 48.0 45.6 32.0 32.0 28.8 27.3 11.2 10.6
EVF9328 70.5 67.0 47.0 47.0 42.3 40.2 16.5 15.6
EVF9329 89.0 84.6 59.3 59.3 53.4 50.7 17.8 16.9
EVF9330 134 125 89.4 89.4 80.4 76.3 22.0 22.0
EVF9331 143 135 115 115 103 98.8 22.0 22.0
EVF9332 194 185 157 157 138 131 30.0 30.0
EVF9333 197 188 158 158 142 135 35.9 35.9
1) Maximum available output current at an output frequency fout = |0 Hz| and heatsink temperature
ϑK = 80 °C
2) Maximum available output current at an output frequency fout = |0 Hz|
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  3.4-1

Technical data 3
Fuses and cable cross-sections 3.5
3.5 Fuses and cable cross-sections
Information about fuses and Field Description

cable cross-sections
Selection of the cable Consider the voltage drop under load (acc. to DIN 18015
cross-section part1 ≤ 3 %).
Protection of the cables on the Fusing on the AC side is achieved via standard fuses.
AC side (L1, L2, L3) Fuses in UL-conform plant must have UL approval.
Protection of the cables on the Fusing the motor cable is not required.
motor side (U, V, W)
Connection of a brake chopper When connecting a brake chopper to the terminals +UG and
-UG the DC fuses and cable cross-sections do not apply.The
corresponding data can be obtained from the documentation
of the brake chopper.
Further information In chapter ”Wiring of the basic device” → ”Important notes” →
”Device protection”
Standards and regulations The user is responsible for the compliance with national and
regional standards and regulations (e.g. VDE 0113, VDE 0298,
EN 60204).
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  3.5-1

3 Technical data
3.5.1 Mains supply
3.5.1 Mains supply
Operation with rated power
9300 vector Operation without mains choke or mains filter FI 2)

Type Mains c d Installation to Installation to UL 3)
EN 60204-11)
L1, L2, L3, PE e L1, L2, L3, PE
Laying system
b2 C
[A] [A] [mm2] [mm2] [A] [AWG] [mA]
EVF9321 6 C6 4) 1 1 5
18
B6
EVF9322 6 C6 4) 1 1 5 300
18
B6
EVF9323 10 B10 1.5 1 10 16
EVF9324 Operation allowed only with mains choke or mains filter
EVF9325 25 B20 6 4 25 10 300
3/PE AC
EVF9326 Operation allowed only with mains choke or mains filter
320 ... 528 V
EVF9327 45 ... 65 Hz 63 – 16 10 60 4 300
EVF9328
EVF9329
EVF9330
Operation allowed only with mains choke or mains filter
EVF9331
EVF9332
EVF9333
c Fuse (fuses of utilisation category gG/gL or semiconductor fuses of utilisation category gRL)
d Circuit breaker
e Fuse
1) The information represents recommendations. Other designs/laying systems are possible (e.g. to
VDE 0298-4). The cable cross-sections apply under the following conditions: Use of PVC-insulated
copper leads, conductor temperature < 70 °C, ambient temperature < 40 °C, no bundling of cables
or cores, three loaded cores.
2) Universal current sensitive earth-leakage circuit breaker
3) Use only UL-approved cables, fuses and fuse holders. UL fuse: voltage 500 ... 600 V, tripping
characteristic ”H”, ”K5” or ”CC”.
4) For short-time mains interruptions, use circuit breakers with tripping characteristic ”C”
National and regional regulations must be observed
3.5-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Technical data 3
Mains supply 3.5.1
9300 vector Mains choke Operation with mains choke or mains filter FI 2)
Type Mains Type Installation according to EN 60204-1 or Installation to UL 3)
VDE 0298-4 1)
c d L1, L2, L3, PE e L1, L2, L3, PE
EN 60204-1 VDE 0298-4
Laying system Laying
system
b2 C F
[A] [A] [mm2] [mm2] [mm2] [A] [AWG] [mA]
EVF9321 ELN3-0700H003 6 B6 1 1 – 5 18
C6 4)
EVF9322 ELN3-0700H003 6 B6 1 1 – 5 18
C6 4)
EVF9323 ELN3-0450H004 10 B10 1 1 – 5 18
EVF9324 ELN3-0250H007 10 B10 1.5 1 – 10 16
EVF9325 ELN3-0160H012 20 B20 4 4 – 20 12
3/PE AC
EVF9326 ELN3-0120H025 35 B32 – 6 – 25 10
320 ... 528 V 300
EVF9327 45 ... 65 Hz ELN3-0088H035 40 – 10 10 – 35 8
EVF9328 ELN3-0075H045 63 – 16 10 – 50 6
EVF9329 ELN3-0055H055 80 – – 25 – 80 4
EVF9330 ELN3-0038H085 100 – – 35 – 100 0
EVF9331 ELN3-0027H105 125 – – 70 50 125 0
EVF9332 ELN3-0022H130 160 – – 95 70 175 2/0
EVF9333 ELN3-0017H170 200 – – 120 95 200 3/0
d Circuit breaker
e Fuse
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  3.5-3

3 Technical data
3.5.1 Mains supply
Operation with increased rated power
9300 vector Mains choke Operation with mains choke or mains filter FI 2)
Type Mains Type c d Installation according to Installation to UL 3)
EN 60204-1 or VDE 0298-4 1)
L1, L2, L3, PE e L1, L2, L3, PE
EN 60204-1 VDE 0298-4
Laying system Laying
system
b2 C F
[A] [A] [mm2] [mm2] [mm2] [A] [AWG] [mA]
EVF9321 ELN3-0700H003 6 C6 4) 1 1 – 5 18
B6
EVF9322 ELN3-0450H004 6 C6 4) 1 1 – 5 18
B6
EVF9323 ELN3-0250H007 10 B10 1 1 – 5 18
EVF9324 ELN3-0160H012 10 B10 1.5 1 – 10 16
EVF9325 3/PE AC ELN3-0120H025 20 B20 4 4 – 20 12
EVF9327 320 ... 440 V ELN3-0075H045 50 – 16 10 – 50 6 300
45 ... 65 Hz
EVF9328 ELN3-0055H055 63 – 25 16 – 60 4
EVF9329 ELN3-0055H055 80 – – 25 – 80 4
EVF9330 ELN3-0027H105 125 – – 70 – 125 0
EVF9331 ELN3-0022H130 160 – – 95 70 175 2/0
EVF9332 ELN3-0017H170 160 – – 95 70 175 2/0
EVF9333 ELN3-0014H200 200 – – 120 95 200 3/0
d Circuit breaker
e Fuse
3.5-4  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Technical data 3
DC supply 3.5.2
3.5.2 DC supply
 Stop!
ƒ Only use semiconductor fuses.
ƒ On principle, fuse DC cables as 2-pole (+UG, -UG).
9300 vector DC fuse 14 × 51 DC fuse 22 × 58 Installation to Installation

(EFSGR0xx0AYHx) (EFSGR0xx0AYIx) EN 60204-1 1) to UL
Type Fused rated current 2) Fused rated current 2) +UG, -UG +UG, -UG
Laying system
B2 C
[A] [A] [mm2] [mm2] [AWG]
EVF9321 10 12 1.5 1.5 16
EVF9322 10 12 1.5 1.5 16
EVF9323 10 12 1.5 1.5 16
EVF9324 20 20 4 2.5 12
EVF9325 32 32 10 6 8
EVF9326 40 40 10 10 8
EVF9327 – 80 35 25 1
EVF9328 – 100 – 35 1
EVF9329 – 2 × 80 – 2 × 25 2×3
EVF9330 – 2 × 100 – 2 × 35 2×1
EVF9331 – 3 × 80 – 3 × 25 3×3
EVF9332 – 3 × 100 – 3 × 35 3×1
EVF9333 – 4 × 100 – 4 × 35 4×1
1) The specifications are recommendations. Other designs/laying systems are possible.
The cable cross-sections apply under the following conditions: Use of PVC-insulated copper leads,
conductor temperature < 70 °C, ambient temperature < 40 °C, no bundling of cables or cores
2) The rated currents of the fuses EFSGR0xx0AYHx and EFSGR0xx0AYIx of Lenze are given. When
using other fuses, other fuse currents and cable cross-sections may arise.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  3.5-5

Installing the basic device 4
Contents
4 Installing the basic device
Contents
4.1 Basic devices in the power range 0.37 ... 11 kW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1-1

4.1.1 Mounting with fixing rails (standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1-1
4.1.2 Thermally separated mounting (push-through technique) . . . . . . . 4.1-2
4.1.3 Mounting in ”cold plate” technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1-3
4.2 Basic devices in the power range 15 ... 30 kW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-1
4.2.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-1
4.2.2 Mounting with fixing brackets (standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-1
4.2.4 Mounting in ”cold plate” technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-4
4.3.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-1
4.4.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4-1
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  4-1

Basic devices in the power range 0.37 ... 11 kW 4.1
Mounting with fixing rails (standard) 4.1.1
4.1 Basic devices in the power range 0.37 ... 11 kW
4.1.1 Mounting with fixing rails (standard)
Required mounting material from the scope of supply:

Description Use EVF9321 ... EVF9325,
EVF9324 EVF9326
Amount
Fixing rails Drive controller fixing 2 4
Dimensions
0 1 2
L L ³ 100mm
b1 d b b1 d b
³ 100mm
c c1 c
g
a a e
9300vec114
Fig. 4.1-1 Standard mounting with fixing rails 0.37 ... 11 kW

 Drive controllers can be mounted side by side without spacing
9300 vector Dimensions [mm]

Type a b b1 c c1 d d1 e 1) g k
EVF9321-EV
 78 384 350 39 - 365 – 250 6.5 30
EVF9322-EV
EVF9323-EV
 97 384 350 48.5 - 365 – 250 6.5 30
EVF9324-EV
EVF9325-EV
 135 384 350 21.5 92 365 – 250 6.5 30
EVF9326-EV
1) For a fieldbus module plugged onto X1, consider mounting space for connecting cables
Mounting ƒ Attach the fixing rails to the housing of the drive controller.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  4.1-1

4.1.2 Thermally separated mounting (push-through technique)
For mounting in push-through technique, the drive controller of type

EVF93xx-EV must be used. In addition, the mounting set for push-through
technique is required.
Type Mounting set Type Mounting set
EVF9321-EV, EJ0036
EVF9322-EV
EVF9323-EV, EJ0037 EVF9325-EV, EJ0038
EVF9324-EV EVF9326-EV
Dimensions
0 1
L L
d1 d1
d b1 b d b1 b
g g
d1 d1
c c f
a1 a1 e
c1 c1
a a
9300vec115
Fig. 4.1-2 Dimensions for thermally separated mounting 0.37 ... 11 kW

Type a a1 b b1 C c1 d d1 e 1) f g
EVF9321-EV
 112.5 78 385.5 350 60 95.5 365.5 105.5 250 92 6.5
EVF9322-EV
EVF9323-EV
 131.5 97 385.5 350 79 114.5 365.5 105.5 250 92 6.5
EVF9324-EV
EVF9325-EV
 169.5 135 385.5 350 117 152.5 365.5 105.5 250 92 6.5
EVF9326-EV
Mounting cutout in control 9300 vector Dimensions [mm]

cabinet
Type Width Height
EVF9321-EV
 82 350
EVF9322-EV
EVF9323-EV
 101 350
EVF9324-EV
EVF9325-EV
 139 350
EVF9326-EV
4.1-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Mounting in ”cold plate” technique 4.1.3
4.1.3 Mounting in ”cold plate” technique
 Note!
All 9300 vector frequency inverters are approved according to
UL508C. To maintain the guaranteed features, controllers in
”cold plate” must be mounted by the user. For this reason, these
frequency inverters have the marking UR (instead of UL).
The drive controllers can be mounted in ”cold plate” technology, e.g. on
collective coolers. For this purpose, the drive controllers of type EVF93xx-CV
must be used.
Required mounting material from the scope of supply:
Description Use EVF9321 EVF9323 EVF9325
EVF9322 EVF9324 EVF9326
Amount
Fixing bracket Drive controller fixing 2 2 2
Sheet metal screw Mounting of fixing 6 6 6
3.5 × 13 mm (DIN 7981) bracket to the drive
controller
Requirements for collective The following points are important for the safe operation of drive
coolers controllers:
ƒ Good thermal connection to the cooler
– The contact surface between collective cooler and drive controller
must be at least as large as the cooling plate of the drive controller.
– Flat contact surface, max. deviation 0.05 mm.
– Connect the collective cooler with all specified screw connections
with the drive controller.
ƒ Adhere to thermal resistance Rth given in the table. The values apply to
the operation of drive controllers under rated conditions.
9300 vector Cooling path Drive controller earth
Type Power to be dissipated Heat sink - [kg]
Pv [W] surroundings
Rth [K/W]
EVF9321-CVV003 24 1.45 3.9
EVF9322-CVV003 42 0.85 3.9
EVF9323-CVV003 61 0.57 4.5
EVF9324-CVV003 105 0.33 4.7
EVF9325-CVV003 180 0.19 6.1
EVF9326-CVV003 360 0.10 6.1
Ambient conditions ƒ The rated data and the derating factors at increased temperature also
apply to the ambient temperature of the drive controllers.
ƒ Temperature at the cooling plate of the drive controller: max. 75 °C.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  4.1-3

Dimensions
0 1 2 3
L L L
b1 d b b1 d b b1 d b
< 75 °C
g g c1 g
c c c e
a a a
9300vec120
Fig. 4.1-3 Dimensions for mounting in ”cold plate” technique 0.37 ... 11 kW

Type a b b1 c c1 d e 1) g
EVF9321-CVV003
 78 381 350 48 – 367 168 6.5
EVF9322-CVV003
EVF9323-CVV003
 97 381 350 67 – 367 168 6.5
EVF9324-CVV003
EVF9325-CVV003
 135 381 350 105 38 367 168 6.5
EVF9326-CVV003
Mounting Apply heat conducting paste before screwing together the cooler and
cooling plate of the drive controller so that the heat transfer resistance is as
low as possible.
1. Fasten the fixing bracket with sheet metal screws 3.5 × 13 mm at the
top and bottom of the drive controller .
2. Clean the contact surface of cooler and cooling plate with spirit.
3. Apply a thin coat of heat conducting paste with a filling knife or brush.
– The heat conducting paste in the accessory kit is sufficient for an area
of approx. 1000 cm2.
4. Mount the drive controller on the cooler.
4.1-4  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Basic devices in the power range 15 ... 30 kW 4.2
Important notes 4.2.1
4.2 Basic devices in the power range 15 ... 30 kW
4.2.1 Important notes
The accessory kit is located in the inside of the drive controller.

Remove the cover of the drive controller
1. Remove the screws 
2. Lift cover  up and detach it
9300vec113
4.2.2 Mounting with fixing brackets (standard)
Mounting material required from the scope of supply:

Description Use Amount
Fixing bracket Drive controller fixing 4
Raised countersunk head screw Mounting of fixing bracket to the drive 4
M5 × 10 mm (DIN 966) controller
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  4.2-1

Dimensions
0 ³ 100mm
L
d b1 b
³ 100mm
k
g
c1 c
d1 a e m
9300vec111
Fig. 4.2-1 Standard mounting with fixing brackets 15 ... 30 kW

 Drive controllers can be mounted side by side without spacing

Type a b b1 c c1 d d1 e 1) g k m
EVF9327-EV
EVF9328-EV 250 402 350 22 206 370 24 250 6.5 24 11
EVF9329-EV
Mounting ƒ Attach the fixing bracket to the heatsink plate of the drive controller.
4.2-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Thermally separated mounting (push-through technique) 4.2.3

EVF93xx-EV must be used. In addition, the mounting set for EJ0011
push-through technique is required.
Dimensions a
a1
L
d2
b1
d3
d
b
d2
d1
c1 g e1
h
h c2 e
c3
9300vec116
Fig. 4.2-2 Dimensions for thermally separated mounting 15 ... 30 kW

Type a a1 b b1 c1 c2 c3 d d1 d2 d3 e 1) e1 g h
EVF9327-EV
EVF9328-EV 279.5 250 379.5 350 19 131 243 361.5 32 100 97 250 159.5 6 9
EVF9329-EV

cabinet
Type Width Height
EVF9327-EV
EVF9328-EV 236 336
EVF9329-EV
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  4.2-3

 Note!
All 9300 vector frequency inverters are approved according to
UL508C. To maintain the guaranteed features, controllers in
”cold plate” must be mounted by the user. For this reason, these
frequency inverters have the marking UR (instead of UL).
The drive controllers can be mounted in ”cold plate” technology, e.g. on
collective coolers. For this purpose, the drive controllers of type EVF93xx-CV
must be used.
Requirements for collective The following points are important for the safe operation of drive
coolers controllers:
ƒ Good thermal connection to the cooler
– The contact surface between collective cooler and drive controller
must be at least as large as the cooling plate of the drive controller.
– Flat contact surface, max. deviation 0.05 mm.
– Connect the collective cooler with all specified screw connections
with the drive controller.
ƒ Adhere to thermal resistance Rth given in the table. The values apply to
the operation of drive controllers under rated conditions.
9300 vector Cooling path Drive controller earth
Type Power to be dissipated Heat sink - [kg]
Pv [W] surroundings
Rth [K/W]
EVF9327-CVV003 410 0.085 13
EVF9328-CVV003 610 0.057 13
Ambient conditions ƒ The rated data and the derating factors at increased temperature also
apply to the ambient temperature of the drive controllers.
ƒ Temperature at the cooling plate of the drive controller: max. 75 °C.
4.2-4  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Mounting in ”cold plate” technique 4.2.4
Dimensions
L
b1
d
b
< 75 °C
g e
c
c1
a
a1
9300vec119
Fig. 4.2-3 Dimensions for mounting in ”cold plate” technique 15 ... 22 kW

Type a a1 b b1 c c1 d e 1) g
EVF9327-CVV003
234 250 381 350 110 220 367 171 6.5
EVF9328-CVV003
Mounting Apply heat conducting paste before screwing together the cooler and
cooling plate of the drive controller so that the heat transfer resistance is as
low as possible.
1. Clean the contact surface of cooler and cooling plate with spirit.
2. Apply a thin coat of heat conducting paste with a filling knife or brush.
– The heat conducting paste in the accessory kit is sufficient for an area
of approx. 1000 cm2.
3. Mount the drive controller on the cooler.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  4.2-5


9300vec113

Hexagon head cap screw Mounting of fixing bracket to the drive 4
M8 × 16 mm (DIN 933) controller
Washer ∅ 8.4 mm (DIN 125) For hexagon head cap screw 4
Spring washer ∅ 8 mm (DIN 127) For hexagon head cap screw 4
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  4.3-1

Dimensions
0
³ 100mm
³ 50mm ³ 50mm
d
b1
b ³ 100mm
k
g
m
d1
e
c c1
a
9300vec133


EVF9330-EV 340 580 510 28.5 283 532 38 285 11 28 18
EVF9331-EV 340 672 591 28.5 283 615 38 285 11 28 18
4.3-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005


EVF93xx-EV must be used. In addition, the mounting set for EJ0010
push-through technique is required.
Dimensions a
a1
L
d2
b1
d2
d
b
d2
d1
c1 g
h
e1
h c2
e
c3
c4
9300vec117

Type a a1 b b1 c1 c2 c3 c4 d d1 d2 e 1) e1 g h
EVF9330-EV
373 340 543 510 45 137.5 217.5 310 525 45 145 285 163.5 7 9
EVF9331-EV

cabinet
Type Width Height
EVF9330-EV
320 492
EVF9331-EV
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  4.3-3


9300vec113

Hexagon head cap screw For fixing bracket 8
M8 × 16 mm (DIN 933)
Washer ∅ 8.4 mm (DIN 125) For hexagon head cap screw 8
Spring washer ∅ 8 mm (DIN 127) For hexagon head cap screw 8
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  4.4-1

Dimensions
0
³ 100mm
³ 50mm ³ 50mm
³ 100mm
d
b1
k
g
m
d1
c c1 e
a
9300vec134


EVF9332-EV
450 750 680 28.5 393 702 38 285 11 28 18
EVF9333-EV
4.4-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005


EVF93xx-EV. In addition, the mounting set for EJ0001 push-through
technique is required.
Dimensions a
a1
d2
b1
d2
d
b
d2
d1
c1 g e1
h
h c2 e
c3
c4
9300vec118

Type a a1 b b1 c1 c2 c3 d d1 d2 e 1) e1 g h
EVF9332-EV
488 450 718 680 49 172.5 295.5 698 49 200 285 164 9 10
EVF9333-EV

cabinet
Type A1 b1
EVF9332-EV
428.5 660
EVF9333-EV
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  4.4-3

Wiring the standard device 5
Contents
5 Wiring the standard device

Contents
5.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1-1

5.1.1 Protection of persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1-1
5.1.2 Device protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1-3
5.1.3 Maximum motor cable length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1-3
5.1.4 Motor protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1-4
5.1.5 Supply form/electrical supply conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1-4
5.1.6 Interaction with compensation equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1-4
5.2 Basics for wiring according to EMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2-1
5.2.1 Shielding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2-1
5.2.2 Mains connection, DC supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2-1
5.2.3 Motor cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2-1
5.2.4 Control cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2-3
5.2.5 Installation in the control cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2-4
5.2.6 Wiring outside the control cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2-5
5.2.7 Detecting and eliminating EMC interferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2-6
5.3 Operating conditions for drive controller of variants V024 and V100 on
IT system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3-1
5.4 Basic devices in the power range 0.37 ... 11 kW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-1
5.4.1 Wiring according to EMC (CE-typical drive system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-1
5.4.2 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-3
5.4.4 Motor connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-6
5.5.2 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-3
5.6.2 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6-3
5.7.2 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7-3
5.8 Connection terminal of the control card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8-1
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  5-1

Contents
5.9 Control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9-1

5.9.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9-1
5.9.2 With active ”safe standstill” function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9-3
5.9.3 Without ”safe standstill” function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9-6
5.9.4 Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9-8
5.10 Wiring of system bus (CAN) ....................................... 5.10-1
5.11 Wiring of the feedback system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11-1
5.11.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11-1
5.11.2 Incremental encoder with TTL level at X8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11-2
5.11.3 Incremental encoder with HTL level at X9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11-3
5.12 Wiring of digital frequency input / digital frequency output . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12-1
5.13 Communication module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13-1
5-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Important notes 5.1
Protection of persons 5.1.1
5.1 Important notes
 Stop!
The drive controller contains electrostatically sensitive
components.
The personnel must be free of electrostatic charge prior to
assembly and service operations.
5.1.1 Protection of persons
 Danger!
Before working on the controller, check that no voltage is applied
to the power terminals:
ƒ Because the power terminals V, W, +UG and -UG remain live
for at least 3 minutes after disconnecting from mains.
ƒ Because the power terminals L1, L2, L3, U, V, W, +UG and -UG
remain live with the motor stopped.
Pluggable terminal strip All pluggable terminals must only be connected or disconnected when no
voltage is applied!
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  5.1-1

5.1 Important notes
5.1.1 Protection of persons
Electrical isolation The terminals X1 and X5 have a double (reinforced) insulation according to
EN50178. The protection against accidental contact is ensured without any
further measures.
 Danger!
ƒ Terminals X3, X4, X6, X7, X8, X9, X10, X11 have a single basic
insulation (single insulating distance).
ƒ Protection against accidental contact in case of a defective
isolating distance is only guaranteed through external
measures, e.g. double insulation.
ƒ If an external DC 24 V voltage source is used, the insulation
level of the controller depends on the insulation level of the
voltage source.
24 VDC
L1
N
59 39 A1 A2 A3 A4 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 ST1 ST2 28 X5 X1
L1
L2
L3
+UG
-UG
PE
PE X3 X4 X6 X8 X9 X10 X11
9300VEC050
Fig. 5.1-1 Electrical isolation between power terminals, control terminals and housing
Double (reinforced) insulation
Basic insulation
Replacement of defective Replace defective fuses with the prescribed type only when no voltage is
fuses applied.
Mains disconnection Make a safety disconnection between the controller and the mains only via
a contactor at the input side.
5.1-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Important notes 5.1
Device protection 5.1.2
5.1.2 Device protection
ƒ In case of condensation, connect the controller to the mains voltage

only after the visible humidity has evaporated.
ƒ Controller is protected by means of external fuses.
ƒ Drive controllers EVF9324, EVF9326 and EVF9328 ... EVF9333 must only
be operated with assigned mains choke / mains filter.
ƒ Length of the screws for fastening the shield sheet for the control
cables: 12 mm.
ƒ Cyclic switching of the supply voltage may overload and destroy the
input current limitation of the drive controller. In case of cyclic
switching over a longer period of time, three minutes have to pass
between two starting operations!
ƒ Switching on the motor side of the controller is only permissible for
safety shutdown (emergency-off).
ƒ Unused control inputs and outputs must be equipped with terminal
strips. Unused Sub-D sockets must be provided with the protection
covers included in the scope of supply.
5.1.3 Maximum motor cable length
ƒ The motor cable must be as short as possible for having a positive

effect on the drive behaviour.
ƒ For group drives (several motors connected to one drive controller) the
resulting cable length lres is the crucial factor:
I res [m] = (l 1 + l 2 + l 3 ... + l i) ⋅ i lx Length of the individual motor cable

lres Resulting length of the motor cable
i Number of the individual motor cables
ƒ At rated mains voltage and a switching frequency of 8 kHz and without

additional output filters, the maximum permissible length of the
motor cable is as follows:
– 50 m shielded
– 100 m unshielded
 Note!
For compliance with EMC regulations, the permissible cable
lengths must be changed.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  5.1-3

5.1 Important notes
5.1.4 Motor protection
5.1.4 Motor protection
ƒ Extensive protection against overload:

– By overcurrent relays or temperature monitoring.
– We recommend the use of PTC thermistors or thermostats to monitor
the motor temperature.
– PTC thermistors or thermostats can be connected to the controller.
ƒ Only use motors with an insulation suitable for the inverter operation:
– Insulation resistance: max. û = 1.5 kV, max. du/dt = 5 kV/μs
– When using motors with an unknown insulation resistance, please
contact your motor supplier.
5.1.5 Supply form/electrical supply conditions
Please observe the restrictions for each mains type!

Mains Operation of the drive controller Notes
With earthed No restrictions z Observe controller ratings
neutral z Mains r.m.s. current: see chapter
(TT/TN mains) ”Technical data”
With isolated Possible, if the controller is protected z Safe operation in the event of an
neutral in the event of an earth fault in the earth fault at the inverter output
(IT mains) supplying mains. cannot be guaranteed.
z Possible, if appropriate earth fault z The variants V024 and V100
detections are available and enable the operation of the
z the controller is immediately 9300 vector frequency inverter on
separated from the mains. IT systems
DC supply via Permitted if the DC voltage is The controller will be destroyed
+UG/-UG symmetrical to PE when +UG or -UG are grounded.
5.1.6 Interaction with compensation equipment
ƒ Controllers only consume very little reactive power of the fundamental

wave from the AC supply mains. Therefore, a compensation is not
required.
ƒ If the controllers are operated at mains with compensation, this
equipment must be used with chokes.
– For this, contact the supplier of the compensation equipment.
5.1-4  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Basics for wiring according to EMC 5.2
Shielding 5.2.1
5.2 Basics for wiring according to EMC
5.2.1 Shielding
The quality of shielding is determined by a good shield connection:

ƒ Connect the shield with a large surface.
ƒ Connect the shield directly to the intended shield sheet of the device.
ƒ In addition, connect the shield to the conductive and earthed mounting
plate with a large contact surface by using a conductive clamp.
ƒ Unshielded cable ends must be as short as possible.
5.2.2 Mains connection, DC supply
ƒ Drive controllers, mains chokes or mains filters may be connected to

the mains via unshielded single cores or cables.
ƒ If a mains filter or RFI filter is used, install a shielded cable between
mains filter or RFI filter and drive controller if it is longer than 300 mm.
ƒ For DC-bus operation or DC supply, use shielded cables.
ƒ The cable cross-section must be dimensioned for the corresponding
fusing (national and regional regulations must be observed).
5.2.3 Motor cables
ƒ Use only shielded motor cables with braid made of tinned or

nickel-plated copper. Shields made of steel braid are not suitable.
– The overlap rate of the braid must be at least 70 % with an overlap
angle of 90 °.
ƒ The cables used must comply with the requirements of the site of use
(e.g. EN 60204-1).
ƒ The cable for motor temperature monitoring (PTC or thermal contact)
must be shielded and separated from the motor cable.
– In the Lenze system cables, the cable for the motor temperature
monitoring is integrated in the motor cable.
ƒ Always place the shield of the motor cable at both sides - at the drive
controller and at the motor.
– Always place shields with large surface on the conducting and
earthed mounting plate. Also use the shield connections on the
device.
ƒ The motor cable is perfectly installed if
– it is routed separately of mains cables and control cables,
– crosses mains cables and control cables only at a right angle,
– is not interrupted.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  5.2-1

5.2.3 Motor cables
ƒ If it is inevitable to interrupt the motor cable (e.g. by chokes, contactors

or terminals):
– The unshielded cable length must not exceed 100 mm (depending on
the cable cross-section).
– Chokes, contactors, terminals etc. must be separated from the other
components (at least with a distance of 100 mm).
– Connect the shield of the motor cable to the mounting plate directly
before and behind the point of separation with a surfarce as large as
possible.
ƒ Connect the shield in the motor terminal box or on the motor housing
to PE.
– Metal glands at the motor terminal box ensure a connection of the
shield and the motor housing.
Motor supply cable Cable gland
Motor supply cable Cable gland

max. 500mm
Braid
Extensive Heat-
contact of the shrinkable tube Cable connector according to EMC
cable shield for cable glands with high
degree of protection.
Fig. 5.2-1 Shielding of the motor cable
5.2-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Control cables 5.2.4
5.2.4 Control cables
ƒ Control cables must be shielded to minimise interference injections.

ƒ For lengths of 200 mm and more, use only shielded cables for analog
and digital inputs and outputs. Under 200 mm, unshielded but twisted
cables may be used.
ƒ Place the shield correctly:
– The shield connections of the control cables must be at a distance of
at least 50 mm from the shield connections of the motor cables and
DC cables.
– For cables for digital inputs and outputs, place the shield at both
ends.
– For cables for analog inputs and outputs, place the shield at one end
on the drive controller.
ƒ To achieve an optimum shielding effect (in case of very long cables,
with high interference) one shield end can be connected to PE potential
via a capacitor (e.g. 10 nF/250 V) (see sketch).
Fig. 5.2-2 Shielding of long, analog control cables
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  5.2-3

5.2.5 Installation in the control cabinet
5.2.5 Installation in the control cabinet
Mounting plate requirements ƒ Only use mounting plates with conductive surfaces (zinc-coated or
V2A-steel).
ƒ Lacquered mounting plates are not suitable even if the lacquer is
removed from the contact surfaces.
ƒ Ensure a large-surface connection of several mounting plates (e.g.
using earthing strip).
Mounting of the components ƒ Connect controller, filters, and chokes to the earthed mounting plate
with a wire of large a cross-section as possible:
Optimum cable routing ƒ The motor cable is perfectly installed if
– it is routed separately of mains cables and control cables,
– it crosses mains cables and control cables only at a right angle,
ƒ Cables must be routed close to the mounting plate (reference
potential) as freely suspended cables act like aerials.
ƒ Cables must be routed in a straight line to the terminals (avoid “tangle
of cables”).
ƒ Use separate cable ducts for power cables and control cables. Do not
mix up different cable types in one cable duct.
ƒ Minimise coupling capacitances and inductances due to unnecessary
cable lengths and reserve loops.
ƒ Short-circuit unused cores to the reference potential.
ƒ Route the positive and negative cables for DC 24 V together over the
total length to prevent loops.
Connection system of ƒ Connect all components (drive controller, choke, filter) to a central
earthing earthing point (PE rail).
ƒ Create an earth system in star connection.
ƒ Comply with the corresponding minimum cable cross-sections.
5.2-4  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Wiring outside the control cabinet 5.2.6
5.2.6 Wiring outside the control cabinet
Notes for cable laying outside the control cabinet:

ƒ The longer the cables the greater must be the space between the
cables.
ƒ In case of parallel cable routing of cables with different types of signals
it is possible to minimise the interferences by means of a metal barrier
or separated cable ducts.
Cover
Barrier without
opening
Signal cables Power cables

EMVallg001
Fig. 5.2-3 Cable routing in the cable duct with barrier
Cover
Communication cable
Cable duct
Measuring leads
Analog cables
Control cables
Power cables
EMVallg002
Fig. 5.2-4 Cable routing in separated cable ducts
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  5.2-5

5.2.7 Detecting and eliminating EMC interferences
5.2.7 Detecting and eliminating EMC interferences
Fault Cause Remedy

Interferences of Unshielded motor cable Use shielded motor cable
analog setpoints of No extensive shielding Provide optimum shielding
devices and according to instructions
measuring systems
Shield of the motor cable is z Keep components separated
interrupted by terminal strips, from all other parts by at least
switches etc. 100mm
z Use Motor choke
Additional, unshielded cables are Separate the additional cables and
installed within the motor cable shield them
(e.g. for motor temperature
monitoring)
Motor cable ends too long and Shorten unshielded cable ends to
unshielded maximally 40 mm
Conducted Terminal strips for the motor Keep the terminals strips for the
interference level is cable are directly installed next to motor cable separated from the
exceeded on the the supply terminals supply and other control terminals
supply side by at least 100 mm
Mounting plate varnished Optimise PE connection:
z Remove varnish
z Use zinc-coated mounting plate
HF short circuit Check cable routing
5.2-6  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Operating conditions for drive controller of variants V024 and V100 on IT system 5.3
5.3 Operating conditions for drive controller of variants V024 and V100 on IT system
In the special edition ”IT system”, operating the 9300 vector frequency
inverter on insulated supply systems is possible. The frequency inverters also
feature an insulated design. This prevents the insulation monitoring from
responding, even if several frequency inverters are installed.
The electric strength of the frequency inverters is increased so that damages
to the frequency inverter are avoided if insulation errors or earth faults in the
supply system occur. The operational reliability of the system remains intact.
Mains connection
 Stop!
Operate the devices only with assigned mains chokes.
The operation with Lenze mains filters or Lenze RFI filters is not
allowed since these items contain components that are
interconnected to PE. It would cancel the protection concept of
the IT system. The components are destroyed in case of earth
fault.
Permissible supply forms and Mains Operation of the drive Notes

electrical supply conditions controllers
With insulated star point Allowed without restrictions Operation with mains filters
(IT systems) or RFI filters is not allowed.
With earthed external Allowed without restrictions
conductor (not UL-approved)
DC supply via +UG/-UG Allowed without restrictions –
DC-bus operation of several Central supply with 9340 regenerative power supply module is not possible.
drives
Installation of the CE-typical For the installation of drives on IT systems, the same conditions apply as for
drive system
the installation on systems with earthed neutral point.
According to the binding EMC product standard EN61800-3, no limit values
are defined for IT systems for noise emission in the high-frequency range.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  5.3-1

Wiring according to EMC (CE-typical drive system) 5.4.1
5.4.1 Wiring according to EMC (CE-typical drive system)
The drives meet the EU Directive on ”Electromagnetic Compatibility” if they

are installed in accordance with the specifications of the CE-typical drive
system. The end-user is responsible for maintaining the EU Directive in the
machine application.
 Note!
Observe the designs in chapter ”Basic wiring according to EMC”!
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  5.4-1

L1
L2
L3
N
PE
F1 … F3
K10
PE S2
Z2 S1 K10
PE L1 L2 L3
IN1 PES PES X11 X4

IN2 K31 HI
Z1
IN3 K32 LO
IN4 33 GND
34
PES PES X5 X6 PES

28 63
E1 7
E2 62
E3
7
EVF9321 …
E4 4
E5
EVF9333 3
+ ST1 2
DC 24 V
ST2 1
–
39 PES
PE
A1 X8 PE
A2
A3 X9
A4
PES PES 59 X10
K10
T1 T2 PE U V W +UG -UG
PE
PES PES PES PES PES PES

X8/8
X8/5
KTY PE PE +UG -UG RB2 RB1 PE PE RB1 RB2 T1 T2

J>
PES PES 9352 RB
PE M PE M JRB
3~ 3~
Z3 Z4
9300VEC108
Fig. 5.4-1 Example for wiring in accordance with EMC regulations

F1 ... F3 Fuses
K10 Mains contactor
Z1 Programmable logic controller (PLC)
Z2 Mains choke or mains filter
Z3 Brake chopper EMB9352-E
Z4 Brake resistor
S1 Mains contactor on
S2 Mains contactor off
+UG, -UG DC-bus connection
PES HF shield termination through large-surface connection to PE
5.4-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

To gain access to the power connections, remove the covers:

ƒ Release the cover for the mains connection with slight pressure on the
front and pull it off to the top.
ƒ Release the cover for the motor connection with slight pressure on the
front and pull it off to the bottom.
Installation material required from the scope of supply:
Shield connection support Support of the shield sheets for the supply 2
cable and motor cable
Hexagon nut M5 Fastening of shield connection supports 4
Spring washer ∅ 5 mm (DIN 127) 2
Serrated lock washer ∅ 5.3 mm 2
(DIN 125)
Shield sheet Shield connections for supply cables, motor 2
cable
Screw and washer assembly Shield sheets fastening 4
M4 × 10 mm (DIN 6900)
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  5.4-3

 Note!
ƒ If a mains filter or RFI filter is used and the cable length
between mains/RFI filter and drive controller exceeds
300 mm, install a shielded cable.
ƒ For DC-bus operation or DC supply, we recommend using
shielded DC cables.
Shield sheet installation
 Stop!
ƒ To avoid damaging the PE stud, always install the shield sheet
and the PE connection in the order displayed. The required
parts are included in the accessory kit.
ƒ Do not use lugs as strain relief.
0
1 8
2
3 7
4
5
6 a 2
7
M6 4
M5 0
a 1.7 Nm
}+
15 lb-in L1 L2 L3 +UG -UG
PE
PE
M5
PE 3.4 Nm
30 lb-in
9300vec130
Fig. 5.4-2 Installation of shield sheet for drive controllers 0.37 ... 11 kW
 PE stud
 Screw on M5 nut and tighten it by hand
 Slide on fixing bracket for shield sheet
 Slide on serrated lock washer
 Slide on PE cable with ring cable lug
 Slide on washer
 Slide on spring washer
 Screw on M5 nut and tighten it
 Screw shield sheet on fixing bracket with two M4 (a) screws
5.4-4  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Mains connection, DC supply 5.4.3
Mains connection, DC supply 0

1
2
L1 L2 L3 +UG -UG
PE
L1, L2, L3 0.5...0.6 Nm

+UG, -UG 4.4...5.3 lb-in
9300std033
Fig. 5.4-3 Mains connection, DC supply for drive controllers 0.37 ... 11 kW
 Mains cable
 Shield sheet
Securely clamp mains cable shield with the lugs
 Mains and DC bus connection
L1, L2, L3: Connection of mains cable
+UG, -UG: Connection of cable for devices in DC-bus connection
Cable cross-sections up to 4 mm2: Use wire end ferrules for flexible cables
Cable cross-sections > 4 mm2: Use pin-end connectors
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  5.4-5

5.4.4 Motor connection
 Note!
ƒ Fusing the motor cable is not required.
ƒ The drive controller features 2 connections for motor
temperature monitoring:
– Terminals T1, T2 for connecting a PTC thermistor or thermal
contact (NC contact).
– Pins X8/5 and X8/8 of the incremental encoder input (X8) for
connecting a KTY thermal sensor.
 Stop!
ƒ To avoid damaging the PE stud, always install the shield sheet
and the PE connection in the order displayed. The required
parts are included in the accessory kit.
ƒ Do not use lugs as strain relief.
0 M5
1 PE 3.4 Nm
2
3 30 lb-in
4
5
6
7
a
1.7 Nm
T1T2
PE
}+ PE
M6 15 lb-in U V W
M5 0
a 2
4
7
8
9300vec128
Fig. 5.4-4 Installation of shield sheet for drive controllers 0.37 ... 11 kW
 PE stud
 Screw on M5 nut and tighten it by hand
 Slide on fixing bracket for shield sheet
 Slide on serrated lock washer
 Slide on PE cable with ring cable lug
 Slide on washer
 Slide on spring washer
 Screw on M5 nut and tighten it
 Screw shield sheet on fixing bracket with two M4 (a) screws
5.4-6  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Motor connection 5.4.4
Motor with PTC thermistor or Wire T1, T2 only if the motor is equipped with a PTC thermistor or thermal
thermal contact (NC contact) contact (NC contact).
ƒ An ”open” cable acts like an antenna and can cause faults at the drive
controller.
 Danger!
ƒ All control terminals are only base-insulated (single isolating
distance) after connecting a PTC thermistor or a thermal
contact.
15 V
2.7 k
7.4 k
3.3 k
MONIT-OH8
PES PES
PES PES
J>
PES
PE M
3~
9300vec139
Fig. 5.4-5 Circuit diagram of motor connection with PTC thermistor or thermal contact (NC
contact) at T1, T2
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  5.4-7

Features of the connection for motor temperature monitoring:

Terminals T1, T2
Connection z PTC thermistor
– PTC thermistor with defined tripping temperature (acc. to
DIN 44081 and DIN 44082)
z Thermal contact (NC contact)
– Temperature switch as NC contact
Tripping point z Fixed (depending on the PTC/thermal contact)
z PTC: Rϑ > 1600 Ω
z Configurable as warning or error (TRIP)
Notes z Monitoring is not active in the Lenze setting.
z If you do not use a Lenze motor, we recommend a PTC thermistor
up to 150°C.

2 3 2 3
U, V, W PE U, V, W PE
0.5...0.6 Nm T1 T2 0.5...0.6 Nm T1 T2
T1, T2 4.4...5.3 lb-in T1, T2 4.4...5.3 lb-in
U V W U V W
1 1
0 0
9300std011
Fig. 5.4-6 Motor connection with PTC thermistor or thermal contact (NC contact)
c  Motor connection with Lenze system cable with integrated control
cable for motor temperature monitoring
 Shield sheet
Securely clamp the overall shield and shield of control cable for motor
temperature monitoring using lugs
d  Connection of motor cable and separate control cable for motor
temperature monitoring
 Shield sheet
Securely clamp the shield of the motor cable and the shield of the cable
for the motor temperature monitoring using lugs
 U, V, W
Motor cable connection
Observe correct polarity. Observe maximum length of motor cable.
 T1, T2 for motor temperature monitoring
Connection of cable for PTC thermistor or thermal contact (NC contact)
5.4-8  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Motor with KTY thermal

sensor
 Note!
ƒ Lenze recommends using Lenze system cables for wiring.
ƒ If self-prepared cables are used, only use cables with cores that
are twisted in pairs and shielded.
X8 X8/8
X8/5
PES
X9
X10
PES
PES PES
KTY
PES
PE M
3~
9300vec121
Fig. 5.4-7 Circuit diagram of motor connection with KTY thermal sensor at incremental
encoder input X8
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  5.4-9


Pin X8/5, X8/8 from incremental encoder input (X8)
Connection Linear KTY thermal sensor
Tripping point z Warning: Adjustable
z Error (TRIP): Fixed at 150 °C
z The KTY thermal sensor is monitored with regard to interruption
and short circuit.
U, V, W PE
0.5...0.6 Nm T1T2
T1, T2 4.4...5.3 lb-in
U V W
1
0
9300vec122
Fig. 5.4-8 Motor connection with KTY thermal sensor

 Motor cable
 Shield sheet
Securely clamp shield of motor cable with the lugs
 U, V, W
Motor cable connection
Cable cross-sections 9300 vector Cable cross-sections U, V, W, PE

Type [mm2] [AWG]
EVF9321 1 18
EVF9322 1 18
EVF9323 1 18
EVF9324 1.5 16
EVF9325 4 12
EVF9326 6 10
5.4-10  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005


 Note!
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  5.5-1

L1
L2
L3
N
PE
F1 … F3
K10
PE S2
Z2 S1 K10
PE L1 L2 L3
IN1 PES PES X11 X4

IN2 K31 HI
Z1
IN3 K32 LO
IN4 33 GND
34
PES PES X5 X6 PES

28 63
E1 7
E2 62
E3
7
EVF9321 …
E4 4
E5
EVF9333 3
+ ST1 2
DC 24 V
ST2 1
–
39 PES
PE
A1 X8 PE
A2
A3 X9
A4
PES PES 59 X10
K10
PE

X8/8
X8/5

J>
PES PES 9352 RB
PE M PE M JRB
3~ 3~
Z3 Z4
9300VEC108

F1 ... F3 Fuses
K10 Mains contactor
Z4 Brake resistor
5.5-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

To gain access to the power connections, remove the cover:

9300vec113

Hexagon nut M6 (DIN 934) Connection of supply cables (mains, +UG, -UG) 10
and motor cable to the stud bolts
Washer ∅ 6 mm (DIN 125) For hexagon nut M6 10
Spring washer ∅ 6 mm (DIN 127) For hexagon nut M6 10
Grommet Motor cable 1
Shield connection support Support of the shield sheet for motor cable 1
Self-tapping screw ∅ 4 × 14 mm Fastening of shield connection support 2
Shield sheet Shield connection for motor cable 1
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  5.5-3

 Note!
shielded DC cables.
0 1 2
}+ PE L1, L2, L3
+UG, -UG
PE
M6
5 Nm
44 lb-in
PE +UG L1 L2 L3 -UG
3
9300std034
Fig. 5.5-2 Mains connection, DC supply for drive controllers 15 ... 30 kW

 PE stud
Connect PE cable with ring cable lug
 Conductive surface
 Shield clamp
Connect shield with a surface as large as possible to the control cabinet
mounting plate and fasten with shield clamp (shield clamp is not part of the
scope of supply)
To improve the shield connection, also connect the shield to the PE stud
 Mains and DC bus connection
L1, L2, L3: Connection of mains cable with ring cable lugs
+UG, -UG: Connection of cable for devices in DC-bus connection with ring
cable lugs
5.5-4  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

 Note!
 Stop!
Do not use lugs as strain relief.
PE
T1 U V W
T2
3.4 Nm
a a 30 lb-in
0
9300vec131
Fig. 5.5-3 Installation of shield sheet for drive controllers 15 ... 30 kW

 Fasten the shield sheet with two self-tapping screws ∅ 4 × 14 mm (a)
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  5.5-5

controller.
 Danger!
contact.
15 V
2.7 k
7.4 k
3.3 k
MONIT-OH8
PES PES
PES PES
J>
PES
PE M
3~
9300vec139
contact) at T1, T2
5.5-6  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005


Terminals T1, T2
DIN 44081 and DIN 44082)
z PTC: Rϑ > 1600 Ω
up to 150°C.

2 2
T1
T2
2.5 Nm
22,1 lb-in
}+ PE
3 T1
T2
2.5 Nm
22,1 lb-in
PE PE
4 T1 U V W
4 T1
}+ PE
T2 T2
1 1
0 M6 0
U, V, W,
5 Nm
PE
44 lb-in
9300std030
c  Motor connection with Lenze system cable with integrated control
cable for motor temperature monitoring
 Shield sheet
Securely clamp the overall shield and the shield of control cable for
motor temperature monitoring using lugs
d  Connection of motor cable and separate control cable for motor
temperature monitoring
 Shield sheet
Securely clamp the shield of the motor cable and the shield of the cable
for the motor temperature monitoring using lugs
 PE stud
Connection of PE cable with ring cable lug
 U, V, W
Connection of motor cable with ring cable lugs
 T1, T2 for motor temperature monitoring
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  5.5-7


sensor
 Note!
X8 X8/8
X8/5
PES
X9
X10
PES
PES PES
KTY
PES
PE M
3~
9300vec121
encoder input X8
5.5-8  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005


and short circuit.
}+ PE
3
PE
T1 U V W
1 T2
M6
0 U, V, W,
5 Nm
PE
44 lb-in
9300vec123

 Motor cable
 Shield connection
Securely clamp shield of motor cable with the lugs
 PE stud
 U, V, W

Type [mm2] [AWG]
EVF9327 10 8
EVF9328 16 6
EVF9329 25 4
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  5.5-9


 Note!
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  5.6-1

L1
L2
L3
N
PE
F1 … F3
K10
PE S2
Z2 S1 K10
PE L1 L2 L3
IN1 PES PES X11 X4

IN2 K31 HI
Z1
IN3 K32 LO
IN4 33 GND
34
PES PES X5 X6 PES

28 63
E1 7
E2 62
E3
7
EVF9321 …
E4 4
E5
EVF9333 3
+ ST1 2
DC 24 V
ST2 1
–
39 PES
PE
A1 X8 PE
A2
A3 X9
A4
PES PES 59 X10
K10
PE

X8/8
X8/5

J>
PES PES 9352 RB
PE M PE M JRB
3~ 3~
Z3 Z4
9300VEC108

F1 ... F3 Fuses
K10 Mains contactor
Z4 Brake resistor
5.6-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005


9300vec113

Cable ties 3.5 × 150 mm Strain relief/shield connection for motor cable 4
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  5.6-3

 Note!
shielded DC cables.
0 1 2
}+ PE L1, L2, L3
+UG, -UG
PE
M8
15 Nm
132 lb-in
PE +UG L1 L2 L3 -UG
3
9300vec126

 PE stud
 Shield clamp
scope of supply)
cable lugs
5.6-4  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

 Note!
controller.
 Danger!
contact.
15 V
2.7 k
7.4 k
3.3 k
MONIT-OH8
PES PES
PES PES
J>
PES
PE M
3~
9300vec139
contact) at T1, T2
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  5.6-5


Terminals T1, T2
DIN 44081 and DIN 44082)
z PTC: Rϑ > 1600 Ω
up to 150°C.
}+
M8
PE U, V, W,
15 Nm 1
PE
132 lb-in
0
PE U V W
4
T1
T2
T1 2.5 Nm
T2 22.1 lb-in 2
3

M5 x 12
3 Nm (26.5 lb-in)
9300std031
 PE stud
 U, V, W
 Shield clamps
Connect shields of motor cable with a surface as large as possible to the
shield sheet and fasten with shield clamps and M5 × 12 mm screws
 Cable ties
Strain relief of motor cable
 T1, T2 for motor temperature monitoring
Connect shield with a surface as large as possible to PE stud
5.6-6  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005


sensor
 Note!
X8 X8/8
X8/5
PES
X9
X10
PES
PES PES
KTY
PES
PE M
3~
9300vec121
encoder input X8
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  5.6-7


and short circuit.
}+ 1
U, V, W, M8
PE
PE 15 Nm
132 lb-in
0
PE U V W
T1
T2
2
3

M5 x 12
3 Nm (26.5 lb-in)
9300vec124

 PE stud
 U, V, W
 Shield clamps
 Cable ties
Strain relief of motor cable

Type [mm2] [AWG]
EVF9330 70 2/0
EVF9331 95 3/0
5.6-8  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005


 Note!
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  5.7-1

L1
L2
L3
N
PE
F1 … F3
K10
PE S2
Z2 S1 K10
PE L1 L2 L3
IN1 PES PES X11 X4

IN2 K31 HI
Z1
IN3 K32 LO
IN4 33 GND
34
PES PES X5 X6 PES

28 63
E1 7
E2 62
E3
7
EVF9321 …
E4 4
E5
EVF9333 3
+ ST1 2
DC 24 V
ST2 1
–
39 PES
PE
A1 X8 PE
A2
A3 X9
A4
PES PES 59 X10
K10
PE

X8/8
X8/5

J>
PES PES 9352 RB
PE M PE M JRB
3~ 3~
Z3 Z4
9300VEC108

F1 ... F3 Fuses
K10 Mains contactor
Z4 Brake resistor
5.7-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005


9300vec113

Cable ties 3.5 × 150 mm Strain relief/shield connection for motor cable 4
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  5.7-3

 Note!
shielded DC cables.
0 1 2
}+ PE L1, L2, L3
+UG, -UG
PE
M10
30 Nm
264 lb-in
PE +UG L1 L2 L3 -UG
3
9300vec127

 PE stud
 Shield clamp
scope of supply)
cable lugs
5.7-4  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

 Note!
controller.
 Danger!
contact.
15 V
2.7 k
7.4 k
3.3 k
MONIT-OH8
PES PES
PES PES
J>
PES
PE M
3~
9300vec139
contact) at T1, T2
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  5.7-5


Terminals T1, T2
DIN 44081 and DIN 44082)
z PTC: Rϑ > 1600 Ω
up to 150°C.
0 1
}+
U, V, W, M10
PE 30 Nm
PE
264 lb-in
PE U V W
5
T1
T2 2
T1 2.5 Nm 3
T2 22.1 lb-in
4
M4 x 12: 2.5 Nm (22.1 lb-in)

M5 x 12: 3 Nm (26.5 lb-in)
9300std032
 PE stud
 U, V, W
 Cable clamps for strain relief of motor cable
Fasten cable clamps with M4 × 12 mm screws
 Shield clamps
 Cable ties for additional strain relief of motor cable
 T1, T2 for motor temperature monitoring
Connect shield with a surface as large as possible to PE stud
5.7-6  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005


sensor
 Note!
X8 X8/8
X8/5
PES
X9
X10
PES
PES PES
KTY
PES
PE M
3~
9300vec121
encoder input X8
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  5.7-7


and short circuit.
0 1
}+
U, V, W, M10
PE 30 Nm
PE
264 lb-in
PE U V W
T1
T2 2
4
a
M4 x 12: 2.5 Nm (22.1 lb-in)

M5 x 12: 3 Nm (26.5 lb-in)
9300vec125

 PE stud
Connection of PE cable
 U, V, W
Observe correct polarisation. Observe maximum length of motor cable.
 Cable clamps for strain relief of motor cable
Fasten cable clamps with M4 × 12 mm screws
 Shield clamps
Place shields of motor cable with large surface on the shield sheet and
fasten with shield clamps and M5 × 12 mm screws
 Cable ties for additional strain relief of motor cable

Type [mm2] [AWG]
EVF9332 95 3/0
EVF9333 120 4/0
5.7-8  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Connection terminal of the control card 5.8
5.8 Connection terminal of the control card
X1
X3
59 ST2 ST1 A4 A3 A2 A1 GND LO HI

X4
39 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1 28
X5
1
X6
2
4
62 7
63 7
X11
K31 K32 33 34
1
X8
1
X9
5
X10
9300VEC001
Fig. 5.8-1 Connection terminal of the control card

c 2 light-emitting diodes (red, green) for status display
x1 Automation interface (AIF)
Slot for communication modules (e. g. keypad XT)
X3 Preselection of signal type with jumper for input signal at X6/1, X6/2
X4 Terminal strip for system bus (CAN)
X5 Terminal strips for digital inputs and outputs
X6 Terminal strips for analog inputs and outputs
X8 Sub-D socket for incremental encoders
X9 Sub-D socket for master frequency input
X10 Sub-D socket for master frequency output
X11 Terminal strip for safety relay KSR
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  5.8-1

Control connections 5.9
5.9 Control connections
 Stop!
The control card will be damaged if
ƒ the voltage between X5/39 and PE or X6/7 and PE is greater
than 50 V,
ƒ the voltage between voltage source and X6/7 is greater than
10 V (common mode) in case of supply via external voltage
source.
Limit the voltage before switching on the drive controller:
ƒ Connect X5/39, X6/2, X6/4 and X6/7 directly to PE or
ƒ use voltage-limiting components.
ƒ For trouble-free operation, the control cables must be shielded:

– For cables for digital inputs and outputs, connect the shield at both
ends.
– For cables for analog inputs and outputs, only connect the shield at
the drive controller end.
– For lengths of 200 mm and more, use only shielded cables for analog
and digital inputs and outputs. Under 200 mm, unshielded but
twisted cables may be used.
Shield sheet Shield connection for control cables 1
Screw M4 × 10 mm (DIN 7985) Shield sheet fastening 1
Terminal strip, 4-pole Connection of safety relay KSR at X11 1
(only for variants V004 and V024)
Terminal strip, 7-pole Connection of digital inputs and outputs at 2
X5
Terminal strip, 4-pole Connection of analog inputs and outputs 2
at X6
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  5.9-1

0
2
9300vec129
Fig. 5.9-1 Connection of cable shield to shield sheet

 Shield sheet
 Fasten shield sheet with M4 × 10 mm screw at the bottom of the control
card
 Securely clamp cable shield with lugs
Terminal data
 Stop!
ƒ Terminal strips must only be connected or disconnected when
no voltage is applied!
ƒ Wire the terminal strips before connecting them!
ƒ Unused terminal strips must also be plugged on to protect the
contacts.
Cable type Wire end ferrule Maximum cable Tightening Stripping

cross-section torque length
Rigid – 2.5 mm2 (AWG 14)
Without wire end
Flexible 2.5 mm2 (AWG 14)
ferrule
Wire end ferrule 0.5 ... 0.6 Nm
5 mm
Flexible without plastic 2.5 mm2 (AWG 14) (4.4 ... 5.3 lb-in)
sleeve
Wire end ferrule
Flexible 2.5 mm2 (AWG 14)
with plastic sleeve
5.9-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

With active ”safe standstill” function 5.9.2
5.9.2 With active ”safe standstill” function
Safety instructions for the ƒ Only qualified personnel are permitted to install and set up the “Safe
installation of the ”safe
standstill” function
standstill” function.
ƒ All safety-relevant cables (e. g. control cable for the safety relay,
feedback contact) outside the control cabinet must be protected, for
instance, by a cable duct. Short circuits between the single cables must
be ruled out!
ƒ Wiring of the safety relay KSR with insulated wire end ferrules or rigid
cables is absolutely vital.
ƒ The electrical reference point for the coil of the safety relay KSR must be
connected with the protective conductor system (DIN EN 60204-1
paragraph 9.4.3). Only this measure guarantees that the operation is
protected against earth faults.
 Tip!
A complete description of the ”Safe standstill” function can be
found in chapter ”Safe standstill”.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  5.9-3

5.9.2 With active ”safe standstill” function
Supply via internal voltage ƒ For supplying the digital inputs (X5/E1 ... X5/E5, X5/ST1), a freely
source
assignable digital output (e. g. X5/A1) must be firmly applied to HIGH
level.
ƒ For supplying the analog inputs (X6/1, X6/2 and X6/3, X6/4), a freely
assignable analog output (e. g. X6/63) must be firmly applied to HIGH
level.
+5 V GND2 +24V
1
2
50mA
50mA
50mA
50mA
+
100k
100k
100k
100k
3
X3 4
K SR GND1 GND1
47k
5
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
6 242R
3.3nF
X11 K31 K32 33 34 X5 28 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 39 A1 A2 A3 A4 ST1ST2 59 X6 1 2 3 4 7 62 63 7
DIGOUT4
S1 S2 AIN1 AIN2 AOUT1 AOUT2
1 2 AOUTx 3 4 AOUTx
10k 10k
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

Z1
9300vec135
Fig. 5.9-2 Wiring of digital and analog inputs/outputs with active ”safe standstill” function
and internal voltage source
S1 Deactivate the pulse inhibit (1. disconnecting path)
S2 Enable the controller (2. disconnecting path)
The PLC accepts the automatic cyclic monitoring of the ”safe
X5/A4 Feedback via a digital output (e. g. DIGOUT4)
The min. wiring requirements for operation
 Note!
If you load a basic configuration C0005 = xx1x (e.g. 1010 for
speed control with control via terminals), the following terminals
are switched to a fixed signal level:
ƒ Terminal X5/A1 to FIXED1 (corresponds to DC 24 V).
ƒ Terminal X6/63 to FIXED100% (corresponds to 10 V).
5.9-4  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

With active ”safe standstill” function 5.9.2
Supply via external voltage source
+5 V GND2 +24V
1
2
50mA
50mA
50mA
50mA
+
100k
100k
100k
100k
3
X3 4
K SR GND1 GND1
47k
5
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
6 242R
3.3nF
DIGOUT4
S1 S2 AIN1 AIN2 AOUT1 AOUT2
1 2 3 4
– + + – – + – –
DC 24 V
(+18 V … +30 V)
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

Z1
9300vec136
Fig. 5.9-3 Wiring of digital and analog inputs/outputs with active ”safe standstill” function
and external voltage source
S1 Deactivate the pulse inhibit (1. disconnecting path)
S2 Enable the controller (2. disconnecting path)
The PLC accepts the automatic cyclic monitoring of the ”safe
X5/A4 Feedback via a digital output (e. g. DIGOUT4)
 Note!
Supplying the digital inputs via an external voltage source
enables a backup operation in case of mains failure. After
switching off the mains voltage all actual values are continued
to be detected and processed.
ƒ Connect the positive pole of the external voltage source with
X5/59 to establish the backup operation in the event of mains
failure.
ƒ The external voltage source must be able to supply a current
≥ 1 A.
ƒ The starting current of the external voltage source is not
limited by the controller. Lenze recommends the use of
voltage sources with current limitation or with an internal
impedance of Z > 1 Ω.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  5.9-5

5.9.3 Without ”safe standstill” function
5.9.3 Without ”safe standstill” function
 Note!
If you do not use the ”safe standstill” function, the safety relay
KSR must permanently carry a current, so that the drivers of the
power output stage are supplied with voltage.
Supply via internal voltage ƒ For supplying the digital inputs (X5/E1 ... X5/E5, X5/ST1), a freely
source
assignable digital output (e. g. X5/A1) must be firmly applied to HIGH
level.
ƒ For supplying the analog inputs (X6/1, X6/2 and X6/3, X6/4), a freely
assignable analog output (e. g. X6/63) must be firmly applied to HIGH
level.
+5 V GND2 +24V
1
2
50mA
50mA
50mA
50mA
100k
100k
100k
100k
3
X3 4
K SR GND1 GND1
47k
5
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
6 242R
3.3nF
S1 AIN1 AIN2 AOUT1 AOUT2

1 2 AOUTx 3 4 AOUTx
10k 10k
9300vec0137
Fig. 5.9-4 Wiring of digital and analog inputs/outputs without ”safe standstill” function
with internal voltage source
S1 Enable controller
 Note!
If you load a basic configuration C0005 = xx1x (e.g. 1010 for
speed control with control via terminals), the following terminals
are switched to a fixed signal level:
ƒ Terminal X5/A1 to FIXED1 (corresponds to DC 24 V).
ƒ Terminal X6/63 to FIXED100% (corresponds to 10 V).
5.9-6  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Without ”safe standstill” function 5.9.3
Supply via external voltage source
+5 V GND2 +24V
1
2
50mA
50mA
50mA
50mA
+
100k
100k
100k
100k
3
X3 4
K SR GND1 GND1
47k
5
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
6 242R
3.3nF
S1 AIN1 AIN2 AOUT1 AOUT2

1 2 AOUTx 3 4 AOUTx
– +
DC 24 V
10k 10k
(+18 V … +30 V)
9300vec138
Fig. 5.9-5 Wiring of digital and analog inputs/outputs without ”safe standstill” function
with external voltage source
S1 Enable controller
 Note!
Supplying the digital inputs via an external voltage source
enables a backup operation in case of mains failure. After
switching off the mains voltage all actual values are continued
to be detected and processed.
ƒ Connect the positive pole of the external voltage source with
X5/59 to establish the backup operation in the event of mains
failure.
ƒ The external voltage source must be able to supply a current
≥ 1 A.
ƒ The starting current of the external voltage source is not
limited by the controller. Lenze recommends the use of
voltage sources with current limitation or with an internal
impedance of Z > 1 Ω.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  5.9-7

5.9.4 Terminal assignment
5.9.4 Terminal assignment
Terminal Function Level / state Technical data

X11/K32 Safety relay KSR Feedback - pulse inhibit Open contact: Pulse inhibit is See chapter ”Technical
X11/K31 1st inactive (operation) data”
disconnecting Closed contact: Pulse inhibit is
path active
X11/33 – coil of safety relay KSR Coil is not carrying any
current: Active pulse inhibit
X11/34 + coil of safety relay KSR Coil is carrying current:
Inactive pulse inhibit
(operation)
X5/28 Controller inhibit Controller enable/inhibit LOW: Controller inhibited LOW: 0 ... +3 V
(DCTRL-CINH) HIGH: Controller enabled HIGH: +12 ... +30 V
2nd
disconnecting Input current at +24 V:
path 8 mA per input
X5/E1 Digital inputs Deactivate CW rotation / quick stop HIGH
(freely Reading and processing
X5/E2 Deactivate CCW rotation / quick stop HIGH
assignable) the input signals - 1/ms
X5/E3 Activate fixed frequency 1 (JOG1) HIGH (mean value)
X5/E4 Set error message (TRIP SET) LOW
X5/E5 Reset error message (TRIP RESET) LOW-HIGH edge
X5/ST1 Additional digital input (E6) HIGH
X5/ST2
X5/A1 Digital outputs Error message LOW LOW: 0 ... +3 V
(freely HIGH: +12 ... +30 V
X5/A2 assignable) Switching threshold QMIN: LOW
Actual speed < setpoint speed in C0017 Load capacity:
max. 50 mA per output
X5/A3 Ready for operation (DCTRL-RDY) HIGH (load resistance at least
480 Ω at +24 V)
X5/A4 Maximum current reached HIGH
(DCTRL-IMAX) Update of the output
signals - 1/ms
X5/39 – GND2, reference potential for digital – Isolated against GND1
signals
X5/59 – Connection of external voltage source DC 24 V (+18 ... +30 V) Current consumption:
for backup operation of the drive Max. 1 A at 24 V
controller in case of mains failure
X6/1 Analog input 1 Voltage input -10 V ... +10 V Resolution:
X6/2 range 6 5 5 mV (11 bits + sign)
4 3
Main setpoint 2 1
Jumper X3
Current input -20 mA ... +20 mA Resolution: 20 μA
range 6 5 (10 bits + sign)
4 3
2 1
Jumper X3
X6/3 Analog input 2 Voltage input Jumper X3 has no -10 V ... +10 V Resolution: 5 mV
X6/4 range effect (11 bits + sign)
Not active
X6/62 Analog output 1 Monitor 1 -10 V ... +10 V Resolution: 20 mV
Actual speed value max. 2 mA (9 bits + sign)
X6/63 Analog output 2 Monitor 2 -10 V ... +10 V Resolution: 20 mV
Actual motor current value max. 2 mA (9 bits + sign)
X6/7 – GND1, reference potential for analog – –
signals
5.9-8  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Wiring of system bus (CAN) 5.10
5.10 Wiring of system bus (CAN)
Wiring
A1 A2 A3 An
93XX 93XX 93XX
X4 HI LO GND PE X4 HI LO GND PE X4 HI LO GND PE HI LO GND PE
120 120
9300VEC054
Fig. 5.10-1 System bus (CAN) wiring

A1 Bus device 1 (controller)
An Bus device n (e. g. PLC), n = max. 63
X4/GND CAN-GND: System bus reference potential
X4/LO CAN-LOW: System bus LOW (data line)
X4/HI CAN-HIGH: System bus HIGH (data line)
 Stop!
Connect a 120-Ω terminating resistor to the first and last node
between the terminals CAN-LOW and CAN-HIGH.
For trouble-free operation, use cables with the listed specifications:
Cable specifications
Overall length ≤ 300 m ≤ 1000 m
Cable type LIYCY 2 x 2 x 0.5 mm2 CYPIMF 2 x 2 x 0.5 mm2
(twisted in pairs and shielded (twisted in pairs and shielded
cores) cores)
Specific resistance ≤ 80 Ω/km ≤ 80 Ω/km
Capacitance per unit ≤ 130 nF/km ≤ 60 nF/km
length
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  5.10-1

Wiring of the feedback system 5.11
5.11 Wiring of the feedback system
ƒ An incremental encoder can be connected to input X8 or input X9:

– Incremental encoder with TTL level are connected to X8.
– Incremental encoder with HTL level are connected to X9.
ƒ The incremental encoder signal can be output at the master frequency
output X10 for slave drives.
 Note!
Protective cover Protection for unused Sub-D sockets 4
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  5.11-1

5.11 Wiring of the feedback system
5.11.2 Incremental encoder with TTL level at X8
Technical data Field Values

Connectable incremental Incremental encoder with TTL level
encoder z Encoder with two 5 V complementary signals electrically
offset by 90°
z Connection of zero track is possible (optional)
Connection at drive controller 9-pole Sub-D socket
Input frequency 0 ... 500 Nm
Current consumption 6 mA per channel
Internal voltage source 5 V DC / max. 200 mA
(X8/4, X8/5)
Wiring
< 50 m
B X8
B
1
A
2
A
3
VCC
4
GND A
5
Z A
6
Z B
KTY 7 B
+KTY
8 Z
-KTY
9 Z
9300VEC018
Fig. 5.11-1 Connection of incremental encoder with TTL level

c Signals with CW rotation
Cores twisted in pairs
Assignment of 9-pole Sub-D socket (X8) at the controller

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Signal B A A VCC GND Z Z +KTY B
(-KTY)
0.14 mm2 (AWG 26) 1 mm2 (AWG 18) 0.14 mm2 (AWG 26)
5.11-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Wiring of the feedback system 5.11
Incremental encoder with HTL level at X9 5.11.3
5.11.3 Incremental encoder with HTL level at X9

Connectable incremental Incremental encoder with HTL-level
encoder z Two-track with inverse signals and zero track
z Single-track without inverse signals and zero track
Input frequency 0 ... 200 Nm
Current consumption 5 mA per channel
Supply of incremental encoder External voltage source
Internal voltage source 5 V DC / max. 200 mA
(X9/4, X9/5) Total current at X9/4, X9/5 and X10/4, X10/5: max. 200 mA
Wiring
< 50 m
B X9
B
1
A
2
A
3
4
GND A
5
Z A
6
Z B
7 B
+ 8
Z
9 Z
–
9300VEC020
Fig. 5.11-2 Connection of incremental encoder with HTL level

c Signals with CW rotation
d External voltage source for the incremental encoder
Cores twisted in pairs

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Signal B A A +5 V GND Z Z - B
0.14 mm2 (AWG 26) 1 mm2 (AWG 18) 0.14 mm2 (AWG 26)
 Note!
Connection of single-track incremental encoder with HTL level:
ƒ Place the signal A at pin X9/2 (A) and the signal B at
pin X9/9 (B).
ƒ Wire pin X9/3 (A) and X9/1) (B) with the positive terminal of
the external voltage source for the incremental encoder.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  5.11-3

Wiring of digital frequency input / digital frequency output 5.12
5.12 Wiring of digital frequency input / digital frequency output

Protective cover Protection for unused Sub-D sockets 4
Technical data Field Master frequency output X10

Pin assignment Dependent on the selected basic configuration
Output frequency 0 ... 500 Nm
Signal Two-track with inverse 5 V signals (RS422) and zero track
Load capacity Maximum 20 mA per channel
(up to 3 slave drives can be connected)
Special features The ”Enable” output signal at X10/8 switches to LOW if the
drive controller is not ready for operation (e.g. separated from
mains). This may trip SD3 monitoring at the slave drive.
Internal voltage source DC 5 V / max. 50 mA
(X10/4, X10/5) Total current at X9/4, X9/5 and X10/4, X10/5: max. 200 mA
Field Master frequency input X9

Input frequency TTL level: 0 ... 500 kHz
HTL level: 0 ... 200 kHz
Signal Two-track with inverse signals and zero track
Single-track without inverse signals and zero track (only for
HTL level)
Signal evaluation Via code C0427
Current consumption Maximum 5 mA
Special features With activated SD3 monitoring, TRIP or warning is tripped if
the ”Lamp Control” input signal at X9/8 switches to LOW.
This may cause the drive controller to respond if the master
drive is not ready for operation.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  5.12-1

5.12 Wiring of digital frequency input / digital frequency output
Wiring
 Note!
< 50 m
X10 X9
B
B
1 1
A
2 2
A
3 3
4 4
5
GND
5
Z A
6 6 A
Z
7 7
B
Lamp
Enable (EN) 8 8 control (LC) B
9 9 Z
Z
9300VEC019
Fig. 5.12-1 Connection of digital frequency input (X9) / digital frequency output (X10)
X9 Slave drive c Signals with CW rotation
X10 Master drive Cores twisted in pairs

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Signal B A A +5 V GND Z Z LC B
0.14 mm2 0.5 mm2 0.14 mm2 0.5 mm2 0.14 mm2
(AWG 26) (AWG 20) (AWG 26) (AWG 20) (AWG 26)

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Signal B A A +5 V GND Z Z EN B
0.14 mm2 0.5 mm2 0.14 mm2 0.5 mm2 0.14 mm2
(AWG 26) (AWG 20) (AWG 26) (AWG 20) (AWG 26)
Adjustment Evaluation of the input signal at X9

Code Function
Clockwise Track A leads track B by 90 ° (positive value at DFIN-OUT)

rotation
C0427 = 0
Counter-clock Track A lags track B by 90 ° (negative value at DFIN-OUT)
wise rotation
Clockwise Track A transmits the speed
rotation Track B = LOW (positive value at DFIN-OUT)
C0427 = 1
Counter-clock Track A transmits the speed
wise rotation Track B = HIGH (negative value at DFIN-OUT)
Clockwise Track A transmits the speed and direction of rotation (positive
rotation value at DFIN-OUT)
Track B = LOW
C0427 = 2
Counter-clock Track B transmits the speed and direction of rotation (negative
wise rotation value at DFIN-OUT)
Track A = LOW
5.12-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Communication module 5.13
5.13 Communication module
 Note!
For information on wiring and using bus communication
modules please see the corresponding Mounting Instructions
and Manuals.
Possible communication Communication module Type/order number

modules
XT keypad EMZ9371BC
LECOM-A/B (RS232/485) EMF2102IBV001
LECOM-B (RS485) EMF2102IBV002
LECOM-LI (optical fibre) EMF2102IBV003
LON EMF2141IB
INTERBUS EMF2113IB
INTERBUS loop EMF2112IB
PROFIBUS-DP EMF2133IB
DeviceNet/CANopen EMF2175IB
Handling Plug the communication module on the AIF interface or remove it. This is also
possible during operation.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  5.13-1

Commissioning 6
Contents
6 Commissioning
Contents
6.1 Before switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1-1

6.2 Selection of the control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2-1
6.3 Parameter setting with the XT EMZ9371BC keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3-1
6.3.1 Commissioning example in V/f characteristic control mode . . . . . 6.3-1
6.3.2 Commissioning example in vector control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3-5
6.4 Controller inhibit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4-1
6.5 Changing the assignment of the control terminals X5 and X6 . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5-1
6.5.1 Free configuration of digital input signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5-1
6.5.2 Free configuration of digital outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5-3
6.5.3 Free configuration of analog input signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5-4
6.5.4 Free configuration of analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5-6
6.6 Adjusting the motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6-1
6.6.1 Entry of motor data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6-1
6.6.2 Motor selection list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6-4
6.6.3 Motor temperature monitoring with PTC or thermal contact . . . . 6.6-8
6.6.4 Motor temperature monitoring with KTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6-10
6.6.5 Current limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6-12
6.6.6 Automatic collection of motor data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6-13
6.7 Setting the speed feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7-1
6.7.1 Incremental encoder with TTL level at X8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7-2
6.7.2 Incremental encoder with HTL level at X9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7-2
6.8 Operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8-1
6.8.1 V/f characteristic control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8-4
6.8.2 Vector control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8-8
6.9 Switching frequency of the inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9-1
6.10 Acceleration, deceleration, braking, stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10-1
6.10.1 Speed range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10-1
6.10.2 Setting acceleration times and deceleration times in speed mode 6.10-3
6.10.3 Quick stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10-4
6.10.4 Changing the direction of rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10-5
6.11 Optimising the operating behaviour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11-1
6.11.1 Slip compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11-1
6.11.2 Oscillation damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11-3
6.11.3 Boost correction with V/f characteristic control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11-5
6.11.4 Motor magnetising current with vector control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11-9
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  6-1

Commissioning 6
Before switching on 6.1
6.1 Before switching on
 Note!
ƒ Keep to the respective switch-on sequence.
ƒ If faults occur during commissioning, the chapter
”Troubleshooting and fault elimination” will help you.
To prevent injury to persons or damage to material assets check the
following ...
... before connecting the mains voltage:
ƒ Wiring for completeness, short-circuit, and earth fault
ƒ The ”Emergency-Off” function of the complete system
ƒ The motor circuit configuration (star/delta) must be adapted to the
output voltage of the drive controller
ƒ In-phase connection of the motor
ƒ Direction of rotation of the incremental encoder
... the setting of the most important drive parameters before enabling the
controller:
ƒ Is the V/f rated frequency adapted to the motor circuit configuration?
ƒ Are the drive parameters relevant for your application set correctly?
ƒ Is the configuration of the analog and digital inputs and outputs
adapted to the wiring?
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  6.1-1

Commissioning 6
Selection of the control mode 6.2
6.2 Selection of the control mode
Description The control mode of the controller can be selected via the operating mode.
You can select between the following modes:
ƒ V/f characteristic control
ƒ Vector control
Selection of the correct The V/f characteristic control is the classic operating mode for standard
operating mode applications.
When using the vector control you will achieve improved drive features
compared to the V/f characteristic control due to:
ƒ Higher torque via the complete speed range
ƒ Higher speed accuracy and higher concentricity factor
ƒ Higher efficiency
M

MN
nN n
8200vec524
Fig. 6.2-1 Comparison of V/f characteristic control and vector control

c V/f characteristic control
d Vector control
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  6.2-1

6 Commissioning
6.2 Selection of the control mode
Operating modes The following table helps you to find the correct operating mode for
recommended for standard standard applications:
applications
ƒ C0006 = 5: V/f characteristic control with constant Umin boost
ƒ C0006 = 1: vector control
Power range 0.37 ... 90 kW Selection of the operating mode in C0006
Motor cable Motor cable
shielded ≤ 50 m shielded > 50 m
unshielded ≤ 100 m unshielded > 100 m
recommended alternatively recommended alternatively
Single drives
With constant load 1 5 5 -
With extremely alternating 1 5 5 -
loads
With high starting duty 1 5 5 -
Positioning and infeed drives 1 5 5 -
with high dynamics
Rewinder with dancer 1 5 - -
Unwinder with dancer 5 - - -
Pump and fan drives 1) 5 - 5 -
Three-phase AC reluctance 5 - 5 -
motors
Three-phase AC sliding rotor 5 - 5 -
motors
Three-phase AC motors with 5 - 5 -
fixed voltage/frequency
characteristic
Group drives l res = i ⋅ (l 1 + l 2 +  + l i)
(the resulting motor cable
length Ires) is decisive
Identical motors and 1 5 5 -
identical loads
Different motors and/or 5 - 5 -
alternating loads
1) For this application we recommend a quadratic voltage characteristic (C0014 = 1)
6.2-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Commissioning 6
Parameter setting with the XT EMZ9371BC keypad 6.3
Commissioning example in V/f characteristic control mode 6.3.1
6.3 Parameter setting with the XT EMZ9371BC keypad
6.3.1 Commissioning example in V/f characteristic control mode
The example describes how to commission a speed control for the controller
with power-related three-phase asynchronous motor.
Switch-on sequence Note
1. Insert the keypad
2. Ensure that the controller is inhibited after
switching on the mains } 59
X5
28
Terminal X5/28 = LOW
(see chapter ”Commissioning”
misc008
→”controller inhibit”)
3. Ensure that no external error is active Terminal X5/E4 = HIGH
4. Switch on
A The control card is supplied via an external voltage:
Switch on the external DC 24 V supply voltage ON
B The control card is supplied via the internal voltage:
misc002
Switch on the mains. The controller provides the
DC 24 V supply.
5. After approx. 2 s the controller is initialised and the
keypad is in the operating level and displays the dcbBA
current speed (C0051) 0050 00
0.00 Hz
0 %
9371BC004
6. Change to the ”Terminal I/O” menu and configure Use C0002 = 0 to restore the Lenze
the function of the control terminals to adapt them setting
to your application. (see chapter ”Commissioning”
Lenze setting: C0005 = 1000 (basic configuration →”Change assignment of the control
”speed control”) terminal X5 and X6”)
7. For quick commissioning select the menu ”Short The submenu ”Setup V/f” contains the
setup” dcbBA codes that are required for
SHPRG p Menu
Code
Para
4 2 commissioning a standard application.
Quick start The digital inputs are configured in the
A Use  to change to the menu level Lenze setting:
V/f quick
9371BC007 X5/E1: Deactivate CW rotation/quick
B Use     to change to the menu ”Short setup” stop
and then to the submenu ”Setup V/f” X5/E2: Deactivate CCW rotation/quick
stop
C Use  to change to the code level to parameterise X5/E3: Activate fixed setpoint 1 (JOG1)
X5/E4: Set error message (TRIP SET)
S T
U V
z dcbBA
your drive Y Z
SHPRG p Menu
Code
Para
0034 00
y 0
X5/E5: Reset error message (TRIP
AIN1 range
9371BC008 RESET)
(see chapter ”Parameter setting”)
8. Adapt the controller to the mains (C0173)
Lenze setting: 1 (400 V mains voltage)
9. Only for the variants V060, V110, V270, V300 in the See code table
power range of 110 ... 400 kW:
Adapt the brake transistor threshold (C0174)
Lenze setting: 3 (500 V mains voltage, 885 V brake
voltage)
10. Enter the motor data See motor nameplate and chapter
”Commissioning” → ”Adapt motor
data”
A If you use a Lenze motor: The data of the Lenze motors are saved
Select the motor type connected under C0086. under C0086.
B If you do not use a Lenze motor:
Enter the data of the motor nameplate
z Rated motor power (C0081)
– Lenze setting: device-dependent
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  6.3-1

6 Commissioning

z Rated motor speed (C0087)
z Rated motor current (C0088) Enter value for the selected motor
– Lenze setting: device-dependent connection method (star/delta)!
z Rated motor frequency (C0089)
z Rated motor voltage (C0090) Enter value for the selected motor
z Motor cosϕ (C0091)
11. If required, set a base frequency which differs from rçìí
Changes in C0086 and C0089 overwrite
NMMB
the rated motor frequency (C0015) the setting in C0015
Lenze setting: C0015 = C0089 (see chapter ”Commissioning”
→”Operating mode” → ”V/f
rãáå
characteristic control”)
M
M `MMNR Ñ
12. If required, adapt the slip compensation (C0021) Due to changes in C0086, C0087, C0089
Lenze setting: Rated slip in [%] with regard to Nmax the rated slip is recalculated and
in C0011. The value is calculated from the data of automatically entered into C0021
the nameplate and is thus suitable for the majority (see chapter ”Commissioning” →”Slip
of applications. compensation”)
13. For protecting the motor, set the current limit Power range 0.37 ... 90 kW:
values ”Imax current” (C0022, C0023) For dissipating the regenerative energy,
Guide value ≤ 2-fold rated motor current use a brake chopper or feedback
module, if necessary
A In motor mode and generator mode (C0022) Power range 110 ... 400 kW:
For dissipating regenerative energy, use
a brake resistor, if necessary
B Additional limitation in generator mode (C0023) (see chapter ”Commissioning” →
Condition: C0023 < C0022 ”Motor adjustment” → ”Current limit
values”)
14. Set the operating mode ”V/f” (C0006) (see chapter ”Commissioning”
Lenze setting: 5 (V/f characteristic control) →”Operating mode” → ”V/f
15. Set the V/f characteristic (C0014) characteristic control”)
Lenze setting: 0 (linear characteristic)
A Linear characteristic (C0014 = 0) Uout
C0089
100 %
C0090
Umin
0
0 1 n
nN
B Square-law characteristic (C0014 = 1) Uout

C0089 For applications with e. g. pumps or
100 %
C0090 fans
Umin
0
0 1 n
nN
16. If required, set Umin boost (C0016) C0016 = 1 % corresponds to a boost of

Lenze setting: 0 % 1 % of the rated voltage ”Mot voltage”
(C0090)
→”Operating mode” → ”V/f
characteristic control”)
17. Set the switching frequency ”fchop” (C0018) See chapter ”Commissioning” →
Lenze setting: ”Switching frequency of the inverter”
Power range 0.37 ... 90 kW: 6 (8/2 kHz sin)
Power range 110 ... 400 kW: 6 (4/2 kHz sin)
6.3-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Commissioning 6
Commissioning example in V/f characteristic control mode 6.3.1

18. Set your type of the speed feedback system See chapter ”Commissioning” →
”Feedback type” (C0025) ”Setting of speed feedback”
Lenze setting: 1 (no feedback)
A When using a TTL encoder:
Select the encoder used under C0025
B When using a TTL encoder with a number of
increments which cannot be set under C0025:
Set C0025 = 100
Enter the number of increments under C0420
C If required, compensate a voltage drop in the
incremental encoder cable. Use C0421 to adjust the
supply voltage for the TTL encoder.
D When using a HTL encoder:
Set C0025 = 101
19. Set the maximum speed (C0011) `MMNN
xåz
See chapter ”Commissioning” →
Lenze setting: 3000 rpm ”Acceleration, deceleration, braking,
stopping”
`MMNM
MB NMMB
20. Set the acceleration time Tir (C0012) T = t ⋅

C0011
ir ir f − f
Lenze setting: 5.00 s 2 1
(see chapter ”Commissioning” →
”Acceleration, deceleration, braking,
f [H z ]
stopping”)
C 0 0 1 1
f2
21. Set the deceleration time Tif (C0013) T = t ⋅
C0011
if if f − f
Lenze setting: 5.00 s
f1
0
2 1
t ir t if t
T ir T if

stopping”)
22. If required, set the quick stop deceleration ramp See chapter ”Commissioning” →
(C0105) ”Acceleration, deceleration, braking,
Lenze setting: 5.00 s stopping”
23. If required, adapt the fixed setpoints JOG. See code table
A JOG 1 (C0039/1) Activation:
Lenze setting: 1500 rpm X5/E3 = HIGH
B Further fixed setpoints:
JOG 2 (C0039/2) ... JOG 15 (C0039/15)
24. Ensure a powerfail-proof saving of the settings in Code C0003 is the first code in the
one of the four parameter sets (C0003) menu ”Setup V/f”.
Use C0003 = 1 to save the settings in parameter set After switching on the DC 24 V supply
1. or mains connection, parameter set 1 is
automatically activated.
25. Switch on the mains if the external DC 24 V supply
voltage is switched on only.
26. Enable controller Terminal X5/28 = HIGH
} 59
X5
28 (see chapter ”Commissioning”
misc009 →”controller inhibit”)
27. Enter the setpoint Analog setpoint
selection:
-10 ... +10 V via
potentiometer at X6/1
and X6/2
Fixed speed: JOG 1 is parameterised in C0039/1
Activate JOG 1 with
X5/E3 = HIGH
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  6.3-3

6 Commissioning

28. The drive is running now CW rotation:
X5/E1 = HIGH and X5/E2 = LOW
CCW rotation:
X5/E1 = LOW and X5/E2 = HIGH
If the drive does not start, press  in
addition
stopping”)
 Note!
In the menu ”Diagnostic” the most important drive parameters
can be monitored
6.3-4  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Commissioning 6
Commissioning example in vector control mode 6.3.2
6.3.2 Commissioning example in vector control mode
The example describes how to commission a speed control for the controller
with power-related three-phase asynchronous motor.
1. Insert the keypad
2. Ensure that the controller is inhibited after
switching on the mains } 59
X5
28
misc008
→”controller inhibit”)
3. Ensure that no external error is active Terminal X5/E4 = HIGH
4. Switch on
A The control card is supplied via an external voltage:
Switch on the external DC 24 V supply voltage ON
B The control card is supplied via the internal voltage:
misc002
Switch on the mains. The controller provides the
DC 24 V supply.
5. After approx. 2 s the controller is initialised and the
keypad is in the operating level and displays the dcbBA
current speed (C0051) 0050 00
0.00 Hz
0 %
9371BC004
6. Change to the ”Terminal I/O” menu and configure Use C0002 = 0 to restore the Lenze
the function of the control terminals to adapt them setting
to your application. (see chapter ”Commissioning”
Lenze setting: C0005 = 1000 (basic configuration →”Change assignment of the control
”speed control”) terminal X5 and X6”)
7. For quick commissioning select the menu ”Short The submenu ”Setup vector” contains
setup” dcbBA the codes that are required for
SHPRG p Menu
Code
Para
4 2 commissioning a standard application.
Quick start The digital inputs are configured in the
A Use  to change to the menu level Lenze setting:
V/f quick
9371BC007 X5/E1: Deactivate CW rotation/quick
B Use     to change to the menu ”Short setup” stop
and then to the submenu ”Setup vector” X5/E2: Deactivate CCW rotation/quick
stop
C Use  to change to the code level to parameterise X5/E3: Activate fixed setpoint 1 (JOG1)
X5/E4: Set error message (TRIP SET)
S T
U V
z dcbBA
your drive Y Z
SHPRG p Menu
Code
Para
0034 00
y 0
X5/E5: Reset error message (TRIP
AIN1 range
9371BC008 RESET)
8. Adapt the controller to the mains (C0173)
Lenze setting: 1 (400 V mains voltage)
9. Only for the variants V060, V110, V270, V300 in the See code table
power range of 110 ... 400 kW:
Adapt the brake transistor threshold (C0174)
Lenze setting: 3 (500 V mains voltage, 885 V brake
voltage)
10. Enter the motor data See motor nameplate and chapter
”Commissioning” → ”Adapt motor
data”
A If you use a Lenze motor: The data of the Lenze motors are saved
Select the motor type connected under C0086. under C0086.
B If you do not use a Lenze motor:
Enter the data of the motor nameplate
z Rated motor power (C0081)
z Rated motor speed (C0087)
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  6.3-5

6 Commissioning

z Rated motor current (C0088) Enter value for the selected motor
z Rated motor frequency (C0089)
z Rated motor voltage (C0090) Enter value for the selected motor
z Motor cosϕ (C0091)
11. For protecting the motor, set the current limit Power range 0.37 ... 90 kW:
values ”Imax current” (C0022, C0023) For dissipating the regenerative energy,
Guide value ≤ 2-fold rated motor current use a brake chopper or feedback
module, if necessary
A In motor mode and generator mode (C0022) Power range 110 ... 400 kW:
For dissipating regenerative energy, use
a brake resistor, if necessary
B Additional limitation in generator mode (C0023) (see chapter ”Commissioning” →
Condition: C0023 < C0022 ”Motor adjustment” → ”Current limit
values”)
12. If the motor temperature is monitored with a A temperature feedback with KTY has a
thermal sensor KTY: positive effect on the vector control,
Activate the temperature feedback with C0594 since the motor data identification
(fault SD6) considers the temperature influence in
Lenze setting: 3 (switched off) the motor model.
”Motor adjustment”)
13. Start the motor data identification ”ident run” (see chapter ”Commissioning”
(C0148) →”Adjusting the motor”)
A Ensure that the controller inhibit is active
} 59
X5
28
misc008
B Switch on the mains

C Set C0148 = 1
D Enable controller Terminal X5/28 = HIGH
} 59
X5
28 The identification starts:
misc009 z The segment  goes off
z ”WRK run” is displayed
z The motor is energised and
”whistles”
z The motor does not rotate
E If after approx. 1 ... 2 min the segment  is active
again, inhibit the controller } 59
X5
28
The identification is completed. The
misc008
following values have been detected
and entered into the codes:
z Inverter error characteristic
(C1753/xx)
z Rotor resistance ”Mot Rr” (C0082)
z Stator resistance ”Mot Rs” (C0084)
z Leakage inductance ”Mot Lss”
(C0085)
z Stator inductance ”Mot Ls” (C0092)
14. Set the operating mode ”vector ctrl” (C0006) (see chapter ”Commissioning” →
Lenze setting: 5 (V/f characteristic control) ”Operating mode” → ”Vector control”)
15. Set the switching frequency ”fchop” (C0018) See chapter ”Commissioning” →
Lenze setting: ”Switching frequency of the inverter”
Power range 0.37 ... 90 kW: 6 (8/2 kHz sin)
Power range 110 ... 400 kW: 6 (4/2 kHz sin)
16. Set your type of the speed feedback system See chapter ”Commissioning” →
”Feedback type” (C0025) ”Setting of speed feedback”
Lenze setting: 1 (no feedback)
A When using a TTL encoder:
Select the encoder used under C0025
6.3-6  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Commissioning 6
Commissioning example in vector control mode 6.3.2

B When using a TTL encoder with a number of
increments which cannot be set under C0025:
Set C0025 = 100
C If required, compensate a voltage drop in the
incremental encoder cable. Use C0421 to adjust the
supply voltage for the TTL encoder.
D When using a HTL encoder:
Set C0025 = 101
17. Set the maximum speed (C0011) `MMNN
xåz
See chapter ”Commissioning” →
Lenze setting: 3000 rpm ”Acceleration, deceleration, braking,
stopping”
`MMNM
MB NMMB
18. Set the acceleration time Tir (C0012) T = t ⋅

C0011
ir ir f − f
Lenze setting: 5.00 s 2 1
f [H z ]
stopping”)
C 0 0 1 1
f2
19. Set the deceleration time Tif (C0013) T = t ⋅
C0011
if if f − f
Lenze setting: 5.00 s
f1
0
2 1
t ir t if t
T ir T if

stopping”)
20. If required, set the quick stop deceleration ramp See chapter ”Commissioning” →
(C0105) ”Acceleration, deceleration, braking,
Lenze setting: 5.00 s stopping”
21. If required, adapt the fixed setpoints JOG. See code table
A JOG 1 (C0039/1) Activation:
Lenze setting: 1500 rpm X5/E3 = HIGH
B Further fixed setpoints:
JOG 2 (C0039/2) ... JOG 15 (C0039/15)
22. Ensure a powerfail-proof saving of the settings in Code C0003 is the first code in the
one of the four parameter sets (C0003) menu ”Setup V/f”.
Use C0003 = 1 to save the settings in parameter set After switching on the DC 24 V supply
1. or mains connection, parameter set 1 is
automatically activated.
23. Switch on the mains if the external DC 24 V supply
voltage is switched on only.
} 59
X5
28 (see chapter ”Commissioning”
misc009 →”controller inhibit”)
25. Enter the setpoint Analog setpoint
selection:
-10 ... +10 V via
potentiometer at X6/1
and X6/2
Fixed speed: JOG 1 is parameterised in C0039/1
Activate JOG 1 with
X5/E3 = HIGH
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  6.3-7

6 Commissioning

26. The drive is running now CW rotation:
X5/E1 = HIGH and X5/E2 = LOW
CCW rotation:
X5/E1 = LOW and X5/E2 = HIGH
If the drive does not start, press  in
addition
stopping”)
 Note!
In the menu ”Diagnostic” the most important drive parameters
can be monitored
6.3-8  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Commissioning 6
Controller inhibit 6.4
6.4 Controller inhibit
Description If the controller inhibit is active, the power outputs are inhibited.
ƒ The drive idles to standstill.
ƒ Status display of keypad: Pulse inhibit 
ƒ Status display at the controller: The green LED is blinking.
 Danger!
Do not use the function ”Controller inhibit” (DCTRL1-CINH) as
emergency-off. The controller inhibit only inhibits the power
outputs and does not separate the controller from the mains!
The drive could start any time again.
Codes for parameter setting
Code Possible settings IMPORTANT

No. Name Lenze Selection
C0040 Ctrl enable 0 Controller enable  6.4-1
z Controller can only be enabled
if X5/28 = HIGH
0 Ctrl inhibit Controller inhibited
1 Ctrl enable Controller enabled
Activation Via terminal X5/28:

ƒ LOW level at the terminal activates the controller inhibit (not
invertible)
ƒ HIGH level enables the controller again
Via the keyboard of the keypad (condition: C0469 = 1):
ƒ  activates the controller inhibit
ƒ  enables the controller again
Via code C0040:
ƒ C0040 = 0 activates the controller inhibit
ƒ C0040 = 1 enables the controller again
 Note!
ƒ The sources for controller inhibit are AND’ed, i.e. the drive only
starts again if the controller inhibit is deactivated for all signal
sources.
ƒ The restart begins with zero speed, i.e. with the centrifugal
masses still rotating an overcurrent may occur if the flying
restart circuit is not active.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  6.4-1

Commissioning 6
Changing the assignment of the control terminals X5 and X6 6.5
Free configuration of digital input signals 6.5.1
6.5 Changing the assignment of the control terminals X5 and X6
 Danger!
If you select a configuration in C0005, the signal assignment of
the inputs and outputs will be overwritten with the
corresponding basic assignment!
ƒ Adapt the signal assignment to your wiring!
6.5.1 Free configuration of digital input signals
Description ƒ Internal digital signals can be freely linked with external digital signal
sources. It serves to establish a freely configurable control of the drive
controller.
– Digital inputs X5/E1 ... X5/E5
ƒ A signal source can be linked with several targets. Ensure reasonable
linkages for not activating functions that are mutually exclusive (e. g.
linking a digital input with quick stop and DC injection braking at the
same time).

C0114 0 High active HIGH level is Inversion of digital input signals at  6.5-1
active X5, function block DIGIN See System
Manual
1 LOW active LOW level is active (extension)
1 DIGIN1 pol 0 Terminal X5/E1
5 DIGIN6 (ST) pol 0 Terminal X5/ST
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  6.5-1

6 Commissioning
6.5.1 Free configuration of digital input signals
Linking signals The internal digital signal can be linked with an external signal source by
entering the selection figure of the external signal into the configuration
code of the internal digital signal.
Example
ƒ C0787/2 =53 Ösignal source for JOG2 is terminal X5/E3
NSET
DIGIN DCTRL -X5/28 NSET-N
X5 C0780
DIGIN-CINH
28 1 C0046
DIGIN1
E1 DMUX
C0114/1...6 DIGIN2 NSET-JOG*1 0
C0787/1
E2 NSET-JOG *2 JOG1...15
0 DIGIN3 C0787/2 0
NSET-JOG *4
C0787/3
E3 1 DIGIN4 NSET-JOG *8 3 15
1 C0787/4
E4 DIGIN5
DIGIN6
E5
C0443
ST
9300vec105
Fig. 6.5-1 Connecting digital signal JOG2 with terminal X5/E3
 Tip!
ƒ A list with all selection digits is included in the chapter
”Configuration” → ”Selection lists”.
ƒ For signal linkage we recommend the function block editor in
GDC (ESP-GDC2).
Signal level ƒ Terminals (X5/E1 ... X5/E5):

– HIGH = +12 V ... +30 V
– LOW = 0 V ... +3 V
ƒ Response times: 1 ms
Inverting the signal level In C0114 you can define the active signal level (HIGH level active or LOW level
active) for the terminals X5/E1 ... X5/E5.
Example
ƒ C0114/3 =1 ÖLOW level X5/E3 activates JOG2
6.5-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Commissioning 6
Free configuration of digital outputs 6.5.2
6.5.2 Free configuration of digital outputs
Description ƒ The digital outputs X5/A1 ... X5/A4 can be freely linked with internal
digital signals.
ƒ One signal source can be linked with several targets.

C0117  Selection list 2 Configuration of digital inputs  6.5-3
 signals, function block DIGOUT See System
Manual
A change of the basic (extension)
configuration in C0005 changes
the signal assignment!
1 CFG: DIGOUT1 15000 DCTRL-TRIP Terminal X5/A1
2 CFG: DIGOUT2 10650 CMP1-OUT Terminal X5/A2
3 CFG: DIGOUT3 500 DCTRL-RDY Terminal X5/A3
4 CFG: DIGOUT4 5003 MCTRL-MMAX Terminal X5/A4
C0118 0 High active HIGH level is Inversion of digital output signals,
active function block DIGOUT
1 LOW active LOW level is active
1 DIGOUT1 pol 1 Terminal X5/A1
Linking signals The digital outputs can be linked with internal digital signals by entering the
selection figure of the internal signal into corresponding subcode of C0117.
Example
ƒ C0117/2 = 505 Ö signal source for X5/A2 is the status message
”direction of rotation” (DCTRL-CW/CCW)
Signal level ƒ Terminals (X5/A1 ... X5/A4):
– HIGH = +12 V ... +30 V
– LOW = 0 V ... +3 V
ƒ Response times: 1 ms
Inverting the signal level In C0118 you can define the active signal level (HIGH level active or LOW level
active) for the terminals X5/A1 ... X5/A4.
Example
ƒ C0118/2 =1 ÖWith LOW level at X5/A2 the motor rotates in CW
direction (with motor in-phase connection)
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  6.5-3

6 Commissioning
6.5.3 Free configuration of analog input signals
6.5.3 Free configuration of analog input signals
Description ƒ Internal analog signals can be freely linked with external analog signal
sources:
– Analog inputs X3/1, X3/2 and X3/3, X3/4

C0026 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Free control code FCODE 26/1 and  6.5-4
FCODE26/2 See System
Manual
1 FCODE (offset) 0.00 Offset of AIN1 (X6/1, X6/2) (extension)
2 FCODE (offset) 0.00 Offset of AIN2 (X6/3, X6/4)
C0027 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Free control code FCODE 27/1 and
FCODE27/2
1 FCODE (GAIN) 100.0 Gain AIN1 (X6/1, X6/2)
0 z 100 % = gain 1
0 z 100 % = gain 1
C0034 Mst current 0 0 -10 V ... +10 V Voltage / current range for analog  5.9-8
1 4 mA ... 20 mA signals at input X6/1, X6/2  6.5-4
z Observe jumper position of X3
2 -20 mA ... +20 mA
Linking signals The internal input signals can be linked with an external signal source by
entering the selection figure of the external signal into the configuration
code of the internal analog signal.
Example
ƒ C0780 = 50 Ö Signal source for the main setpoint (NSET-N) is terminal
X6/1, X6/2
C0034 AIN1
X6 NSET
1 + + AIN1-OUT NSET-N
C0780
2 + +
AIN1-OFFSET C0046
C0402 C0400
C0010 DMUX
C0404/1 NSET-JOG*1 0
C0787/1
AIN1-GAIN NSET-JOG *2
C0787/2 0
C0403 NSET-JOG *4
C0787/3
NSET-JOG *8 3 15
C0404/2 C0787/4
9300vec106
Fig. 6.5-2 Linking analog signal NSET-N with terminal X6/1, X6/2
 Tip!
GDC (ESP-GDC2).
6.5-4  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Commissioning 6
Free configuration of analog input signals 6.5.3
Adjustment Gain and offset

Setting gain (C0027) and offset (C0026) to adapt the input signal to the
application.
Input range of X6/1, X6/2
Input range C0034 Position of jumper at X3
-10 V ... +10 V C0034 = 0 6 5
4 3
2 1
+4 mA ... +20 mA C0034 = 1 6 5
4 3
-20 mA ... +20 mA C0034 = 2 2 1
 Note!
Different settings in C0034 and of X3 result in a wrong input
signal.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  6.5-5

6 Commissioning
6.5.4 Free configuration of analog outputs
6.5.4 Free configuration of analog outputs
Description ƒ The analog outputs (X6/62, X6/63) can be freely linked with internal
analog process or monitoring signals. The controller outputs a voltage
proportional to the internal signal to the analog outputs.

C0108 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Free control code FCODE108/1  6.5-6
and FCODE108/2 See System
Manual
1 FCODE (GAIN) 100.0 Gain of analog output signal (extension)
0 AOUT1 (X6/62)
z 100 % = gain 1
2 FCODE (GAIN) 100.0 Gain of analog output signal
0 AOUT2 (X6/63)
z 100 % = gain 1
C0109 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Free control code FCODE109/1
and FCODE109/2
1 FCODE (offset) 0.00 Offset of analog output signal
AOUT1 (X6/62)
AOUT2 (X6/63)
Linking signals Analog outputs can be linked with internal analog signals by entering the
selection figure of the internal signal into the code of C0431 (AOUT1, X6/62)
or C0436 (AOUT2, X6/63).
Example
ƒ C0436 = 5006 Ö signal source for X6/63 is the actual motor voltage
 Tip!
GDC (ESP-GDC2).
Adjustment Setting gain (C0108) and offset (C0109)to adapt the output signal to the
application.
With an internal signal of 100 % and a gain 1, a voltage of 10 V is output at
the terminal.
6.5-6  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Commissioning 6
Adjusting the motor 6.6
Entry of motor data 6.6.1
6.6 Adjusting the motor
6.6.1 Entry of motor data
Description The vector control mode requires considerably more motor data than the V/f
characteristic control mode.
On principle all motor data should be entered independent of the operating
mode. This enables the controller to detect further data as e.g. slip
compensation (C0021), maximum torque (C0057), number of motor pole
pairs (C0059) always conclusively and enter them into the corresponding
codes.

C0081 Mot power Æ 0.01 {0.01 kW} 500.00 Rated motor power
 Æ Change of C0086 resets value
to factory setting
z Change of C0081 sets C0086 =
0
C0086 Mot type Æ  Motor selection list Motor type selection  6.6-1
 Æ depending on the controller
used
z Motor selection in C0086 sets
the corresponding parameters
in C0021, C0022, C0081, C0087,
C0088, C0089, C0090, C0091
C0087 Mot speed Æ 50 {1 rpm} 36000 Rated motor speed  6.6-1
 Æ depending on C0086
z Motor selection in C0086 set
the corresponding rated motor
speed in C0087
z Change of C0087 sets
C0086 = 0
C0088 MOT CURRENT Æ 0.5 {0.1 A} 500.0 Rated motor current  6.6-1
 Æ Depending on C0086
z Selection of a motor in C0086
sets the corresponding rated
motor current in C0088
C0086 = 0
C0089 Mot frequency Æ 10 {1 Hz} 5000 Rated motor frequency  6.6-1
frequency in C0089
C0086 = 0
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  6.6-1

6 Commissioning
6.6.1 Entry of motor data

C0090 Mot voltage Æ 0 {1 V} 1000 Rated motor voltage  6.6-1
voltage in C0090
0
C0091 Mot cos phi Æ 0.50 {0.01 } 1.00 Motor cos ϕ  6.6-1
the corresponding motor cos ϕ
in C0091
C0086 = 0
Sequence of the motor data

entry Start entry motor data
no
Does C0086 contain
the motor?
yes
Choose similar motor
in C0086 according to the
criteria circuit configuration
and rated motor power
Operating mode "87 Hz no

delta connection”?
yes
Choose motor in C0086 Enter motor nameplate data:

Enter motor nameplate data:
C0081 = Ö3 x Pr C0081, C0087, C0088, C0089,
C0087 = (Ö3 - 1) n0 + nr C0090, C0091
C0088 = IrD
C0089 = 87 Hz
C0090 = UrD
C0091 = cos j
Entry motor data completed
9300vec096
Fig. 6.6-1 Sequence diagram for motor data entry

PN Rated motor power
n0 Synchronous speed
nN Rated motor speed
INΔ Rated motor current for delta connection
UNΔ Rated motor voltage for delta connection
6.6-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Commissioning 6
Entry of motor data 6.6.1
Lenze motor which is included By selecting the motor in C0086 all required motor data are automatically
in C0086
entered into the following codes.
Code Description Code Description
C0022 Limit current for operation in motor mode C0087 Rated motor speed
C0023 Limit current for operation in generator C0088 Rated motor current
mode
C0081 Rated motor power C0089 Rated motor frequency
C0082 Motor rotor resistance C0090 Rated motor voltage
C0084 Motor stator resistance C0091 Power factor cos ϕ
C0085 Motor leakage inductance C0092 Motor stator inductance
Motor of another 1. Select a similar motor in C0086.

manufacturer or a Lenze
motor which is not included in – Selection criteria: Connection method, rated motor power, rated
C0086 motor frequency
2. Enter the motor data of the motor nameplate or data sheet into C0081,
C0087, C0088, C0089, C0090 and C0091.
Operating mode ”87 Hz delta By changing from star to delta connection and changing the base frequency
connection”
(fbase = 87 Hz), the induction machine (fN = 50 Hz) develops √three times the
power with a frequency of 87 Hz. In the total range the machine runs with
a √3 times higher delta current, which must be provided by the controller.
Example
A motor with the following data is to be connected in delta connection:
ƒ DSM 50 Hz; Δ/Y 230/400 V; 18.5 kW; 62/35 A, 1450 min-1, cos ϕ = 0.88
Sequence Note
1. Enter C0086 = 263 Select a motor in C0086, which has a √3 times
(DXRAXX 180-12-87; 32.4 kW; higher rated motor power with delta connection.
87 Hz)
2. Enter C0087 = 2548 min-1 Consider the slip speed. With a rated motor torque
the slip speed of an asynchronous motor is nearly
constant over the total speed range.
Calculation of the rated motor speed:
C0087 = (3 − 1) ⋅ n 0 + n N
C0087 = (3 − 1) ⋅ 1500 min −1 + 1450 min −1
n0 = synchronous speed
nN = rated motor speed at 50 Hz
3. Enter C0088 = 62 A Rated motor current for delta connection
4. Enter C0090 = 400 V Rated motor voltage for star connection
5. Enter C0089 = 87 Hz Rated motor frequency
6. Enter C0091 = 0.88 Power factor cos ϕ
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  6.6-3

6 Commissioning
6.6.2 Motor selection list
Three-phase asynchronous The following table contains all asynchronous motors, which can be selected
motors
via C0086.
The ”reference list of asynchronous motors” contains the asynchronous
motors, the data of which must be entered manually. ( 6.6-6)
0 1
9300VEC058
Fig. 6.6-2 Nameplate of a Lenze motor
  Lenze type C0081 C0087 C0088 C0089 C0090 Motor type Temperature sensor
PN nN Ir [A] fN [Hz] UN [V]
[kW] [rpm]
9 DSGA56-22-100 SDSGA056-22-100 0.24 2790 0.8 100 390 Asynchronous KTY
inverter - motor
(Star connection)
10 MDSKA56-140 MDSKAXX056-22 0.80 3950 2.4 140
11 MDFKA71-120 MDFKAXX071-22 2.20 3410 6.0 120
12 MDSKA71-140 MDSKAXX071-22 1.70 4050 4.4 140
13 MDFKA80-60 MDFKAXX080-22 2.10 1635 4.8 60
14 MDSKA80-70 MDSKAXX080-22 1.40 2000 3.3 70
390
15 MDFKA80-120 MDFKAXX080-22 3.90 3455 9.1 120
16 MDSKA80-140 MDSKAXX080-22 2.30 4100 5.8 140
17 MDFKA90-60 MDFKAXX090-22 3.80 1680 8.5 60
18 MDSKA90-80 MDSKAXX090-22 2.60 2300 5.5 80
19 MDFKA90-120 MDFKAXX090-22 6.90 3480 15.8 120
20 MDSKA90-140 MDSKAXX090-22 4.10 4110 10.2 140 350
21 MDFKA100-60 MDFKAXX100-22 6.40 1700 13.9 60
22 MDSKA100-80 MDSKAXX100-22 4.00 2340 8.2 80 390
23 MDFKA100-120 MDFKAXX100-22 13.20 3510 28.7 120
24 MDSKA100-140 MDSKAXX100-22 5.20 4150 14.0 140 330 Asynchronous servo
KTY
motor
25 MDFKA112-60 MDFKAXX112-22 11.00 1710 22.5 60
26 MDSKA112-85 MDSKAXX112-22 6.40 2490 13.5 85 390
27 MDFKA112-120 MDFKAXX112-22 20.30 3520 42.5 120
28 MDSKA112-140 MDSKAXX112-22 7.40 4160 19.8 140 320
30 DFQA100-50 MDFQAXX100-22 10.60 1420 26.5 50
31 DFQA100-100 MDFQAXX100-22 20.30 2930 46.9 100
32 DFQA112-28 MDFQAXX112-22 11.50 760 27.2 28
33 DFQA112-58 MDFQAXX112-22 22.70 1670 49.1 58
34 DFQA132-20 MDFQAXX132-32 17.00 555 45.2 20 360
35 DFQA132-42 MDFQAXX132-32 35.40 1200 88.8 42
40 DFQA112-50 MDFQAXX112-22 20.10 1425 43.7 50
41 DFQA112-100 MDFQAXX112-22 38.40 2935 81.9 100
42 DFQA132-36 MDFQAXX132-32 31.10 1035 77.4 36
43 DFQA132-76 MDFQAXX132-32 60.10 2235 144.8 76 340
6.6-4  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Commissioning 6
Motor selection list 6.6.2
[kW] [rpm]
210 DXRAXX071-12-50 DXRAXX071-12 0.25 1410 0.9
211 DXRAXX071-22-50 DXRAXX071-22 0.37 1398 1.2
212 DXRAXX080-12-50 DXRAXX080-12 0.55 1400 1.7
213 DXRAXX080-22-50 DXRAXX080-22 0.75 1410 2.3
214 DXRAXX090-12-50 DXRAXX090-12 1.10 1420 2.7
215 DXRAXX090-32-50 DXRAXX090-32 1.50 1415 3.6
216 DXRAXX100-22-50 DXRAXX100-22 2.20 1425 4.8
Asynchronous
217 DXRAXX100-32-50 DXRAXX100-32 3.00 1415 6.6 50 400 inverter - motor Thermal contact
218 DXRAXX112-12-50 DXRAXX112-12 4.00 1435 8.3 (Star connection)
219 DXRAXX132-12-50 DXRAXX132-12 5.50 1450 11.0

220 DXRAXX132-22-50 DXRAXX132-22 7.50 1450 14.6
221 DXRAXX160-12-50 DXRAXX160-12 11.00 1460 21.0
222 DXRAXX160-22-50 DXRAXX160-22 15.00 1460 27.8
223 DXRAXX180-12-50 DXRAXX180-12 18.50 1470 32.8
224 DXRAXX180-22-50 DXRAXX180-22 22.00 1456 38.8
225 30kW-ASM-50 – 30.00 1470 52.0
226 37kW-ASM-50 – 37.00 1470 66.0
227 45kW-ASM-50 – 45.00 1480 82.0 Asynchronous
50 400 inverter - motor –
228 55kW-ASM-50 – 55.00 1480 93.0 (Star connection)
229 75kW-ASM-50 – 75.00 1480 132.0
230 75kW-ASM-50 – 90.00 1480 132.0
250 DXRAXX071-12-87 DXRAXX071-12 0.43 2525 1.5
251 DXRAXX071-22-87 DXRAXX071-22 0.64 2515 2.0
252 DXRAXX080-12-87 DXRAXX080-12 0.95 2515 2.9
253 DXRAXX080-22-87 DXRAXX080-22 1.3 2525 4.0
254 DXRAXX090-12-87 DXRAXX090-12 2.0 2535 4.7
255 DXRAXX090-32-87 DXRAXX090-32 2.7 2530 6.2
256 DXRAXX100-22-87 DXRAXX100-22 3.9 2535 8.3
Asynchronous
257 DXRAXX100-32-87 DXRAXX100-32 5.35 2530 11.4 87 400 inverter - motor Thermal contact
258 DXRAXX112-12-87 DXRAXX112-12 7.10 2545 14.3 (Delta connection)
259 DXRAXX132-12-87 DXRAXX132-12 9.7 2555 19.1

260 DXRAXX132-22-87 DXRAXX132-22 13.2 2555 25.4
261 DXRAXX160-12-87 DXRAXX160-12 19.3 2565 36.5
262 DXRAXX160-22-87 DXRAXX160-22 26.4 2565 48.4
263 DXRAXX180-12-87 DXRAXX180-12 32.4 2575 57.8
264 DXRAXX180-22-87 DXRAXX180-22 38.7 2560 67.4
265 30kW-ASM-87 – 52.00 2546 90.0
266 37kW-ASM-87 – 64.00 2546 114.0
267 45kW-ASM-87 – 78.00 2563 142.0 Asynchronous
87 400 inverter - motor –
268 55kW-ASM-87 – 95.00 2563 161.0 (Delta connection)
269 75kW-ASM-87 – 130.00 2563 228.0
270 90kW-ASM-87 – 156.00 2590 277.0
410 MDXMAXM-071-12-50 MDXMAXM-071-12 0.25 1400 0.82 50 400
411 MDXMAXM-071-32-50 MDXMAXM-071-32 0.37 1400 1.20 50 400
412 MDXMAXM-080-12-50 MDXMAXM-080-12 0.55 1400 1.60 50 400
413 MDXMAXM-080-32-50 MDXMAXM-080-32 0.75 1380 2.00 50 400
Asynchronous
414 MDXMAXM-090-12-50 MDXMAXM-090-12 1.10 1410 2.60 50 400 inverter - motor Thermal contact
415 MDXMAXM-090-32-50 MDXMAXM-090-32 1.50 1420 3.50 50 400 (Star connection)
416 MDXMAXM-100-12-50 MDXMAXM-100-12 2.20 1400 5.60 50 400

417 MDXMAXM-100-32-50 MDXMAXM-100-32 3.00 1400 7.30 50 400
418 MDXMAXM-112-22-50 MDXMAXM-112-22 4.00 1430 8.50 50 400
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  6.6-5

6 Commissioning
[kW] [rpm]
440 MDXMAXM-071-12-87 MDXMAXM-071-12 0.43 2510 1.40 87 400
441 MDXMAXM-071-32-87 MDXMAXM-071-32 0.64 2510 2.10 87 400
442 MDXMAXM-080-12-87 MDXMAXM-080-12 0.95 2510 2.80 87 400
443 MDXMAXM-080-32-87 MDXMAXM-080-32 1.30 2490 3.50 87 400
444 MDXMAXM-090-12-87 MDXMAXM-090-12 2.00 2520 4.50 87 400
445 MDXMAXM-090-32-87 MDXMAXM-090-32 2.70 2530 6.10 87 400 Asynchronous
inverter - motor Thermal contact
446 MDXMAXM-100-12-87 MDXMAXM-100-12 3.90 2510 9.70 87 400 (Delta connection)
447 MDXMAXM-100-32-87 MDXMAXM-100-32 5.40 2510 12.70 87 400
448 MDXMAXM-112-22-87 MDXMAXM-112-22 7.10 2540 14.80 87 400
449 MDXMAXM-112-32-50 MDXMAXM-112-32 5.50 1440 12.50 50 400
450 MDXMAXM-132-22-50 MDXMAXM-132-22 7.50 1460 16.80 50 400
451 MDXMAXM-132-32-50 MDXMAXM-132-32 9.20 1450 19.50 50 400
Reference list of The motors listed under ”motor nameplate” are not available in
asynchronous motors
Global Drive Control (GDC) and the device software.
1. Enter the corresponding value listed under C0086 into the code C0086.
2. Compare the codes for the motor data with the values in the table.
– If necessary, adapt the values in the controller to the values in the
table.
3. If necessary, optimise the dynamic behaviour of your machine via the
codes C0070 and C0071.
Information on the motor Motor data
nameplate
Field C0086 C0022 C0081 C0084 C0085 C0087 C0088 C0089 C0090 C0091 C0070 C0071 C0075 C0076
C86 Type Imax Pr Rs Lσ nN IN fr Ur cos ϕ Vpn Tnn Vpi Tni
[A] [kW] [Ω] [mH] [rpm] [A] [Hz] [V]
1006 MDXMAxx-071-12 210 1.28 0.25 39.90 157.20 1355 0.85 50 400 0.70 6 300 3.6 2
1007 MDXMAxx-071-12 250 2.25 0.47 39.90 157.20 2475 1.50 87 400 0.66 6 300 2 2
1008 MDXMAxx-071-32 211 1.73 0.37 25.03 122.60 1345 1.15 50 400 0.74 6 300 3.4 2
1009 MDXMAxx-071-32 251 3.00 0.67 25.03 122.60 2470 2.00 87 400 0.70 6 300 2.5 2
1010 MDXMAxx-080-12 212 2.40 0.55 20.69 89.00 1370 1.60 50 400 0.78 6 300 3.2 2
1011 MDXMAxx-080-12 252 3.90 1.00 20.69 89.00 2480 2.60 87 400 0.73 6 300 1.6 2
1012 MDXMAxx-080-32 213 2.85 0.75 11.69 65.20 1390 1.90 50 400 0.80 6 300 3.5 2
1013 MDXMAxx-080-32 253 4.95 1.35 11.69 65.20 2510 3.30 87 400 0.77 6 300 1.9 3
1014 MDXMAxx-090-12 214 3.90 1.10 10.01 40.20 1405 2.60 50 400 0.80 6 300 2.5 2
1015 MDXMAxx-090-12 254 6.75 2.00 10.01 40.20 2520 4.50 87 400 0.77 6 300 2 2
1016 MDXMAxx-090-32 215 5.25 1.50 5.85 28.80 1410 3.50 50 400 0.78 6 300 2 2
1017 MDXMAxx-090-32 255 9.15 2.70 5.85 28.80 2525 6.10 87 400 0.76 6 300 1 2
1018 MDXMAxx-100-12 216 7.20 2.20 2.90 20.00 1425 4.80 50 400 0.80 6 300 1 1.5
1019 MDXMAxx-100-12 256 12.45 3.90 2.90 20.00 2535 8.30 87 400 0.76 6 300 0.8 1.5
1020 MDXMAxx-100-32 217 9.75 3.00 2.10 17.00 1415 6.50 50 400 0.81 6 300 2.5 1.5
1021 MDXMAxx-100-32 257 17.10 5.40 2.10 17.00 2530 11.40 87 400 0.78 6 300 1.4 1.8
1022 MDXMAxx-112-22 218 12.45 4.00 1.50 11.00 1435 8.30 50 400 0.82 6 300 2 2
1023 MDXMAxx-112-22 258 21.45 7.10 1.50 11.00 2545 14.30 87 400 0.83 6 300 1 2
1024 MDXMAxx-132-12 219 16.50 5.50 0.86 13.00 1450 11.00 50 400 0.84 6 300 1.5 2
1025 MDXMAxx-132-12 259 28.65 9.70 0.86 13.00 2555 19.10 87 400 0.83 6 300 1.3 2
1026 MDXMAxx-132-22 220 21.90 7.50 0.80 11.00 1450 14.60 50 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 2
1027 MDXMAxx-132-22 260 38.10 13.20 0.80 11.00 2555 25.40 87 400 0.84 6 300 0.95 1.8
1028 MDXMAxx-160-22 221 31.50 11.00 0.50 7.00 1460 21.00 50 400 0.85 6 300 1.9 2.2
1029 MDXMAxx-160-22 261 54.75 19.30 0.50 7.00 2565 36.50 87 400 0.85 6 300 1 2
1030 MDXMAxx-160-32 222 41.70 15.00 0.40 5.50 1460 27.80 50 400 0.87 6 300 1.7 2.5
1031 MDXMAxx-160-32 262 72.60 26.40 0.40 5.50 2565 48.40 87 400 0.86 6 300 1 1.8
6.6-6  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Commissioning 6
Motor selection list 6.6.2

nameplate
[A] [kW] [Ω] [mH] [rpm] [A] [Hz] [V]
1032 MDXMAxx-180-12 223 49.20 18.50 0.40 4.00 1470 32.80 50 400 0.90 6 300 1.4 1.7
1033 MDXMAxx-180-12 263 86.70 32.40 0.40 4.00 2575 57.80 87 400 0.89 6 300 1 1.7
1034 MDXMAxx-180-22 224 58.20 22.00 0.20 3.80 1456 38.80 50 400 0.90 6 300 1 1.5
1035 MDXMAxx-180-22 264 101.1 38.70 0.20 3.80 2560 67.40 87 400 0.89 6 300 1 1.5
1036 MDXMAXM-63-12 210 0.68 0.12 87.58 610.53 1390 0.45 50 400 0.65 6 300 1.5 10
1037 MDXMAXM-63-12 250 1.17 0.21 87.58 610.53 2500 0.78 87 400 0.65 6 300 1.5 10
1038 MDXMAXM-63-32 210 0.98 0.18 56.90 342.11 1400 0.65 50 400 0.65 6 300 1.5 10
1039 MDXMAXM-63-32 250 1.70 0.31 56.90 342.11 2510 1.13 87 400 0.65 6 300 1.5 10
1040 MDXMAXM-112-32 219 18.75 5.50 0.86 7.20 1440 12.50 50 400 0.78 6 300 1.5 10
1041 MDXMAXM-112-32 259 32.55 9.60 0.86 7.20 2550 21.70 87 400 0.78 6 300 1.5 10
1042 MDXMAXM-132-22 220 25.20 7.50 0.54 4.80 1460 16.80 50 400 0.77 6 300 1.5 10
1043 MDXMAXM-132-22 260 43.80 13.10 0.54 4.80 2570 29.20 87 400 0.77 6 300 1.5 10
1044 MDXMAXM-132-32 221 29.25 9.20 0.46 4.70 1450 19.50 50 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 10
1045 MDXMAXM-132-32 261 50.70 16.00 0.46 4.70 2560 33.80 87 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 10
1046 MDXMAXM-160-22 260 31.50 11.00 1.27 18.97 1466 21.00 50 400 0.86 6 300 1.5 10
1047 MDXMAXM-160-32 260 42.30 15.00 0.87 14.28 1466 28.20 50 400 0.87 6 300 1.5 10
1048 MDXMAXM-180-22 260 54.60 18.50 0.40 4.00 1440 36.40 50 400 0.87 6 300 1.5 10
1049 MDXMAXM-180-32 260 66.15 22.00 0.20 3.80 1465 44.10 50 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 10
1050 MDXMAXM-200-32 260 90.00 30.00 0.17 3.50 1455 60.00 50 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 10
1051 MDXMAXM-225-12 260 108.0 37.00 0.15 2.00 1460 72.00 50 400 0.86 6 300 1.5 10
1052 MDXMAXM-225-22 260 128.25 45.00 0.15 2.00 1475 85.50 50 400 0.84 6 300 1.5 10
1053 MDXMAXM-063-11 210 1.43 0.18 51.00 273.7 2760 0.95 50 400 0.80 6 300 1.5 10
1054 MDXMAXM-063-31 210 1.65 0.25 33.00 93.4 2760 1.10 50 400 0.83 6 300 1.5 10
1055 MDXMAXM-071-11 211 1.50 0.37 22.50 90.2 2840 1.00 50 400 0.78 6 300 1.5 10
1056 MDXMAXM-071-31 212 2.25 0.55 16.90 62.9 2840 1.50 50 400 0.82 6 300 1.5 10
1057 MDXMAXM-080-11 213 2.85 0.75 11.36 47.4 2850 1.90 50 400 0.80 6 300 1.5 10
1058 MDXMAXM-080-31 214 4.20 1.10 6.86 33.4 2810 2.80 50 400 0.82 6 300 1.5 10
1059 MDXMAXM-090-11 215 4.80 1.50 5.10 22.2 2840 3.20 50 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 10
1060 MDXMAXM-090-31 216 7.20 2.20 3.20 14.5 2840 4.80 50 400 0.86 6 300 1.5 10
1061 MDXMAXM-100-31 217 9.30 3.00 1.81 10.7 2850 6.20 50 400 0.88 6 300 1.5 10
1062 MDXMAXM-100-41 218 12.75 4.00 1.45 8.6 2830 8.50 50 400 0.85 6 300 1.5 10
1063 MDXMAXM-112-31 250 18.30 5.50 3.10 17 2890 12.20 50 400 0.83 6 300 1.5 10
1064 MDXMAXM-112-41 250 23.25 7.50 1.96 12 2900 15.50 50 400 0.87 6 300 1.5 10
1065 MDXMAXM-132-21 250 28.05 9.00 1.41 11.292 2925 18.70 50 400 0.89 6 300 1.5 10
1066 MDXMAXM-071-13 210 1.13 0.18 58.93 342 870 0.75 50 400 0.71 6 300 1.5 10
1067 MDXMAXM-071-13 250 1.95 0.31 58.93 342 1610 1.30 87 400 0.71 6 300 1.5 10
1068 MDXMAXM-071-33 210 1.50 0.25 37.90 116.8 920 1.00 50 400 0.63 6 300 1.5 10
1069 MDXMAXM-071-33 250 2.55 0.43 37.90 116.8 1660 1.70 87 400 0.63 6 300 1.5 10
1070 MDXMAXM-080-13 211 2.10 0.37 28.00 112.7 900 1.40 50 400 0.67 6 300 1.5 10
1071 MDXMAXM-080-13 251 3.60 0.64 28.00 112.7 1640 2.40 87 400 0.67 6 300 1.5 10
1072 MDXMAXM-080-33 212 2.85 0.55 16.60 78.6 900 1.90 50 400 0.68 6 300 1.5 10
1073 MDXMAXM-080-33 252 4.95 0.95 16.60 78.6 1640 3.30 87 400 0.68 6 300 1.5 10
1078 MDFMAxx-250-22 224 147.75 55.00 0.04 1.92 1475 98.50 50 400 0.86 6 300 1 2
1079 MDFMAxx-250-22 264 255.90 95.00 0.04 1.92 2585 170.60 87 400 0.86 6 300 1 2
1080 MDEBAXM-063-12 210 0.68 0.12 87.58 610.53 1390 0.45 50 400 0.65 6 300 1.5 10
1081 MDEBAXM-063-12 250 1.17 0.21 87.58 610.53 2500 0.78 87 400 0.65 6 300 1.5 10
1082 MDEBAXM-063-32 210 0.98 0.18 56.90 342.11 1400 0.65 50 400 0.65 6 300 1.5 10
1083 MDEBAXM-063-32 250 1.70 0.31 56.90 342.11 2510 1.13 87 400 0.65 6 300 1.5 10
1084 MDEBAXM-071-12 210 1.35 0.25 39.90 157.20 1390 0.90 50 400 0.64 6 300 3.6 2
1085 MDEBAXM-071-12 250 2.34 0.43 39.90 157.20 2500 1.56 87 400 0.64 6 300 2 2
1086 MDEBAXM-071-32 211 1.95 0.37 25.03 122.60 1380 1.30 50 400 0.64 6 300 3.4 2
1087 MDEBAXM-071-32 251 3.38 0.64 25.03 122.60 2490 2.25 87 400 0.64 6 300 2.5 2
1088 MDEBAXM-080-12 212 2.40 0.55 20.69 89.00 1400 1.60 50 400 0.68 6 300 3.2 2
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  6.6-7

6 Commissioning
6.6.3 Motor temperature monitoring with PTC or thermal contact

nameplate
[A] [kW] [Ω] [mH] [rpm] [A] [Hz] [V]
1089 MDEBAXM-080-12 252 4.16 0.95 20.69 89.00 2510 2.77 87 400 0.68 6 300 1.6 2
1090 MDEBAXM-080-32 213 3.00 0.75 11.69 65.20 1400 2.00 50 400 0.72 6 300 3.5 2
1091 MDEBAXM-080-32 253 5.20 1.30 11.69 65.20 2510 3.46 87 400 0.72 6 300 1.9 3
1092 MDEBAXM-090-12 214 4.05 1.10 6.40 37.00 1420 2.70 50 400 0.77 6 300 2.5 2
1093 MDEBAXM-090-12 254 7.05 2.00 6.40 37.00 2535 4.70 87 400 0.77 6 300 2 2
1094 MDEBAXM-090-32 215 5.40 1.50 4.80 26.00 1415 3.60 50 400 0.77 6 300 2 2
1095 MDEBAXM-090-32 255 9.30 2.70 4.80 26.00 2530 6.20 87 400 0.77 6 300 1 2
1096 MDEBAXM-100-12 216 7.20 2.20 2.90 20.00 1425 4.80 50 400 0.80 6 300 1 1.5
1097 MDEBAXM-100-12 256 12.45 3.90 2.90 20.00 2535 8.30 87 400 0.80 6 300 0.8 1.5
1098 MDEBAXM-100-32 217 9.90 3.00 2.10 17.00 1415 6.60 50 400 0.81 6 300 2.5 1.5
1099 MDEBAXM-100-32 257 17.10 5.35 2.10 17.00 2530 11.40 87 400 0.81 6 300 1.4 1.8
1100 MDEBAXM-112-22 218 12.45 4.00 1.50 11.00 1435 8.30 50 400 0.82 6 300 2 2
1101 MDEBAXM-112-22 258 21.45 7.10 1.50 11.00 2545 14.30 87 400 0.82 6 300 1 2
1102 MDEBAXM-112-32 219 17.85 5.50 2.71 21.40 1425 11.90 50 400 0.84 6 300 1.5 10
1114 MDFMAxx-200-32 224 83.25 30.00 – – 1465 55.50 50 400 0.85 6 300 1 2
1115 MDFMAxx-200-32 264 145.50 52.00 – – 2575 97.00 87 400 0.85 6 300 1 2
6.6.3 Motor temperature monitoring with PTC or thermal contact
Description PTC resistors can be connected via the terminal inputs T1 and T2 according
to DIN 44081 and DIN 44082. The motor temperature is measured and
integrated into the drive monitoring.
A thermal contact (NC contact) can also be connected to T1 and T2. Lenze
three-phase AC motors provide this as default.
When using motors equipped with PTC resistors or thermostats, we
recommend to always activate the PTC input. This prevents the motor from
being destroyed by overheating.
 Stop!
ƒ The motor temperature monitoring may only be connected to
T1, T2 if the cable is terminated with a PTC or thermal contact
(NC contact) on the motor side.
– An ”open” cable acts like an antenna and can cause faults at
the drive controller.
– Input signals at T1, T2 are processed with a delay of 2 s.
ƒ The drive controller can only evaluate a PTC resistor! Do not
connect several PTC resistors in series or in parallel:
– The motor temperature would be measured incorrectly.
– The motors could be destroyed by overheating.
ƒ If you operated several motors on a drive controller, use
thermal contacts (NC contacts) for motor temperature
monitoring and connect these in series.
ƒ To achieve full motor protection, an additional temperature
monitoring with separate evaluation must be installed.
6.6-8  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Commissioning 6
Motor temperature monitoring with PTC or thermal contact 6.6.3

C0585 MONIT OH8 3 0 TRIP Configuration of motor  6.6-8
temperature monitoring See System
2 Warning Manual
z Temperature monitoring via
(extension)
3 Off PTC input (T1, T2)
Activation
 Note!
ƒ In the Lenze setting, the motor temperature monitoring is
switched off!
ƒ If you work with several parameter sets, the monitoring must
be activated separately in each parameter set!
1. Connecting the monitoring circuit of the motor to T1 and T2.
– With 1.6 kΩ < R < 4 kΩ, monitoring is activated.
2. Setting the controller reaction:
– C0585 = 3: Temperature monitoring of the motor is switched off.
– C0585 = 0: TRIP error message (display of keypad: OH8 )
– C0585 = 2: Warning signal (display of keypad: OH8 )
Function test Connect the PTC input with a fixed resistor:
ƒ R > 4 kΩ: The fault message OH8 must be activated.
ƒ R < 1 kΩ: Fault message must not be activated.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  6.6-9

6 Commissioning
6.6.4 Motor temperature monitoring with KTY
6.6.4 Motor temperature monitoring with KTY
Description Via the incremental encoder connection X8 a KTY resistor can be connected
to pin X8/5 and X8/8. The motor temperature is detected and integrated in
the drive monitoring.
The KTY resistor is monitored with regard to interruption and short circuit.
We recommend to always activate the KTY input when using motors which
are equipped with KTY resistors. This serves to prevent the motor from being
destroyed by overheating.
 Stop!
ƒ The controller can only evaluate one KTY resistor! Do not
connect several KTY resistors in series or parallel:
– The motor temperature would be measured incorrectly.
– The motors could be destroyed by overheating.
ƒ If several motors are operated on one controller, use thermal
contacts (NC contacts) connected in series for motor
temperature monitoring.
ƒ To achieve full motor protection, an additional temperature
monitoring with separate evaluation must be installed.

C0121 OH7 limit 150 45 {1 °C} 150 Setting of the operating  6.6-10
temperature for monitoring OH7 See System
Manual
z Only for KTY at X8
(extension)
z Monitoring OH7 is configured
in C0584
temperature monitoring with See System
fixed operating temperature Manual
(extension)
3 Off z Only for KTY at X8
z The operating temperature is
fixed at 150 °C
C0584 MONIT OH7 3 2 Warning Configuration of monitoring  6.6-10
motor temperature with variable See System
operating temperature Manual
(extension)
3 Off z When reaching the
temperature set in C0121 the
warning OH7 is activated
6.6-10  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Commissioning 6
Motor temperature monitoring with KTY 6.6.4

C0594 MONIT SD6 3 0 TRIP Activation of the motor  6.6-10
temperature monitoring with KTY See System
at X8 Manual
(extension)
z Use C0594 = 0 or 2 to activate
monitoring
z In case of a short circuit or
2 Warning
interruption at X8/5 and X8/8
the fault message SD6 is
activated
z Configuration of the response
when exceeding the motor
3 Off temperature
– Fixed operating temperature
in C0583
– Variable operating
temperature in C0584
Activation
 Note!
ƒ In the Lenze setting, the motor temperature monitoring is
switched off!
ƒ If you work with several parameter sets, the monitoring must
be activated separately in each parameter set!
Use C0594 = 0 or C0594 = 2 to activate the motor temperature monitoring
via X8. In addition, the connection is monitored for short circuit and
interruption.
1. Connecting the monitoring circuit of the motor to X8/5 and X8/8.
2. Setting controller reaction to short circuit or interruption of the
connection:
– C0594 = 3: Monitoring is switched off.
– C0594 = 0: TRIP error message (display of keypad: Sd6 )
– C0594 = 2: Warning signal (display of keypad: Sd6 )
Adjustment Monitoring with fixed operating temperature (150 °C)
– C0583 = 0: TRIP error message (display of keypad: OH3 )
Monitoring with variable operating temperature (45 ... 150 °C)
1. Setting the operating temperature in C0121.
– C0584 = 2: Warning signal (display of keypad: OH7 )
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  6.6-11

6 Commissioning
6.6.5 Current limits
6.6.5 Current limits
Description The controllers are provided with a current limit value control which
determines the dynamic behaviour under load. The resulting utilisation is
compared to the current limit value set under C0022 for motor load and
under C0023 for generator load. If the current limit values are exceeded, the
controller changes its dynamic behaviour.
Controller performance when Motor overload during acceleration:

a limit value is reached
The controller extends the acceleration ramp.
Generator overload during deceleration:
The controller extends the deceleration ramp.
With increasing load and constant speed:
ƒ When the current limit of the motor mode is reached:
– The controller reduces the speed up to 0 min-1 .
– The controller cancels the change of the speed if the load falls below
the limit value again.
ƒ When the current limit in the generator mode is reached:
– The controller increases the speed up to the maximum speed
(C0011).
– The controller cancels the change of the speed if the load falls below
the limit value again.
ƒ If a sudden load is built up at the motor shaft (e. g. the drive is blocked),
the overcurrent disconnection can respond (fault message OCx).

C0022 IMAX CURRENT Æ 0 {0.01 A} - Imax limit in motor mode  6.6-12
Æ Depending on C0086
C0023 Imax gen. Æ 0 {0.01 A} - Imax limit in generator mode  6.6-12
6.6-12  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Commissioning 6
Automatic collection of motor data 6.6.6
Adjustment ƒ Set the acceleration and deceleration times so that the drive can follow
the speed profile without reaching Imax of the drive controller.
ƒ A correct current control in generator mode is only possible with an
external brake resistor.
ƒ Drive behaviour with overload in motor or generator mode
(C0054 > C0022 or C0023):
– The drive controller reduces the speed up to 0 min-1.
– The drive controller cancels the change of the speed if the load falls
below the limit value again.
ƒ When operating with a switching frequency > 8 kHz or 4 kHz, C0022
and C0023 must be adapted to the permissible output currents
(Derating).
ƒ Correct current (C0075, C0076) in generator mode is only possible with
connected brake chopper or DC-bus operation with energy exchange.
6.6.6 Automatic collection of motor data
Description The motor data identification serves to detect the required motor data and
influences of the motor cable.
Before executing the identification, you must manually enter the motor
data from the motor nameplate into the corresponding codes.
Vector control (C0006 = 1)
In the vector control mode the motor data identification must be executed
before initial commissioning.
ƒ In case of vector control without temperature feedback, the heating of
the motor in the motor model is not taken into consideration.
ƒ In case of vector control with thermal sensor KTY a motor temperature
of 20 °C in the motor model is considered.
Important: The temperature feedback must be activated (C0594 = 0 or
C0594 = 2) before you execute the motor data identification.
V/f characteristic control (C0006 = 5)
In the Lenze setting, the controllers are defined for a power-adapted motor
with 10 m of motor cable. Therefore the motor data identification is not
essential.
ƒ The identification of the motor data also influences the smooth
running behaviour. When identifying the motor data for this operating
mode, you can optimise the smooth running behaviour at low speeds.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  6.6-13

6 Commissioning

C0084 Mot Rs Æ 0.00 {0.01 mΩ} 100000. Motor stator resistance  6.6-1
 00 Æ Value is determined by motor  6.6-13
parameter identification
(C0148, C0149)
speed in C0087
C0086 = 0
C0086 = 0
frequency in C0089
C0086 = 0
voltage in C0090
0
in C0091
C0086 = 0
C0092 Mot Ls Æ 0.0 {0.1 mH} 6500.0 Motor stator inductance  6.6-1
 Æ Value is evaluated by motor
parameter identification from
C0088, C0089, C0090 and
C0091
Æ Selection of a motor in C0086
sets the corresponding stator
inductance value in C0092
6.6-14  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Commissioning 6

C0148 ident run 0 0 WRK Ready Motor data identification  6.6-13
 stop 1. Inhibit controller, wait until
drive has stopped
2. Enter the correct values of the
motor nameplate into C0087,
C0088, C0089, C0090, C0091
3. Set C0148 = 1, confirm with

4. Enable controller
1 WRK Start identification The identification
run – starts,  goes off. The
motor ”whistles” but does
not rotate!
– lasts approx. 1 ... 2 min
– is completed when  is lit
again
5. Inhibit controller:
C0149 Auto ident 0 0 Id Automatic identification is Automatic motor data  6.6-13
 inactive inactive identification
1. Inhibit controller, wait until
drive has stopped
1 Id active Automatic identification is motor nameplate into C0087,
active C0088, C0089, C0090, C0091
z The identification starts 3. Set C0149 = 1, confirm with
automatically after 
controller enable 4. Enable controller
z After a faulty The identification
identification, the process – starts,  goes off. The
is restarted after TRIP motor ”whistles” but does
RESET or mains switching not rotate!
and subsequent – lasts approx. 1 ... 2 min
controller enable – is completed when  is lit
again
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  6.6-15

6 Commissioning
Adjustment The identification is only executed for the parameter set which is activated
at the moment:
ƒ If you want to identify the motor dat for another parameter set, you
must switch to this parameter set and restart the identification.
 Note!
ƒ During the identification the motor is supplied with current.
The motor does not rotate.
ƒ The load machine can remain to be connected. Existing
holding brakes can be kept in the braking position.
ƒ If the motor is idling, a small phase offset may occur at the
motor shaft.
1. Enter C0087, C0088, C0089, C0090 and C0091 of your motor (see
nameplate):
– It is vital to enter the correct values since these entries influence
important parameters such as slip compensation and no-load
current.
– Enter the values according to the connection method (star or delta)
for the rated motor current (C0088) and rated motor voltage (C0090).
Manual motor data 1. Inhibit the controller. Wait until drive stands still.
identification (C0148)
2. Select C0148 = 1, confirm with .
3. Enable the controller. The identification starts.
– The green LED at the controller is blinking very fast.
– ”WRK run” is displayed at the keypad.
– The rotor resistance is calculated and saved in C0082.
– The motor stator resistance is detected and saved in C0084.
– The motor leakage inductance is measured and saved in C0085.
– The inverter compensation characteristic is calculated from the
measured motor stator resistance and saved in C1751/1 ... C1751/17.
– The motor stator inductance is calculated from the entered data and
saved in C0092.
– The identification takes approx. 1 ... 2 min (dependent on the rated
motor power).
– The identification is completed when the green LED at the controller
is lit (keypad, GDC:  is active).
4. Inhibit the controller.
If the motor data identification is has been completed incorrectly
If the identification is incorrect, the fault ID1 or ID2 is displayed.
ƒ If the motor data identification is incorrect, the process must be
repeated from step 2.
6.6-16  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Commissioning 6
Automatic motor data The automatic motor data identification is suitable for standard and
identification (C0149)
replacement devices which are pre-parameterised in the workshop and
commissioned on site:
ƒ Enter the motor data of the motor nameplate, set C0149 = 1 and save
the settings.
ƒ The motor data identification is started with the first controller enable.
After a successful identification the settings are automatically saved in
the parameter set 1.
1. Inhibit controller (X5/28 = LOW).
2. Switch on the mains.
3. Select a Lenze motor under C0086 or enter motor data of the
nameplate.
4. If required, select C0149 = 1 and confirm with .
5. Enable the controller. The identification starts.
– The green LED at the controller is blinking very fast.
– ”WRK run” is displayed at the keypad.
– The rotor resistance is calculated and saved in C0082.
– The motor stator resistance is detected and saved in C0084.
– The motor leakage inductance is measured and saved in C0085.
– The inverter compensation characteristic is calculated from the
measured motor stator resistance and saved in C1751/1 ... C1751/17.
– The motor stator inductance is calculated from the entered data and
saved in C0092.
– The identification takes approx. 1 ... 2 min (dependent on the rated
motor power).
– The identification is completed when the green LED at the controller
is lit (keypad, GDC:  is active).
– Controller is inhibited.
– If required, select C0149 = 0 and confirm with . The automatic
motor data identification is deactivated.
6. Inhibit the controller.
If the motor data identification is has been completed incorrectly
If the identification is incorrect, the fault ID or ID is displayed.
1. Acknowledge fault with TRIP RESET or switch the mains.
2. Enable the controller. The identification restarts.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  6.6-17

Commissioning 6
Setting the speed feedback 6.7
6.7 Setting the speed feedback
Description For speed monitoring, the feedback signal via incremental encoder can
either be supplied via input X8 or X9.
ƒ At input X8 you can only attach an incremental encoder with
TTL-levels.
ƒ Incremental encoders with HTL-level can only be connected to input
X9.
The incremental encoder signal can be output for slaves at the digital
frequency output X10.
The master frequency input (DFIN) and master frequency output (DFOUT)
are described in the chapter ”Function library”.
 Note!
You can use maximally two of the three interfaces X8, X9, X10 at
the same time. This may lead to the fact that the incremental
encoder input cannot be activated or the master frequency input
or master frequency output does not work.
ƒ This does not apply if the input signal at X8 or X9 is directly
output to master frequency output X10 (C0540 = 4 or 5).
ƒ To deactivate the master frequency input, the internal signal
connection of function block DFIN to the following function
block must be removed. Remove the function block DFIN from
the processing table.

C0025 Feedback type 1 Speed feedback  6.7-1
 1 no feedback No feedback
100 IT (C420) - X8 Input of the Incremental encoder at X8
number of z Incremental encoders with TTL
increments in level can only be connected to
C0420 X8.
number of z Connect incremental encoders
increments in with HTL-level on X9 only
C0420
Number of Incremental encoder at X8
increments: z Incremental encoders with TTL
110 IT512-5V 512 inc level can only be connected to
X8.
111 IT1024-5V 1024 inc
112 IT2048-5V 2048 inc
113 IT4096-5V 4096 inc
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  6.7-1

6 Commissioning
6.7 Setting the speed feedback

C0420 ENCODER 512 1 {1 inc/rev} 8192 Number of increments for  6.7-1
 CONST incremental encoder at X8 or X9
z Connect incremental encoders
with HTL-level on X9 only
C0421 ENC VOLTAGE 5.00 5.00 {0.1 V} 8.00 Supply voltage for the incremental
 encoder at X8
CAUTION! A wrong entry can
destroy the incremental encoder!
On X8, only incremental encoders with TTL level can be operated. Wiring
diagram and pin assignment of X8 are described in chapter ”Wiring of the
basic device” → ”Wiring of the feedback system”.
Activation ƒ C0025 = 100. In addition, you have to set the number of increments in
C0420.
ƒ C0025 = 110, 111, 112 or 113. The number of increments (512, 1024,
2048 or 4096) is automatically set.
Adjustment The incremental encoder obtains its supply voltage from the drive controller.
 Stop!
If the supply voltage is too high, it may destroy the incremental
encoder.
Use C0421 to set the supply voltage VCC (5 V) for the incremental encoder to
compensate, if required, a voltage drop on the incremental encoder cable.
Calculation of the voltage drop
R [Ω] l Length of the incremental encoder cable
ΔU ≈ l [m] ⋅ ⋅ I Inc [A]
[m]
R Resistance of the incremental encoder cable
IInc Current consumption of the incremental
encoder
6.7.2 Incremental encoder with HTL level at X9
On X9, incremental encoders with HTL level can be operated. Wiring diagram
and pin assignment of X9 are described in chapter ”Wiring of the basic
device” → ”Wiring of the feedback system”.
Activation ƒ C0025 = 101. In addition, you have to set the number of increments in
C0420.
Adjustment The incremental encoder must be operated with an external supply voltage.
C0421 has no influence.
ƒ Incremental encoders with HTL level require DC 8 ... 30 V supply
voltage. Please observe the information of the manufacturer.
6.7-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Commissioning 6
Operating mode 6.8
6.8 Operating mode
Description The control mode of the controller can be selected via the operating mode.
You can select between the following modes:
ƒ V/f characteristic control
ƒ Vector control
Selection of the correct The V/f characteristic control is the classic operating mode for standard
operating mode applications.
When using the vector control you will achieve improved drive features
compared to the V/f characteristic control due to:
ƒ Higher torque via the complete speed range
ƒ Higher speed accuracy and higher concentricity factor
ƒ Higher efficiency
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  6.8-1

6 Commissioning
6.8 Operating mode
Speed/ torque characteristics

V/f characteristic control
No feedback With feedback
M M
1 0 1 0
MN MN
-nN nN n -nN nN n
-MN -MN
2 3 2 3
9300vec092 9300vec093
Fig. 6.8-1 Speed/ torque characteristics

 Operation in motor mode (CW rotation)
 Operation in generator mode (CCW rotation)
 Operation in motor mode (CCW rotation)
 Operation in generator mode (CW rotation)
Vector control
without feedback with feedback
M M
1 0 1 0
MN MN
-nN nN n -nN nN n
-MN -MN
2 3 2 3
9300vec095 9300vec094
Fig. 6.8-2 Speed/ torque characteristics

 Operation in motor mode (CW rotation)
 Operation in generator mode (CCW rotation)
 Operation in motor mode (CCW rotation)
 Operation in generator mode (CW rotation)
6.8-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Commissioning 6
Operating mode 6.8
Operating modes The following table helps you to find the correct operating mode for
recommended for standard standard applications:
applications
ƒ C0006 = 5: V/f characteristic control with constant Umin boost
ƒ C0006 = 1: vector control
Power range 0.37 ... 90 kW Selection of the operating mode in C0006
Motor cable Motor cable
shielded ≤ 50 m shielded > 50 m
unshielded ≤ 100 m unshielded > 100 m
recommended alternatively recommended alternatively
Single drives
With constant load 1 5 5 -
With extremely alternating 1 5 5 -
loads
With high starting duty 1 5 5 -
Positioning and infeed drives 1 5 5 -
with high dynamics
Rewinder with dancer 1 5 - -
Unwinder with dancer 5 - - -
Pump and fan drives 1) 5 - 5 -
Three-phase AC reluctance 5 - 5 -
motors
Three-phase AC sliding rotor 5 - 5 -
motors
Three-phase AC motors with 5 - 5 -
fixed voltage/frequency
characteristic
Group drives l res = i ⋅ (l 1 + l 2 +  + l i)
(the resulting motor cable
length Ires) is decisive
Identical motors and 1 5 5 -
identical loads
Different motors and/or 5 - 5 -
alternating loads
1) For this application we recommend a quadratic voltage characteristic (C0014 = 1)
 Note!
Only switch between the operating modes if the controller is
inhibited!
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  6.8-3

6 Commissioning
6.8 Operating mode
6.8.1 V/f characteristic control
Description The output voltage of the controller follows a defined characteristic. At low
output frequencies, the characteristic can be boosted. It can be adapted to
different load profiles.
ƒ Linear characteristic for drives with constant load torque over the
speed.
ƒ Quadratic characteristic for drives with quadratic load torque over the
speed:
– Quadratic V/f characteristics are preferably used in centrifugal pump
and fan drives. However, it must be checked whether your pump or
fan drive can be operated in this operating mode!
– If your pump or fan drive cannot be used for the operation with a
quadratic V/f characteristic, the linear V/f characteristic or vector
control mode must be used.
Uout Uout
C0089 C0089
100 % 100 %
C0090 C0090
Umin
Umin
0 0
0 1 n 0 1 n
nN nN
9300vec085 9300vec086
Fig. 6.8-3 Linear and square-law V/f characteristic

C0006 OP MODE 5 Selection of the operating mode
 for the motor control
1 vector ctrl Vector control In case of the first selection enter  6.8-8
without or with the motor data and identify them
speed feedback with C0148.
5 V/f V/f characteristic Commissioning without  6.8-4
control identification of the motor data is
possible
z Advantage of identification
with C0148: Improved smooth
running at low speeds
C0014 V/f charact. 0 Characteristic in the V/f  8.2-25
characteristic control mode
0 Linear Linear V/f characteristic
1 square Square V/f characteristic
C0015 Rated freq 50 10 {1 Hz} 5000 V/f-rated frequency  8.2-25
In C0015 you can set a base
frequency which differs from the
rated motor frequency (C0089)
z Lenze setting: C0015 = C0089
z Changing C0086 or C0089
overwrites the value in C0015
6.8-4  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Commissioning 6
Operating mode 6.8
V/f characteristic control 6.8.1

C0016 Umin boost 0.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 Umin boost (FCODE)  6.8-4
z C0016 = 1 % corresponds to a
boost of 1 % of the rated motor
voltage (C0090)
z Code is freely configurable
C0021 Slipcomp Æ -20.00 {0.01 %} 20.00 Slip compensation  6.11-1
Æ Change of C0086, C0087 or  8.2-25
C0089 sets C0021 to the  8.2-48
calculated rated slip of the
motor
z When changing over to the
vector control mode, C0021 is
set to 0
voltage in C0090
0
Adjustment 1. Select ”V/f characteristic control” mode (C0006 = 5, factory

adjustment).
2. Select V/f characteristic (C0014) if necessary
3. Enter the data of the motor nameplate.
4. If required, you can set a base frequency in C0015 which differs from
the rated motor frequency (C0089).
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  6.8-5

6 Commissioning
6.8 Operating mode
Set Umin boost Load-independent boost of the motor voltage for output frequencies below
the V/f rated frequency. This serves to optimise the torque behaviour.
C0016 must be adapted to the asynchronous motor used. Otherwise the
motor may be destroyed by overtemperature or the controller may be
operated with overcurrent:
1. Operate the motor in idle state at 5 ... 10 % of the rated speed (nN):
2. Increase Vmin until you reach the following motor current:
A Motor in short-time operation up to 0.5 ¡ nN:
– For self-ventilated motors: Imotor ≈ IN motor
– For forced ventilated motors: Imotor ≈ IN motor
B Motor in continuous operation up to 0.5 ¡ nN:
– For self-ventilated motors: Imotor ≈ 0.8 ¡ IN motor
– For forced ventilated motors: Imotor ≈ IN motor
 Note!
Observe for all adjusting processes the thermal behaviour of the
connected asynchronous motor at low speeds:
ƒ Usually, standard asynchronous motors with insulation class B
can be driven for a short time with its rated current in the
speed range up to 0.5 ¡ nN.
ƒ Contact the motor manufacturer for getting the exact setting
values for the max. permissible motor current of
self-ventilated motors in the lower speed range.
Uout Uout
C0089 C0089
100 % 100 %
C0090 C0090
Umin
Umin
0 0
0 1 n 0 1 n
nN nN
9300vec085 9300vec086
Fig. 6.8-4 Umin boost at linear and square-law V/f characteristic
6.8-6  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Commissioning 6
Operating mode 6.8
V/f characteristic control 6.8.1
Optimising V/f characteristic In general the V/f characteristic control can be operated without any further
control measures. The V/f characteristic control must only be optimised in case of
the following drive behaviour:
Drive behaviour Remedy
Does not rotate concentrically at low Executing motor identification
speeds, especially when operating
with long motor cables
Problems in case of high starting Adjusting the voltage increase (C0016).
duty (high mass inertia), in extreme z Set C0016 so that with an enabled controller and
cases, the error message OC1 occurs 5 ... 10 % of the rated speed an approx.
0.8-fold ... single rated motor current flows
z  6.8-6
The set voltage increase (C0016) Adapting the voltage increase with boost correction
does not result in the desired current ( 6.11-5)
flow (controller has problems at high
starting duty, error message OC1
during acceleration).
Drive does not follow the speed z Increasing acceleration / deceleration time
setpoint. z Consider sufficient magnetising time of the motor.
Reason: The current controller the magnetising time amounts to 0.1 ... 2 s
intervenes in the rated field depending on the motor power
frequency to limit the controller z Increase permissible maximum current (C0022,
output current to the maximum C0023)
current (C0022, C0023)
For operation without speed z Increase slip compensation (C0021). Important:
feedback (C0025 = 1): unstable drive due to overcompensation!
Lack of speed stability at high load z In case of cyclic load impulses (e.g. centrifugal pump)
(setpoint and motor speed are not a smoother motor characteristic can be achieved by
proportional anymore) smaller values in C0021 (maybe negative values)
Note: The slip compensation is only active for operation
without speed feedback.
Error messages OC1 or OC3 with z Increase gain of the Imax controller (C0075)
short acceleration times (C0012) z Reduce integral-action time of the Imax controller
compared with the load (controller (C0076)
cannot follow the dynamic z Increase acceleration time (C0012)
processes)
Mechanical resonances at certain The function block NLIM1 serves to suppress those
speeds speed ranges in which resonances occur (see chapter
”Function library”).
Speed oscillations in no-load The oscillation damping minimises speed oscillations
operation at speeds > 1/3 rated (see ”Optimising operational performance” in chapter
speed ”Commissioning”)
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  6.8-7

6 Commissioning
6.8 Operating mode
6.8.2 Vector control
Description Compared to the V/f characteristic control, the vector control serves to
achieve a considerably higher torque and lower current consumption in idle
state.
 Note!
ƒ The connected motor may be maximally two power classes
smaller than the motor assigned to the drive controller.
ƒ The motor data identification is essential.

possible
Æ Change of C0086, C0087 or  8.2-25
C0089 sets C0021 to the  8.2-48
motor
set to 0
C0075 Vp curr CTRL 0.20 0.00 {0.01 } 0.99 Gain of current controller  8.2-25
z Vector control: gain of current  8.2-48
controller
z V/f characteristic control:
maximum current controller
C0076 Tn curr CTRL 10.0 0.1 {0.1 ms} 2000.0 Integral-action time of current  8.2-25
controller  8.2-48
z Vector control: integral-action
time of current controller
z C0076 = 2000 ms: current
controller is switched off
C0077 Ti field CTRL 4.0 0.3 {0.1 ms} 6000.0 Integral-action time of field
controller
z Only active in case of vector
control with feedback
to factory setting
0
6.8-8  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Commissioning 6
Operating mode 6.8
Vector control 6.8.2

speed in C0087
C0086 = 0
C0086 = 0
frequency in C0089
C0086 = 0
voltage in C0090
0
in C0091
C0086 = 0
C0088, C0089, C0090 and
C0091
drive has stopped
C0088, C0089, C0090, C0091

not rotate!
again
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  6.8-9

6 Commissioning
6.8 Operating mode
Set vector control C0006 = 1 set the vector control mode.
 Note!
When setting the vector control mode, the slip compensation
(C0021) is automatically set to 0.0 %.
ƒ When you switch back to the V/f characteristic control mode,
the slip compensation must be re-adapted.
Prepare the motor data The motor data of the motor nameplate must be entered:
identification
ƒ Rated motor speed (C0087)
ƒ Rated motor current (C0088)
ƒ Rated motor frequency (C0089)
ƒ Rated motor voltage (C0090)
ƒ Motor cos ϕ (C0091)
Executing the motor data Execute the motor data identification. ( 6.6-13)
identification
6.8-10  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Commissioning 6
Operating mode 6.8
Vector control 6.8.2
Optimising vector control In general the vector control can be operated without any further measures.
The vector control must only be optimised in case of the following drive
behaviour:
Drive behaviour Remedy
Operation without feedback: 1. Optimise setpoint for the motor magnetising current.
z The current consumption in idle ( 6.11-9)
state differs widely from the 2. Stator inductance (C0092) must be adapted after
rated magnetising current (ImR ≈ motor parameter identification.
IN × sin ϕ) . Calculate sin ϕ from The calculation of the stator inductance by the motor
the cos ϕ of the motor nameplate. data identification is based on the motor data
z The drive has an uneven starting entered before and does not consider the physical
performance leakage of the motor and the inductive reactance of
the motor cable.
+15 %
92 C00
C00 92
0
-15 %
0,37 22 90 400 PN [kW]
9300vec040
Tendency of the correction of C0092

PN: rated motor power
Lack of speed stability at high load Use C0021 (slip compensation) to change the influence
(setpoint and motor speed are not of the rotor resistance (C0082) proportionally:
proportional anymore) z Reduce the value in C0021 at an increasing speed
(negative values)
z Increase the value in C0021 at a decreasing speed
Note: If you activate the vector control (C0006 = 1),
C0021 is automatically set to 0 %.
Unstable control at higher speeds z Reduce the gain of the speed controller (C0070) (if
required, speed-dependent adaptation via function
block CURVE1 and MCTRL-VP-ADAPT)
z Control value in C0092 by comparing the current
consumption in no-load operation with the rated
magnetising current (ImR ≈ IN × sin ϕ).
z Optimise oscillation damping (C0234 ... C0236)
Unstable control at higher speeds z Reduce gain of the Imax controller (C0075) or reduce
and high torque at high power gain and influence of the oscillation damping (at a
(> 55 kW) power of 55 ... 90 kW).
z For operation with feedback, deactivate oscillation
damping with C0234 = 0.
Unstable control in field weakening z Reduce integral-action time of the field controller via
range for operation with speed C0077
feedback z Increase gain of the Imax controller (C0075)
Error messages OC1 or OC3 with z Increase gain of the Imax controller (C0075)
short acceleration times (C0012) z Reduce integral-action time of the Imax controller
compared with the load (controller (C0076)
cannot follow the dynamic z Increase acceleration time (C0012)
processes).
Mechanical resonances at certain The function block NLIM1 serves to suppress those
speeds speed ranges in which resonances occur (see chapter
”Function library”).
Speed oscillations in no-load The oscillation damping minimises speed oscillations
operation at speeds > 1/3 rated (see ”Optimising operational performance” in chapter
speed ”Commissioning”)
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  6.8-11

Commissioning 6
Switching frequency of the inverter 6.9
6.9 Switching frequency of the inverter
Description The switching frequency of the inverter influences the smooth running
behaviour, the power loss in the controller and the noise generation in the
connected motor. The Lenze setting is the optimum value for standard
applications. General rule:
The lower the switching frequency the
ƒ lower the power loss.
ƒ higher the noise generation.
ƒ better the concentricity factor.
You can select between two switching frequency modes:
Code sine-wave modulated (sin) flat top modulated (f_top)
C0018 0, 1, 4, 5, 6 2, 3
 Note!
ƒ In the flat top modulation, the concentricity factor at low
speeds is lower than in the sine-wave modulation. For most
standard applications a sine-wave modulated switching
frequency is optimal.
ƒ The maximum output frequency of the controller depends on
the selected switching frequency (see C0018).
ƒ When C0018 = 0 and C0018 = 6, the switching frequency is
automatically changed over depending on the output current
of the controller.
ƒ Please note that for operation with high switching frequencies
the output current must be reduced to prevent the controller
from being heated inadmissibly (derating).
ƒ Adapt the current limit values (C0022 and C0023) so that the
currents listed in the technical data are not exceeded.
In addition you can set to change over to a lower switching frequency when
the heatsink temperature reaches an adjustable limit value. This serves to
prevent the drive from being inhibited by the error ”overtemperature” and
the motor coasts without torque.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  6.9-1

6 Commissioning
6.9 Switching frequency of the inverter

C0018 fchop 6 Switching frequency of the  6.9-1
0 auto chop automatic inverter
change-over of z General rule: the lower the
the switching switching frequency the
frequency – lower the power loss
between – higher the noise generation
16/8/2 kHz – better the concentricity
1 2 kHz sin optimised smooth factor
running – Observe derating
information at high
2 4 kHz f_top power-optimised switching frequencies
3 8 kHz f_top power-optimised z The max. output frequency
4 8 kHz sin noise optimised (fout) amounts to:
5 16 kHz sin noise optimised – fchop = 16 kHz ⇒fout = 600 Hz
– fchop = 8 kHz ⇒fout = 300 Hz
6 auto 8/2 kHz noise / – fchop = 4 kHz ⇒fout = 150 Hz
power-optimised
with automatic
change-over to
low switching
frequency
C0144 OH switch 1 0 Switch off Switch-over is not Temperature-dependent
 active switching frequency reduction
z If the heatsink temperature set
1 Switch on Switch-over is in C0122 is reached (warning
active OH4), the controller switches to
2 kHz
Function of automatic C0144 = 0 (no temperature-dependent switching frequency reduction)

switching frequency
reduction If the maximum permissible heatsink temperature (ϑmax ) is exceeded when
operating with automatic switching frequency reduction, the inverter is
inhibited, TRIP ”OH” (overtemperature) is set and the motor coasts without
torque.
C0144 = 1 (temperature-dependent switching frequency reduction is
active):
ƒ If the heatsink temperature set in C0122 (overtemperature OH4) is
reached when operating with automatic switching frequency
reduction, the controller automatically reduces the switching
frequency to 2 kHz, thus keeping the operation running.
ƒ After the heatsink has cooled down, the controller automatically
switches to the set switching frequency again.
6.9-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Commissioning 6
Acceleration, deceleration, braking, stopping 6.10
Speed range 6.10.1
6.10 Acceleration, deceleration, braking, stopping
6.10.1 Speed range
Description The speed range required for the application is set in the codes C0010 and
C0011:
ƒ The minimum speed (C0010) corresponds to a speed setpoint selection
of 0 %.
ƒ The minimum speed (C0011) corresponds to a speed setpoint selection
of 100 %.
n
C0011
C0010
0% 100 %
9300vec097
Fig. 6.10-1 Relation between setpoint and minimum and maximum output frequency

C0010 Nmin 0 0 {1 rpm} 36000 z Reference value Minimum  6.10-1
for the absolute speed
and relative
setpoint selection
for the
acceleration and
deceleration
times
z C0059 must be
set correctly
z Set C0010 <
C0011
C0011 Nmax 3000 0 {1 rpm} 36000 z C0010 is only Maximum
effective in case speed
of analog setpoint
selection via AIN1
Important: For
parameter setting
via interface, major
changes in one step
should only be made
when the controller
is inhibited.
C0010 Features of ”minimum speed” (nmin):

ƒ C0010 is approached via the acceleration ramp.
ƒ C0010 is only effective with analog setpoint selection via AIN1
(terminal X6/1 and X6/2).
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  6.10-1

6 Commissioning
6.10.1 Speed range
C0011 Features of ”maximum output frequency” (nmax):

ƒ When selecting fixed setpoints (JOG), C0011 acts as limitation.
ƒ C0011 is an internal scaling variable! Therefore major changes may
only be carried out when the controller is inhibited!
 Stop!
Set 0011 so that the maximum permissible motor speed is not
exceeded.
Otherwise the motor will be destroyed.
Setting tips The internal speed limits must be observed (p = number of motor pole pairs):
ƒ Switching frequency 16 kHz: nmax = 36000/p min-1
ƒ Switching frequency 8 kHz: nmax = 36000/2p min-1
ƒ Switching frequency 2/4 kHz: nmax = 36000/4p min-1
6.10-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Commissioning 6
Speed range 6.10.2
6.10.2 Setting acceleration times and deceleration times in speed mode
Description The acceleration and deceleration times determine the controller response
time after a setpoint change.

C0012 TIR (ACC) 5.00 0.00 {0.01 s} 9999.90 Acceleration time Tir of the main  6.10-3
setpoint
z Refers to speed change
0 ... C0011
C0013 TIF (DEC) 5.00 0.00 {0.01 s} 9999.90 Deceleration time Tif of the main
setpoint
0 ... C0011
Adjustment ƒ The acceleration and deceleration times refer to a speed change from
0 min-1 to the max. speed set in C0011.
ƒ Calculate the times Tir and Tif, which you can set under C0012 and
C0013.
n [min-1]
C0011
n2
n1
0
t
tir tif
Tir Tif
9300vec098
Fig. 6.10-2 Acceleration and deceleration times
T ir = t ir ⋅ nC0011 tir and tif are the desired times for the change
2 − n1 between n1 and n2
T if = t if ⋅ nC0011
2 − n1
 Note!
If the acceleration and deceleration times are set too short, and
under unfavourable operating conditions, the controller can be
switched off with TRIP OC1 or OC3. In these cases, the
acceleration and deceleration times must be set so that the drive
can follow the speed profile without Imax reaching a drive
system.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  6.10-3

6 Commissioning
6.10.3 Quick stop
6.10.3 Quick stop
Description Quick stop brakes the drive to standstill with the deceleration time set in
C0105.
ƒ DC-injection braking (GSB) has priority over quick stop.

C0105 QSP Tif 5.00 0.00 {0.01 s} 999.90 Quick stop deceleration time  8.2-25
z The deceleration time refers to  8.2-48
a speed variation of C0011 ... 0
Activation Via digital signal:

ƒ MCTRL-QSP = HIGH.
ƒ Activating signal DCTRL-QSP. The signal can be activated via 3 OR’d
inputs:
– Control word CAN-CTRL.B3 from CAN-IN1
– Control word AIF-CTRL.B 3 from AIF-IN
– Control word C0135.B3
Via keyboard of the keypad:
For this the key must be assigned with the quick stop function (C0469 = 2):
–  activates quick stop
–  restarts the drive
6.10-4  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Commissioning 6
Changing the direction of rotation 6.10.4
6.10.4 Changing the direction of rotation
Description In the basic configurations (C0005) the direction of rotation of the motor is
reversed in a fail-safe way via the X5/E1 and X5/E2 and the function block
R/L/Q. Thus, only the main setpoint is changed.
The reversing time depends on the ramp times set for the main setpoint or
quick stop.
When the direction of rotation is changed, the drive brakes along the
deceleration ramp (C0013) and accelerates along the acceleration ramp
(C0012) into the other direction of rotation.
Direction of rotation with in-phase connection:
Direction of Signal level at Notes
rotation
X5/E1 X5/E2
CCW rotation LOW HIGH
CW rotation HIGH LOW
Quick stop LOW LOW
Unchanged HIGH HIGH z During operation: The direction of
rotation results from the signal
which was active first.
z At mains connection: The
controller activates quick stop
(QSP).
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  6.10-5

Commissioning 6
Optimising the operating behaviour 6.11
Slip compensation 6.11.1
6.11 Optimising the operating behaviour
6.11.1 Slip compensation
Description The speed of an asynchronous machine decreases when being loaded. This
load-dependent speed drop is called slip. By setting C0021 the slip can be
partly compensated.
In the V/f characteristic control mode the slip compensation is only active at
operation without feedback (C0025 = 1).

Æ Change of C0086, C0087 or  8.2-25
C0089 sets C0021 to the  8.2-48
motor
set to 0
C0078 Tn slip CTRL 100 1 {1 ms} 6000 Integral-action time of slip  8.2-25
controller
z Filter time for slip
compensation (C0021)
z Only active with V/f
characteristic control
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  6.11-1

6 Commissioning
6.11.1 Slip compensation
Adjustment V/f characteristic control

The slip compensation (C0021) is automatically calculated from the rated
motor speed (C0087) and the rated motor frequency (C0089). The entered
slip constant [%] is the rated slip of the motor in [%] relating to the
synchronous speed of the motor.
ƒ Calculating the slip compensation and entering it into C0021:
n rsyn − n r E Slip constant (C0021) [%]

s= n rsyn ⋅ 100 % nrsyn Synchronous motor speed [min-1]
f r ⋅ 60 nr Rated motor speed according to

n rsyn = p motor nameplate [min-1]
fr Rated motor frequency according to
motor nameplate [Hz]
p Number of motor pole pairs
(1, 2, 3, ...)
ƒ If required, the slip compensation can be adapted manually:

– If C0021 is set too high, the drive may get unstable.
– With cyclic load impulses (e. g. centrifugal pump) a smooth motor
characteristic is achieved by smaller values in C0021 (possibly
negative values)
– Parameterise C0078 (filter time for the slip compensation) if you
want to change the motor response time to load changes
(dynamic ↔ slow).
ƒ The actual speed is output as an analog signal (in [%] of nmax (C0011))
to MCTRL-NACT.
 Note!
When operating synchronous or reluctance motors, C0021 must
be set to 0.
Vector control
Use C0021 to change the influence of the rotor resistance (C0082)
proportionally:
ƒ Reduce the value in C0021 at an increasing speed (negative values)
ƒ Increase the value in C0021 at a decreasing speed
 Note!
6.11-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Commissioning 6
Oscillation damping 6.11.2
6.11.2 Oscillation damping
Description Suppressing no-load oscillations in case of:

ƒ Drives with different rated power of controller and motor, e. g. when
operating with high switching frequency and the power derating
involved.
ƒ Operation of higher-pole motors.
ƒ Operation of three-phase AC drives > 10 kW.
Compensation of resonances in the drive kit:
ƒ Certain asynchronous motors may show this behaviour above 1/3 of
the rated speed (1/3 ⋅ nn). This may result in an unstable operation
(current and speed variations).

C0234 damp value 20 -100 {1 %} 100 Influence of the oscillation  8.2-25
damping, function block MCTRL  8.2-48
z Minimising a tendency to
oscillation of the drive
z Influences the tendency to
z When C0025 >1 and C0006 = 1,
C0234 is set to 0
C0235 damping 5 1 {1 ms} 600 Filter time of the oscillation  8.2-25
z Filter time for the internal
signal for oscillation damping
C0236 damp limit 0.2 0.0 {0.1 Hz} 20.0 Limit value of oscillation damping,
function block MCTRL
z Limit value for the internal
signal of oscillation damping
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  6.11-3

6 Commissioning
6.11.2 Oscillation damping
Adjustment The Lenze setting is designed for power-adapted motors.

Usually, the speed oscillations can be reduced by changing the Lenze setting
of the codes C0234 oder C0236 by the factor 2 ... 5.
1. Approach the range with speed oscillations.
2. Change the influence of the oscillation damping in C0234 (generally,
increase it).
3. Increase the limitation of the oscillation damping in C0236.
4. Change filter time in C0235 in the range of 1 ... 20 ms, if necessary.
ƒ These can be indicators for smooth running:
– Constant motor current characteristic
– Reduction of the mechanical oscillations in the bearing seat
 Note!
Restricted effect with vector control
ƒ The oscillation damping has no influence on the drive
behaviour at low tendency to oscillation of the speed
controller.
ƒ Especially for drives > 55 kW with a tendency to oscillation it
may be necessary to deactivate the oscillation damping
(C0234 = 0 %).
ƒ For operation with feedback the oscillation damping has no
influence.
6.11-4  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Commissioning 6
Boost correction with V/f characteristic control 6.11.3
6.11.3 Boost correction with V/f characteristic control
Description In the V/f characteristic control mode (C0006 = 5), a constant voltage boost
(in [%] von C0090) can be preset in code C0016 at low speeds or motor
standstill.
If due to the setting in C0016 no current or a nonuniform current flows, the
voltage boost can be further increased via the boost correction to inject a
sufficiently high and uniform current into the motor.
If the voltage boost is insufficient, the following drive behaviour occurs:
ƒ The required torque is not achieved at standstill.
ƒ When the load is accelerated from standstill, the current overshoots as
the motor had not been magnetised sufficiently before. OC1 can trip.
 Note!
If the motor magnetising current is too low, Lenze recommends
to operate the controller with sine-wave modulated switching
frequency (C0018 = 0, 1, 4, 5 oder 6) only.

C0080 Vp field CTRL 0.00 0.00 {0.01 } 0.99 Influence on the motor  6.6-1
magnetising current set in C0095  6.11-5
z Not effective when C0006 = 1
and C0025 > 1
z Sphere of influence is effective
from 0 Hz to the frequency set
in C1583
C0095 Mot Io Æ 0.00 {0.01 A} 1000.00 Motor magnetising current  6.6-1
 Æ depending on C0086, C0088  6.11-5
and C0091
z Change of C0086, C0088 and
C0091 sets C0095 to the Lenze
setting
C0086 = 0
C1583 fset high 100.0 0.00 {0.01 %} 199.99 Adaptation of the motor  6.11-5
0 magnetising current set in C0095
(with V/f characteristic control:
influence limit of the boost
correction; with vector control:
influence limit of the field
precontrol)
z The output frequency is set up
to which the motor
magnetising current set in
C0095 is to have an effect.
z C1583 = 100 % ≙ half the
rated motor frequency in
C0089
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  6.11-5

6 Commissioning
Adjustment
 Stop!
A longer operation of the motor in standstill may destroy the
motor by overheating, especially in case of small motors.
ƒ Connect the thermal contact (NC contact), PTC, or KTY of the
motor and activate the motor temperature monitoring of the
controller.
ƒ Operate self-ventilated motors with a blower, if required.
Setting voltage boost

1. Set a voltage boost in C0016. ( 6.8-6)
– When C0016 = 0 % no boost is possible.
2. For magnetising the motor, consider enough time from controller
enable to the start of the speed ramp-function generator.
– The bigger the motor the longer the time for magnetisation. A motor
with the power of 90 kW requires up to 2 s.
– If the desired continuous current does not flow, correct the boost
using the codes C0080, C0095 and C1583.
Carry out a boost correction
3. If required, set the desired motor magnetising current (standstill
current) in C0095 which is to be achieved by the boost correction.
– The value in the Lenze setting has been evaluated by the controller
from the entered motor data of the motor nameplate.
– When C0095 = 0, the boost correction is deactivated.
4. Set the influence of the boost correction in C0080.
6.11-6  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Commissioning 6
Boost correction with V/f characteristic control 6.11.3
0
6 × Umin
3 × Umin
0
C0080
0 0.5 0.99
9300vec141
Fig. 6.11-1 Influence of boost correction

 Maximum height of the correction value when the field
frequency is 0
C0080 = 0.99 Maximum correction value. The voltage boost Umin achieved by
C0016 is increased sixfold.
C0080 = 0 No correction value. The voltage boost Umin achieved by C0016 is
not increased, the boost correction is deactivated.
Increase the value in C0080 step by step and observe the effect on the
current injection with an oscilloscope, if required.
– If the boost correction is to high can cause current overshoots when
the current injection starts.
5. Set the adaptation of the boost correction in C1583.
0
100 %
0
0 0.5 fout fout
9300vec140
Fig. 6.11-2 Adaptation of boost correction

 Adaptation of boost correction
Characteristic when C1583 = 100 % (Lenze setting). The output
frequency corresponds to half the rated motor frequency in C0089.
Characteristic when C1583 = 199.99 %. The output frequency
corresponds to the rated motor frequency in C0089.
When C1583 = 0 % the boost correction is deactivated
Enter the output frequency in C1583 until which the boost correction is
to have an effect.
– At an output frequency of 0 Hz the boost correction has the influence
defined in C0080 and is 100 percent efficient. An increasing output
frequency reduces the influence linearly to 0.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  6.11-7

6 Commissioning
Example A motor connected to a controller has a rated motor voltage of 400 V

(C0090 = 400 V). The voltage boost Umin is set to 2 % (C0016 = 2 %).
ƒ At a voltage boost of 2 % and a rated motor voltage of 400 V,
Umin = 8 V.
The voltage boost Umin is to be optimised via C0080:
0
6 × Umin
3 × Umin
0
C0080
0 0.5 0.99
9300vec141
Fig. 6.11-3 Influence of boost correction

 Maximum correction value when the output frequency is 0 Hz
ƒ When C0080 = 0.5, the maximum correction value is:

3 × Umin = 3 × 8 V = 24 V
ƒ The maximum voltage boost is:
Umin + correction value = 8 V + 24 V = 32 V
6.11-8  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Commissioning 6
Motor magnetising current with vector control 6.11.4
6.11.4 Motor magnetising current with vector control
This chapter describes how to optimise the setpoint for the motor
magnetising current (C0095) via the codes C0080 and C1583 in case of
vector control without feedback.
ƒ In case of vector control with feedback the setpoint for the motor
magnetising current is only determined by C0095. An optimisation is
not required. The codes C0080 and C1583 have no effect.
The motor current consists of the exciting and active part. The
magnetisation of the motor is determined by the excitation current
(magnetising current). To create a torque the motor needs active current.
In the vector control mode (C0006 = 1) a magnetising current is injected into
the motor after controller enable. The current level is detected by the
controller from the motor data.
If a too low motor magnetising current is injected after controller enable, the
following drive behaviour occurs:
ƒ The required torque is not achieved at standstill.
ƒ When a high load is accelerated from standstill, the current overshoots.
OC1 can be activated.
ƒ The machine runs irregularly as the motor is underexcited.
 Note!
If the motor magnetising current is too low, Lenze recommends
to operate the controller with sine-wave modulated switching
frequency (C0018 = 0, 1, 4, 5 oder 6) only.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  6.11-9

6 Commissioning

and C0025 > 1
in C1583
 Æ depending on C0086, C0088  6.11-5
and C0091
setting
C0086 = 0
0 magnetising current set in C0095
precontrol)
to which the motor
z C1583 = 100 % ≙ half the
C0089
6.11-10  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Commissioning 6
Motor magnetising current with vector control 6.11.4
Adjustment
 Stop!
A longer operation of the motor in standstill may destroy the
motor by overheating, especially in case of small motors.
ƒ Connect the thermal contact (NC contact), PTC, or KTY of the
motor and activate the motor temperature monitoring of the
controller.
ƒ Operate self-ventilated motors with a blower, if required.
Basic setting
1. Enter the motor data of the motor nameplate and execute the motor
identification. ( 6.6-13)
2. For magnetising the motor, consider enough time. The motor is being
magnetised between controller enable and motor start.
A delayed start of the motor can be achieved using e.g. the quick stop
function:
– Activate quick stop. Enable the controller and wait until the motor is
magnetised sufficiently. Deactivate quick stop for the motor to start.
The bigger the motor the longer the time for magnetisation. A motor with
the power of 90 kW requires up to 2 s.
If the desired continuous current does not flow, the magnetisation of the
motor can be optimised using the codes C0080, C0095 and C1583.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  6.11-11

6 Commissioning
Optimisation
3. If required, select a setpoint for the motor magnetising current in
C0095.
– The value in the Lenze setting has been evaluated by the controller
from the entered motor data of the motor nameplate.
4. The influence, the setpoint of the motor magnetising current is to
have, can be set in C0080.
– A P controller which increases or reduces the setpoint can be
parameterised via C0080.
– Increase the value in C0080 step by step and observe the effect on
the current injection with an oscilloscope, if required.
– When C0080 = 0 the P controller is deactivated. No setpoint is
selected for the motor magnetising current.
5. Set the adaptation of the setpoint for the motor magnetising current in
C1583.
0
100 %
0
0 0.5 fout fout
9300vec140
Fig. 6.11-4 Adaptation of the setpoint for the motor magnetising current
 Adaptation of the setpoint
Characteristic when C1583 = 100 % (Lenze setting). The output
frequency corresponds to half the rated motor frequency in C0089.
Characteristic when C1583 = 199.99 %. The output frequency
corresponds to the rated motor frequency in C0089.
When C1583 = 0 % the adaptation is deactivated. No setpoint is selected for the
motor magnetising current.
Select the output frequency in C1583, up to which the setpoint of the

motor magnetising current is to have an effect.
– At an output frequency of 0 Hz the setpoint has the influence defined
in C0080 and is 100 percent efficient. An increasing output frequency
reduces the influence linearly to 0.
6.11-12  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Parameter setting 7
Contents
7 Parameter setting
Contents
7.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1-1

7.2 Parameter setting with the XT EMZ9371BC keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-1
7.2.1 General data and operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-1
7.2.2 Installation and commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-2
7.2.3 Display elements and function keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-3
7.2.4 Changing and saving parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-5
7.2.5 Load parameter set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-7
7.2.6 Transfering parameters to other controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-8
7.2.7 Activating password protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-10
7.2.8 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-11
7.2.9 Menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-12
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  7-1

Parameter setting 7
Important notes 7.1
7.1 Important notes
Adapting the controller The controller functions can be adapted to your applications by means of
functions to the application parameterisation. You can either parameterise via keypad, PC or via the
parameter channel of a bus system.
The function library contains a detailed description of the functions, the
signal flow diagrams contain all configurable signals.
Parameters and codes The parameters for the functions are stored in numbered codes:
ƒ Codes are marked in the text with a ”C” (e.g. C0002).
ƒ The code table provides a quick overview of all codes. The codes are
sorted according to their numbers and can be used as reference.
( 8.3-1)
Parameter setting via keypad A quick parameter setting is provided by the keypad XT. Moreover, it serves
as status display, error diagnosis and transfer of parameters to other drive
controllers.
Keypad XT
EMZ9371BC
Can be used with 8200 vector, 8200 motec, starttec, Drive PLC,
9300 vector, 9300 servo
Operator buttons 8
Plain text display yes
Menu structure yes
Configurable menu (“user menu”) yes
Predefined basic configurations yes
Non-volatile memory for parameter transfer yes
Password protection yes
Diagnosis terminal Keypad XT in handheld design, IP 20
(E82ZBBXC)
Installation in control cabinet no
Type of protection IP 20
Detailed description  7.2-1
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  7.1-1

7 Parameter setting
7.1 Important notes
Parameter setting via PC You need the parameter setting / operating software »Global Drive Control«
(GDC) or »Global Drive Control easy« (GDC easy) and an interface for
communication:
ƒ Interface for system bus (CAN) (preset in GDC):
– PC system bus adapter
ƒ Serial interface for LECOM:
– Communication module LECOM-A/B (RS232/RS485)
EMF2102IB-V001
The parameter setting /operating software of the Global Drive Control
family are easy-to-understand and tools for the operation, parameter
setting and diagnostics or Lenze drive controllers.
GDC easy GDC
ESP-GDC2-E ESP-GDC2
Supply Free download from the Program package must be
internet at charged for
www.lenze.com
Operation in interactive mode yes yes
Comprehensive help functions yes yes
Menu ”Short setup” yes yes
Monitor windows for displaying yes yes
operating parameters and for
diagnostic purposes
Saving and printing of parameter yes yes
settings as code list
Loading of parameter files from the yes yes
controller to the PC
Storing of parameter files from the PC yes yes
in the controller
Function block editor no yes
Technology functions for 9300 Servo no yes
Oscilloscope function for 9300 Servo no yes
and 9300 vector
Detailed description Online Help of the Online Help of the
program program
Parameter setting via bus Detailed information can be found in the documentation of the
system corresponding bus system.
7.1-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Parameter setting 7
General data and operating conditions 7.2.1
7.2.1 General data and operating conditions
dcbBA
SHPRG p Menu
Code
Para
0050 00
50.00_Hz
MCTRL-NOUT
b0
S T
U V
z
Y Z
y
a c
9371BC011
Field Values
Dimensions O 60 mm
B 73.5 mm
c 15 mm
Type of protection IP20
Ambient temperature during operation: -10 °C ... +60 °C
during transport: -25 °C ... +70 °C
during storage -25 °C ... +60 °C
Climatic conditions Class 3K3 to EN 50178 (without condensation, average relative
humidity 85 %)
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  7.2-1

7 Parameter setting
7.2.2 Installation and commissioning
7.2.2 Installation and commissioning
Lx
xx
W
2Z
A
E8
B 00
b 50
c 00 Hz
Menu
0_
d p
Code
Para .0 dcbBA
RG
SHP 50 T
U SHPRG p Menu
NO 0050 00
UV
Code
L-
Para
TR 50.00_Hz
ST
MC
MCTRL-NOUT
zZ
S T
U V
Yy z
Y Z
y
EMZ9371BC
dcbBA
SHPRG p
Code
Para
Menu
0050 00
GLOBAL DRIVE
E82ZBBXC
Init
S T
U V
z
Y Z
y
d
0050 00 0 BA
dcb
50.00 Hz
20 %
1
S T
U V
z
Y Z
y 2 3
d
0050 00
50.00 Hz
20 %
S T
U V
z
Y Z
y
9371BC018
Fig. 7.2-1 Installation and commissioning of XT EMZ9371BC keypad or E82ZBBXC diagnosis

terminal
c Connect keypad on the front of the controller to the AIF interface.
It is possible to connect the keypad and remove it during operation.
d As soon as the keypad is supplied with voltage, it carries out a short self-test.
e The operation level indicates, when the keypad is ready for operation:
 Current state of the controller
 Memory location 1 of the user menu (C0517):
Code number, subcode number, and current value
 Active fault message or additional status signal
 Current value in % of the status display defined in C0004
f  must be pressed to leave the operation level
7.2-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Parameter setting 7
Display elements and function keys 7.2.3
7.2.3 Display elements and function keys
0 4
1 dcbBA 5
6
SHPRG p Menu
Code
Para
0050 00
2 50.00_Hz
3 MCTRL-NOUT 7
S T
U V
z 8
Y Z
y
9371BC002
Fig. 7.2-2 Display elements and function keys of the XT EMZ9371BC keypad
Displays Display Meaning Explanation

 Status display of basic device
 Ready for operation
 Pulse inhibit is active Power outputs inhibited
 Set current limit is exceeded in motor
or generator mode
 Speed controller 1 in its limitation Drive is torque-controlled
(only active for operation with
basic devices of 9300 series)
 Active fault
 Parameter acceptance
 Parameter is accepted immediately Basic device operates immediately
with the new parameter value
SHPRG  Parameter must be confirmed with Basic device operates with the
 new parameter value after being
confirmed
SHPRG When the controller is inhibited the Basic device operates with the
parameter must be confirmed with new parameter value after the
 controller is re-enabled
None Display parameter Change is not possible
 Active level
Menu Menu level is active Select main menu and submenus
Code Code level is active Select codes and subcodes
Para Parameter level is active Change parameters in the codes or
subcodes
None Operating level is active Display operating parameters
 Short text
alphanumeric Contents of the menus, meaning of
the codes and parameters
In the operating level C0004 (in %)
and the active fault are displayed
 Number
Menu level With active level: Only active for operation with
Menu number basic devices of 8200 vector or
8200 motec series
Code level With active level:
Four-digit code number
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  7.2-3

7 Parameter setting
7.2.3 Display elements and function keys
Display Meaning Explanation

 Number
Menu level With active level: Only active for operation with
Submenu number basic devices of 8200 vector or
8200 motec series
Code level With active level:
Two-digit subcode number
 Parameter value
Parameter value with unit
 Cursor
In the parameter level, the figure
above the cursor can be directly
changed
 Function keys
For description see the following
table
Function keys
 Note!
Key combinations with :
Press  and keep it pressed, then press the second key in
addition.
Key Function
Menu level Code level Parameter level Operating level
Change to the Change to the Change to the code

parameter level operating level level
Load predefined
Accept parameters
configurations in
 when SHPRG  or
the menu
SHPRG is displayed
”Short setup” 1)
 Change between Change of code Change of figure
 menu items number above cursor
Quick change
 Quick change of Quick change of
between the menu
 code number figure above cursor
items
 Change between main menu, submenus cursor to the right
 and code level cursor to the left
 Cancel the function of key , the LED in the key is off
 Inhibit controller, the LED in the key is lit
Reset the fault 1. Remedy the cause of malfunction
(TRIP reset): 2. Press 
3. press 
1) Only active for operation with basic devices of 8200 vector or 8200 motec series
7.2-4  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Parameter setting 7
Changing and saving parameters 7.2.4
7.2.4 Changing and saving parameters
 Note!
Your settings have an effect on the current parameters in the
main memory. You must save your settings as parameter set for
not losing them when connecting the mains!
If you need only one parameter set, save your settings as
parameter set 1, since the parameter set 1 is automatically
loaded after mains connection.
Step Key Action

sequence
1. Select the menu  Use the arrow keys to select the desired
menu
2. Change to the code level  Display of the first code in the menu
3. Select code or subcode  Display of the current parameter value
4. Change to the parameter level 
5. When SHPRG is displayed,  1) The drive coasts
inhibit the controller
6. Change parameters
A  Move cursor below the figure to be
changed
B  Change of figure
 Quick change of figure

7. Accept the changed parameter
Display of SHPRG or SHPRG    Confirm change to accept the parameter
Display ”OK”
Display  - The parameter has been accepted
immediately
8. Enable the controller, if  1) The drive operates again
required
9. Change to the code level
A  Display of the operating level
B  Display of the code with changes
parameter
10. Change further parameters Restart the ”loop” with step 1. or 3.
11. Save changed parameter
A  Select the code C0003 ”PAR SAVE in the
menu ”Load/Store”
B  Change to the parameter level
Display ”0” and ”READY”
Select the parameter set C  Save as parameter set 1:
in which the parameters Set Ö ”1” ”Save PS1”
are to be saved Save as parameter set 2:
permanently
Set Ö ”2” ”Save PS2”
Save as parameter set 3:
Save as parameter set 4:
D  When ”OK” is displayed, the settings are
permanently saved in the selected
parameter set.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  7.2-5

7 Parameter setting
7.2.4 Changing and saving parameters
Step Key Action

sequence
B  Display of C0003 ”PAR SAVE”
13. Parameter setting for another Restart the ”loop” with step 1. or 3.
parameter set
1) The function of the key  can be programmed:
C0469 = 1: Controller inhibit
C0469 = 2: Quick stop (Lenze setting)
7.2-6  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Parameter setting 7
Load parameter set 7.2.5
7.2.5 Load parameter set
The keypad serves to load a saved parameter set into the main memory
when the controller is inhibited. After the controller is enabled it operates
with the new parameters.
 Danger!
ƒ When a new parameter set is loaded, the controller is
reinitialised and acts as if it was connected to the mains:
– –System configurations and terminal assignments can be
changed. Make sure that your wiring and drive configuration
comply with the settings of the parameter set.
ƒ Only use terminal X5/28 as source for the controller inhibit!
Otherwise the drive may start in an uncontrolled way when
switching over to another parameter set.
 Note!
ƒ After switching on the supply voltage, the controller always
loads parameter set 1 into the main memory.
ƒ It is also possible to load other parameter sets into the main
memory via the digital inputs or bus commands.
Step Key Action

sequence
1. Inhibit controller: Terminal X5/28 = LOW
2. Load the saved parameter set
into the main memory
A  Select the code C0002 ”PAR LOAD in the
menu ”Load/Store”
B  Change to the parameter level
The active parameter set is displayed, e. g.
display ”0” and ”Load Default”
If you want to restore the delivery status,
proceed with D
Select the parameter set C  Load parameter set 1:
to be loaded Set Ö ”1” ”Load PS1”
Load parameter set 2:
Set Ö ”2” ”Load PS2”
D  ”RDY” goes off. The parameter set is loaded
completely into the main memory if ”RDY”
is displayed again.
B  Display of C0002 ”PAR LOAD”
The drive is running with the settings of
the loaded parameter set
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  7.2-7

7 Parameter setting
7.2.6 Transfering parameters to other controllers
7.2.6 Transfering parameters to other controllers
Parameter settings can be easily copied from one basic device to another by
using the keypad.
For this purpose use the menu ”Load/Store”:
 Danger!
During the parameter transfer from the keypad to the basic
device the control terminals can adopt undefined states!
Therefore the plugs X5 and X6 must be disconnected from the
basic device before the transfer takes place. This ensures that the
controller is inhibited and all control terminals have the defined
state ”LOW”.
Copying parameter sets from

the basic device into the
keypad  Note!
After copying the parameter sets into the keypad XT
(C0003 = 11) always the parameter set last-loaded via C0002 is
activated.
Thus the current parameters still remain active after copying.
ƒ Before copying, save the current parameters in the parameter
set and load this parameter set into the controller via C0002.
Step Key Action

sequence
1. Connect the keypad to the
basic device 1
The drive coasts.
3. Select C0003 in the menu  Select the code C0003 ”PAR SAVE” in the
”Load/Store” C0003 menu ”Load/Store” using the arrow keys.
4. Change to the parameter level  Display ”0” and ”READY”
5. Copy all parameter set into the The settings stored in the keypad are
keypad overwritten.
 Set ”11” ”Save extern”
6. Start copying  The status display ”RDY” goes off. ”BUSY”
is shown as parameter value.
If ”BUSY” goes OFF after approx. one
minute, all parameter sets have been
copied into the keypad.The status display
”RDY” is lit.
B  Display C0003 and ”PAR SAVE”
9. Remove keypad from the basic
device 1
7.2-8  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Parameter setting 7
Transfering parameters to other controllers 7.2.6
Copying parameter set from Step Key Action

the keypad into the basic sequence
device
1. Connect the keypad to the
basic device 2
The status display ”IMP” is lit.
The drive coasts
3. Pull the plugs X5 and X6 All control terminals have the defined state
”LOW”.
4. Select C0002 in the menu  Select code C0002 ”PAR LOAD” in the menu
”Load/Store” ”Load/Store” using the arrow keys.
5. Change to the parameter level  The active parameter set is displayed, e.g.
display ”0” and ”Load Default”
6. Select the correct copy The settings stored in the basic device are
function overwritten.
z Copy all available parameter sets into the The parameters are not yet active after
basic device and save them permanently. copying. Select the parameter set and load
it into the main memory.  7.2-7
 Set ”20” ”ext -> EEPROM”
z Copy single parameter sets to the main
memory.
 Copy parameter set 1:
Set Ö ”11” ”Load ext PS1”
Copy parameter set 2:
7. Start copying  The status display ”RDY” goes off. ”BUSY”
is shown as parameter value.
If ”BUSY” goes off, the selected parameter
sets are copied into the basic drive. The
status display ”RDY” is lit.
B  Display C0002 and ”PAR LOAD”
9. If necessary, store separately  Select code C0003 ”PAR SAVE” in the menu
copied parameter sets ”Load/Store” using the arrow keys and
permanently store the contents of the
main memory.
10. Plug in plugs X5 and X6
The drive is running with the new settings.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  7.2-9

7 Parameter setting
7.2.7 Activating password protection
7.2.7 Activating password protection
 Note!
ƒ If the password protection is activated (C0094 = 1 ... 9999), you
have only free access to the user menu.
ƒ To access the other menus, you must enter the password. By
this, the password protection is annulled as long as you enter
a new password.
ƒ Please observe that the password-protected parameters can
be overwritten as well when transferring the parameter sets
to other basic devices. The password is not transferred.
ƒ Do not forget your password! If you have forgotten your
password, it can only be reset via a PC or a bus system!
Activate password protection Step Key Action

sequence
1. Select the menu ”USER menu”  Change to the user menu using the arrow
keys
2. Change to the code level  Display of code C0051 ”MCTRL-NACT”
3. Select C0094  Display of code C0094 ”Password”
4. Change to the parameter level  Display ”0” = no password protection
5. Set password
A  Select password (1 ... 9999)
B  Confirm password
B  Display of C0094 and ”Password”
7. Change to the menu ”USER 
menu”
The password protection is active now.
You can only quit the user menu if you re-enter the password and confirm it with .
Remove password protection Step Key Action

sequence
1. Change to the code level in the 
user menu
2. Select C0094  Display of code C0094 ”Password”
3. Change to the parameter level  Display ”9999” = password protection is
active
4. Enter password
A  Set valid password
B  Confirm
The password protection is deactivated by
entering once again the password.
B  Display of C0094 and ”Password”
The password is deactivated now. All menus can freely accessed again.
7.2-10  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Parameter setting 7
Diagnostics 7.2.8
7.2.8 Diagnostics
In the ”Diagnostic” menu the two submenus ”Actual info” and ”History”
include all codes for
ƒ drive monitoring
ƒ error diagnostics
In the operating level, additional status messages are displayed. If several
messages are active, the message with the highest priority is displayed:
Priority Display Meaning
1 GLOBAL DRIVE INIT Initialisation or communication error between keypad
and controller
2 XXX - TRIP Active TRIP (contents of C0168/1)
3 XXX - MESSAGE Active message (contents of C0168/1)
4 Special controller states:
Switch-on inhibit
5 Source of controller inhibit (the value of C0004 is displayed at the same time):
STP1 Terminal X5/28
STP3 Operating module or LECOM A/B/LI
STP4 INTERBUS or PROFIBUS-DP
STP5 System bus (CAN)
STP6 C0040
6 Source of quick stop:
QSP-term-Ext Input MCTRL-QSP at function block MCTRL is at HIGH
level
QSP-C0135 Operating module or LECOM A/B/LI
QSP-AIF INTERBUS or PROFIBUS-DP
QSP-CAN System bus (CAN)
7 XXX - WARNING Active warning (contents of C0168/1)
8 xxxx Value under C0004
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  7.2-11

7 Parameter setting
7.2.9 Menu structure
7.2.9 Menu structure
For easy operation, the codes are clearly arranged in function-related

menus:
Main menu Submenus Description
Display Display
USER menu Codes defined in C0517
Code list All available codes

ALL All available codes listed in ascending order (C0001 ... C7999)
PS 1 Codes in parameter set 1 (C0001 ... C1999)
Load / Store Parameter set management
Parameter set transfer, restore delivery status
Diagnostics Diagnostics
Actual info Display codes to monitor the drive
History Fault analysis with history buffer
Short setup Quick configuration of predefined applications
Configuration of the user menu
The predefined applications depend on the type of the basic
device (frequency inverter, servo inverter, position controller, ...)
Main FB Configuration of the main function blocks

NSET Setpoint processing
NSET-JOG Fixed setpoints
NSET-RAMP1 Ramp function generator
MCTRL Motor control
DFSET Digital frequency processing
DCTRL Internal control
Terminal I/O Connection of inputs and outputs with internal signals
AIN1 X6.1/2 Analog input 1
AIN2 X6.3/4 Analog input 2
AOUT1 X6.62 Analog output 1
AOUT2 X6.63 Analog output 2
DIGIN Digital inputs
DIGOUT Digital outputs
DFIN Master frequency input
DFOUT Master frequency output
State bus State bus (not with 9300 frequency inverter)
Controller Configuration of internal control parameters
Speed Speed controller
Current Current controller or torque controller
Phase Phase controller (not with 9300 frequency inverter)
Motor/Feedb. Input of motor data, configuration of speed feedback
Motor adj Motor data
Feedback Configuration of feedback systems
Monitoring Configuration of monitoring functions
7.2-12  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Parameter setting 7
Menu structure 7.2.9
Main menu Submenus Description

Display Display
LECOM/AIF Configuration of operation with communication modules
LECOM A/B Serial interface
AIF interface Process data
Status word Display of status words
System bus Configuration of system bus (CAN)
Management CAN communication parameters
CAN-IN1
CAN object 1
CAN-OUT1
CAN-IN2
CAN object 2
CAN-OUT2
CAN-IN3
CAN object 3
CAN-OUT3
Status word Display of status words
FDO Free digital outputs
Diagnostics CAN diagnostics
FB config Configuration of function blocks
Func blocks Parameter setting of function blocks

The submenus contain all available function blocks
FCODE Configuration of free codes
Identify Identification
Drive Software version of basic device
Op Keypad Software version of keypad
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  7.2-13

Configuration 8
Contents
8 Configuration
Contents
8.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1-1

8.2 Function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2-1
8.2.1 Diameter calculator (DCALC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2-1
8.2.2 Master frequency input (DFIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2-5
8.2.3 Master frequency output (DFOUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2-8
8.2.4 Master frequency ramp-function generator (DFRFG) . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2-13
8.2.5 Master frequency processing (DFSET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2-18
8.2.6 Internal motor control with V/f characteristic control (MCTRL1) . . 8.2-25
8.2.7 Internal motor control with vector control (MCTRL2) . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2-48
8.3 Code table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3-1
8.4 Selection lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4-1
8.4.1 Selection list 1: Analog output signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4-1
8.4.2 Selection list 2: Digital output signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4-3
8.4.3 Selection list 3: Phase signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4-6
8.4.4 Selection list 4: Speed signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4-6
8.4.5 Selection list 5: Function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4-7
8.4.6 Selection list 10: error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4-8
8.5 Table of attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5-1
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8-1

Configuration 8
Important notes 8.1
8.1 Important notes
The ”Configuration” chapter consists of two parts.
System Manual The ”Configuration” chapter in the System Manual contains the following:
ƒ Description of function blocks
Diameter calculator (DCALC), master frequency input (DFIN), master
frequency output (DFOUT), master frequency ramp function generator
(DFRFG), master frequency processing (DFSET), internal motor control
with V/F characteristic control (MCTRL1), internal motor control with
vector control (MCTRL2)
ƒ Code table
ƒ Selection lists
ƒ Table of attributes
System Manual (extension) The ”Configuration” chapter in the System Manual (extension) contains the
following:
ƒ Notes on the configuration with Global Drive Control
ƒ Description of the basic configuration
ƒ How to use function blocks
ƒ Description of the other function blocks for the 9300 vector frequency
inverter
ƒ Description of monitoring systems
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.1-1

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Diameter calculator (DCALC) 8.2.1
8.2 Function blocks
8.2.1 Diameter calculator (DCALC)
Description The function block calculates the current reel diameter in winding drives.
DCALC1-SET DCALC1
C1320
C1328
C1325 DCALC1-D-OUT
DCALC1-LOAD
C1321/1 DCALC1-DMAX
C1326/1 C1300
a DCALC1-DMIN
DCALC1-N-LINE a
C1327/1 * b
C1322/1 b DCALC1-OUT
CTRL ARIT
C1301
DCALC1-N-WIND
C1327/2 C1302 C1305 C1308 C1310
C1322/2 C1303 C1306 C1309
C1304 C1307
DCALC1-HOLD DCALC1-OVFL
C1321/2
DCALC1-I=0
C1326/2
C1311
fb_dcalc1
Fig. 8.2-1 Diameter calculator (DCALC1)

C1300 N-motor/Dma 300 -32767 {1 rpm} 32767 Motor speed at Dmax, function  8.2-1
 x block DCALC1
z Nominal speed of the winding
drive
C1301 N-line max 3000 1 {1 rpm} 32767 Maximum line speed, function
 block DCALC1
z Nominal speed of the line drive
C1302 calc cycle 0.1 0.1 {0.1 rev} 100.0 Calculation cycle, function block  8.2-1
DCALC1
C1303 time const 0.10 0.01 {0.01 s} 50.00 Filter time constant, function
block DCALC1
C1304 Dmax 500 1 {1 mm} 10000 Maximum diameter, function  8.2-1
 block DCALC1
z Nominal winding diameter
C1305 lower D-limit 50 1 {1 mm} 10000 Lower diameter limit, function
block DCALC1
z Minimum winding diameter
C1306 upper D-limit 500 1 {1 mm} 10000 Upper diameter limit, function
block DCALC1
z Maximum winding diameter
C1307 hyst D-limit 1.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.0 Hysteresis - diameter limitation,
function block DCALC1
z Hysteresis for Dmin /Dmax
output
C1308 arit function 1 0 DCALC1-OUT=D DCALC1-OUT = Selection of the arithmetic  8.2-1
 diameter function, function block DCALC1
1 DCALC1-OUT=1/D DCALC1-OUT =
1/diameter
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.2-1

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks

C1309 Dmin 50 1 {1 mm} 10000 Minimum diameter, function  8.2-1
 block DCALC1
C1310 DCALC1-Titime 0.000 0.000 {0.001 999.900 Acceleration and deceleration
s} time, function block DCALC1
C1311 window D-calc 1.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 Window - diameter calculation,
z Window setting for permissible
diameter deviation
C1320 CFG: SET 1000 FIXED0%  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input  8.2-1
 signal, function block DCALC1
z Setting the initial value
C1321  Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
 signals, function block DCALC1
1 CFG: LOAD 1000 FIXED0 z HIGH: Initial value at
DCALC1-SET is accepted
z DCALC1-LOAD has a higher
priority than DCALC1-HOLD
2 CFG: HOLD 1000 FIXED0 z HIGH = Keeps the achieved
diameter and resets the
integrators.
C1322 -36000 {1 rpm} 36000 Function block DCALC1  8.2-1
1 DIS: N-Line z Display of the signals linked in
C1327
2 DIS: N-WIND
C1325 DIS: SET -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block DCALC1
z Display of the signal linked in
C1320
C1326 0 1 Function block DCALC1
1 DIS: LOAD z Display of the signals linked in
C1321
2 DIS: HOLD
C1327  Selection list 3 Configuration of input signals,  8.2-1
 function block DCALC1
1 CFG: N-Line 1000 FIXED0INC z Speed signal of the line drive
2 CFG: N-WIND 1000 FIXED0INC z Speed signal of the winding
drive
C1328 DIS: D-ACT -200 {1 mm} 200 Function block DCALC1
z Display of the current diameter
Setting the initial value The signal at DCALC1-Set is set as initital value.
ƒ The initial value is accepted with DCALC1-LOAD = 1.
ƒ The initial value is accepted without being filtered.
8.2-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Diameter calculator (DCALC) 8.2.1
Calculating the diameter The actual diameter is calculated by dividing the speed signals at
DCALC1-N-LINE and DCALC1-N-WIND.
ƒ The signal at DCALC1-N-LINE must correspond to the circumferential
speed of the reel.
ƒ The signal at DCALC1-N-WIND must be proportional to the winding
speed.
ƒ For correspondence of the calculated value with the real diameter, the
signal must be adapted to DCALC1-N-LINE in C1300 and C1301. The
nominal reel diameter dmax is indicated in C1304.
– When using the nominal reed diameter dmax, you must enter the
value at input DCALC1-N-WIND in C1300 and the value at input
DCALC1-N-LINE in C1301.
ƒ The input signals are integrated cyclically. In C1302 the integration
interval can be changed (calculation cycle):
High value in C1302 ⇒high resolution
Low value in C1302 ⇒low resolution
ƒ When the integrator overflows, DCALC1-OVFL is set to HIGH. The
integrator is reset internally and restarts with calculating the last
correct value.
ƒ A first order low pass filters the calculated values. The filter time
constant is set via C1303.
Displaying the diameter In C1328 the actual diameter is indicated.
ƒ For the conversion of the scaled calculated value into the absolute
value [mm], the reference diameter dmax must be entered under
C1304.
ƒ The actual diameter is output at DCALC1-D-OUT. The signal is scaled to
the value in C1304.
Holding/Saving the current With DCALC1-HOLD = HIGH the last-calculated diameter value is kept and
value the integrators are reset.
ƒ When the controller is switched off, the actual diameter value is saved.
When the controller is switched on, the last-saved value is loaded.
Setting/displaying of the In C1305 the minimum diameter (dmin) is entered in [mm]. dmin is reached
diameter when DCALC1-DMIN switches to HIGH.
In C1306 the maximum diameter (dmax) is entered in [mm]. dmax is reached
when DCALC1-DMAX switches to HIGH.
In C1307 a hysteresis for resetting the display signal is set. The entry in [%]
refers to the absolute values in C1305 and C1306.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.2-3

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
Converting the diameter (d) in In configurations with speed precontrol it is common to multiply the
1/d precontrol signal with the reciprocal value of the diameter (d). This value is
output at DCALC1-OUT.
ƒ C1308 = 0: DCALC1-OUT = d
ƒ C1308 = 1: DCALC1-OUT = 1/d
For the conversion into 1/d the reference value for the diameter at which the
signal at DCALC1-OUT is to amount to 100 % must be defined in C1309.
ƒ In general, C1309 corresponds to the minimum diameter in C1305
(dmin).
To guarantee a constant transition when setting new diameter values, a
new ramp-function generator is activated if C1310 > 0 s.
Web break monitoring A window comparator compares the calculated value with the value which
was filtered last.
ƒ In C1311 the maximum difference in [%] between both values is
defined.
ƒ DCALC1-I=0 is set to LOW when the maximum difference will be
exceeded.
8.2-4  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Master frequency input (DFIN) 8.2.2
8.2.2 Master frequency input (DFIN)
Description The function block calculates a speed signal from the rectangular signals at
X9. TTL signals and HTL signals can be connected. The zero track can be
selected as an option.
The edge changes are detected every 1 ms and result directly in the output
value.
X9
C0427 DFIN
DFIN-OUT
C0425 C0426
fb_dfin
Fig. 8.2-2 Digital frequency input (DFIN)

C0425 DFIN const 3 0 256 inc/rev Constant of the master frequency  8.2-5
1 512 inc/rev input, function block DFIN
z Output signal at the connected
2 1024 inc/rev encoder or at the upstream
3 2048 inc/rev controller in the event of a
4 4096 inc/rev master frequency
cascade/master frequency bus
5 8192 inc/rev
6 16384 inc/rev
C0426 DIS: OUT -36000 {1 rpm} 36000 Output signal of the master
frequency input, function block
DFIN
z Display only
C0427 DFIN function 0 Function of the master frequency
input, function block DFIN
0 2-phase z Phase-displaced signal
sequence
1 A pulse/B dir z Control of direction of rotation
via track B
2 Pulse A or B z Control of speed and direction
of rotation via track A or track B
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.2-5

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
8.2.2 Master frequency input (DFIN)
Evaluating input signals In C0427 the different modes for the evaluation of the input signals can be
selected.
C0427 = 0 (phase-displaced signal sequence)
O
O
B
B
Z
Z
Fig. 8.2-3 Phase-displaced signal sequence (CW rotation)

Clockwise Track A leads track B by 90 ° (positive value at DFIN-OUT)
rotation
Counter-clock Track A lags track B by 90 ° (negative value at DFIN-OUT)
wise rotation
C0427 = 1 (control of the direction of rotation via track B)
O
O
B
B
Z
Z
Fig. 8.2-4 Control of direction of rotation via track B

Clockwise Track A transmits the speed
rotation Track B = LOW (positive value at DFIN-OUT)
Counter-clock Track A transmits the speed
wise rotation Track B = HIGH (negative value at DFIN-OUT)
C0427 = 2 (control of speed and direction of rotation via track A or track B)
O
O
B
B
Z
Z
Fig. 8.2-5 Control of speed and direction of rotation via track A or track B
Clockwise Track A transmits the speed and direction of rotation (positive
rotation value at DFIN-OUT)
Track B = LOW
Counter-clock Track B transmits the speed and direction of rotation (negative
wise rotation value at DFIN-OUT)
Track A = LOW
8.2-6  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Master frequency input (DFIN) 8.2.2
Adjusting the output signal In C0425 the output signal can be adapted:
ƒ To the encoder at X9 or
ƒ To the upstream controller with master frequency cascade/master
frequency bus.
Transfer function
Calculating the output signal:
DFIN-OUT [rpm] = f [Hz] ⋅ 60

C0425
Example:
The input frequency amounts to 200 kHz, the number of increments
corresponds to 2048 inc/rev. (C0425 = 3).
DFIN-OUT [rpm] = 200000 Hz ⋅ 60 = 5859 rpm

2048
Signal adaptation
Signal adaptations other than by squaring in C0425 can be achieved by
connecting a function block.
Example:
The function block CONV3 shall convert the speed signal into a quasi analog
signal.
Calculating the output signal at CONV3:
CONV3-OUT [%] = f [Hz] ⋅ 0.4 ⋅ C0950

C0425 C0951
Interconnecting function blocks:
X9
C0427 DFIN CONV3
DFIN-OUT CONV3-IN C0950 CONV3-OUT
C0952
C0951
C0953
C0425 C0426
fb_dfin_01
Fig. 8.2-6 Digital frequency input (DFIN) with connected converter
 Note!
If a master frequency is output to DFOUT-AN-IN or DFOUT-DF
(C0540 = 0 or C0540 = 1) and an incremental encoder is
evaluated via X8, the function block DFIN cannot be used
anymore.
If the input signals at X8 or X9 are output to X10, (C0540 = 4 or
C0540 = 5), this restriction does not exist.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.2-7

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
8.2.3 Master frequency output (DFOUT)
Description The function block creates rectangular signals from an analog signal or
speed signal, which are output via X10. Alternatively, you can set the master
frequency output to a signal output at X8 or X9.
C0030 DFOUT
C0540
DFOUT-DF-IN DFOUT-OUT
C0542
C0549
DFOUT-AN-IN
C0541
C0547
DFOUT-SYN-RDY
C0544 C0540
CTRL
C0548
0 X10
X5 E5
1
C0545 2
X9 3
4
5
X8
fb_dfout
Fig. 8.2-7 Digital frequency output (DFOUT)

C0030 DFOUT CONST 3 0 256 inc/rev Function block DFOUT  8.2-8
1 512 inc/rev z Setting of the constant
(increments per revolution) for
2 1024 inc/rev the master frequency output
3 2048 inc/rev X10
4 4096 inc/rev
5 8192 inc/rev
6 16384 inc/rev
8.2-8  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Master frequency output (DFOUT) 8.2.3

C0540 Function 0 Function selection, function block  8.2-8
 DFOUT
z Output signal at X10
0 Analog input Analog input Signal at DFOUT-AN-IN is output.
Zero track can be input externally.
1 PH diff input Phase difference Signal at DFOUT-DF-IN is output.
input Zero track can be input externally.
2 Not assigned
3 Not assigned
4 X10 = X9 X9 is output on The input signals are buffered
X10 C0030 is without function
5 X10 = X8 X8 is output on
X10
C0541 CFG: an-in 5001 MCTRL-NACT  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
 signal, function block DFOUT
z Signal in [%] of C0011
C0542 CFG: DF-IN 1000 FIXEDPHI-0  Selection list 4 Configuration of input signal,
 function block DFOUT
z Speed signal
C0544 CFG: SYN-RDY 1000 FIXED0  Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
z DFOUT-SYN-RDY = HIGH:
Generating a zero pulse
C0545 PH OFFSET 0 0 {1 inc.} 65535 Phase offset, function block
DFOUT
z Displacing the zero pulse
generated via DFOUT-SYN-RDY
by up to 360 °
z 1 rev. = 65535 inc (360 °)
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.2-9

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
Output signals at X10

A
A
B
B
Z
Z
fb_dfout_01
Fig. 8.2-8 Signal sequence for CW rotation (definition)

ƒ The output signals correspond to the simulation of an incremental
encoder:
– Track A and track B and, if required, the zero track and the
corresponding inverted tracks are output. The levels are
TTL-compatible.
– Positive input values (CW rotation) result in the represented signal
sequence.
ƒ With negative input values (CCW rotation) track B leads track A by 90 °.
ƒ The encoder constant of the encoder simulation is set in C0030.
C0540 serves to define which input signal or signal source shall be active.
The zero track is output according to the selected setting.
C0540 Signal at X10
0 DFOUT-AN-IN is output to X10. Zero track can be selected externally.
1 DFOUT-DF-IN is output to X10. Zero track can be selected externally.
2 No function
3 No function
4 The signal at input X9 is electrically amplified and directly output (C0030 is without
function)
5 The signal at input X8 is electrically amplified and directly output (C0030 is without
function)
 Note!
The settings C0540 = 0 and C0540 = 1 are not possible when a
connection to the master frequency input X9 (DFIN) was
established and an incremental encoder was connected via X8
(C0025 = 100, 110 ... 113).
8.2-10  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Master frequency output (DFOUT) 8.2.3
Output of analog signal as Setting: C0540 = 0

frequency
ƒ The analog signal at the input DFOUT-AN-IN is converted into a
frequency and output to X10.
ƒ Frequency calculation:
f [Hz] = DFOUT-AN-IN [%] ⋅ C0030 ⋅ C0011

100 60
Example:
The input signal at DFOUT-AN-IN amounts to 50 %, the number of
increments corresponds to 2048 inc/rev. (C0030 = 3) and the maximum
speed (C0011) is set to 3000 rpm.
f [Hz] = 50 % ⋅ 2048 ⋅ 3000 = 51200 Hz

100 60
Generating an index pulse
An artificial index signal can be generated for the output frequency.
1. Set the input DFOUT-SYN-RDY = HIGH.
– 360° later, a LOW-HIGH edge generates the index pulse.
– Then, a zero pulse is generated every 360 ° according to C0030.
2. If necessary, shift the zero pulse by up to 360 ° (65536 inc = 360 °) via
C0545.
Output of the speed signal as Setting: C0540 = 1
frequency
ƒ The speed signal at the input DFOUT-DF-IN is converted into a
frequency and output to X10.
ƒ Frequency calculation:
f [Hz] = DFOUT-DF-IN [rpm] ⋅ C0030

60
Example:
The input signal at DFOUT-DF-IN amounts to 3000 rpm, the number of
increments corresponds to 2048 inc/revolution (C0030 = 3).
f [Hz] = 3000 rpm ⋅ 2048 = 102400 Hz

60
An artificial zero pulse can be generated for the output frequency.
1. Set the input DFOUT-SYN-RDY = HIGH.
– 360° later, a LOW-HIGH edge generates the zero pulse.
– Then, a zero pulse is generated every 360 ° according to C0030.
2. If necessary, shift the zero pulse by up to 360 ° (65536 inc = 360 °) via
C0545.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.2-11

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
Signal at X8 is directly output ƒ The input signals at X8 are amplified electrically and output directly.
at X10
ƒ The signals depend on the assignment of the input X8.
ƒ The codes C0030, C0545 and the output DFOUT-OUT have no function.
ƒ The zero track is only output if it is connected to X8.
Signal at X9 is directly output ƒ The input signals at X9 are amplified electrically and output directly.
at X10
ƒ The signals depend on the assignment of the input X9.
ƒ The codes C0030, C0545 and the output DFOUT-OUT have no function.
ƒ The zero track is output if it is connected to X9.
8.2-12  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Master frequency ramp-function generator (DFRFG) 8.2.4
8.2.4 Master frequency ramp-function generator (DFRFG)
Description The function block creates acceleration and deceleration ramps for the
operation with master frequency, thus leading the drive to the master
frequency with angular synchronism.
C0751 DFRFG1
C0753
C0755
DFRFG1-SYNC
CTRL
C0752
DFRFG1-IN
C0758 DFRFG1-OUT
C0765
C0754
DFRFG1-QSP
C0759 DFRFG1-FAIL
S Q
C0764/1
R
DFRFG1-STOP
C0760
C0764/2
DFRFG1-RESET
C0761
C0764/3
fb_dfrfg
Fig. 8.2-9 Digital frequency ramp function generator (DFRFG1)

C0751 DFRFG1 TIR 1.000 0.001 {0.001 999.999 Acceleration time Tir, function  8.2-13
s} block DFRFG1
C0752 MAX SPEED 3000 1 {1 rpm} 16000 Maximum speed, function block
DFRFG1
z Maximum speed-up (speed)
C0753 DFRFG1 QSP 0.000 0.000 {0.001 999.900 Deceleration time Tif for quick
s} stop, function block DFRFG1
C0754 PH ERROR 2.109 10 {1} 2.109 Following error, function block
DFRFG1
z Maximum permissible phase
difference between setpoint an
actual phase
z 1 rev. = 65535 inc
C0755 SYN WINDOW 100 0 {1 inc.} 65535 Synchronisation window, function
block DFRFG1
z 1 rev. = 65535 inc
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.2-13

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks

C0758 CFG: IN 1000 FIXEDPHI-0  Selection list 4 Configuration of input signal,  8.2-13
 function block DFRFG1
z Speed/phase setpoint signal
C0759 cfg: qsp 1000 FIXED0  Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
 signal, function block DFRFG1
z HIGH = quick stop active
C0760 cfg: stop 1000 FIXED0  Selection list 2 Configuration of input signal,
z HIGH = Status of the profile
generator is maintained,
setpoint is saved
C0761 CFG: RESET 1000 FIXED0  Selection list 2 Configuration of input signal,
z HIGH = resetting the
integrators
C0764 0 1 Function block DFRFG1
1 DIS: QSP z Display of the signals linked in
C0759, C0760 and C0761
2 DIS: STOP
3 DIS: RESET
C0765 DIS: IN -32767 {1 rpm} 32767 Function block DFRFG1
C0758
8.2-14  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Profile generator
Stop!
Do not operate the drive with this function at the torque
limitation Mmax, Imax.
The profile generator creates ramps which automatically compensate the
resulting phase displacement. If you do not need this compensation, set
DFRFG-RESET = HIGH.
DFRFG-OUT
C0751 C0751
C0755
DFRFG-IN C0752
DFRFG-SYNC t
Fig. 8.2-10 Synchronisation on DFRFG

C0751 Setting the deceleration and acceleration time
C0752 Setting the maximum speed
C0755 Setting the switching point
When the actual angle has reached its setpoint and the output signal
corresponds to the input signal, the drive runs in synchronism and the
output DFRFG1-SYNC is set to HIGH. At the same time the profile generator
is switched to the inactive state.
Fig. 8.2-11 Speed-time diagram DFRFG

The number of increments at DFRFG1-IN (master drive) defines the set
phase. The set phase can be displayed as a path. The speed-time diagram
shows the distance covered (angle) as the area below the speed profile.
When synchronisation is reached, master and slave have covered the same
distance (phase).
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005 8.2-15

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
Quick stop (QSP) Quick stop takes the drive out of the system and brings it to standstill.
Setpoints and actual values are continued to be detected.
DFRFG-OUT
C0751 C0751
DFRFG-IN C0752
C0753
DFRFG-QSP t
Fig. 8.2-12 Quick stop DFRFG

C0751 Acceleration and deceleration time of the profile generator
C0752 Maximum speed
C0753 Setting the deceleration time Tif for QSP
ƒ QSP is activated using DFRFG1-QSP = HIGH.

ƒ With DFRFG1-QSP = LOW, QSP is deactivated. The setpoint is
approached via the profile generator.
Ramp function generator stop The function “ramp-function generator stop” keeps the state of the profile
generator during operation. Setpoints and actual values are continued to be
detected.
DFRFG-OUT
DFRFG-IN C0752
DFRFG-STOP t
Fig. 8.2-13 Ramp function generator stop

C0752 Maximum speed
ƒ The function ”ramp-function generator stop is activated with

DFRFG1-STOP = HIGH.
– The last status is output at DFRFG1-OUT.
ƒ With DFRFG1-STOP = LOW the function “ramp-function generator
stop” is reset. The setpoint is approached via the profile generator.
Reset ramp generator ƒ With DFRFG1-RESET = HIGH, the profile generator is activated.
Internally added-up set phases and actual phases are reset.
ƒ The set phase is detected using a HIGH-LOW signal at DFRFG1-RESET.
8.2-16  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Monitoring the phase The profile generator can accept a phase difference between the set phase
difference and the actual phase of up to ±2140000000 inc (= 32000 revolutions).
ƒ A limit value can be set for the permissible phase difference via C0754.
ƒ If the limit value is reached, DFRFG1-FAIL is set to HIGH and the value is
saved.
ƒ DFRFG1-FAIL is only set to LOW with DFRFG1-RESET = HIGH.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.2-17

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
8.2.5 Master frequency processing (DFSET)
Description The function block prepares the master frequency for the controller. You can
select values for the stretching and gearbox factor and carry out a speed or
phase trimming.
C0429 DFSET
DFSET-0-PULSE C0534
C0525 C0546
C0538/1 X5 C0531
2
E4
1
MCTRL-PHI-ACT
X5 DFSET-ACK
CTRL
2
E5
1 C0528/1
X9/6,7
C0532 C0535
DFSET-N-TRIM
C0524
C0537
DFSET-RAT-DIV
C0522
DFSET-VP-DIV C0536/2 DFSET-POUT
C0521
C0536/1 a
a
DFSET-IN a a + DFSET-NOUT
C0520 * b * b +
C0539 b b C0530
C0533 C0033 C0252 C0253
0 + + + DFSET-PSET
1 -
+ +
DFSET-SET
C0527 C0528/2
C0538/3
DFSET-RESET
C0526
DFSET-A-TRIM C0538/2
C0523 * C0529
C0536/3
MCTRL-PHI-ACT
fb_dfset
Fig. 8.2-14 Digital frequency processing (DFSET)

C0033 GEARBOX 1 1 {1} 32767 Gearbox factor - denominator of  8.2-18
DENOM the function block DFSET
C0252 Angle offset 0 -245760000 {1 inc.} 245760000 Phase offset for master frequency  8.2-18
processing, function block DFSET
z Fixed phase offset for digital
frequency configuration
z 1 rev. = 65536 inc
C0253 Angle n-trim Æ -32767 {1 inc.} 32767 Speed-dependent phase
trimming for the master
frequency processing, function
block DFSET
Æ depending on C0005, C0025,
C0490
z Change of C0005, C0025 or
C0490 resets C0253 to the
corresponding Lenze setting
z 1 rev. = 65536 inc
z Value in C0253 is reached at
15000 rpm
8.2-18  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Master frequency processing (DFSET) 8.2.5

 function block DFSET
z Input of speed / phase setpoint
signal
C0521 CFG: VP-DIV 1000 FIXED0%  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
 signal, function block DFSET
z Signal for numerator of
stretching factor
z 100 % = 16384 inc
C0522 cfg: rat-div 1000 FIXED0%  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
gearbox factor
z 100 % = 16384 inc
C0523 cfg: A-trim 1000 FIXED0%  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
z Signal for phase trimming via
offset multiplier (C0529)
z 100 % = 16384 inc
C0524 cfg: n-trim 1000 FIXED0%  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
z Signal for speed trimming
C0525 cfg: 0-pulse 1000 FIXED0  Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
z Signal for one-time zero pulse
activation
z HIGH = release for zero pulse
synchronisation
C0526 CFG: RESET 1000 FIXED0  Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
z Signal for reset of integrators
z HIGH sets
– Position difference = 0
– DFSET-PSET = 0
– DFSET-PSET2 = 0
C0527 CFG: SET 1000 FIXED0  Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
z HIGH = Set phase integrators
to equal values
z LOW-HIGH edge sets
DFSET-PSET = 0
z HIGH-LOW edge sets
DFSET-PSET to the current
value of MCTRL-PHI-SET
z DFSET-SET has a higher priority
than DFSET-RESET
C0528 -2.109 {1} 2.109 Function block DFSET  8.2-18
z Display only
1 DIS: 0-pulse A Phase difference between two
zero pulses
2 DIS: Offset Offset = C0523 × C0529 + C0252
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.2-19

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks

C0529 Multip offset 1 -20000 {1} 20000 Offset multiplier, function block  8.2-18
DFSET
z Multiplier for the phase offset
(C0252)
C0530 DF EVALUATION 0 0 with factor With gearbox Master frequency evaluation,
factor function block DFSET
1 no factor Without gearbox z Evaluation of the setpoint
factor integrator
C0531 Act 0 div 1 1 {1} 16384 Actual zero pulse divisor, function
block DFSET
C0532 0-pulse/TP 1 1 0-pulse Index pulse Zero pulse / touch probe, function
block DFSET
2 Touch probe Touch probe z Zero pulse of the feedback
system or touch probe
C0533 Vp denom 1 1 {1} 32767 Gain factor of denominator Vp,
function block DFSET
C0534 0 pulse fct 0 Zero pulse function, function  8.2-18
block DFSET
z Synchronising the drive
0 inactive Inactive
1 Continuous Continuous
synchronisation,
correction in the
shortest possible
way
2 Cont. switch Continuous After a LOW-HIGH signal to
synchronisation, DFSET-0-pulse, the zero track is
correction in the synchronised once
shortest possible
way
10 Once, fast way One-time
synchronisation,
correction in the
shortest possible
way
11 Once, CW One-time
synchronisation,
correction in
direction of
rotation to the
right
12 Once, CCW One-time
synchronisation,
correction in
direction of
rotation to the left
13 Once, 2*0-pulse One-time
synchronisation,
correction is
detected from
setpoint pulse and
actual pulse and
corrected to the
corresponding
direction
C0535 Set 0 Div 1 1 {1} 16384 Desired zero pulse divisor,  8.2-18
8.2-20  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2

C0536 -32767 {1} 32767 Function block DFSET  8.2-18
1 DIS: VP-DIV z Display of the signals linked in
C0521, C0522 and C0523
2 DIS: RAT-DIV
3 DIS: A-trim
C0537 DIS: n-trim -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block DFSET
C0524
C0538 0 1 Function block DFSET
1 DIS: 0-pulse z Display of the signals linked in
C0525, C0526 and C0527
2 DIS: RESET
3 DIS: SET
C0539 DIS: IN -6000 {1 rpm} 6000 Function block DFSET
C0520
C0546 Min inc/rev 1000 1 {1 inc.} 2147483647 Masking of the touch probe  8.2-18
signal, function block DFSET
z Suppressing interference
pulses at X5/E4 (actual pulse of
touch probe signal)
z The size of the masking
window between two actual
pulses is set
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.2-21

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
Setpoint conditioning with Stretching factor

stretching and gearbox factor
The stretching factor defines the ratio with which the drive is to run faster
or slower than the setpoint.
The setpoint at DFSET-IN is evaluated. The result is output to DFSET-POUT.
DFSET-POUT = DFSET-IN ⋅ DFSET-VP-DIV

C0533
The stretching factor results from numerator and denominator.
ƒ The numerator (DFSET-VP-DIV) can be defined as a variable from the
analog signal source or as a fixed value from a code.
ƒ Enter the denominator under C0533.
 Note!
When calculating the stretching factor, the input signal at
DFSET-VP-DIV is not processed in a scaled mode. A signal of
100 % corresponds a count value of 16384.
Gearbox factor
The gearbox factor defines the ratio using which the drive speed can be
changed additionally.
The setpoint at DFSET-IN, multiplied by the stretching factor, is evaluated.
The result is output at DFSET-NOUT [in % of nmax (C0011)].
DFSET-NOUT = DFSET-IN ⋅ DFSET-VP-DIV ⋅ DFSET-RAT-DIV

C0533 C0033
The gearbox factor results from numerator and denominator.
ƒ The numerator (DFSET-RAT-DIV) can be defined as a variable from the
analog signal source or as a fixed value from a code.
ƒ Enter the denominator under C0033.
 Note!
When calculating the gearbox factor, the input signal at
DFSET-RAT-DIV is not processed in a scaled mode. A signal of
100 % corresponds a count value of 16384.
8.2-22  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Processing of correction Speed trimming

values
The speed trimming serves to add correction values, e. g. by a superimposed
control loop. This enables the drive to accelerate or decelerate.
ƒ At the speed trimming, an analog value at DFSET-N-TRIM is added to
the speed setpoint.
Phase trimming
The phase trimming adds a setpoint at DFSET-A-TRIM to the phase setpoint
and changes the rotor position to the setpoint with the number of
increments provided in either direction (drive is leading or lagging). The
phase is trimmed within a range of ±32767 increments (corresponds to
±½ revolution). Every analog signal can be used as a source.
ƒ The input is done is increments (1 revolution ≙ 65536 increments).
ƒ An analog input signal at DFSET-A-TRIM of
100 % ≙ 1/4 revolution ≙ 16384 increments.
ƒ You can extend the setting range with a multiplier (C0529).
Phase offset
The phase offset (C0252) adds a fixed phase offset to the setpoint of the
drive.
Phase adjustment proportional to speed
With a phase adjustment proportional to speed, the phase leads or lags with
increasing speed.
ƒ Enter the offset in increments under C0253.
ƒ The set phase offset is reached at 15000 rpm of the drive (linear
relationship).
 Note!
Phase corrections are only reasonable if the controller is
operated with incremental encoder feedback and the calculated
following error is used for correcting the speed setpoint. The
following error is output to DFSET-PSET.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.2-23

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
Synchronising to zero track or

touch probe
 Stop!
When the synchronisation via the terminals X5/E4 and X5/E5
(C0532 = 2) is activated, these terminals must not contain any
other signal connections.
When selecting a basic configuration via C0005, the terminals
contain a basic setting.
Selection of synchronisation
C0532 = 1 (zero pulse) The synchronisation is performed on the zero track of the
digital frequency input X9 and the zero track of the feedback
system set under C0490.
C0532 = 2 (touch probe) The synchronisation is performed using the terminals X5/E4
(actual pulse) and X5/E5 (setpoint pulse).
Touch probe initiators can have delay times which cause a speed-dependent
phase offset.
Set the correction for the phase offset under C0429.
C0429 = 16384 ⋅ Correction value

The correction value for the phase offset can be obtained from the data
sheet of the initiator or contact the manufacturer.
Synchronisation modes
C0534 Synchronisation mode Note
0 Inactive Function inactive
1 Continuous synchronisation with
correction in the shortest possible way
2 Continuous synchronisation with After a LOW-HIGH signal to
correction in the shortest possible way DFSET-0-pulse, the zero track is
10 One synchronisation. A phase deviation is synchronised once
corrected in the shortest possible way.
11 One synchronisation. A phase deviation is
corrected in CW direction.
12 One synchronisation. A phase deviation is
corrected in CCW direction.
13 Single synchronisation. A phase difference
is determined between setpoint pulse and
actual pulse and is corrected to the
corresponding direction of rotation
according to the sign.
ƒ During synchronisation, DFSET-ACK i set to HIGH.
 Note!
Drive synchronisation is only reasonable if the controller is
operated with incremental encoder feedback and the calculated
following error is used for correcting the speed setpoint. The
following error is output to DFSET-PSET.
8.2-24  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Internal motor control with V/f characteristic control (MCTRL1) 8.2.6
8.2.6 Internal motor control with V/f characteristic control (MCTRL1)
Description The function block MCTRL1 controls the motor. It is always carried out so that
it does not need to be entered into the processing table.
In the Lenze setting, the controller is set to V/f characteristic control
(C0006 = 5). Without other settings and with analog setpoint selection via
X6/1, X6/2 and connected asynchronous standard motor (50 Hz/400 V)
commissioning can be executed immediately.
The V/f characteristic control is suitable for single drive, multi-motor drives,
synchronous motors, reluctance motors and asynchronous motors.
MCTRL1
DCTRL-QSP >
–1 MCTRL-QSP-OUT
MCTRL-QSP
C0900 Auto-GSB
C0042
C0907/3 C0019 >
–1
C0107 MCTRL-GSB-OUT
MCTRL-GSB
C0904
MCTRL-NSET2
C0905
MCTRL-HI-M-LIM C0050 MCTRL-MMAX
C0893 n.c. n.c.
MCTRL-LO-M-LIM C0906/4 MCTRL-MSET2
C0892 n.c.
C0906/3 C0056 MCTRL-MACT
MCTRL-N/M-SWT
C0899 n.c. oscillation damping
C0907/2 MCTRL-IACT
MCTRL-I-LOAD active
C0902 n.c.
current
MCTRL-I-SET C0907/4 C0235 C0054 MCTRL-IMAX
C0901 n.c.
C0234 C0236
C0105 C0906/5
MCTRL-DCVOLT
QSP
C0053
±100% Imax V/f PWM
1
MCTRL-N-SET 0
C0890 slip compensation
C0906/1
active MCTRL-IXT
MCTRL-VP-N-ADAPT current C0022 C0014 C0018
C0910 C0078 C0023 C0015 C0142
C0087 C0064
C0911 C0021 C0075 C0036 C0143
MCTRL-BOOST C0089 C0076 C0089 C0148
C0903 C0086 MCTRL-FACT
C0090 C0909
C0906/6 speed control C0912
MCTRL-M-ADD 1 C0086 C0058
C0891 n.c. C0913
MCTRL-VACT
C0906/2 -
C0052
C0071 C0074 C0025
C0070
MCTRL-M-TEMP
KTY
C0421
C0063
C0011
X8 Encoder
MCTRL-NACT
1
C0420 MCTRL-PHI-ACT
X9 MCTRL-PHI-ANG
C0025 C0051 MCTRL-PHI-ANA

CONST
fb_mctrl1
Fig. 8.2-15 Internal motor control with V/f characteristic control (MCTRL1)
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.2-25

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks

possible
and relative
setpoint selection
for the
acceleration and
deceleration times
z C0059 must be set
correctly
z Set C0010 < C0011
z C0010 is only
C0011 Nmax 3000 0 {1 rpm} 36000 effective in case of Maximum
analog setpoint speed
selection via AIN1
Important: For
parameter setting
changes in one step
should only be made
when the controller
is inhibited.
boost of 1 % of the rated motor
voltage (C0090)
8.2-26  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2

information at high
power-optimised
with automatic
change-over to
low switching
frequency
Æ Change of C0086, C0087 or  8.2-25
C0089 sets C0021 to the  8.2-48
motor
set to 0
C0036 DC brk value 0.0 0.0 {0.1 A} - Set DC braking current  8.2-25
Æ depends on the controller  8.2-48
C0042 DIS: QSP Quick stop  8.2-25
z Display only  8.2-48
0 QSP inactive Quick stop is not active
1 QSP active Quick stop is active
C0050 MCTRL-NSET2 -100.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 Speed setpoint, function block  8.2-25
MCTRL  8.2-48
z Display of the speed in [%] of
C0011
C0051 MCTRL-NACT -36000 {1 rpm} 36000 Actual speed value, function block  8.2-25
MCTRL  8.2-48
z Display only
C0052 MCTRL-UMOT 0 {1 V} 800 Motor voltage, function block  8.2-25
MCTRL  8.2-48
z Display only
z MCTRL-VACT = 100 % = C0090
C0053 Ug-voltage 0 {1 V} 900 DC-bus voltage, function block  8.2-25
MCTRL  8.2-48
z Display only
z MCTRL-DCVOLT = 100 % =
1000 V
C0054 IMot 0.0 {0.1 A} 500.0 Current motor current, function  8.2-25
block MCTRL  8.2-48
z Read only
z MCTRL-IACT = 100 % = C0022
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.2-27

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks

C0056 MCTRL-MSET2 -100.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 Read only. The output signal  8.2-25
depends on the operating mode:  8.2-48
z Current motor current in case
of V/f characteristic control,
function block MCTRL1
z Torque setpoint in case of
vector control, function block
MCTRL2
C0058 MCTRL-FACT -600.0 {0.1 Hz} 600.0 Output frequency  8.2-25
z MCTRL-FACT = 100.0 % =
1000.0 Hz
C0063 Mot temp 0 {1 °C} 200 Motor temperature  8.2-25
z Monitoring of the motor
temperature must be activated.
z KTY at X8/5, X8/8:
– At 150 °C TRIP OH3 is set
– Early warning is possible via
OH7, temperature is set in
C0121
z PTC, thermal contact at T1, T2:
– If it is released, TRIP or
warning OH8
C0064 Utilisation 0 {1 %} 150 Device utilisation I×t  8.2-25
z Device utilisation during the
last 180 s of operating time
z C0064 > 100 % releases
warning OC5
z C0064 >140 % limits the output
current to the rated controller
current
C0070 Vp speed CTRL 10.0 0.0 {0.1 } 255.9 Gain of speed controller  8.2-25
C0071 Tn speed CTRL 50 1 {1 ms} 6000 Integral-action time of speed  8.2-48
controller
C0071 = 6000 ms: No
integral-action time
C0074 limit N 10.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 Limitation of the speed controller  8.2-25
z Influence of the speed  8.2-48
controller for V/f characteristic
z max. setpoint difference in
percent
controller
8.2-28  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2

controller
used
in C0021, C0022, C0081, C0087,
C0088, C0089, C0090, C0091
speed in C0087
C0086 = 0
frequency in C0089
C0086 = 0
voltage in C0090
0
 Æ depending on C0086, C0088  6.11-5
and C0091
setting
C0086 = 0
C0107 Holding time 0.00 0.00 {0.01 s} 9999.90 Hold time for automatic DC  8.2-25
injection braking (Auto-GSB)  8.2-48
C0132 Controller Æ 0 {1 ms} 9999 Minimum time for controller  8.2-25
 enable fly inhibit with active flying restart  8.2-48
delay circuit, delays the start of the
flying restart process after
controller enable
C0087, C0088, C0089, C0090,
C0091, C0092
A change of one of the codes
resets C0132 to the minimum
time of the selected motor
z The time is derived from the
double rotor time constant
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.2-29

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks

C0140 select direct 0 Search direction during flying  8.2-25
 restart process  8.2-48
z Positive direction of rotation:
The motor rotates in CW
direction with view on the
motor shaft
z Negative direction of rotation:
The motor rotates in CCW
motor shaft
0 NSET Only search in the direction of the
applied setpoint
1 inv. Nset Only search against the direction
of the applied setpoint
2 pos. Only search in positive direction of
rotation
3 neg. Only search in negative direction
of rotation
4 Both, Nset Search at first in the direction of
the applied setpoint and then
against the direction
5 Both, inv. Nset Search at first against the
direction and then in the direction
6 Both pos. Search at first in positive then in
negative direction of rotation
7 Both neg. Search at first in negative then in
positive direction of rotation
C0142 Start options 1 Starting condition for the flying  8.2-25
restart circuit  8.2-48
0 Start lock z Automatic start is inhibited
after
– mains connection
– Cancel of a message
(t > 0.5 s)
– Trip reset
z Flying restart circuit is inactive
z Start after HIGH-LOW-HIGH
level change at X5/28
1 Auto start Automatic start when
X5/28 = HIGH
2 flying lock z Automatic start is inhibited
after
(t > 0.5 s)
– Trip reset
z Flying restart circuit is active
3 Fly restart Automatic start when
X5/28 = HIGH
8.2-30  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2

C0143 limit 2 kHz 0.0 0.0 {0.1 Hz} 20.0 Speed-dependent switching  8.2-25
threshold  8.2-48
z Threshold for automatic
switching frequency reduction
z The controller changes
automatically to 2 kHz when
this value falls below the
threshold
C0145 select ref 1 Selection of the flying restart  8.2-25
 mode  8.2-48
z Reference speed with which the
flying restart process is started
0 REF: C0011 Maximum speed
1 REF: N-ACT Last current speed
2 REF: N-SET Defined main speed setpoint
It is referenced to the setpoint
signal at input NSET-N of the
function block NSET.
If the setpoint signal at input
NSET-N is missing, it is referenced
to the active JOG setpoint
(C0039/x)
C0146 fly current 0 -500 {1} 500 Flying restart circuit, quantity of  8.2-25
current during search process  8.2-48
z Influences the current injection
during search process
C0147 fly dt-f 0 -82 {1} 82 Flying restart circuit, search speed
during flying restart process
z For drives with great
centrifugal masses, reduce the
search speed, if required
z When C0025 >1 and C0006 = 1,
C0234 is set to 0
C0890 CFG: N-SET 5050 NSET-NOUT  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input  8.2-25
 signal, function block MCTRL  8.2-48
z Speed setpoint
C0900 cfg: qsp 10250 R/L/Q-QSP  Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input  8.2-25
z HIGH = drive performs quick
stop
C0903 cfg: BOOST 5015 MCTRL-BOOST  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input  8.2-25
 signal, function block MCTRL
z Boost of the motor voltage
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.2-31

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks

C0904 cfg: DC-BREAK 1000 FIXED0  Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input  8.2-25
z HIGH = Motor is braked
C0905 DIS: DC-BREAK 0 1 Function block MCTRL
C0904
C0906 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block MCTRL  8.2-25
1 DIS: N-SET z Display of the signals linked in  8.2-48
C0890, C0891, C0892, C0893,
2 DIS: M-ADD C0901 and C0903
3 DIS: LO-M-LIM
4 DIS: HI-M-LIM
5 DIS: I-SET
6 DIS: BOOST
C0907 0 1 Function block MCTRL
1 reserved z Display of the signals linked in
C0899, C0900 and C0902
2 DIS: N/M-SWT
3 DIS: QSP
4 DIS: I-LOAD
C0909 speed limit 1 1 +/- 175 % Speed limitation, function block  8.2-25
MCTRL  8.2-48
2 0 ... 175 %
z Limitation of direction of
3 -175 ... 0 % rotation for the speed setpoint
C0910 CFG: VP-ADAPT 1006 FIXED100%  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input  8.2-25
z Gain adaptation of the speed
controller
z If the gain is varying, join to
CURVE-OUT of FB CURVE
C0911 DIS: VP-ADAPT -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block MCTRL
C0910
C0912 OV delay time Æ - {1 ms} - Delay time of the pulse release  8.2-25
after an OU message  8.2-48
Æ depending on C0082, C0086,  9.4-3
C0087, C0088, C0089, C0090,
C0091, C0092
resets C0912 to the time of the
selected motor
C0913 OV handling 0 Value of the motor current during  8.2-25
 the flying restart process or after  8.2-48
an OU message
0 inactive Non-reduced motor current z When C0913 = 1, the motor is
driven with reduced current to
the setpoint speed during the
flying restart process of after an
1 active Reduced motor current OU message.
z The setting is only effective for
the drives EVF9326 ... EVF9333
8.2-32  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Speed setpoint selection ƒ The signal at input MCTRL-N-SET is the speed setpoint in [%] and
always refers to the maximum speed (C0011).
ƒ In the most basic configurations, MCTRL-N-SET is connected with the
function block NSET (speed setpoint conditioning).
– It is also possible to connect MCTRL-N-SET with any other analog
output signal of an FB.
Speed setpoint limitation ƒ The speed setpoint at MCTRL-N-SET is always limited to ±100 % of the
maximum speed nmax (C0011).
ƒ The speed setpoint is converted into a frequency setpoint by the motor
control and limited to a maximum output frequency depending on the
chopper frequency fchop.
Chopper frequency fchop Maximum output frequency
16 kHz 600Hz
8 kHz 300Hz
2/4 kHz 150Hz
Setting of the V/f The motor voltage characteristic is set via the input of the motor ratings.
characteristic
Via the input MCTRL-BOOST the motor voltage can be raised. The input is
connected to C0016 (freely configurable) in all basic configurations.
ƒ To adapt the motor voltage boost to your application, you can also
connect the input with other function blocks.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.2-33

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
Speed control With feedback operation, a PI controller will control the slip.
Activating the speed control
The speed control is activated when you select an incremental encoder in
C0025.
Parameter setting
Code Function
C0070 Gain Vp
C0071 Integral-action time Tn
C0074 Influence of the speed controller at operation with incremental encoder.
Reference is nmax (C0011).
 Note!
If the speed controller influence is adapted to the motor slip to
be expected, the motor cannot accelerate in an uncontrolled way
when the incremental encoder fails.
Adaptation of the speed controller
The gain of the speed controller can be changed online via the input
MCTRL-VP-N-ADAPT. The set gain in C0070 is the reference value for an input
signal of 100 %.
ƒ You can influence the gain (C0070) by adapting a function block (e.g.
CURVE) to MCTRL-VP-N-ADAPT.
ƒ The adaptation is switched off in the Lenze default setting.
8.2-34  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Limitation of the output The limitation of the output current is mainly used for the protection of the
current controller and the stabilisation of the control.
When the maximum permissible motor load is exceeded, you can adapt the
max. output current of the controller accordingly.
Parameter setting
Code Function
C0022 Maximum current in motor mode
C0023 Maximum current in generator mode
If you select a motor (via C0086), the maximum current of which is clearly
lower than the output current of the controller, the maximum motor current
(C0022) is limited automatically to 200% of the rated motor current.
Mode of operation
In the V/f characteristic control mode, a PI controller (Vp = C0075,
Tn = C0076) prevents an excess of the max. permissible motor current by
reducing (motor overload) or increasing (generator overload) of the output
frequency.
The N controller is not active in the V/f characteristic control mode without
feedback.
Consequences
ƒ The motor cannot follow the speed setpoint.
ƒ MCTRL-IMAX is set to HIGH
ƒ When selecting the automatic switching frequency setting (C0018 = 0
or 6), the controller switches to a lower switching frequency so that a
disconnection is not required.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.2-35

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
Automatic speed detection The flying restart circuit is especially suitable for applications with fan and
after controller enable - flying
restart circuit
drives with great mass inertia.
The flying restart circuit serves to enable the controller although the motor
still rotates. The flying restart circuit automatically detects the current
motor speed using this speed to start the motor control. This prevents the
motor from braking to zero speed with subsequent acceleration.
Use C0140 to determine the search direction during the flying restart
process.
ƒ If the direction of rotation of the coasting machine is known, you can
search in the direction of rotation or in the direction of the applied
setpoint.
ƒ If the direction of rotation of the coasting machine is not known, you
can search in both directions of rotation or in both directions of the
applied setpoint.
In case of applications with fan, for example, search is possible in both
directions if the direction of rotation of the free-running fan impeller is
not known due to the air flow.
 Note!
ƒ The flying restart circuit is optimised for a power-adapted
motor. Thus, the rated motor current should not exceed the
rated controller current.
ƒ Although the flying restart circuit is activated (C0142 = 2 or
C0142 = 3), the flying restart process does not start if the pulse
inhibit is deactivated again after an OU message.
In order that the flying restart process starts, connect e.g. the
input DCTRL-CINHx with the output signal MONIT-OU. An OU
message causes an internal controller inhibit. When the
controller inhibit is deactivated, the flying restart process is
started.
8.2-36  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Setting
Selection Code Description
Search direction during C0140 = 0 Lenze setting
flying restart process Only search in the direction of the applied setpoint
C0140 = 1 Only search against the direction of the applied
setpoint
C0140 = 2 Only search in positive direction of rotation
C0140 = 3 Only search in negative direction of rotation
C0140 = 4 Search at first in the direction of the applied setpoint
and then against the direction
C0140 = 5 Search at first against the direction and then in the
direction of the applied setpoint
C0140 = 6 Search at first in positive then in negative direction
of rotation
C0140 = 7 Search at first in negative then in positive direction
of rotation
Reference speed for C0145 = 0 Flying restart circuit referenced to the maximum
starting the search speed (C0011).
process Recommended when the motor speed is unknown
C0145 = 1 Lenze setting
Flying restart circuit referenced to the last current
motor speed
C0145 = 2 Speed setpoint, recommended when motor speed is
known
Value of current during C0146 Influences the value of current during the search
search process process. Reduce the value in case of motors with low
centrifugal mass (speed already increases during
search process ).
Search speed C0147 Influences the search speed. A search process takes
approx. 1 ... 2 s. It may be required to reduce the
search speed to achieve a successful search process
(reduce value).
Activation
Start protection C0142 = 0 The flying restart circuit is inactive. protection
against unexpected start-up means that a restart
requires signal change for enabling the controller (e.
g. LOW-HIGH edge at X5/28).
Automatic start C0142 = 1 Lenze setting
Automatic start, flying restart circuit is inactive
Start after deactivating C0142 = 2 Flying restart circuit is started after resetting 
the switch-on inhibit (mains connection, cancel of messages, (t > 0.5 s) or
TRIP RESET) and renewed controller enable (e. g.
LOW-HIGH edge at X5/28)
Starting without C0142 = 3 Flying restart circuit gets active immediately. No
protection against renewed controller enable required (e. g. LOW-HIGH
unexpected start-up edge at X5/28).
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.2-37

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
Flying restart circuit with protection against unexpected start-up

(C0142 = 2):

0
9300vec087
Fig. 8.2-16 Signal characteristic for manual start with flying restart circuit (C0142 = 2)
 Speed setpoint (e.g. AIN-OUT)
 Actual speed value
 Fault (e.g. DCTRL-FAIL = HIGH)
 Pulse inhibit (e.g. DCTRL-IMP = HIGH)
 Enable controller (e.g. X5/28 = HIGH)
c The motor rotates with setpoint
d A fault (e.g. mains failure, TRIP SET) activates a pulse inhibit  . The motor
coasts. After eliminating the fault (e.g. mains recovery, TRIP RESET) the pulse
inhibit remains active until the controller is enabled again (e.g. LOW-HIGH
edge at X5/28)
Important in case of an OU message: if the OU message is not pending
anymore, the pulse inhibit is deactivated.
e The flying restart circuit is active now and determines the current motor
speed
f The motor is accelerated along the set acceleration ramp to the speed
setpoint and is being kept there
8.2-38  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Flying restart circuit without protection against unexpected start-up

(C0142 = 3):

0
9300vec088
Fig. 8.2-17 Signal characteristic for automatic start with flying restart circuit (C0142 = 3)
d A fault (e.g. mains failure, TRIP SET) activates a pulse inhibit . The motor
inhibit is deactivated.
e The flying restart circuit is active now and calculates the current motor
speed. If, after an OU message, the pulse inhibit is deactivated again, the
flying restart circuit is not started.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.2-39

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
Quick stop (QSP) After a signal request, the motor is decelerated to standstill when an internal
ramp function generator has been activated.
Mode of operation
ƒ Quick stop is active
– MCTRL-QSP = HIGH
– The control word DCTRL-QSP is applied
– DC injection braking (GSB) is not active (GSB has priority over quick
stop)
ƒ If quick stop is active, the motor brakes to standstill with the
deceleration time set in C0105. MCTRL-QSP-OUT is set to HIGH.
8.2-40  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Manual DC injection braking ƒ After a signal, the motor is braked by injecting a DC current.
ƒ Braking in generator mode must be used for controlled brake ramps.
ƒ The hold time (C0107) has no influence. The motor remains braked
until MCTRL-GSB is set to LOW.
 Note!
Manual DC injection braking has priority over quick stop.
Setting
DC braking current C0036 DC braking current with which the motor is braked
 Stop!
An excessive DC braking current and braking time can thermally
overload the motor. Special care must be taken when using
self-ventilated motors.
Activation
The input MCTRL-GSB in the function block MCTRL is triggered with HIGH
level.
ƒ MCTRL-GSB = HIGH: Function is activated
ƒ MCTRL-GSB = LOW: Function is not activated
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.2-41

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
Function procedure

0
1
5 C0036
9300vec089
Fig. 8.2-18 Signal sequence with DC injection braking

 Actual speed value of the motor (e. g. MCTRL-NACT)
 Controller output current (e. g. MCTRL-IACT)
 Pulse inhibit (e. g. DCTRL-IMP)
 Activating DC injection braking (MCTRL-GSB)
 DC injection braking is active (MCTRL-GSB-OUT)
MCTRL-GSB-OUT = HIGH: Function is active
MCTRL-GSB-OUT = LOW: Function is not active
c The motor rotates with the preset speed. The current adjusts itself as a
function of the load .
d DC injection braking is activated with MCTRL-GSB = HIGH. Pulse inhibit 
is set. The motor coasts.
e The pulse inhibit is deactivated and the DC braking current set in C0036 is
injected
f DC injection braking is deactivated with MCTRL-GSB = LOW
The motor is accelerated to speed setpoint at the set acceleration ramp and
is kept there.
8.2-42  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Automatic DC injection When the speed falls below a settable speed setpoint threshold, the function
braking
”DC injection braking” is activated.
 Note!
Automatic DC-injection braking has priority over quick stop.
Setting
Speed setpoint threshold C0019 If the values fall below the threshold, DC-injection
braking is released
Hold time C0107 Duration of DC-injection braking. After the hold time,
pulse inhibit is set.
 Stop!
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.2-43

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
Function procedure
Automatic DC injection braking provides two function procedures, each
with a different reaction of the controller. The parameter setting is identical
for both function procedures.
Function procedure 1:
ƒ After the hold time has elapsed (C0107), the controller automatically
sets pulse inhibit .

0
2
5 C0036
C0107
9300vec090
Fig. 8.2-19 Signal characteristic with automatic DC injection braking

 Speed setpoint (e. g. AIN-OUT)
 Actual speed value of the motor (e. g. MCTRL-NACT)
 Controller output current (e. g. MCTRL-IACT)
 Pulse inhibit (e. g. DCTRL-IMP)
d With a speed setpoint < speed threshold (C0019), DC injection braking is
activated. Pulse inhibit  is set. The motor coasts.
injected
f After the hold time (C0107) pulse inhibit  is set
8.2-44  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
ƒ If you define a speed setpoint > speed threshold (C0019) before the
hold time elapses, DC-injection braking is deactivated and the drive
follows the speed setpoint. If the speed falls below the threshold again,
DC-injection braking is reactivated and the hold time is restarted.

0
C0019
2
5 C0036
9300vec091

injected
f DC-injection braking is deactivated as soon as the speed setpoint exceeds
the speed threshold (C0019). The motor is accelerated to the defined speed
setpoint and kept there.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.2-45

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
Oscillation damping Suppressing no-load oscillations in case of:

involved.
Adjustment
The Lenze setting is designed for power-adapted motors.
increase it).
8.2-46  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Slip compensation The speed of an asynchronous machine decreases when being loaded. This
load-dependent speed drop is called slip. By setting C0021 the slip can be
partly compensated.
In the V/f characteristic control mode the slip compensation is only active at
operation without feedback (C0025 = 1).
V/f characteristic control
The slip compensation (C0021) is automatically calculated from the rated
motor speed (C0087) and the rated motor frequency (C0089). The entered
slip constant [%] is the rated slip of the motor in [%] relating to the
synchronous speed of the motor.
ƒ Calculating the slip compensation and entering it into C0021:
n rsyn − n r E Slip constant (C0021) [%]

s= n rsyn ⋅ 100 % nrsyn Synchronous motor speed [min-1]
f r ⋅ 60 nr Rated motor speed according to

n rsyn = p motor nameplate [min-1]
fr Rated motor frequency according to
motor nameplate [Hz]
p Number of motor pole pairs (1, 2, 3,
...)
ƒ If required, the slip compensation can be adapted manually:

– If C0021 is set too high, the drive may get unstable.
– With cyclic load impulses (e. g. centrifugal pump) a smooth motor
characteristic is achieved by smaller values in C0021 (possibly
negative values)
– Parameterise C0078 (filter time for the slip compensation) if you
want to change the motor response time to load changes
(dynamic ↔ slow).
ƒ The actual speed is output as an analog signal (in [%] of nmax (C0011))
to MCTRL-NACT.
 Note!
When operating synchronous or reluctance motors, C0021 must
be set to 0.
Inhibiting the direction of If the motor may only rotate in one direction, you can limit the output
rotation voltage generation to one direction of rotation via C0909.
Code Description
C0909 = 1 The motor rotates in both directions
C0909 = 2 Motor rotates clockwise, ”positive direction of rotation”
(View of the motor shaft)
C0909 = 3 Motor rotates counter-clockwise, ”negative direction of rotation”
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.2-47

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
8.2.7 Internal motor control with vector control (MCTRL2)
Description The function block MCTRL2 controls the motor. Since it is always executed,
it does not need to be entered into the processing table.
Compared with the V/f characteristic control the vector control (C0006 = 1)
has a much higher torque efficiency at the same motor current. The motor
is monitored and controlled via an internal motor model. This serves to
achieve an optimum operating behaviour of the motor at any time.
The vector control can be used for single drives, asynchronous motors and
multi-motor drives of the same type with rigid coupling.
MCTRL2
DCTRL-QSP >
–1 MCTRL-QSP-OUT
MCTRL-QSP
C0900 Auto-GSB
C0042
C0907/3 C0019 >
–1
C0107 MCTRL-GSB-OUT
MCTRL-GSB
C0904
MCTRL-NSET2
C0905
MCTRL-HI-M-LIM C0050 MCTRL-MMAX
C0893
MCTRL-MSET2
MCTRL-LO-M-LIM C0906/4
C0892
C0056 MCTRL-MACT
MCTRL-N/M-SWT C0906/3
C0899
MCTRL-IACT
MCTRL-I-LOAD C0907/2
C0902 C0054 MCTRL-IMAX
MCTRL-I-SET C0907/4
C0901 MCTRL-DCVOLT
C0105 C0906/5 C0053
QSP
±100%
1 + + 1 VECT-CTRL PWM
MCTRL-N-SET 0
0 + 0
C0890 - + 1
C0906/1
MCTRL-VP-N-ADAPT MCTRL-IXT
C0910 C0070 C0022 C0018
C0071 C0023 C0021
C0911 C0081 C0036 C0064
C0497
C0086 C0087 C0075
MCTRL-BOOST speed control MCTRL-FACT
C0903 n.c. C0088 C0076
C0089 C0143
C0906/6 C0090 C0234 C0058
C0091 C0235 MCTRL-VACT
MCTRL-M-ADD
C0891 C0082 C0236
C0084 C0909 C0052
C0906/2 C0148
C0085
C0092
C0898 MCTRL-M-TEMP
C0912 KTY
C0421 C0913 C0063
C0011
X8 Encoder
MCTRL-NACT
1
C0420 MCTRL-PHI-ACT
X9 MCTRL-PHI-ANG
C0025 C0051 MCTRL-PHI-ANA

CONST
fb_mctrl2
Fig. 8.2-21 Internal motor control with vector control (MCTRL2)
8.2-48  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Internal motor control with vector control (MCTRL2) 8.2.7

possible
and relative
setpoint selection
for the
acceleration and
deceleration times
z C0059 must be set
correctly
z Set C0010 < C0011
z C0010 is only
C0011 Nmax 3000 0 {1 rpm} 36000 effective in case of Maximum
analog setpoint speed
selection via AIN1
Important: For
parameter setting
changes in one step
should only be made
when the controller
is inhibited.
information at high
power-optimised
with automatic
change-over to
low switching
frequency
C0019 THRESH 0 -36000 {1 rpm} 36000 Operating threshold - automatic  8.2-25
NACT=0 DC injection brake (Auto-GSB)  8.2-48
z Falling below the threshold in
C0019 activates automatic DC
injection braking when the
holding time set under C0107 >
0
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.2-49

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks

Æ Change of C0086, C0087 or  8.2-25
C0089 sets C0021 to the  8.2-48
motor
set to 0
C0420 X8.
C0420
X8.
111 IT1024-5V 1024 inc
112 IT2048-5V 2048 inc
113 IT4096-5V 4096 inc
MCTRL  8.2-48
C0011
MCTRL  8.2-48
z Display only
MCTRL  8.2-48
z Display only
z MCTRL-VACT = 100 % = C0090
MCTRL  8.2-48
z Display only
1000 V
z Read only
z MCTRL-IACT = 100 % = C0022
8.2-50  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2

depends on the operating mode:  8.2-48
MCTRL2
1000.0 Hz
C0121
warning OH8
warning OC5
current
controller
C0071 = 6000 ms: No
controller
C0082 Mot Rr Æ 0.000 {0.001 Ω} 65.000 Motor rotor resistance  6.6-1
 Æ Value is evaluated by motor  6.6-13
C0087, C0088, C0089, C0090
and C0091
sets the corresponding rotor
resistance value
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.2-51

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks

(C0148, C0149)
C0085 Mot Lss Æ 0.0 {0.1 mH} 6500.0 Motor leakage inductance  6.6-1
(C0148, C0149)
used
in C0021, C0022, C0081, C0087,
C0088, C0089, C0090, C0091
speed in C0087
C0086 = 0
C0086 = 0
frequency in C0089
C0086 = 0
voltage in C0090
0
in C0091
C0086 = 0
C0088, C0089, C0090 and
C0091
8.2-52  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2

 Æ depending on C0086, C0088  6.11-5
and C0091
setting
C0086 = 0
 enable fly inhibit with active flying restart  8.2-48
delay circuit, delays the start of the
controller enable
C0087, C0088, C0089, C0090,
C0091, C0092
motor shaft
motor shaft
applied setpoint
2 pos. Only search in positive direction of
rotation
of rotation
direction and then in the direction
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.2-53

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks

after
(t > 0.5 s)
– Trip reset
X5/28 = HIGH
after
(t > 0.5 s)
– Trip reset
X5/28 = HIGH
threshold
 mode  8.2-48
z Reference speed with which the
flying restart process is started
(C0039/x)
z Influences the current injection
during search process
8.2-54  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2

drive has stopped
C0088, C0089, C0090, C0091

not rotate!
again
z When C0025 >1 and C0006 = 1,
C0234 is set to 0
C0421 ENC VOLTAGE 5.00 5.00 {0.1 V} 8.00 Supply voltage for the incremental
 encoder at X8
C0497 Nact filter 2.0 0.0 {0.1 ms} 50.0 Filter time constant Nact for actual  8.2-48
speed value, function block
MCTRL2
z Internal filtering of the speed
signal for control
z C0497 = 0 ms: Switched off
z Speed setpoint
C0891 cfg: M-add 1000 FIXED0%  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input  8.2-48
z Additional torque setpoint or
torque setpoint
C0892 cfg: lo-M-lim 5700 ANEG1-OUT  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
z Lower torque limit in [%] of
C0057
C0893 cfg: hi-M-lim 19523 FCODE-472/3  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
z Upper torque limit in [%] of
C0057
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.2-55

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks

C0898 CFG: M-LIM 0 0 M-LIM ON Reduced torque Torque limitation in the field  8.2-48
 switch limit is active weakening range, function block
MCTRL
z If the torque limit is reduced,
the maximum possible torque
1 M-LIM OFF Reduced torque in the field weakening range is
limit is inactive lowered with 1/f. This provides
a higher motor stability in the
field weakening range
C0899 cfg: n/m-swt 1000 FIXED0  Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input  8.2-48
z LOW = active speed control
z HIGH = active torque control
stop
C0901 cfg: i-set 1000 FIXED0%  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input  8.2-48
z Setting of integral action
component of the speed
controller
C0902 cfg: i-load 1000 FIXED0  Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
z HIGH = the integral action
component at MCTRL-I-SET is
accepted by the speed
controller
C0904
C0890, C0891, C0892, C0893,
3 DIS: LO-M-LIM
4 DIS: HI-M-LIM
5 DIS: I-SET
6 DIS: BOOST
C0899, C0900 and C0902
2 DIS: N/M-SWT
3 DIS: QSP
4 DIS: I-LOAD
MCTRL  8.2-48
2 0 ... 175 %
controller
C0910
8.2-56  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2

Æ depending on C0082, C0086,  9.4-3
C0087, C0088, C0089, C0090,
C0091, C0092
selected motor
an OU message
0 inactive Non-reduced motor current z When C0913 = 1, the motor is
flying restart process of after an
1 active Reduced motor current OU message.
Speed setpoint selection ƒ The signal at input MCTRL-N-SET is the speed setpoint in [%] and
always refers to the maximum speed (C0011).
ƒ In the most basic configurations, MCTRL-N-SET is connected with the
function block NSET (speed setpoint conditioning).
– It is also possible to connect MCTRL-N-SET with any other analog
output signal of an FB.
Speed setpoint limitation ƒ The speed setpoint at MCTRL-N-SET is always limited to ±100 % of the
maximum speed nmax (C0011).
ƒ The speed setpoint is converted into a frequency setpoint by the motor
control and limited to a maximum output frequency depending on the
chopper frequency fchop.
Chopper frequency fchop Maximum output frequency
16 kHz 600Hz
8 kHz 300Hz
2/4 kHz 150Hz
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.2-57

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
Speed control A PI controller compares the speed setpoint with the actual speed of the
motor model and creates a torque setpoint from the speed variation.
ƒ the actual speed is output as an analog signal (in [%] of nmax (C0011))
to MCTRL-NACT.
Parameter setting
Code Function
C0070 Gain Vp
C0071 Integral-action time Tn
Operation with speed feedback

To change over to operation with external speed feedback, the incremental
encoder must be selected via C0025. The external speed feedback serves to
operate the motor in all of the four torque/speed quadrants.
Adaptation of the speed controller
Use the input MCTRL-VP-N-ADAPT to change the gain of the speed controller
online. The set gain in C0070 is the reference value for an input signal of
100 %.
ƒ By adapting a function block (e.g. CURVE) to MCTRL-VP-N-ADAPT you
can influence the gain (C0070).
ƒ In the Lenze setting the adaptation is deactivated.
Behaviour when speed setpoint = 0
If the speed setpoint = 0 (MCTRL-N-SET = 0) and actual speed value ≈ 0
(MCTRL-NACT ≈ 0), the speed controller is switched off. The motor merely
receives its magnetising current.
Behaviour in braking operation at very low speed
 Stop!
A longer-lasting braking operation with very low speed can lead
to an unstable vector control. Remedy:
ƒ Passing through the critical speed range more quickly.
ƒ Using speed feedback.
8.2-58  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Temperature detection
For motors with temperature detection (KTY83-110) the controller can
consider temperature changes in its motor model. The accuracy and stability
of the vector control are improved considerably.
ƒ Sensor connection:
– X8/5 = -KTY (rt/ws/bl)
– X8/8 = +KTY (br/gr/sw)
 Note!
You can also use the thermal sensor (KTY) without speed
feedback.
ƒ When monitoring SD6 (C0594) is activated, temperature feedback is
activated at the same time.
ƒ First, activate the temperature feedback and then start the motor
identification to consider the motor temperature.
ƒ In addition, you can activate and parameterise the monitoring
functions OH3 (C0583) and OH7 (C0584).
ƒ The current motor temperature can be displayed via C0063.
Setting integral action component
To initialise the speed controller with a starting torque, the integral action
component of the speed controller can be described via MCTRL-I-SET
(starting value) and MCTRL-I-LOAD (control signal).
Input signal Effect
MCTRL-I-LOAD = HIGH z The speed controller transmits the value at MCTRL-I-SET to its
integral action component
z The P component is switched off
MCTRL-I-LOAD = LOW The speed controller is active
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.2-59

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
Torque limitation in the field The function is suitable for applications which also require a constant torque
weakening range in the field weakening range.
ƒ With quick stop (QSP) the torque limitation becomes inactive.
ƒ When the motor torque reaches the defined limit, the drive cannot
follow the speed setpoint anymore and the output MCTRL-MMAX is set
to HIGH.
External setting of torque limits
If the maximum torque reached in the field weakening operation is too low,
the torque limits can be changed via the inputs MCTRL-HI-M-LIM and
MCTRL-LO-M-LIM.
ƒ MCTRL-HI-M-LIM defines the upper torque limit in [%] of the maximum
torque displayed in C0057.
Maximum possible input value: 199.99 %
ƒ MCTRL-LO-M-LIM defines the lower torque limit in [%] of the maximum
torque displayed in C0057.
Minimum possible input value: -199.99 %
 Note!
The maximum possible torque displayed under C0057refers to
the basic speed range (zero speed to rated speed of the motor)
and is calculated from the nameplate data and the setting of the
maximum motor current under C0022.
8.2-60  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
M
199 %
100 %
1
80 %
2
nN 2 nN 3 nN n
9300vec153
Fig. 8.2-22 Torque characteristics when being evaluated with C0898

 ”Internal limit characteristic” when C0898 = 1 and MCTRL-HI-M-LIM = 199 %
Boost of the upper torque limit when MCTRL-HI-M-LIM = 199 % and
C0898 = 0
 Torque characteristic when C0898 = 1 and MCTRL-HI-M-LIM = 80 %
 Torque characteristic when C0898 = 0 and MCTRL-HI-M-LIM = 80 %
Evaluating torque limits using C0898

Code C0898 serves to evaluate the defined torque limits at the inputs
MCTRL-LO-M-LIM and MCTRL-HI-M-LIM using the function 1/fact. This serves
to reduce the torque.
Evaluation of the torque C0898 = 0 Lenze setting
limit in the field The input signals at MCTRL-LO-M-LIM and
weakening range MCTRL-HI-M-LIM are evaluated with 1/fact.
C0898 = 1 An ”internal limit characteristic” which corresponds
to a maximum torque limit of ±199,99 % is evaluated
with 1/fact.
z The torque remains constant until the limit
characteristic is reached. This requires that the
controller provides a sufficient amount of current
and the motor is stable within the required speed
range.
z The input signals at MCTRL-LO-M-LIM and
MCTRL-HI-M-LIM are not evaluated with 1/fact.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.2-61

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
Limitation of the output The output current is mainly limited for protecting the controller and
current stabilising the drive control.
If the maximum permissible motor load is exceeded, the maximum output
current of the controller must be adjusted accordingly.
Parameter setting
Code Function
C0022 Maximum current in motor mode
C0023 Maximum current in generator mode
If you select a motor via C0086 the maximum current of which is much lower
than the output current of the controller, the maximum current in motor
mode (C0022) is automatically limited to the double rated motor current.
Mode of functioning
In the vector control mode the limit values are complied with by means of
the automatic limitation of the speed controller.
The speed controller is limited if the motor current has reached the limit set
under C0022 or C0023 (the controller supplies the max. output current). In
this status
Consequences
ƒ The motor cannot follow the speed setpoint.
ƒ MCTRL-IMAX is set to HIGH.
ƒ When selecting the automatic chopper frequency setting (C0018 = 0 or
6) a lower chopper frequency is switched to so that the unit will not be
switched off.
8.2-62  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Torque control with speed As an alternative to the speed control, the vector control can be switched to
limitation torque control with speed limitation.
 Note!
In the basic configurations C0005 = 4xxx the torque control with
speed limitation is already set.
ƒ When MCTRL-N/M-SWT = HIGH, the torque control with speed
limitation is active.
– The torque control with torque setpoint selection via MCTRL-M-ADD
is active.
– MCTRL-M-ADD acts as a bipolar torque setpoint.
– The sign of the speed limitation value at MCTRL-N-SET is
automatically created from the sign of the torque setpoint at
MCTRL-M-ADD. Thus, the speed limitation value acts in both
directions of rotation.
– The actual torque is output as analog signal (in [%] of Mmax (C0057))
to MCTRL-MACT.
 Stop!
If the motor is to create a holding torque at standstill, the torque
setpoint must not fall below a certain limit.
ƒ Depending on the motor type and accuracy of the identified
motor parameters, the vector control can become unstable if
the torque setpoint <10 % ... 20 %.
ƒ Operate the motor with speed feedback when the required
holding torque is within the critical region.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.2-63

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
Automatic speed detection The flying restart circuit is especially suitable for applications with fan and
after controller enable - flying
restart circuit
drives with great mass inertia.
The flying restart circuit serves to enable the controller although the motor
still rotates. The flying restart circuit automatically detects the current
motor speed using this speed to start the motor control. This prevents the
motor from braking to zero speed with subsequent acceleration.
Use C0140 to determine the search direction during the flying restart
process.
ƒ If the direction of rotation of the coasting machine is known, you can
search in the direction of rotation or in the direction of the applied
setpoint.
ƒ If the direction of rotation of the coasting machine is not known, you
can search in both directions of rotation or in both directions of the
applied setpoint.
In case of applications with fan, for example, search is possible in both
directions if the direction of rotation of the free-running fan impeller is
not known due to the air flow.
 Note!
ƒ The flying restart circuit is optimised for a power-adapted
motor. Thus, the rated motor current should not exceed the
rated controller current.
ƒ Although the flying restart circuit is activated (C0142 = 2 or
C0142 = 3), the flying restart process does not start if the pulse
inhibit is deactivated again after an OU message.
In order that the flying restart process starts, connect e.g. the
input DCTRL-CINHx with the output signal MONIT-OU. An OU
message causes an internal controller inhibit. When the
controller inhibit is deactivated, the flying restart process is
started.
Special features of vector control
ƒ With a known motor speed there is no need of the flying restart circuit
if a suitable setpoint becomes effective instantaneously after controller
enable (e.g. assign setpoint to NSET-CINH-VAL).
ƒ By selecting a suitable setpoint the flying restart processes can be
reduced to approx. 200 ms.
ƒ For operation with feedback there is no need to activate the flying
restart circuit as the signal as the signal MCTRL-NACT acts as the
setpoint at NSET-CINH-VAL.
8.2-64  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Setting
Search direction during C0140 = 0 Lenze setting
flying restart process Only search in the direction of the applied setpoint
C0140 = 1 Only search against the direction of the applied
setpoint
C0140 = 2 Only search in positive direction of rotation
C0140 = 3 Only search in negative direction of rotation
C0140 = 4 Search at first in the direction of the applied setpoint
and then against the direction
C0140 = 5 Search at first against the direction and then in the
C0140 = 6 Search at first in positive then in negative direction
of rotation
C0140 = 7 Search at first in negative then in positive direction
of rotation
Reference speed for C0145 = 0 Flying restart circuit referenced to the maximum
starting the search speed (C0011).
process Recommended when the motor speed is unknown
C0145 = 1 Lenze setting
Flying restart circuit referenced to the last current
motor speed
C0145 = 2 Speed setpoint, recommended when motor speed is
known
Value of current during C0146 Influences the value of current during the search
search process process. Reduce the value in case of motors with low
centrifugal mass (speed already increases during
search process ).
Search speed C0147 Influences the search speed. A search process takes
approx. 1 ... 2 s. It may be required to reduce the
search speed to achieve a successful search process
(reduce value).
Activation
Start protection C0142 = 0 The flying restart circuit is inactive. protection
against unexpected start-up means that a restart
requires signal change for enabling the controller (e.
g. LOW-HIGH edge at X5/28).
Automatic start C0142 = 1 Lenze setting
Automatic start, flying restart circuit is inactive
Start after deactivating C0142 = 2 Flying restart circuit is started after resetting 
the switch-on inhibit (mains connection, cancel of messages, (t > 0.5 s) or
TRIP RESET) and renewed controller enable (e. g.
LOW-HIGH edge at X5/28)
Starting without C0142 = 3 Flying restart circuit gets active immediately. No
protection against renewed controller enable required (e. g. LOW-HIGH
unexpected start-up edge at X5/28).
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.2-65

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
Flying restart circuit with protection against unexpected start-up

(C0142 = 2):

0
9300vec087
Fig. 8.2-23 Signal characteristic for manual start with flying restart circuit (C0142 = 2)
d A fault (e.g. mains failure, TRIP SET) activates a pulse inhibit  . The motor
inhibit remains active until the controller is enabled again (e.g. LOW-HIGH
edge at X5/28)
Important in case of an OU message: if the OU message is not pending
anymore, the pulse inhibit is deactivated.
e The flying restart circuit is active now and determines the current motor
speed
8.2-66  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Flying restart circuit without protection against unexpected start-up

(C0142 = 3):

0
9300vec088
Fig. 8.2-24 Signal characteristic for automatic start with flying restart circuit (C0142 = 3)
d A fault (e.g. mains failure, TRIP SET) activates a pulse inhibit . The motor
inhibit is deactivated.
e The flying restart circuit is active now and calculates the current motor
speed. If, after an OU message, the pulse inhibit is deactivated again, the
flying restart circuit is not started.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.2-67

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
Quick stop (QSP) After a signal, the motor is decelerated to standstill when an internal ramp
function generator has been activated.
Mode of operation
ƒ Quick stop is active
– MCTRL-QSP = HIGH
– The control word DCTRL-QSP is applied
– DC injection braking (GSB) is not active (GSB has priority over quick
stop)
ƒ When quick stop is active:
– the motor decelerates to standstill with the deceleration time set in
C0105,
– A torque control is deactivated and the motor is controlled by the
speed controller.
– The torque limitations MCTRL-LO-M-LIM and MCTRL-HI-M-LIM are
deactivated.
– MCTRL-QSP-OUT is set to HIGH.
 Note!
When the motor is at standstill, the field current is injected into
the motor.
8.2-68  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Manual DC injection braking ƒ After a signal, the motor is braked by injecting a DC current.
ƒ Braking in generator mode must be used for controlled brake ramps.
ƒ The hold time (C0107) has no influence. The motor remains braked
until MCTRL-GSB is set to LOW.
 Note!
Manual DC injection braking has priority over quick stop.
Special features of vector control with feedback
ƒ If the DC braking current (C0036) ≤ than the motor magnetising current,
the motor magnetising current is injected.
ƒ If the DC braking current (C0036) > than the motor magnetising current,
the DC braking current is injected.
Setting
 Stop!
Activation
The input MCTRL-GSB in the function block MCTRL is triggered with HIGH
level.
ƒ MCTRL-GSB = HIGH: Function is activated
ƒ MCTRL-GSB = LOW: Function is not activated
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.2-69

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
Function procedure

0
1
5 C0036
9300vec089
Fig. 8.2-25 Signal sequence with DC injection braking

 Actual speed value of the motor (e. g. MCTRL-NACT)
 Controller output current (e. g. MCTRL-IACT)
 Pulse inhibit (e. g. DCTRL-IMP)
 Activating DC injection braking (MCTRL-GSB)
d DC injection braking is activated with MCTRL-GSB = HIGH. Pulse inhibit 
is set. The motor coasts.
injected
f DC injection braking is deactivated with MCTRL-GSB = LOW
The motor is accelerated to speed setpoint at the set acceleration ramp and
is kept there.
8.2-70  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Automatic DC injection When the speed falls below a settable speed setpoint threshold, the function
braking
”DC injection braking” is activated.
 Note!
Automatic DC-injection braking has priority over quick stop.
Special features of vector control with feedback
ƒ If the DC braking current (C0036) ≤ than the motor magnetising current,
the motor magnetising current is injected.
ƒ If the DC braking current (C0036) > than the motor magnetising current,
the DC braking current is injected.
Setting
Speed setpoint threshold C0019 If the values fall below the threshold, DC-injection
braking is released
Hold time C0107 Duration of DC-injection braking. After the hold time,
pulse inhibit is set.
 Stop!
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.2-71

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
Function procedure
Automatic DC injection braking provides two function procedures, each
with a different reaction of the controller. The parameter setting is identical
for both function procedures.
ƒ After the hold time has elapsed (C0107), the controller automatically
sets pulse inhibit .

0
2
5 C0036
C0107
9300vec090

injected
f After the hold time (C0107) pulse inhibit  is set
8.2-72  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
ƒ If you define a speed setpoint > speed threshold (C0019) before the
hold time elapses, DC-injection braking is deactivated and the drive
follows the speed setpoint. If the speed falls below the threshold again,
DC-injection braking is reactivated and the hold time is restarted.

0
C0019
2
5 C0036
9300vec091

injected
f DC-injection braking is deactivated as soon as the speed setpoint exceeds
the speed threshold (C0019). The motor is accelerated to the defined speed
setpoint and kept there.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.2-73

8 Configuration
8.2 Function blocks
Oscillation damping Suppressing no-load oscillations in case of:

involved.
Adjustment
The Lenze setting is designed for power-adapted motors.
increase it).
 Note!
Restricted effect with vector control
ƒ The oscillation damping has no influence on the drive
behaviour at low tendency to oscillation of the speed
controller.
ƒ Especially for drives > 55 kW with a tendency to oscillation it
may be necessary to deactivate the oscillation damping
(C0234 = 0 %).
ƒ For operation with feedback the oscillation damping has no
influence.
8.2-74  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Function blocks 8.2
Slip compensation Vector control

Use C0021 to change the influence of the rotor resistance (C0082)
proportionally:
ƒ Reduce the value in C0021 at an increasing speed (negative values)
ƒ Increase the value in C0021 at a decreasing speed
 Note!
Inhibiting the direction of If the motor may only rotate in one direction, you can limit the output
rotation voltage generation to one direction of rotation via C0909.
Code Description
C0909 = 1 The motor rotates in both directions
C0909 = 2 Motor rotates clockwise, ”positive direction of rotation”
C0909 = 3 Motor rotates counter-clockwise, ”negative direction of rotation”
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.2-75

Configuration 8
Code table 8.3
8.3 Code table
How to read the code table:
Column Abbreviation Meaning

Code Cxxxx Code Cxxxx z Parameter value of the code can be defined
1 Subcode 1 of Cxxxx differently in each parameter set
z Parameter value is accepted immediately (ONLINE)
2 Subcode 2 of Cxxxx
* Parameter value of the code is the same in all parameter sets
 Changed parameter or the code or subcode is accepted after pressing  
 Changed parameter of the code or subcode is accepted after pressing  ,
if the controller is inhibited
Name Name of the code
Lenze Lenze setting (value on delivery or after restoring the delivery status with C0002)
Æ The column ”IMPORTANT” contains further information
Selection 1 {%} 99 min. value {unit} max. value
IMPORTANT - Short, important explanations

C0002 PAR LOAD 1 Loading a parameter set
 0 Load default Restore the delivery status
1 Load PS1 z Load parameter set saved in
2 Load PS2 the controller and activate it
z Parameter set 1 is loaded
3 Load PS3 automatically after every
4 Load PS4 mains connection
11 Load ext PS1 Load parameter set from the
12 Load ext PS2 keypad into the controller and
activate it
13 Load ext PS3
14 Load ext PS4
20 ext -> EEPROM Load all parameter sets from the
keypad into the controller
C0003 PAR SAVE 0 Save parameter set
 0 Ready Saving is completed
1 Save PS1 Save the parameters loaded in
2 Save PS2 the controller into a parameter
set (PS1 .... PS4)
3 Save PS3
4 Save PS4
11 Save extern All parameter sets (PS1 .... PS4)
must be transferred from the
controller to the keypad XT
C0004 Op display 56 0 {1} 1999 Operating display
 z Keypad shows selected code in
the operating level if no other
status messages of C0183 are
active
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.3-1

8 Configuration
8.3 Code table

C0005 SIGNAL CFG Selection of the basic
 configuration
1000 0 Common Modified basic The first two digits indicate the
configuration predefined basic function, e. g.:
z 01xxx: Speed control
100 CFG: emty All internal
connections are The third digit indicates
removed additional functions:
z xx0xx: No additional function
1000 Speed mode Speed control z xx1xx: Brake control
z xx2xx: Setpoint selection via
2000 Step mode Step control motor potentiometer
z xx3xx: PID controller
3000 Lead screw Traversing control z xx4xx: Mains failure control

z xx5xx: Setpoint selection via
master frequency
4000 Torque mode Torque control
z xx6xx: Gearbox factor - analog
trimming
5000 DF master Digital frequency z xx7xx: Gearbox factor - digital
master trimming
z xx8xx: Master frequency ramp
6000 DF slv bus Master frequency function generator
slave (bar)
Die fourth digit indicates the
7000 DF slv cas Digital frequency predefined voltage source for the
slave (cascade) control terminals:
z xxx0x: External supply voltage
8000 Dancer ctrl e Dancer position z xxx1x: Internal supply voltage
control with
external diameter The fifth digit indicates the
measurement predefined device control
z xxxx0: Terminal control
9000 Dancer ctrl i Dancer position z xxxx1: RS232, RS485 or optical
control with fibre
internal diameter z xxxx3: INTERBUS or
measurement PROFIBUS-DP
z xxxx5: System bus (CAN)
possible
C0009 LECOM 1 1 {1} 99 LECOM controller address
ADDRESS z Bus device number when
operated via interface
z 10, 20 ... 90 reserved for
broadcast to device groups
with RS232, RS485, optical
fibre
8.3-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Code table 8.3

and relative
setpoint selection
for the
acceleration and
deceleration
times
z C0059 must be
set correctly
z Set C0010 <
C0011
C0011 Nmax 3000 0 {1 rpm} 36000 z C0010 is only Maximum
effective in case speed
of analog setpoint
selection via AIN1
Important: For
parameter setting
changes in one step
should only be made
when the controller
is inhibited.
C0012 TIR (ACC) 5.00 0.00 {0.01 s} 9999.90 Acceleration time Tir of the main  6.10-3
setpoint
0 ... C0011
C0013 TIF (DEC) 5.00 0.00 {0.01 s} 9999.90 Deceleration time Tif of the main
setpoint
0 ... C0011
boost of 1 % of the rated
motor voltage (C0090)
C0017 FCODE (Qmin) 50 -36000 {1 rpm} 36000 Qmin-switching threshold
(FCODE)
z Programmable speed
threshold
z If the current speed is < C0017,
CMP1-OUT is activated.
z Freely configurable code
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.3-3

8 Configuration
8.3 Code table

information at high
5 16 kHz sin noise optimised – fchop = 16 kHz
⇒fout = 600 Hz
power-optimised – fchop = 4 kHz ⇒fout = 150 Hz
with automatic
change-over to
low switching
frequency
C0019 THRESH NACT=0 0 -36000 {1 rpm} 36000 Operating threshold - automatic  8.2-25
DC injection brake (Auto-GSB)  8.2-48
z Falling below the threshold in
C0019 activates automatic DC
injection braking when the
holding time set under C0107
>0
C0020 turn value 100 0 {1 %} 200 Influence on concentricity factor
z Manual influence on the
concentricity factor of the
motor
Æ Change of C0086, C0087 or  8.2-25
C0089 sets C0021 to the  8.2-48
motor
set to 0
C0420 X8.
C0420
X8.
111 IT1024-5V 1024 inc
112 IT2048-5V 2048 inc
113 IT4096-5V 4096 inc
8.3-4  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Code table 8.3

C0026 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Free control code FCODE 26/1  6.5-4
Manual
1 FCODE (offset) 0.00 Offset of AIN1 (X6/1, X6/2) (extension)
2 FCODE (offset) 0.00 Offset of AIN2 (X6/3, X6/4)
C0027 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Free control code FCODE 27/1
and FCODE27/2
z 100 % = gain 1
z 100 % = gain 1
C0030 DFOUT CONST 3 0 256 inc/rev Function block DFOUT  8.2-8
1 512 inc/rev z Setting of the constant
(increments per revolution) for
2 1024 inc/rev the master frequency output
3 2048 inc/rev X10
4 4096 inc/rev
5 8192 inc/rev
6 16384 inc/rev
C0032 FCODE 1 -32767 {1} 32767 Gearbox factor - numerator of  8.2-18
GEARBOX the function block DFSET
z Freely configurable code
C0033 GEARBOX 1 1 {1} 32767 Gearbox factor - denominator of  8.2-18
DENOM the function block DFSET
C0034 Mst current 0 0 -10 V ... +10 V Voltage / current range for  5.9-8
analog signals at input X6/1,  6.5-4
1 4 mA ... 20 mA
X6/2
2 -20 mA ... +20 mA z Observe jumper position of X3
C0037 Set-value rpm 0 -36000 {1 rpm} 36000 Setpoint selection
C0038 0 {1 rpm} 36000 Suppress speed ranges, function See System
Manual
block NLIM1 (extension)
z Speed ranges are only run
through dynamically
z Static behaviour in the
inhibited range is suppressed
1 N 1 start 0 Suppress speed range 1
2 N 1 stop 0
4 N 2 stop 0
6 N 3 stop 0
C0039 -36000 {1 rpm} 36000 JOG setpoints for the speed See System
Manual
1 JOG SET-VALUE 1500 setpoint conditioning, function (extension)
block NSET
2 JOG SET-VALUE 1000 z Parameter setting of the fixed
3 JOG SET-VALUE 500 speeds (JOG setpoints)
4 JOG SET-VALUE 200 z Activation via binary coding of
digital input signals in
5 JOG SET-VALUE 100
C0787/1 ... C0787/4
6 JOG SET-VALUE 50 z For coding see description of
7 JOG SET-VALUE 25 function block NSET
8 JOG SET-VALUE 10
9 JOG SET-VALUE 5
10 JOG SET-VALUE 0
... ... ...
15 JOG SET-VALUE 0
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.3-5

8 Configuration
8.3 Code table

C0040 Ctrl enable 0 Controller enable  6.4-1
z Controller can only be enabled
if X5/28 = HIGH
0 Ctrl inhibit Controller inhibited
1 Ctrl enable Controller enabled
C0043 Trip reset 0 0 no/trip reset Reset actual error
1 trip active There is an error TRIP
C0045 DIS: act JOG 0 Nset active Nset is active Active JOG setpoint for the speed See System
Manual
1 JOG1 JOG setpoint 1 setpoint conditioning, function (extension)
block NSET
2 JOG2 JOG setpoint 2 z Display of the activated fixed
... ... ... speed
15 JOG15 JOG setpoint 15
C0046 DIS: N -199.9 {0.01 %} 199.99 Main setpoint for the speed
9 setpoint conditioning, function
block NSET
z Read only
C0049 DIS: NADD -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Additional setpoint, function See System
Manual
block NSET (extension)
z Read only
0 MCTRL  8.2-48
C0011
C0051 MCTRL-NACT -36000 {1 rpm} 36000 Actual speed value, function  8.2-25
z Display only
MCTRL  8.2-48
z Display only
z MCTRL-VACT = 100 % = C0090
MCTRL  8.2-48
z Display only
1000 V
z Read only
z MCTRL-IACT = 100 % = C0022
0 depends on the operating mode:  8.2-48
MCTRL2
8.3-6  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Code table 8.3

C0057 MAX TORQUE 0 {1 Nm} 500 Maximum torque
z Read only
z Maximum possible torque of
the drive configuration
z In case of V/f characteristic
control depending on C0022,
C0086, C0088
z In case of vector control
depending on C0022, C0086,
C0088, C0091
1000.0 Hz
C0059 Mot pole no. 1 {1} 50 Pole pair number of the motor
z Display only
C0061 HEATSINK TEMP 0 {1 °C} 100 Heatsink temperature See System
Manual
z Read only (extension)
z If the temperature of the
heatsink > 85 °C the controller
sets TRIP OH
z Early warning is possible via
C0122
temperature must be
activated.
C0121
warning OH8
warning OC5
z C0064 >140 % limits the
output current to the rated
controller current
C0067 Act trip  Selection list 10 Momentary fault message
z Display only
controller
C0071 = 6000 ms: No
C0074 limit N 10.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 Limitation of the speed controller  8.2-25
z Influence of the speed  8.2-48
controller for V/f characteristic
z max. setpoint difference in
percent
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.3-7

8 Configuration
8.3 Code table

controller
C0077 Ti field CTRL 4.0 0.3 {0.1 ms} 6000.0 Integral-action time of field
controller
z Only active in case of vector
controller
C0079 Adapt I-CTRL 100.00 10.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 Adaptation of the current  8.2-25
z Evaluation for the
integral-action time Tni of the
current controller
z effective if setpoint = 0
z until the rated speed it is
elevated up to 100%
z C0079 = 100 %: No adaptation
of the integral-action time
z C0079 < 100 %:
– Evaluation of the
integral-action time :
(100 % − C0079)
T ni = ⋅ [n S [%] + C0079
(n N [%]
nN = rated motor speed
nS = speed setpoint
and C0025 > 1
in C1583
to factory setting
0
C0082 Mot Rr Æ 0.000 {0.001 Ω} 65.000 Motor rotor resistance  6.6-1
C0087, C0088, C0089, C0090
and C0091
sets the corresponding rotor
resistance value
8.3-8  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Code table 8.3

(C0148, C0149)
C0085 Mot Lss Æ 0.0 {0.1 mH} 6500.0 Motor leakage inductance  6.6-1
(C0148, C0149)
used
in C0021, C0022, C0081,
C0087, C0088, C0089, C0090,
C0091
speed in C0087
C0086 = 0
C0086 = 0
frequency in C0089
C0086 = 0
voltage in C0090
0
in C0091
C0086 = 0
C0088, C0089, C0090 and
C0091
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.3-9

8 Configuration
8.3 Code table

C0093 DRIVE IDENT Controller identification
z Read only
0 invalid Damaged power section
1 none No power section
9321 9321VC Display of the controller used
... ...
9333 9333VC
C0094 PASSWORD 0 0 {1} 9999 Password  7.2-10
z C0094 = 1 ... 9999: Free access
to the user menu only
 Æ depending on C0086, C0088  6.11-5
and C0091
setting
C0086 = 0
C0096 0 no protection No password Parameter access protection
protection z Extension of the access
1 R protection Read protection protection for AIF bus systems
and CAN with activated
2 W protection Write protection password in C0094
3 R/W protection Read/write z All codes in the user menu can
protection continued to be accessed.
1 AIF PROTECT. 0 Parameter access protection AIF
2 CAN PROTECT. 0 Parameter access protection CAN
C0099 S/W version x.y Software version
x Main version z Display only
y Subversion
C0101 0.00 {0.01 s} 999.90 Additional acceleration times for See System
Manual
speed setpoint conditioning, (extension)
1 add Tir 0.00 function block NSET
z Additional acceleration and
deceleration times for the
2 add Tir 0.00 main setpoint
z Activation via binary coding of
... ... ... digital input signals in
C0788/1 ... C0788/4
15 add Tir 0.00 z For coding see description of
function block NSET
C0103 0.00 {0.01 s} 999.90 Additional deceleration times for
speed setpoint conditioning,
1 add Tif 0.00 function block NSET
z Additional acceleration and
deceleration times for the
2 add Tif 0.00 main setpoint
... ... ... digital input signals in
C0788/1 ... C0788/4
15 add Tif 0.00 z For coding see description of
function block NSET
C0104 select accel. 0 Selection of acceleration function See System
Manual
 of the linear ramp function (extension)
generator of NSET
0 a = const Constant acceleration
1 t = const Constant time
2 s = const Constant path
8.3-10  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Code table 8.3

C0108 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Free control code FCODE108/1  6.5-6
Manual
1 FCODE (GAIN) 100.00 Gain of analog output signal (extension)
AOUT1 (X6/62)
z 100 % = gain 1
2 FCODE (GAIN) 100.00 Gain of analog output signal
AOUT2 (X6/63)
z 100 % = gain 1
C0109 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Free control code FCODE109/1
and FCODE109/2
AOUT1 (X6/62)
AOUT2 (X6/63)
C0114 0 High active HIGH level is Inversion of digital input signals  6.5-1
active at X5, function block DIGIN See System
Manual
1 LOW active LOW level is (extension)
active
5 DIGIN6 (ST) pol 0 Terminal X5/ST
C0116  Selection list 2 Configuration of free digital See System
Manual
 outputs (FDO) (extension)
1 CFG: FDO-0 1000 FIXED0 z Signals can only be evaluated
when being networked with
... ... ... ... automation interfaced
32 CFG: FDO-31 1000 FIXED0
C0117  Selection list 2 Configuration of digital inputs  6.5-3
 signals, function block DIGOUT See System
Manual
A change of the basic (extension)
configuration in C0005 changes
the signal assignment!
1 CFG: DIGOUT1 15000 DCTRL-TRIP Terminal X5/A1
2 CFG: DIGOUT2 10650 CMP1-OUT Terminal X5/A2
3 CFG: DIGOUT3 500 DCTRL-RDY Terminal X5/A3
4 CFG: DIGOUT4 5003 MCTRL-MMAX Terminal X5/A4
C0118 0 High active HIGH level is Inversion of digital output
active signals, function block DIGOUT
1 LOW active LOW level is
active
C0121 OH7 limit 150 45 {1 °C} 150 Setting of the operating  6.6-10
temperature for monitoring OH7 See System
Manual
(extension)
z Monitoring OH7 is configured
in C0584
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.3-11

8 Configuration
8.3 Code table

C0122 OH4 limit 80 45 {1 °C} 85 Configuration of monitoring OH4 See System
Manual
z Monitoring of the heatsink (extension)
temperature
z Activating monitoring with
C0582
z Temperature in C0122
reached:
– Warning OH4 is initiated
C0125 Baud rate 0 0 9600 baud LECOM baud rate
1 4800 baud z Baud rate for accessory
module 2102
2 2400 baud
3 1200 baud
4 19200 baud
C0126 MONIT CE0 3 0 TRIP Configuration of monitoring CE0 See System
Manual
2 Warning z Error message in case of (extension)
communication error AIF
3 Off
C0130 DIS: act Ti Active Ti times for the speed See System
Manual
0 C12/C13 setpoint conditioning, function (extension)
block NSET
1 Tir1/Tif1 z Display of the additional
2 Tir2/Tif2 acceleration and deceleration
... ... times for the main setpoint
(C0101, C0103)
14 Tir14/Tif14
15 Tir15/Tif15 C0788/1 ... C0788/4
 enable fly delay inhibit with active flying restart  8.2-48
circuit, delays the start of the
controller enable
C0087, C0088, C0089, C0090,
C0091, C0092
C0133 RFG fly delay 100 0 {1 ms} 9999 Deceleration of the ramp See System
Manual
 function generator after flying (extension)
restart process, function block
NSET
z Deceleration time for the ramp
function generator after a
flying restart process
C0134 RFG charac 0 0 Linear linear Ramp function generator See System
Manual
characteristic characteristic, function block (extension)
NSET
1 S-shaped S-shaped z Characteristic of the main
characteristic setpoint
8.3-12  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Code table 8.3

C0135 Control word 0 Bit Assignment Control word, function block AIF See System
Manual
0 reserved z Decimal control word when (extension)
networked via automation
1 reserved interface AIF
2 reserved z 16-bit information, binary
3 Quick stop coded
4 reserved
5 reserved
6 reserved
7 reserved
8 Operation inhibited
9 Controller inhibit
10 TRIP SET
11 Trip reset
12 reserved
13 reserved
14 reserved
15 reserved
C0136 Display of the control words in See System
Manual
C0135, AIF-IN and CAN-IN1 (extension)
1 Ctrl wrd C135 Control word C0135
2 Ctrl wrd CAN Control word CAN
3 Ctrl wrd AIF Control word AIF
motor shaft
motor shaft
applied setpoint
2 pos. Only search in positive direction
of rotation
of rotation
direction and then in the
C0141 FCODE (setval) 0.00 -199.9 {0.01 } 199.99 Main setpoint, freely
configurable code (FCODE)
z Used as main setpoint in the
basic configurations
C0005 = xxx1
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.3-13

8 Configuration
8.3 Code table

after
(t > 0.5 s)
– Trip reset
X5/28 = HIGH
after
(t > 0.5 s)
– Trip reset
X5/28 = HIGH
threshold
C0144 OH switch 1 0 Switch off Switch-over is not Temperature-dependent
 active switching frequency reduction
z If the heatsink temperature set
1 Switch on Switch-over is in C0122 is reached (warning
active OH4), the controller switches to
2 kHz
 mode  8.2-48
z Reference speed with which
the flying restart process is
started
(C0039/x)
8.3-14  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Code table 8.3

z Influences the current
injection during search process
drive has stopped
C0088, C0089, C0090, C0091

not rotate!
again
C0149 Auto ident 0 0 Id Automatic identification is Automatic motor data  6.6-13
 inactive inactive identification
1. Inhibit controller, wait until
drive has stopped
1 Id active Automatic identification is 2. Enter the correct values of the
active motor nameplate into C0087,
z The identification starts
C0088, C0089, C0090, C0091
automatically after 3. Set C0149 = 1, confirm with
controller enable 
z After a faulty 4. Enable controller
identification, the The identification
process is restarted after – starts,  goes off. The
TRIP RESET or mains motor ”whistles” but does
switching and not rotate!
subsequent controller – lasts approx. 1 ... 2 min
enable – is completed when  is lit
again
C0150 Status word Bit00 – Bit08 Status Code Read only See System
Manual
Bit01 IMP Bit09 Status Code Decimal status word when (extension)
Bit02 – Bit10 Status Code interface (AIF)
Bit03 – Bit11 Status Code z Binary interpretation indicates
Bit04 – Bit12 Warning the bit states
Bit05 – Bit13 Message
Bit06 n=0 Bit14 –
Bit07 CINH Bit15 –
C0151 DIS: FDO (DW) Read only See System
Manual
z Free digital outputs (FDO) (extension)
z Hexadecimal representation of
the digital output signals
configured in C0116
z Binary interpretation indicates
the bit states
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.3-15

8 Configuration
8.3 Code table

C0155 STATUS WORD Bit00 Fail Bit08 R/L Display only
2 Bit01 Mmax Bit09 – z Binary interpretation indicates
the bit states
Bit02 Imax Bit10 –
Bit03 IMP Bit11 –
Bit04 RDY Bit12 –
Bit06 TRIP Bit14 –
Bit07 Init Bit15 –
C0156  Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input See System
Manual
 signals of function block STAT (extension)
1 CFG: STAT.B0 2000 DCTRL-PAR*1-O z Input signals are output as
status messages in C0150, AIF
2 CFG: STAT.B2 5002 MCTRL-IMAX status word and CAN1 status
3 CFG: STAT.B3 5003 MCTRL-MMAX word
4 CFG: STAT.B4 5050 NSET-RFG I=O
5 CFG: STAT.B5 10650 CMP1-OUT
6 CFG: STAT.B14 505 DCTRL-CW/CCW
7 CFG: STAT.B15 500 DCTRL-RDY
C0157 0 No status message Digital status signal of function
1 Status message is output block STAT
1 DIS: STAT.B0 z Display of the signals linked in
C0156
2 DIS: STAT.B2
3 DIS: STAT.B3
4 DIS: STAT.B4
5 DIS: STAT.B5
6 DIS: STAT.B14
7 DIS: STAT.B15
C0161 Act trip Display of history buffer ”Active See System
Manual
fault” (extension)
z Keypad: LECOM error number
C0167 Reset failmem 0 0 Ready Clear history buffer See System
Manual
z Active fault messages are not (extension)
1 Clear history buffer cleared
8.3-16  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Code table 8.3

C0168 Display of the fault messages in See System
Manual
the history buffer (extension)
z Keypad: LECOM error number
1 Fail No. act Active fault
2 Fail no. old1 Last fault
3 Fail no. old2 Second to last fault
4 Fail no. old3 Third last fault
5 Fail no. old4 Fourth-last fault
6 Fail no. old5 Fifth-last fault
7 Fail no. old6 Sixth-last fault
8 Fail no. old7 Last but six fault
C0169 Display in [s] Displays at what time the fault
(C0168) has occurred since mains
connection (C0179)
z If a fault is followed by
another fault for several times,
only the time of the last
occurrence is stored
1 Failtime act Active fault
2 Failtime old1 Last fault
3 Failtime old2 Second to last fault
4 Failtime old3 Third last fault
5 Failtime old4 Fourth-last fault
6 Failtime old5 Fifth-last fault
7 Failtime old6 Sixth-last fault
8 Failtime old7 Last but six fault
C0170 Displays how many times the
fault (C0168) has occurred after
the last mains connection
1 COUNTER ACT Active fault
2 COUNTER OLD1 Last fault
3 Counter old2 Second to last fault
4 Counter old3 Third last fault
5 Counter old4 Fourth-last fault
6 Counter old5 Fifth-last fault
7 Counter old6 Sixth-last fault
8 COUNTER OLD7 Last but six fault
C0173 UG limit 1 Adaptation of UG thresholds See System
Manual
 Check during commissioning and (extension)
adapt, if necessary
All controllers in the system must
have the same threshold!
Mains LU OU
0 < 400 V 285 V 770 ... 775 V Device with or without brake
1 400 V 285 V 770 ... 775 V chopper
2 460 V 328 V 770 ... 775 V
3 480 V 342 V 770 ... 775 V Device without brake chopper
4 480 V 342 V 800 ... 785 V Device with brake chopper
C0178 OP TIMER {s} Display only
Total time of the controller
enable (X5/28 = HIGH)
C0179 MAINS TIMER {s} Display only
Total time of mains ”ON”
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.3-17

8 Configuration
8.3 Code table

C0182 Ti S-shaped 20.00 0.01 {0.01 s} 50.00 Integration time of S-shaped See System
Manual
ramp function generator, (extension)
function block NSET
z C0182 = 0.00: ramp function
generator operates linearly
z C0182 > 0.00: ramp function
generator operates in an
S-shape (without jerk)
C0183 Diagnostics Diagnostics  7.2-11
z Display only
z If several items or fault or
status information are to be
shown, the information with
the smallest number is
displayed
0 No fault
101 Initialisation
102 TRIP/fault
103 Emergency stop
104 IMP message
105 Power OFF Function is not supported
111 Operation inhibit via C0135
112 Operation inhibit via AIF
113 Operation inhibit via CAN
121 Controller inhibited via X5/28
122 Controller inhibited internally
(DCTRL-CINH1)
123 Controller inhibited internally
(DCTRL-CINH2)
124 Controller inhibited via at the
keypad
125 Controller inhibited via AIF
126 Controller inhibited via CAN
141 Switch-on inhibit
142 Pulse inhibit 
151 Quick stop via MCTRL-QSP
152 Quick stop via  at the keypad
153 Quick stop via AIF
154 Quick stop via CAN
161 DC injection braking via terminal
162 DC injection braking via C0135
163 DC injection braking via AIF
164 DC injection braking via CAN
170 Motor parameter identification is
active
250 Warning is active (C0168)
C0190 NSET arit 0 0 OUT = C46 Arithmetic function, function See System
Manual
1 C46 + C49 block NSET (extension)
Connects main setpoint (C0046)
2 C46 - C49 and additional setpoint (C0040)
3 C46 * C49
4 C46 / C49
5 C46/(100 - C49)
8.3-18  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Code table 8.3

C0195 BRK1 T act 99.9 0.0 {0.1 s} 99.9 Brake closing time, function block See System
Manual
BRK1 (extension)
z C0195 = 99.9 s: infinite
z After the time has elapsed in
C0195, the status ”brake
applied” is reached
C0196 BRK1 T release 0.0 0.0 {0.1 s} 60.0 Brake opening time, function
block BRK1
z Opening time can be obtained
from the technical data of the
brake
z After the time has elapsed in
C0196, the status ”brake
released” is reached
C0200 S/W ID x Main version Software ID
y Subversion z Display only
S9300MVxy000 9300 vector 0.37 ... 90 kW
S9300MVxy020 9300 vector 110 ... 400 kW
C0201 S/W Date xxx yy zzzz xxx = month Software creation
yy = day z Display only
zzzz = year
C0202 Internal identification
z Display only
C0203 Commission number
z Display only
C0204 Serial number
z Display only
C0206 Product date xx/yy/zz Date of production
z Display only
z xx = day, yy = month, zz = year
C0207 DL info 1 Download info 1
z Display only
C0208 DL INFO 2 Download info 2
z Display only
C0209 DL INFO 3 Download info 3
z Display only
C0220 NSET Tir add 2.00 0.00 {0.01 s} 9999.90 Acceleration time Tir for See System
Manual
additional setpoint, function (extension)
block NSET
z The acceleration time refers to
a speed variation of 0 ... C0011
C0221 NSET TIF ADD 2.00 0.00 {0.01 s} 9999.90 Deceleration time Tif for
additional setpoint, function
block NSET
z The deceleration time refers to
C0222 PCTRL Vp 1.0 0.1 {0.1 } 500.0 Gain Vp, function block PCTRL1 See System
Manual
C0223 PCTRL1 Tn 400 20 {1 ms} 99999 Integral action component Tn, (extension)
function block PCTRL1
z C0223 = 99999 ms: no integral
action component
C0224 PCTRL1 Kd 0.0 0.0 {0.1 } 5.0 Differential component Kd,
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.3-19

8 Configuration
8.3 Code table

z When C0025 >1 and
C0006 = 1, C0234 is set to 0
C0236 damp limit 0.2 0.0 {0.1 Hz} 20.0 Limit value of oscillation
damping, function block MCTRL
C0241 Cmp-RFG-I=0 1.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 Speed threshold in [%] for the See System
Manual
digital output NSET-controller (extension)
enable-I=0, function block NSET
z The analog signals NSET-NOUT
(without arithmetic and
limiting functions) and
NSET-controller enable-I are
compared
z NSET-controller
enable-I=0 = HIGH: the
differential signal between
NSET-NOUT and
NSET-controller enable-I falls
below the value in C0241
z C0241 = 100 %: nmax
C0244 BRK1 M set 0.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 Holding torque, function block See System
Manual
BRK1 (extension)
z C0244 = 100 % = C0057
C0250 FCODE 1 Bit 0 0 1 Free control code FCODE250
C0252 Angle offset 0 -245760000 {1 inc.} 245760000 Phase offset for master frequency  8.2-18
processing, function block DFSET
z Fixed phase offset for digital
frequency configuration
z 1 rev. = 65536 inc
C0253 Angle n-trim Æ -32767 {1 inc.} 32767 Speed-dependent phase
trimming for the master
frequency processing, function
block DFSET
C0490
z Change of C0005, C0025 or
C0490 resets C0253 to the
corresponding Lenze setting
z 1 rev. = 65536 inc
z Value in C0253 is reached at
15000 rpm
8.3-20  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Code table 8.3

C0260 MPOT1 high 100.00 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Upper limit, function block See System
Manual
MPOT1 (extension)
z Condition: C0260 > C0261
C0261 MPOT1 low -100.0 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Lower limit, function block
MPOT1
z Condition: C0261 < C0260
C0262 MPOT1 TIR 10.0 0.1 {0.1 s} 6000.0 Acceleration time Tir, function
block MPOT1
z The set time refers to a change
of 0 ... 100 %
C0263 MPOT1 Tif 10.0 0.1 {0.1 s} 6000.0 Deceleration time Tif, function
block MPOT1
Motor potentiometer
z The set time refers to a change
of 100 ... 0 %
C0264 MPOT1 on/off 0 0 no change Deactivation of motor
1 Deceleration with Tif to 0% potentiometer, function block
MPOT1
2 Deceleration with Tif to C0261 z Function is executed when
3 Jump with Tif = 0 to 0% MPOT1-INACT = HIGH
4 Jump with Tif = 0 to C0261
5 Acceleration with Tir to C0260
C0265 MPOT1 INIT 0 0 Value of MPOT1 when mains fails Initialisation of motor
potentiometer, function block
MPOT1
1 lower limit of C0261
z Starting value which is to be
accepted during mains
2 0% switching and activated motor
potentiometer
Manual
 signals, function block MPOT (extension)
1 CFG: UP 1000 FIXED0 UP DOWN MPOT1-OUT
0 0 ⎯
0 1 ↓
1 0 ↑
1 1 ⎯
2 CFG: DOWN 1000 FIXED0 ↑: Output signal runs to the upper limit
value
↓: Output signal runs to the lower limit
value
⎯: Output signal is unchanged
C0268 CFG: INACT 1000 FIXED0  Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
 signal, function block MPOT
z HIGH: motor potentiometer is
not active. Output signal runs
to 0
C0269 Digital input signals, function
1 DIS: UP block MPOT
z Display of the signals linked in
2 DIS: DOWN C0267 and C0268
3 DIS: INACT
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.3-21

8 Configuration
8.3 Code table

C0325 Vp2 adapt 1.0 0.1 {0.1 } 500.0 Function block PTCTRL1 See System
Manual
z Adaptation of gain Vp2 (extension)
C0326 Vp3 adapt 1.0 0.1 {0.1 } 500.0 Function block PTCTRL1
z Adaptation of gain Vp3
C0327 Set2 adapt 100.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 Function block PTCTRL1
z Adaptation of setpoint speed
threshold nset2
z Condition: C0327 > C0328
C0328 SET1 ADAPT 0.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 Function block PTCTRL1
z Adaptation of setpoint speed
threshold nset1
z Condition: C0328 < C0327
C0329 ADAPT ON/OFF 0 0 No adaptation of the process Function block PTCTRL1
controller z Adaptation On/Off
1 External adaptation via input
2 Adaptation via setpoint
3 Adaptation via control difference
C0332 PCTRL Tir 0 0 {1 s} 10000 Acceleration time Tir, function See System
Manual
block PCTRL1 (extension)
a setpoint change of 0 ... 100 %
C0333 PCTRL1 Tif 0 0 {1 s} 10000 Deceleration time Tif, function
block PCTRL1
a setpoint change of 100 % ... 0
C0336 DIS: act Up 0.0 {0.1 } 500.0 Current gain Vp, function block See System
Manual
PCTRL1 (extension)
z Read only
C0337 Bi/unipolar 0 Sphere of action, function block
PCTRL1
0 Bipolar z Output value is limited to
-100 ... 100 %
1 Unipolar z Output value is limited to
0 ... 100 %
C0338 ARIT1 FUNCT 1 0 OUT = IN1 Selection of function, function See System
Manual
1 OUT = IN1 + IN2 block ARIT1 (extension)
2 OUT = IN1 - IN2
3 OUT = IN1 * IN2
4 OUT = IN1 / IN2
5 OUT = IN1 / (100 - IN2)
C0339  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
 signals, function block ARIT1
1 CFG: IN 1000 FIXED0% ARIT1-IN1
C0340 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block ARIT1
C0339
1 DIS: IN ARIT1-IN1
2 DIS: IN ARIT1-IN2
C0350 CAN ADDRESS 1 1 {1} 63 Node address of system bus
z Change is effective after
command ”Reset-Node”
8.3-22  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Code table 8.3

C0351 CAN baud rate 0 0 500 kbits/s Baud rate of system bus
1 250 kbits/s z Change is effective after
2 125 kbits/s
3 50 kbits/s
4 1000 kbits/s
C0352 CAN mst 0 0 Slave Configuration of system bus
devices
1 Master z Change is effective after
C0353 0 C0350 is the source Source of the system bus address
1 C0354 is the source
1 CAN ADDR SEL1 0 CAN IN1/OUT1
2 CAN ADDR SEL2 0 CAN IN2/OUT2
3 CAN addr sel3 0 CAN IN3/OUT3
C0354 1 {1} 512 Selective system bus address
z Individual addressing of the
system bus process data
objects
1 IN1 addr 2 129 CAN-IN1
2 OUT1 addr 2 1 CAN-OUT2
C0355 0 {1} 2047 System bus identifier
1 CAN-IN1 Id z Display only
2 CAN-OUT1 Id
3 CAN-IN2 Id
4 CAN-OUT2 Id
5 CAN-IN3 Id
6 CAN-OUT3 Id
C0356 0 {1 ms} 65000 System bus time setting
1 CAN BOOT UP 3000 Essential for CAN system without
master
2 OUT2 cycle 0 0 = event-controlled process data
transfer
3 OUT3 cycle 0 >0 = cyclic process data transfer
4 CAN DELAY 20 Waiting time to the start of cyclic
sending after boot-up
C0357 0 {1 ms} 65000 System bus monitoring times
z The CAN objects remain in
receive position after a fault
message
1 CE1MONIT TIME 3000 CAN-IN1
2 CE2monit time 3000 CAN-IN2
3 CE3monit time 3000 CAN-IN3
C0358 Reset node 0 0 no function Installing system bus reset nodal
1 CAN reset point
C0359 CAN state 0 Operational System bus status
1 Pre-Operational z Display only
2 Warning
3 Bus off
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.3-23

8 Configuration
8.3 Code table

C0360 0 65535 Telegram counter
z Display only
z At values > 65535, the counter
starts at 0
1 Message OUT All sent telegrams
2 Message IN All received telegrams
3 Message OUT1 Sent telegrams on CAN-OUT1
6 Message POUT1 Sent telegrams on parameter
channel 1
7 Message POUT2 Sent telegrams on parameter
channel 2
8 Message IN1 Received telegrams from
CAN-IN1
CAN-IN2
CAN-IN3
11 Message PIN1 Received telegrams from
parameter channel 1
12 Message PIN2 Received telegrams from
parameter channel 2
C0361 0 {1 %} 100 System bus load
z Display only
z To ensure a perfect operation,
the total bus load (all
connected devices) should be
less than 80%
1 Load OUT All sent telegrams
2 Load IN All received telegrams
3 LOAD OUT1 Sent telegrams on CAN-OUT1
4 LOAD OUT2 Sent telegrams on CAN-OUT2
5 Load OUT3 Sent telegrams on CAN-OUT3
6 Load POUT1 Sent telegrams on parameter
channel 1
7 LOAD POUT2 Sent telegrams on parameter
channel 2
8 Load IN1 Received telegrams from
CAN-IN1
9 Load IN2 Received telegrams from
CAN-IN2
10 LOAD IN3 Received telegrams from
CAN-IN3
11 LOAD PIN1 Received telegrams from
parameter channel 1
12 LOAD PIN2 Received telegrams from
parameter channel 2
C0364 CFG: CAN activ 1000 FIXED0  Selection list 2 Configuration - digital input
 signal
z Switches the system bus via
the external signal from
”Pre-Operational” to
”Operational”
C0365 DIS:CAN activ 0 Pre-Operational System bus state
1 Operational z Display only
8.3-24  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Code table 8.3

C0366 Sync Response 1 0 No response Response to sync telegram of the
1 Response master
C0367 Sync Rx ID 128 1 {1} 256 Receipt identifier (Rx)
z Sync Identifier for grouping for
data transfer to CAN-IN1
C0368 SYNC TX ID 128 1 {1} 256 Transmission identifier (Tx)
z Identifier for generating a sync
telegram
C0369 SYNC TX TIME 0 0 {1} 65000 Sync transmission time (Tx)
z Transmission interval for the
object set in C0368
C0400 DIS: OUT -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Analog output signal, function See System
Manual
block AIN1 (extension)
z Read only
C0402 CFG: OFFSET 19502 FCODE-26/1  Selection list 1 Configuration offset, function
 block AIN1
z The offset is added to the
input signal at AIN1-IN
C0403 CFG: GAIN 19504 FCODE-27/1  Selection list 1 Configuration of gain, function
 block AIN1
z The gain is multiplied by the
C0404 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block AIN1
1 DIS: OFFSET z Display of the signals linked in
C0402 and C0404
2 DIS: GAIN
C0405 DIS: OUT -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Analog output signal, function See System
Manual
block AIN2 (extension)
z Read only
C0407 CFG: OFFSET 19503 FCODE-26/2  Selection list 1 Configuration of offset, function
 block AIN2
 block AIN2
C0409 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block AIN2
1 DIS: OFFSET z Display of the signals linked in
C0407 and C0408
2 DIS: GAIN
C0421 ENC VOLTAGE 5.00 5.00 {0.1 V} 8.00 Supply voltage for the
 incremental encoder at X8
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.3-25

8 Configuration
8.3 Code table

C0425 DFIN const 3 0 256 inc/rev Constant of the master frequency  8.2-5
1 512 inc/rev input, function block DFIN
z Output signal at the connected
2 1024 inc/rev encoder or at the upstream
3 2048 inc/rev controller in the event of a
4 4096 inc/rev master frequency
cascade/master frequency bus
5 8192 inc/rev
6 16384 inc/rev
C0426 DIS: OUT -36000 {1 rpm} 36000 Output signal of the master
frequency input, function block
DFIN
z Display only
C0427 DFIN function 0 Function of the master frequency
input, function block DFIN
0 2-phase z Phase-displaced signal
sequence
1 A pulse/B dir z Control of direction of rotation
via track B
2 Pulse A or B z Control of speed and direction
of rotation via track A or track
B
C0431 CFG: IN 5001 MCTRL-NACT  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input See System
Manual
 signal, function block AOUT1 (extension)
z Signal at AOUT1-IN is output
to terminal X6/62
 block AOUT1
z the offset is added to the input
signal at AOUT1-IN
 block AOUT1
input signal at AOUT1-IN
C0434 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block AOUT1
1 DIS: IN z Display of the signals linked in
C0431, C0432 and C0433
2 DIS: OFFSET
3 DIS: GAIN
C0436 CFG: IN 5002 MCTRL-MSET2  Selection list 1
Configuration of analog input See System
Manual
 signal, function block AOUT2 (extension)
z Signal at AOUT2-IN is output
to terminal X6/63
 block AOUT2
 block AOUT2
C0439 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block AOUT2
C0436, C0437 and C0438
2 DIS: OFFSET
3 DIS: GAIN
8.3-26  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Code table 8.3

C0443 DIS: DIGIN-OUT 0 {1} 255 Terminal signals, function block See System
Manual
DIGIN (extension)
z Read only
z Binary interpretation of the
terminal signals at X5
Bit Assignment
0 DIGIN1 X5/E1
1 DIGIN2 X5/E2
2 DIGIN3 X5/E3
3 DIGIN4 X5/E4
4 DIGIN5 X5/E5
5 ST-DIGIN6 X5/ST
6 DIGIN-CINH X5/28
C0444 0 LOW signal Terminal signals, function block See System
Manual
1 HIGH signal DIGOUT (extension)
z Read only
DIS: DIGOUT1 Bit Assignment X5/A1
DIS: DIGOUT2 0 DIGIN1 X5/A2
C0450 CFG: NX 1000 FIXED0%  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input See System
Manual
 signal, function block BRK1 (extension)
z Speed threshold, from which
the drive may output the
signal ”Close brake”
 signal, function block BRK1
z HIGH = close brake
z LOW = open brake
C0452 CFG: SIGN 1000 FIXED0%  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
 signal, function block BRK1
z Direction of torque with which
the drive is to create a torque
against the brake
C0458 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block BRK1 See System
Manual
1 DIS: NX z Display of the signals linked in (extension)
C0450 and C0452
2 DIS: SIGN
C0459 DIS: ON Function block BRK1
C0451
C0464 CUSTOMER I/F 0 original Customer interface indicates the
status of the selected basic
configuration
z Reassignment of terminals in a
basic configuration does not
change C0005 and sets C0464
1 changed =1
z Adding or removing function
blocks or changing the signal
flow among the function
blocks in a basic configuration
sets C0005 = 0 and C0464= 1
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.3-27

8 Configuration
8.3 Code table

C0465 →  Selection list 5 Function block - processing list
 z Defining the sequence in
1 FB list 200 DFIN which the function blocks are
to be processed internally
2 FB list 0 Æ Depending on C0005.
3 FB list 50 AIN1 Changing C0005 loads
4 FB list 0 assigned processing list
Æ The displayed values apply to
5 FB list 0
C0005 = 1000
6 FB list 55 AIN2 z After changing the signal flow,
7 FB list 0 adapt the processing list in any
8 FB list 0 case. Otherwise the controller
may use the wrong signals!
9 FB list 10250 R/L/Q z The function blocks DIGIN,
10 FB list 0 DIGOUT, AIF-IN, CAN-IN, and
... ... 0 MCTRL are always processed
and do not have to be entered
14 FB list 0
in the list
15 FB list 5250 NLIM1
16 FB list 5050 NSET
... ... 0
19 FB list 5700 ANEG1
... ... 0
22 FB list 10650 CMP1
... ... 0
25 FB list 70 AOUT1
... ... 0
28 FB list 75 AOUT2
... ... 0
31 FB list 250 DFOUT
... ... 0
41 FB list 25000 AIF-OUT
42 FB list 20000 CAN-OUT
... ... ...
50 FB list 0
C0466 CPU T remain Remaining process time for
processing the function blocks
z Display only
C0469 Fct STP key 2 0 inactive Inactive Determines the function which is
 released when pressing  on
1 CINH Inhibit controller: the keypad
Changes are only active after
2 qsp Quick stop mains connection!
C0470 0 {1} 255 Configuration of free control
codes for digital signals
z The data words C0470 and
C0471 are in parallel and are
identical.
1 FCODE 8 Bit 0 FCODE bit 0-7
C0471 Configuration of 0 0 {1} 4294967296 Free control code for digital
input signals
FCODE 32 Bit z The data words C0470 and
C0471 are in parallel and are
identical.
8.3-28  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Code table 8.3

C0472 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Configuration of free control
1 FCODE analog 0.00 codes for analog signals
2 FCODE analog 0.00
3 FCODE analog 100.00
6 FCODE analog 0.00
... ... 0.00
20 FCODE analog 0.00
C0473 -32767 {1} 32767 Configuration of free control
1 FCODE ABS 1 codes for absolute analog signals
2 FCODE ABS 1
3 FCODE ABS 0
... ... 0
10 FCODE ABS 0
1 FCODE PH 0 codes for phase signals
z 1 rev. = 65536 inc
... ... 0
5 FCODE PH 0
1 FCODE DF 0 codes for phase difference signals
z 1 rev. = 65536 inc
2 FCODE DF 0
C0497 Nact filter 2.0 0.0 {0.1 ms} 50.0 Filter time constant Nact for  8.2-48
actual speed value, function
block MCTRL2
z Internal filtering of the speed
signal for control
z C0497 = 0 ms: Switched off
C0510 CFG: IN1 50 AIN1-OUT  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input See System
Manual
 signal, function block NLIM1 (extension)
z Input for analog speed
setpoint
C0511 DIS: IN1 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block NLIM1
z Display of the input signal
configured in C0510
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.3-29

8 Configuration
8.3 Code table

C0517 0.00 {0.01 } 1999.00 z The user menu contains in the
 Lenze setting the most
1 USER MENU 51.00 Actual speed value (MCTRL-NACT) important codes for
commissioning the operating
2 USER MENU 54.00 Actual motor current (MCTRL-IACT) mode ”V/f characteristic
3 USER MENU 56.00 Torque setpoint (MCTRL-MSET2) control
4 USER MENU 64.00 Device utilisation I×t z With an active password
protection only the codes
5 USER MENU 183.00 Diagnostics entered in C0517 can be freely
6 USER MENU 168.01 History buffer accessed
7 USER MENU 39.01 JOG-setpoints 1 (NSET) z Enter the numbers of the
required codes in the subcodes
8 USER MENU 86.00 Motor type selection
z The input is done in the format
9 USER MENU 148.00 Identifying motor parameters xxx.yy
10 USER MENU 22.00 Imax limit in motor mode – xxx: Code number
11 USER MENU 23.00 Imax limit in generator mode – yy: Subcode number
z It is not checked whether the
12 USER MENU 11.00 Maximum speed Nmax
entered code exists.
13 USER MENU 12.00 Acceleration time Tir main setpoint
14 USER MENU 13.00 Deceleration time Tif main setpoint
15 USER MENU 16.00 Umin boost
16 USER MENU 70.00 Gain Vp speed controller
17 USER MENU 71.00 Integral-action time Tn speed controller
18 USER MENU 75.00 Gain Vp current controller
19 USER MENU 76.00 Integral-action time Tn current controller
20 USER MENU 142.00 Starting condition
21 USER MENU 92.00 Motor stator inductance
22 USER MENU 36.00 DC braking current
23 USER MENU 93.00 Controller identification
24 USER MENU 99.00 Software version
... ... 0 Not assigned
31 USER MENU 94.00 Password
32 USER MENU 3.00 Save parameter set
8.3-30  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Code table 8.3

 function block DFSET
z Input of speed / phase
setpoint signal
C0521 CFG: VP-DIV 1000 FIXED0%  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
stretching factor
z 100 % = 16384 inc
C0522 cfg: rat-div 1000 FIXED0%  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
gearbox factor
z 100 % = 16384 inc
C0523 cfg: A-trim 1000 FIXED0%  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
z Signal for phase trimming via
offset multiplier (C0529)
z 100 % = 16384 inc
C0524 cfg: n-trim 1000 FIXED0%  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
z Signal for speed trimming
C0525 cfg: 0-pulse 1000 FIXED0  Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
z Signal for one-time zero pulse
activation
z HIGH = release for zero pulse
synchronisation
z Signal for reset of integrators
z HIGH sets
– Position difference = 0
– DFSET-PSET = 0
– DFSET-PSET2 = 0
z HIGH = Set phase integrators
to equal values
z LOW-HIGH edge sets
DFSET-PSET = 0
z HIGH-LOW edge sets
DFSET-PSET to the current
value of MCTRL-PHI-SET
z DFSET-SET has a higher priority
than DFSET-RESET
C0528 -2.109 {1} 2.109 Function block DFSET  8.2-18
z Display only
1 DIS: 0-pulse A Phase difference between two
zero pulses
2 DIS: Offset Offset = C0523 × C0529 + C0252
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.3-31

8 Configuration
8.3 Code table

C0529 Multip offset 1 -20000 {1} 20000 Offset multiplier, function block  8.2-18
DFSET
z Multiplier for the phase offset
(C0252)
C0530 DF EVALUATION 0 0 with factor With gearbox Master frequency evaluation,
factor function block DFSET
1 no factor Without gearbox z Evaluation of the setpoint
factor integrator
C0531 Act 0 div 1 1 {1} 16384 Actual zero pulse divisor, function
block DFSET
C0532 0-pulse/TP 1 1 0-pulse Index pulse Zero pulse / touch probe,
2 Touch probe Touch probe z Zero pulse of the feedback
system or touch probe
C0533 Vp denom 1 1 {1} 32767 Gain factor of denominator Vp,
C0534 0 pulse fct 0 Zero pulse function, function  8.2-18
block DFSET
z Synchronising the drive
0 inactive Inactive
1 Continuous Continuous
synchronisation,
correction in the
shortest possible
way
2 Cont. switch Continuous After a LOW-HIGH signal to
synchronisation, DFSET-0-pulse, the zero track is
correction in the synchronised once
shortest possible
way
10 Once, fast way One-time
synchronisation,
correction in the
shortest possible
way
11 Once, CW One-time
synchronisation,
correction in
direction of
rotation to the
right
12 Once, CCW One-time
synchronisation,
correction in
direction of
rotation to the
left
13 Once, 2*0-pulse One-time
synchronisation,
correction is
detected from
setpoint pulse
and actual pulse
and corrected to
the corresponding
direction
C0535 Set 0 Div 1 1 {1} 16384 Desired zero pulse divisor,  8.2-18
8.3-32  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Code table 8.3

C0536 -32767 {1} 32767 Function block DFSET  8.2-18
1 DIS: VP-DIV z Display of the signals linked in
C0521, C0522 and C0523
2 DIS: RAT-DIV
3 DIS: A-trim
C0537 DIS: n-trim -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block DFSET
C0524
C0538 0 1 Function block DFSET
1 DIS: 0-pulse z Display of the signals linked in
C0525, C0526 and C0527
2 DIS: RESET
3 DIS: SET
C0539 DIS: IN -6000 {1 rpm} 6000 Function block DFSET
C0520
C0540 Function 0 Function selection, function block  8.2-8
 DFOUT
z Output signal at X10
0 Analog input Analog input Signal at DFOUT-AN-IN is output.
Zero track can be input
externally.
1 PH diff input Phase difference Signal at DFOUT-DF-IN is output.
input Zero track can be input
externally.
2 Not assigned
3 Not assigned
4 X10 = X9 X9 is output on The input signals are buffered
X10 C0030 is without function
5 X10 = X8 X8 is output on
X10
C0541 CFG: an-in 5001 MCTRL-NACT  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
C0542 CFG: DF-IN 1000 FIXEDPHI-0  Selection list 4 Configuration of input signal,
 function block DFOUT
z Speed signal
C0544 CFG: SYN-RDY 1000 FIXED0  Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
z DFOUT-SYN-RDY = HIGH:
C0545 PH OFFSET 0 0 {1 inc.} 65535 Phase offset, function block
DFOUT
z Displacing the zero pulse
generated via DFOUT-SYN-RDY
by up to 360 °
z 1 rev. = 65535 inc (360 °)
C0546 Min inc/rev 1000 1 {1 inc.} 2147483647 Masking of the touch probe  8.2-18
signal, function block DFSET
z Suppressing interference
pulses at X5/E4 (actual pulse
of touch probe signal)
z The size of the masking
window between two actual
pulses is set
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.3-33

8 Configuration
8.3 Code table

C0547 DIS: AN-IN -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block DFOUT  8.2-8
C0541
C0548 DIS: SYN-RDY 0 1 Function block DFOUT
C0544
C0549 DIS: DF-IN -32767 {1 rpm} 32767 Function block DFOUT
C0542
C0560 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Configuration of fixed setpoints, See System
Manual
1 FIX SET-VALUE 100 function block FIXSET1 (extension)
z Output of the setpoints to
2 FIX SET-VALUE 75 FIXSET1-OUT via binary coding
3 FIX SET-VALUE 50 of the inputs FIXSET1-IN1 ...
4 FIX SET-VALUE 25 FIXST1-IN4
5 FIX SET-VALUE 0
... ... 0
15 FIX SET-VALUE 0
C0561 CFG: AIN 1000 FIXED0%  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
 signal, function block FIXSET1
z The analog input signal is
switched to FIXSET1-OUT if all
inputs FIXSET-INx = LOW
 signals, function block FIXSET1
z The number of inputs to be
assigned depend on the
number of the fixed setpoints
required.
1 CFG: IN 1000 FIXED0 FIXSET1-IN1
C0563 DIS: AIN -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block FIXSET1
C0561
C0564 0 1 Function block FIXSET1
C0562/1, C0562/2, C0562/3
and C0562/4
1 DIS: IN FIXSET1-IN1
C0570 CFG: IN 1000 FIXED0%  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input See System
Manual
 signal, function block S&H1 (extension)
C0571 CFG: LOAD 1000 FIXED0  Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
 signal, function block S&H1
C0572 DIS: IN -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block S&H1
C0570
C0573 DIS: LOAD 0 1 Function block S&H1
C0571
C0574 MONIT OC2 0 0 TRIP Configuration of monitoring OC2, See System
Manual
3 Off earth fault (extension)
8.3-34  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Code table 8.3

C0581 MONIT EER 0 0 TRIP Configuration monitoring EEr, See System
Manual
1 Message external fault (extension)
2 Warning
3 Off
C0582 MONIT OH4 2 2 Warning Configuration monitoring OH4, See System
Manual
heatsink temperature (extension)
3 Off z The operating temperature
can be set in C0122
fixed operating temperature Manual
(extension)
3 Off z Only for KTY at X8
z The operating temperature is
fixed at 150 °C
C0584 MONIT OH7 3 2 Warning Configuration of monitoring  6.6-10
motor temperature with variable See System
operating temperature Manual
(extension)
3 Off z When reaching the
temperature set in C0121 the
warning OH7 is activated
temperature monitoring See System
2 Warning Manual
z Temperature monitoring via
(extension)
3 Off PTC input (T1, T2)
C0587 MONIT SD3 3 0 TRIP Configuration of monitoring SD3, See System
Manual
encoder at X9
2 Warning (extension)
z Monitors the voltage supply at
3 Off X9/pin 8
C0588 MONIT 0 0 TRIP Configuration of monitoring H10 See System
Manual
H10/H11 and H11, thermal sensors in the (extension)
controller
z H10: Sensor error - heatsink
3 Off temperature
z H11: Sensor error - interior
temperature
C0591 MONIT CE1 3 0 TRIP Configuration of monitoring CE1, See System
Manual
2 Warning communication error at CAN-IN1 (extension)
3 Off
C0592 MONIT CE2 3 0 TRIP Configuration of monitoring CE2,
2 Warning communication error at CAN-IN2
3 Off
C0593 MONIT CE3 3 0 TRIP Configuration of monitoring CE3,
2 Warning communication error at CAN-IN3
3 Off
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.3-35

8 Configuration
8.3 Code table

C0594 MONIT SD6 3 0 TRIP Activation of the motor  6.6-10
KTY at X8 Manual
(extension)
z Use C0594 = 0 or 2 to activate
monitoring
z In case of a short circuit or
2 Warning
interruption at X8/5 and X8/8
the fault message SD6 is
activated
z Configuration of the response
when exceeding the motor
3 Off temperature
– Fixed operating temperature
in C0583
– Variable operating
temperature in C0584
C0595 MONIT CE4 3 0 TRIP Configuration of monitoring CE4, See System
Manual
2 Warning BUS-OFF (system bus) (extension)
3 Off
C0596 Nmax limit 4000 0 {1 rpm} 36000 Configuration of monitoring See System
Manual
Nmax, maximum system speed (extension)
exceeded
C0597 MONIT LP1 3 0 TRIP Configuration of monitoring the See System
Manual
2 Warning motor phases LP1 (extension)
3 Off
C0598 MONIT SD5 3 0 TRIP Configuration of monitoring SD5, See System
Manual
2 Warning open circuit at analog input X6/1, (extension)
X6/2
3 Off
C0599 Limit LP1 5.0 1.0 {0.1 %} 10.0 Configuration of current limit See System
Manual
LP1, current limit value for (extension)
monitoring the motor phases in
C0597
C0600 Function 1 0 OUT = IN1 Function selection, function block See System
Manual
1 OUT = IN1 + IN2 ARIT2 (extension)
2 OUT = IN1 - IN2
3 OUT = IN1 * IN2
4 OUT = IN1 / IN2
5 OUT = IN1 / (100 - IN2)
 signal, function block ARIT2
C0601
1 DIS: IN ARIT2-IN1
2 DIS: IN ARIT2-IN2
8.3-36  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Code table 8.3

C0603 Function 1 0 OUT = IN1 Function selection, function block See System
Manual
1 OUT = IN1 + IN2 ARIT3 (extension)
2 OUT = IN1 - IN2
3 OUT = IN1 * IN2
4 OUT = IN1 / IN2
5 OUT = IN1 / (100 - IN2)
 signal, function block ARIT3
C0604
1 DIS: IN ARIT3-IN1
2 DIS: IN ARIT3-IN2
Manual
 signal, function block SQRT1 (extension)
C0609 DIS: IN -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block SQRT1
C0608
C0610  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input See System
Manual
 signals, function block ADD1 (extension)
1 CFG: IN 1000 FIXED0% Addition input ADD1-IN1
3 CFG: IN 1000 FIXED0% Subtraction input ADD1-IN3
C0611 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block ADD1
C0610
1 DIS: IN ADD1-IN1
2 DIS: IN ADD1-IN2
3 DIS: IN ADD1-IN3
Manual
 signals, function block ADD2 (extension)
3 CFG: IN 1000 FIXED0% Subtraction input ADD2-IN3
C0613 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block ADD2
C0612
1 DIS: IN ADD2-IN1
2 DIS: IN ADD2-IN2
3 DIS: IN ADD2-IN3
C0620 DB1 gain 1.00 -10.00 {0.01 } 10.00 Gain, function block DB1 See System
Manual
C0621 DB1 VALUE 1.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 Dead band, function block DB1 (extension)
z Fault signals around the zero
point of the input signal are
set to 0
C0622 CFG: IN 1000 FIXED0%  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
 signal, function block DB1
C0623 DIS: IN -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block DB1
C0622
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.3-37

8 Configuration
8.3 Code table

C0630 Max limit 100.00 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Upper limit, function block LIM1 See System
Manual
z The analog input signal is (extension)
limited to the set value
C0631 MiN limit -100.0 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Lower limit, function block LIM1
z The analog input signal is
limited to the set value
 signal, function block LIM1
C0633 DIS: IN -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block LIM1
C0632
C0640 Delay T 20.00 0.01 {0.01 s} 50.00 Time constant, function block See System
Manual
PT1-1 (extension)
z Time period by which the
output of analog signal is
delayed
 signal, function block PT1-1
C0642 DIS: IN -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block PT1-1
C0641
C0643 Delay T 20.00 0.01 {0.01 s} 50.00 Time constant, function block
PT1-2
delayed
 signal, function block PT1-2
C0645 DIS: IN -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block PT1-2
C0644
C0650 DT1-1 gain 1.00 -320.00 {0.01 } 320.00 Gain, function block DT1-1 See System
Manual
z Gain of the analog input signal (extension)
C0651 Delay T 1.000 0.005 {0.01 s} 5.000 Time constant, function block
DT1-1
delayed
 signal, function block DT1-1
C0653 Sensibility 1 1 15 bits Input sensitivity, function block
2 14 bits DT1-1
z According to the setting only
3 13 bits the indicated higher-order bits
4 12 bits are evaluated
5 11 bits
6 10 bits
7 9 bits
C0654 DIS: IN -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block DT1-1
C0652
8.3-38  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Code table 8.3

C0655 Numerator 1 -32767 {1} 32767 Configuration of conversion See System
Manual
factor with numerator and (extension)
denominator, function block
CONV5
C0656 Denominator 1 1 {1} 32767 OUT [rpm] = IN [%] ⋅ 15000 rpm ⋅ C0655
100 % C0656
 signal, function block CONV5
C0658 DIS: IN -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block CONV5
C0657
Manual
 signal, function block ABS1 (extension)
z Converts bipolar signals into
unipolar signals
C0662 DIS: IN -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block ABS1
C0661
C0671 RFG1 Tir 0.00 0.00 {0.01 s} 999.90 Acceleration time Tir and See System
Manual
deceleration time Tif, function (extension)
block RFG1
C0672 RFG1 Tif 0.00 0.00 {0.01 s} 999.90 z Acceleration and deceleration
ramp
C0673 CFG: IN 1000 FIXED0%  Selection list 1Configuration of analog input
 signal, function block RFG1
z Selection of a final value at
RFG1-OUT
C0674 CFG: SET 1000 FIXED0%  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
z Selection of a starting value at
RFG1-OUT
z HIGH: RFG1-OUT is set to the
value at RFG1-Set
z LOW: The signal at RFG1-OUT
travels along the ramps
towards the input value at
RFG1-IN
C0676 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block RFG1
C0673 and C0674
1 DIS: RFG1 RFG1-IN
2 DIS: RFG1 RFG1-SET
C0677 DIS: LOAD 0 1 Function block RFG1
C0675
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.3-39

8 Configuration
8.3 Code table

C0680 Function 1 1 IN1 = IN 2 Function selection, function block See System
Manual
2 IN1 > IN2 CMP1 (extension)
z Compare input signals at
3 IN1 < IN2 CMP1-IN1 and CMP1-IN2
4 |IN1IN2|
5 |IN1IN2|
6 |IN1IN2|
C0681 HYSTERESIS 1.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 Hysteresis, function block CMP1
z Hysteresis for input signals
which are not stable and hence
the output oscillates
C0682 Window 1.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 Window, function block CMP1
z Set the range in which the
signal comparison is to be
apply
 signal, function block CMP1
1 CFG: IN 5001 MCTRL-NACT CMP1-IN1
2 CFG: IN 19500 FCODE-17 CMP1-IN2
C0684 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block CMP1
C0683
1 DIS: IN CMP1-IN1
2 DIS: IN CMP1-IN2
Manual
4 |IN1IN2|
5 |IN1IN2|
6 |IN1IN2|
apply
1 CFG: IN 1000 FIXED0% CMP2-IN1
C0688
1 DIS: IN CMP2-IN1
2 DIS: IN CMP2-IN2
8.3-40  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Code table 8.3

Manual
4 |IN1IN2|
5 |IN1IN2|
6 |IN1| < |IN2|
apply
C0693
1 DIS: IN CMP3-IN1
2 DIS: IN CMP3-IN2
C0700 CFG: IN 19523 FCODE-472/3  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input See System
Manual
 signal, function block ANEG1 (extension)
z The value at ANEG1-IN is
multiplied by -1 and output
C0701 DIS: IN -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block ANEG1
C0700
C0703 CFG: IN 19523 FCODE-472/3  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input See System
Manual
 signal, function block ANEG2 (extension)
z The value at ANEG2-IN is
multiplied by -1 and output
C0704 DIS: IN -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block ANEG2
C0703
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.3-41

8 Configuration
8.3 Code table

Manual
4 |IN1| = |IN2|
5 |IN1| > |IN2|
6 |IN1| < |IN2|
apply
C0708
1 DIS: IN CMP4-IN1
2 DIS: IN CMP4-IN2
C0710 Function 0 Function selection, function block See System
Manual
TRANS1 (extension)
0 Rising trans Rising edge 1. LOW-HIGH edge at TRANS1-IN
switches TRANS1-OUT = HIGH
2. After the time has elapsed
(C0711),
TRANS1-OUT switches to LOW
1 Falling trans Falling edge 1. HIGH-LOW edge at TRANS1-IN
(C0711),
2 Both trans Both edges 1. LOW-HIGH- or HIGH-LOW
edge at TRANS1-IN switches
TRANS1-OUT = HIGH
(C0711),
C0711 Pulse T 0.001 0.001 {0.001 60.000 Pulse duration, function block
s} TRANS1
z After the time has elapsed,
C0713 CFG: IN 1000 FIXED0  Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
 signal, function block TRANS1
C0714 DIS: IN 0 1 Function block TRANS1
C0713
8.3-42  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Code table 8.3

Manual
TRANS2 (extension)
0 Rising trans Rising edge 1. LOW-HIGH edge at TRANS2-IN
(C0716),
1 Falling trans Falling edge 1. HIGH-LOW edge at TRANS2-IN
(C0716),
2 Both trans Both edges 1. LOW-HIGH or HIGH-LOW edge
at TRANS2-IN switches
TRANS2-OUT = HIGH
(C0716),
C0716 Pulse T 0.001 0.001 {0.001 60.000 Pulse duration, function block
s} TRANS2
z After the time has elapsed,
 signal, function block TRANS2
C0719 DIS: IN 0 1 Function block TRANS2
C0718
Manual
DIGDEL1 (extension)
0 On delay On delay 1. LOW-HIGH edge at
DIGDEL1-IN starts a timing
element
(C0721), DIGDEL1-OUT
switches to HIGH
1 Off delay Off delay 1. LOW-HIGH edge at
element and sets
DIGDEL1-OUT = HIGH
switches to LOW
2 ON/OFF delay On/off delay 1. LOW-HIGH or HIGH-LOW edge
at DIGDEL1-IN starts a timing
element
(C0721),
DIGDEL1-OUT = DIGDEL1-IN
C0721 Delay T 1.000 0.001 {0.001 60.000 Delay time, function block
s} DIGDEL1
 signal, function block DIGDEL1
C0724 DIS: IN 0 1 Function block DIGDEL1
C0723
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.3-43

8 Configuration
8.3 Code table

Manual
DIGDEL2 (extension)
0 On delay On delay 1. LOW-HIGH edge at
element
switches to HIGH
1 Off delay Off delay 1. LOW-HIGH edge at
element and sets
DIGDEL2-OUT = HIGH
switches to LOW
2 ON/OFF delay On/off delay 1. LOW-HIGH or HIGH-LOW edge
at DIGDEL2-IN starts a timing
element
(C0726),
DIGDEL2-OUT = DIGDEL2-IN
C0726 Delay T 1.000 0.001 {0.001 60.000 Delay time, function block
s} DIGDEL2
 signal, function block DIGDEL2
C0729 DIS: IN 0 1 Function block DIGDEL2
C0728
C0730 Mode 0 0 Stop measurement Function block OSZ See System
Manual
z Starting / stopping the (extension)
1 Start measurement measured value recording
C0731 STATUS 0 Measurement completed Oscilloscope function
1 Measurement active z Read only
z Current operating status
2 Trigger detected
3 Abort
4 Abort after trigger
5 Read memory
Manual
 signals, function block OSZ (extension)
1 OSZ channel 1 1000 FIXED0% Function block OSZ
2 OSZ channel 2 1000 FIXED0%
 signal, function block OSZ
1 Trigger input 1000 FIXED0
8.3-44  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Code table 8.3

C0734 Trigger source 1 0 OSC trigger input Function block OSZ See System
Manual
1 OSZ channel 1 z Configure digital input C0732 (extension)
or C0733 with desired trigger
2 OSZ channel 2 signal
3 OSZ channel 3
4 OSZ channel 4
C0735 Trigger level 0 -32767 {1} 32767 Function block OSZ
z Trigger level OSZ channel 1 ...
OSZ channel 4
C0736 Trigger edge 0 0 LOW-HIGH edge Oscilloscope function
1 HIGH-LOW edge
C0737 Trigger Delay 0.0 -100.0 {0.1 %} 999.99 Function block OSZ
z Setting of pretriggering and
posttriggering
C0738 Sampling period 3 3 1 ms Oscilloscope function See System
Manual
4 2 ms z Time base (extension)
5 5 ms
6 10 ms
7 20 ms
8 50 ms
9 100 ms
10 200 ms
11 500 ms
12 1s
13 2s
14 5s
15 10 s
16 20 s
17 50 s
18 1 min
19 2 min
20 5 min
21 10 min
C0739 Number of 4 1 {1} 4 Function block OSZ See System
Manual
channels z Switching on/off the channels (extension)
– 1 = channel 1
– 2 = channel 1 + 2
– 3 = channel 1 ... 3
– 4 = channel 1 ... 4
C0740 0 Oscilloscope function
z Reading data memory
1 Read start 0 0 {1} 65535 z Provides a pointed access to a
position storage block
2 Enable/inhibit 0 0 No data reading
data reading 1 Data reading
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.3-45

8 Configuration
8.3 Code table

C0741 STATUS 0 1000000000 Function block OSZ See System
Manual
1 Version z Read only (extension)
2 Memory size
3 Data width
4 Number of
channels
C0742 Data block 8 0 {1} 65536 Function block OSZ
length
C0743 Read data block 0 65535 Function block OSZ
length z Read only
(OSZ) z Reading an 8 byte data block
C0744 Memory depth 3 0 512 measured values Oscilloscope function
1 1024 measured values z Adapt memory capacity to the
measurement task
2 1536 measured values
C0749 0 65535 Information about storing the See System
measured values, function block Manual
(extension)
OSZ
z Read only
1 Abort index Measured value no. of the abort
time
2 Trigger index Measured value no. of the trigger
time
3 End index Measured value no. of the end
time
C0750 Vp denom 16 1 1 Gain VP of the position controller,  8.2-13
2 1/2 function block DFRFG1
4 1/4
8 1/8
16 1/16
32 1/32
64 1/64
128 1/128
256 1/256
512 1/512
1024 1/1024
2048 1/2048
4096 1/4096
8192 1/8192
16384 1/16384
8.3-46  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Code table 8.3

C0751 DFRFG1 TIR 1.000 0.001 {0.001 999.999 Acceleration time Tir, function  8.2-13
s} block DFRFG1
C0752 MAX SPEED 3000 1 {1 rpm} 16000 Maximum speed, function block
DFRFG1
z Maximum speed-up (speed)
C0753 DFRFG1 QSP 0.000 0.000 {0.001 999.900 Deceleration time Tif for quick
s} stop, function block DFRFG1
C0754 PH ERROR 2.109 10 {1} 2.109 Following error, function block
DFRFG1
z Maximum permissible phase
difference between setpoint
an actual phase
z 1 rev. = 65535 inc
C0755 SYN WINDOW 100 0 {1 inc.} 65535 Synchronisation window,
function block DFRFG1
z 1 rev. = 65535 inc
z Speed/phase setpoint signal
C0759 cfg: qsp 1000 FIXED0  Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
 signal, function block DFRFG1
z HIGH = quick stop active
C0760 cfg: stop 1000 FIXED0  Selection list 2 Configuration of input signal,
z HIGH = Status of the profile
generator is maintained,
setpoint is saved
C0761 CFG: RESET 1000 FIXED0  Selection list 2 Configuration of input signal,
z HIGH = resetting the
integrators
C0764 0 1 Function block DFRFG1
1 DIS: QSP z Display of the signals linked in
C0759, C0760 and C0761
2 DIS: STOP
3 DIS: RESET
C0765 DIS: IN -32767 {1 rpm} 32767 Function block DFRFG1
C0758
C0770 CFG: D 1000 FIXED0  Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input See System
Manual
 signal, function block FLIP1 (extension)
C0771 CFG: CLK 1000 FIXED0  Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
 signal, function block FLIP1
z Each LOW-HIGH edge at
FLIP1-CLK switches the signal
at FLIP1-D to FLIP1-OUT
C0772 CFG: CLR 1000 FIXED0  Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
z Resets the flip-flop
z HIGH: Sets FLIP1-OUT = LOW
z Input has highest priority
C0773 0 1 Function block FLIP1
1 DIS: D z Display of the signals linked in
C0770, C0771 and C0773
2 DIS: CLK
3 DIS: CLR
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.3-47

8 Configuration
8.3 Code table

C0775 CFG: D 1000 FIXED0  Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input See System
Manual
 signal, function block FLIP2 (extension)
C0776 CFG: CLK 1000 FIXED0  Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
z Each LOW-HIGH edge at
FLIP2-CLK switches the signal
at FLIP2-D to FLIP2-OUT
C0777 CFG: CLR 1000 FIXED0  Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
z Resets the flip-flop
z HIGH: sets FLIP2-OUT = LOW
z Input has highest priority
C0778 0 1 Function block FLIP2
1 DIS: D z Display of the signals linked in
C0775, C0776 and C0777
2 DIS: CLK
3 DIS: CLR
C0780 CFG: N 5250 NLIM1-OUT  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input See System
Manual
 signal, function block NSET (extension)
z Main setpoint
C0781 CFG: N-INV 10251 R/L/Q-R/L  Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
 signal, function block NSET
z HIGH: main setpoint (C0780) is
inverted
C0782 CFG: NADD 55 AIN2-OUT  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
z Additional setpoint
C0783 CFG: NADD-INV 1000 FIXED0  Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
z HIGH: additional setpoint
(C0783) is inverted
C0784 CFG: CINH-VAL 5001 MCTRL-NACT  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
z The signal is accepted by the
main setpoint integrator when
the controller is inhibited
C0785 CFG: SET 5000 MCTRL-nset2  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
z When NSET-LOAD = HIGH, the
signal is accepted by the main
setpoint integrator
C0786 CFG: LOAD 5001 MCTRL-QSP-OUT  Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
z HIGH: The signal at NSET-SET
is accepted by the mains
setpoint integrator
z Control of both ramp function
generators in special
situations, e.g. quick stop
8.3-48  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Code table 8.3

Manual
 signals, function block NSET (extension)
z Activation of a fixed speed via
binary coding of the digital
input signals
z For coding see description of
function block NSET
z Parameter setting of the fixed
speeds (JOG setpoints) in
C0039
1 CFG: JOG 53 DIGIN3 NSET-JOG*1
2 CFG: JOG 1000 FIXED0 NSET-JOG*2
 signals, function block NSET
z Activation of additional
acceleration and deceleration
times for the mains setpoint
via binary coding of the digital
input signals
z For coding see description of
function block NSET
z Parameter setting of the times
in C0101 and 103
1 CFG: TI 1000 FIXED0 NSET-Ti*1
C0789 CFG: RFG-0 1000 FIXED0  Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input See System
Manual
 signal, function block NSET (extension)
z HIGH: Guides the main
setpoint integrator to 0 via the
current Ti times
C0790 CFG: RFG-STOP 1000 FIXED0  Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
z HIGH: Keeps the main setpoint
integrator on its current value
C0798 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block NSET See System
Manual
z Display of the signals linked in (extension)
1 DIS: CINH-VAL C0783 and C0785
Read only: analog input signals of
2 DIS: SET
NSET
C0799 Input signals 0 1 Function block NSET
1 DIS: N-INV z Display of the signals linked in
C0781, C0783, C0786, C0787,
2 DIS: NADD-INV C0788, C0789 and C0790
3 DIS: LOAD
4 DIS: JOG*1
5 DIS: JOG*2
6 DIS: JOG*4
7 DIS: JOG*8
8 DIS: TI*1
9 DIS: TI*2
10 DIS: TI*4
11 DIS: TI*8
12 DIS: RFG-0
13 DIS: RFG-STOP
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.3-49

8 Configuration
8.3 Code table

C0800 CFG: SET 1000 FIXED0%  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input See System
Manual
 signal, function block PCTRL (extension)
z Input for the process setpoint
z Value range: ±200 %
C0801 CFG: ACT 1000 FIXED0%  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
 signal, function block PCTRL
Configuration of analog input
signal of PCTRL1
z Input for the actual value
C0802 CFG: INFLU 1000 FIXED0%  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
z Evaluation (influence) of the
output signal
C0803 CFG: ADAPT 1000 FIXED0%  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
z The gain Vp can be changed via
the adaptation input
C0804 CFG: INACT 1000 FIXED0  Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
z HIGH = deactivates the process
controller
C0805 CFG: I-OFF 1000 FIXED0  Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
z HIGH = Switching off integral
action component
z LOW = Switching on integral
action component
C0808 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block PCTRL See System
Manual
1 DIS: SET z Display of the signals linked in (extension)
C0801, C0802, C0803 and
2 DIS: ACT C0804
3 DIS: INFLU
4 DIS: ADAPT
C0809 Function block PCTRL
1 DIS: INACT z Display of the signals linked in
C0805 and C0806
2 DIS: I-OFF
Manual
 signals, function block ASW1 (extension)
1 CFG: IN 1000 FIXED0% ASW1-IN1
 signal, function block ASW1
z LOW: signal at ASW1-IN1 is
output to ASW1-OUT
z HIGH: signal at ASW1-IN2 is
output to ASW1-OUT
C0812 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block ASW1
C0810
1 DIS: IN ASW1-IN1
2 DIS: IN ASW1-IN2
C0813 DIS: SET 0 1 Function block ASW1
C0811
8.3-50  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Code table 8.3

Manual
output to ASW2-OUT
output to ASW2-OUT
C0815
1 DIS: IN ASW2-IN1
2 DIS: IN ASW2-IN2
C0818 DIS: SET 0 1 Function block ASW2
C0816
Manual
 signals, function block AND1 (extension)
1 CFG: IN 1000 FIXED0 AND1-IN1
C0821 0 1 Function block AND1 See System
Manual
C0820
1 DIS: IN AND1-IN1
2 DIS: IN AND1-IN2
3 DIS: IN AND1-IN3
Manual
Manual
C0822
1 DIS: IN AND2-IN1
2 DIS: IN AND2-IN2
3 DIS: IN AND2-IN3
Manual
Manual
C0824
1 DIS: IN AND3-IN1
2 DIS: IN AND3-IN2
3 DIS: IN AND3-IN3
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.3-51

8 Configuration
8.3 Code table

Manual
Manual
C0826
1 DIS: IN AND4-IN1
2 DIS: IN AND4-IN2
3 DIS: IN AND4-IN3
Manual
Manual
C0828
1 DIS: IN AND5-IN1
2 DIS: IN AND5-IN2
3 DIS: IN AND5-IN3
Manual
 signals, function block OR1 (extension)
1 CFG: IN 1000 FIXED0 OR1-IN1
C0831 0 1 Function block OR1
C0830
1 DIS: IN OR1-IN1
2 DIS: IN OR1-IN2
3 DIS: IN OR1-IN3
Manual
C0832
1 DIS: IN OR2-IN1
2 DIS: IN OR2-IN2
3 DIS: IN OR2-IN3
8.3-52  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Code table 8.3

Manual
C0834
1 DIS: IN OR3-IN1
2 DIS: IN OR3-IN2
3 DIS: IN OR3-IN3
Manual
C0836
1 DIS: IN OR4-IN1
2 DIS: IN OR4-IN2
3 DIS: IN OR4-IN3
Manual
C0838
1 DIS: IN OR5-IN1
2 DIS: IN OR5-IN2
3 DIS: IN OR5-IN3
C0840 CFG: IN 1000 FIXED0  Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input See System
Manual
 signal, function block NOT1 (extension)
C0841 DIS: IN 0 1 Function block NOT1
C0841
Manual
C0842
Manual
C0844
Manual
C0846
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.3-53

8 Configuration
8.3 Code table

Manual
C0848
Manual
 signals, function block AIF-OUT (extension)
1 CFG: OUT.W1 1000 FIXED0% Process output word 1
z 100% = 16384
z Signal is output via byte 3 and
byte 4 to X1
z 100% = 16384
z 100% = 16384
C0851 CFG: OUT.D1 1000 FIXED0INC  Selection list 3 Configuration of phase input
 signal, function block AIF
z 32-bit phase signal
C0852 Type OUT.W2 0 Output of the signal type, See System
Manual
function block AIF (extension)
0 analog Analog signal AIF-OUT.W2 (C0850/2) is output
to X1
1 digital 0-15 Digital signal via FDO-00 ... FDO-15 (LOW word,
bit 0 ... bit 15 C0116/1 ... C0116/15) are output
to X1
2 low phase Low phase AIF-OUT.D1 (LOW word, C0851) is
output to X1
C0853 Type OUT.W3 0 Output of the signal type,
function block AIF
0 analog Analog signal AIF-OUT.W3 (C0850/3) is output
to X1
1 digital 16-31 Digital signal via FDO-16 ... FDO-31 (HIGH word,
bit 16 ... bit 31 C0116/16 ... C0116/31) are
output to X1
2 high phase High phase AIF-OUT.D1 (HIGH word, C0851)
is output to X1
C0855 0 FFFF Process input words, function See System
Manual
block AIF-IN (extension)
z Read only
1 DIS: IN (0 ... 15) Bit 0 ... bit 15 (via byte 5 and
byte 6)
2 DIS: IN (16 ... 31) Bit 16 ... bit 31 (via byte 7 and
byte 8)
C0856 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Process input words, function See System
Manual
z Read only
z 100% = 16384
1 DIS: IN.W1 Input via byte 3 and byte 4
C0857 DIS: IN.D1 -2147483648 {1} 2147483647 32-bit phase signal, function See System
Manual
z Read only
z 65536 = 1 rev.
8.3-54  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Code table 8.3

C0858 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Process output words, function See System
Manual
block AIF-OUT
1 DIS: OUT.W1 (extension)
2 DIS: OUT.W2 C0850
3 DIS: OUT.W3 z 100% = 16384
C0859 DIS: OUT.D1 -2147483648 {1} 2147483647 32-bit phase signal, function See System
Manual
block AIF-OUT (extension)
C0851
z 1 rev. = 65536
Manual
 signals, function block CAN-OUT (extension)
1 CFG: OUT1.W1 1000 FIXED0% CAN-OUT1
2 CFG: OUT1.W2 1000 FIXED0%
C0861  Selection list 3 Configuration of input signals,
 function block CAN-OUT
1 CFG: OUT1.D1 1000 FIXED0INC CAN-OUT1
C0863 0 FFFF Process input words, function See System
Manual
block CAN-IN (extension)
z Read only
z Bit 0 ... bit 15 (via byte 5 and
byte 6)
z Bit 16 ... bit 31 (via byte 7 and
byte 8)
1 DIS: IN1 dig0 CAN-IN1, bit 0 ... bit 15
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.3-55

8 Configuration
8.3 Code table

C0864 Output of the signal type, See System
Manual
function block CAN-OUT (extension)
1 TYPEOUT1.W2 0 0 analog Analog signal CAN-OUTx.Wx (C0860) is output
to X4
2 TYPEOUT2.W1 0 1 digital 0-15 Digital signal FDO-00 ... FDO-15 (LOW word,
bit 0 ... bit 15 C0116/1 ... C0116/15) are output
to X4
3 TypeOUT3.W1 0 2 low phase Low phase CAN-OUTx.D1 (LOW word,
C0861) is output to X4
C0865 Output of the signal type,
function block CAN-OUT
1 TYPEOUT1.W3 0 0 analog Analog signal CAN-OUTx.Wx (C0860) is output
to X4
2 TYPEOUT2.W2 0 1 digital 16-31 Digital signal FDO-16 ... FDO-31 (HIGH word,
bit 16 ... bit 31 C0116/16 ... C0116/31) are
output to X1
3 TYPEOUT3.W2 0 2 high phase High phase CAN-OUTx.D1 (HIGH word,
C0861) is output to X4
C0866 -32768.00 {0.01 %} 32767.00 Process input words, function See System
Manual
block CAN-IN (extension)
z Read only
z 100% = 16384
1 DIS: IN1.W1 CAN-IN1
2 DIS: IN1.W2
3 DIS: IN1.W3
5 DIS: IN2.W2
6 DIS: IN2.W3
7 DIS: IN2.W4
9 DIS: IN3.W2
10 DIS: IN3.W3
11 DIS: IN3.W4
C0867 -2147483648 {1} 2147483647 32-bit phase signal, function
1 DIS: IN1.D1 block CAN-IN
z Read only
2 DIS: IN2.D1
z 1 rev. = 65536
3 DIS: IN3.D1
C0868 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Process output words, function See System
Manual
1 DIS: OUT1.W1 block CAN-OUT (extension)
2 DIS: OUT1.W2 C0860
3 DIS: OUT1.W3 z 100% = 16384
4 DIS: OUT2.W1
5 DIS: OUT2.W2
6 DIS: OUT2.W3
7 DIS: OUT2.W4
8 DIS: OUT3.W1
9 DIS: OUT3.W2
10 DIS: OUT3.W3
11 DIS: OUT3.W4
C0869 -2147483648 {1} 2147483647 32-bit phase information,
function block CAN-OUT
1 DIS: OUT1.D1
2 DIS: OUT2.D1 C0861
3 DIS: OUT3.D1 z 1 rev. = 65536
8.3-56  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Code table 8.3

Manual
 signals, function block DCTRL (extension)
1 CFG: CINH 1000 FIXED0 DCTRL-CINH1
HIGH = Controller inhibit
2 CFG: CINH 1000 FIXED0 DCTRL-CINH2
HIGH = Controller inhibit
C0871 CFG: TRIP-SET 54 DIGIN4  Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
 signal, function block DCTRL
z HIGH = fault message EEr
C0876 CFG: TRIP-RES 55 DIGIN5  Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
 signal, function block DCTRL
z LOW-HIGH edge = TRIP reset
C0878 Function block DCTRL See System
Manual
1 DIS: CINH1 z Display of the signals linked in (extension)
C0870, C0871 and C0876
2 DIS: CINH2
3 DIS: TRIP-SET
4 DIS: TRIP-RES
C0879 Resetting control words
1 Reset C135 0 0 Ready z C0879 = 1 performs one reset
2 Reset AIF 0 1 Reset

3 Reset CAN 0
Manual
 signals, function block DCTRL (extension)
1 CFG: PAR*1 1000 FIXED0 C0880/ C0880/ Selected z Select parameter set
1 2 parameter set z Selection of a parameter set
via binary coding of the digital
2 CFG: PAR*2 1000 FIXED0 0 0 Parameter set 1 input signals
0 1 Parameter set 2
1 0 Parameter set 3
1 1 Parameter set 4
C0881 CFG: PAR-LOAD 1000 FIXED0  Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input See System
Manual
 signal, function block DCTRL (extension)
z LOW-HIGH edge = Load
selected parameter set into
C0880
C0884 Function block DCTRL See System
Manual
1 DIS: PAR*1 z Display of the signals linked in (extension)
C0880 and C0881
2 DIS: PAR*2
3 DIS: PAR-LOAD
C0885 CFG: R 51 DIGIN1  Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input See System
Manual
 signals, function block R/L/Q (extension)
z Truth table:
Inputs Outputs
R L R/L QSP
C0886 CFG: L 52 DIGIN2  Selection list 2 0 0 0/1 1
 1 0 0 0
0 1 1 0
1 1 – –
– State is unchanged
C0889 0 1 Function block R/L/Q
1 DIS: R z Display of the signals linked in
C0885 and C0886
2 DIS: L
z Speed setpoint
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.3-57

8 Configuration
8.3 Code table

C0891 cfg: M-add 1000 FIXED0%  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input  8.2-48
z Additional torque setpoint or
torque setpoint
C0892 cfg: lo-M-lim 5700 ANEG1-OUT  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
z Lower torque limit in [%] of
C0057
C0893 cfg: hi-M-lim 19523 FCODE-472/3  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
z Upper torque limit in [%] of
C0057
C0898 CFG: M-LIM 0 0 M-LIM ON Reduced torque Torque limitation in the field  8.2-48
 switch limit is active weakening range, function block
MCTRL
z If the torque limit is reduced,
the maximum possible torque
1 M-LIM OFF Reduced torque in the field weakening range is
limit is inactive lowered with 1/f. This provides
a higher motor stability in the
field weakening range
C0899 cfg: n/m-swt 1000 FIXED0  Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input  8.2-48
z LOW = active speed control
z HIGH = active torque control
stop
C0901 cfg: i-set 1000 FIXED0%  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input  8.2-48
z Setting of integral action
component of the speed
controller
C0902 cfg: i-load 1000 FIXED0  Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
z HIGH = the integral action
component at MCTRL-I-SET is
accepted by the speed
controller
C0903 cfg: BOOST 5015 MCTRL-BOOST  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input  8.2-25
z Boost of the motor voltage
C0904
8.3-58  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Code table 8.3

C0890, C0891, C0892, C0893,
3 DIS: LO-M-LIM
4 DIS: HI-M-LIM
5 DIS: I-SET
6 DIS: BOOST
C0899, C0900 and C0902
2 DIS: N/M-SWT
3 DIS: QSP
4 DIS: I-LOAD
MCTRL  8.2-48
2 0 ... 175 %
controller
C0910
Æ depending on C0082, C0086,  9.4-3
C0087, C0088, C0089, C0090,
C0091, C0092
selected motor
an OU message
z When C0913 = 1, the motor is
0 inactive Non-reduced motor current
flying restart process of after
1 active Reduced motor current an OU message.
Manual
CONV1
C0941 Denominator 1 1 {1} 32767 OUT [%] = IN [%] ⋅
C0940
C0941
C0942
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.3-59

8 Configuration
8.3 Code table

Manual
CONV2
C0946 Denominator 1 1 {1} 32767 OUT [%] = IN [%] ⋅ C0945
C0946
C0947
Manual
CONV3
C0951 Denominator 1 1 {1} 32767 OUT [%] = IN [rpm] ⋅ 100 % ⋅ C0950
15000 rpm C0951
C0952
Manual
CONV4
C0956 Denominator 1 1 {1} 32767 OUT [%] = IN [rpm] ⋅ 100 % ⋅ C0955
15000 rpm C0956
C0957
Manual
CURVE1 (extension)
1 Function 1 Characteristic with two base
points
2 Function 2 Characteristic with three base
points
3 Function 3 Characteristic with four base
points
8.3-60  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Code table 8.3

C0961 y0 0.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 199.99 Configuration of base point y0, See System
Manual
function block CURVE1 (extension)
z Ordinate of the value pair
(x = 0 % / y0)
C0962 y1 50.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 199.99 Configuration of base point y1,
function block CURVE1
z Ordinate of the value pair (x1 /
y1)
z Ordinate of the value pair (x2 /
y2)
z Ordinate of the value pair
(x 100 % / y100)
C0965 x1 50.00 0.01 {0.01 %} 99.99 Configuration of base point x1,
z Abscissa of the pair (x1 / y1)
C0966 x2 75.00 0.01 {0.01 %} 99.99 Configuration of base point x2,
z Abscissa of the pair (x2 / y2)
Manual
 signal, function block CURVE1 (extension)
C0968 DIS: IN -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block CURVE1
C0967
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.3-61

8 Configuration
8.3 Code table

C0970 CFG: SET 1000 FIXED0%  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input See System
Manual
 signal, function block MFAIL (extension)
z Starting value for the
controlled deceleration in [%]
of C0011
C0971 CFG: FAULT 1000 FIXED0  Selection list 2 Configuration of digital input
 signal, function block MFAIL
z HIGH = activates mains failure
control
z HIGH = resets mains failure
control
C0973 CFG: ADAPT 1000 FIXED0%  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
z Dynamic adaptation of the
proportional gain of UGsetl
controller in [%] of C0980
C0974 CFG: CONST 1000 FIXED0%  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
z Proportional gain of UGset
controller in [%] of C0980
C0975 CFG: THRESHLD 1000 FIXED0%  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
z Restart protection when the
value falls below the speed
threshold
z Restart threshold in [%] of
C0011
C0976 CFG: NACT 1000 FIXED0%  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
z Comparison value for the
restart threshold in [%] of
C0011
z Start for V2 controller
z Speed starting value for the
deceleration in [%] of C0011
C0978 CFG: DC-SET 1000 FIXED0%  Selection list 1 Configuration of analog input
z Setting of the voltage setpoint
on which the DC-bus voltage is
to be kept (100 % = 1000 V)
C0980 MFAIL Vp 0.500 0.001 {0.001} 31.000 Gain Vp, function block MFAIL See System
Manual
C0981 MFAIL TN 100 20 {1 ms} 2000 Integral-action time Tn, function (extension)
block MFAIL
C0982 MFAIL TIR 2.000 0.001 {0.001 16.000 Acceleration time Tir, function
s} block MFAIL
C0983 RETRIGGER T 1.000 0.001 {0.001 60.000 Retrigger time, function block
s} MFAIL
z After the time has elapsed, the
mains failure control is
terminated
8.3-62  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Code table 8.3

C0988 Input signals -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block MFAIL See System
Manual
1 DIS: N-SET z Display of the signals linked in (extension)
C0970, C0973, C0974, C0975,
2 DIS: ADAPT C0976, C0977 and C0978
3 DIS: CONST
4 DIS: THRESHLD
5 DIS: NACT
6 DIS: SET
7 DIS: DC-SET
C0989 0 1 Function block MFAIL
1 DIS: FAULT z Display of the signals linked in
C0971 and C0972
2 DIS: RESET
C1000 DIVISION 1 0 {1} 31 Part factor, function block See System
Manual
CONVPHA1 (extension)
z Calculate output signal:
100 %
OUT [%] = IN [%] ⋅
2 14 ⋅ 2 C1000
C1001 CFG: IN 1000 FIXED0INC  Selection list 3 Configuration of input signal,
 function block CONVPHA1
C1002 DIS: IN -2147483648 {1} 2147483647 Function block CONVPHA1
C1001
C1040 Acceleration 100.00 0.001 {0.001 } 5000.000 Acceleration, function block See System
Manual
0 SRFG1 (extension)
z Max. acceleration
C1041 JERK 0.200 0.001 {0.001 999.999 Jerk, function block SRFG1
s} z S-ramp time
 signal, function block SRFG1
z Starting value for the ramp
function generator
z Starting value is accepted
when SRFG1-LOAD = HIGH
z HIGH = accepts the value at
SRFG1-SET and outputs it to
SRFG1-OUT. SRFG1-DIFF
remains on 0 %
C1045 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block SRFG1
C1042 and C1043
2 DIS: SET
C1046 DIS: LOAD 0 1 Function block SRFG1
C1044
C1090 Output signal -2147483648 {1} 2147483647 Function block FEVAN1 See System
Manual
z Display of the converted signal (extension)
C1091 Code 141 2 {1} 2000 Code, function block FEVAN1
z Selection of the target code in
which the calculated value is
to be written
C1092 Subcode 0 0 {1} 255 Subcode, function block FEVAN1
z Selection of the target subcode
in which the calculated value is
to be written
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.3-63

8 Configuration
8.3 Code table

C1093 Numerator 1.0000 0.0001 {0.0001} 100000.0000 Numerator, function block See System
Manual
FEVAN1 (extension)
z Scaling of the input signal
C1094 Denominator 0.0001 0.0001 {0.0001} 100000.0000 Denominator, function block
FEVAN1
z Scaling of the input signal
C1095 offset 0 0 {1} 1000000000 Offset, function block FEVAN1
z An offset can be added to the
converted signal
Manual
 signal, function block FEVAN1 (extension)
 signal, function block FEVAN1
z A LOW-HIGH edge transmits
the converted signal to the
target code
C1098 DIS: IN -32768 {1} 32767 Function block FEVAN1 See System
Manual
z Display of the signal linked in (extension)
C1096
C1099 DIS: LOAD Function block FEVAN1
C1097
Manual
FCNT1 (extension)
1 Return |FCNT1-OUT| ≥ |FCNT1-CMP-VAL|:
z The numerator is reset to the
value at FCNT1-LD-VAL
2 Hold |FCNT1-OUT| = |FCNT1-CMP-VAL|:
z The numerator is stopped
Manual
 signals, function block FCNT1 (extension)
1 CFG: LD-VAL 1000 FIXED0% z Starting value
2 CFG: CMP-VAL 1000 FIXED0% z Comparison value
Manual
 signals, function block FCNT1 (extension)
1 CFG: CLKUP 1000 FIXED0 LOW-HIGH edge counts upwards
by one
2 CFG: CLKDWN 1000 FIXED0 LOW-HIGH edge counts
downwards by one
3 CFG: LOAD 1000 FIXED0 z HIGH = accepts starting value
z Input signal has highest
priority
C1103 -32768 {1} 32768 Function block FCNT1 See System
Manual
1 DIS: LD-VAL z Display of the signals linked in (extension)
C1101
2 DIS: CMP-VAL
C1104 0 1 Function block FCNT1
1 DIS: CLKUP z Display of the signals linked in
C1102
2 DIS: CLKDWN
3 DIS: LOAD
8.3-64  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Code table 8.3

Manual
output to ASW3-OUT
output to ASW3-OUT
C1060
1 DIS: IN ASW3-IN1
2 DIS: IN ASW3-IN2
C1163 DIS: SET Function block ASW3
C1061
C1300 N-motor/Dmax 300 -32767 {1 rpm} 32767 Motor speed at Dmax, function  8.2-1
 block DCALC1
z Nominal speed of the winding
drive
C1301 N-line max 3000 1 {1 rpm} 32767 Maximum line speed, function
 block DCALC1
z Nominal speed of the line
drive
C1302 calc cycle 0.1 0.1 {0.1 rev} 100.0 Calculation cycle, function block  8.2-1
DCALC1
C1303 time const 0.10 0.01 {0.01 s} 50.00 Filter time constant, function
block DCALC1
C1304 Dmax 500 1 {1 mm} 10000 Maximum diameter, function  8.2-1
 block DCALC1
z Nominal winding diameter
C1305 lower D-limit 50 1 {1 mm} 10000 Lower diameter limit, function
block DCALC1
z Minimum winding diameter
C1306 upper D-limit 500 1 {1 mm} 10000 Upper diameter limit, function
block DCALC1
z Maximum winding diameter
C1307 hyst D-limit 1.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.0 Hysteresis - diameter limitation,
z Hysteresis for Dmin /Dmax
output
C1308 arit function 1 0 DCALC1-OUT=D DCALC1-OUT = Selection of the arithmetic 8.2-1
 diameter function, function block DCALC1
1 DCALC1-OUT=1/D DCALC1-OUT =
1/diameter
C1309 Dmin 50 1 {1 mm} 10000 Minimum diameter, function  8.2-1
 block DCALC1
C1310 DCALC1-Titime 0.000 0.000 {0.001 999.900 Acceleration and deceleration
s} time, function block DCALC1
C1311 window D-calc 1.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 100.00 Window - diameter calculation,
z Window setting for
permissible diameter deviation
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.3-65

8 Configuration
8.3 Code table

C1320 CFG: SET 1000 FIXED0%  Selection list 1
Configuration of analog input  8.2-1
 signal, function block DCALC1
z Setting the initial value
 signals, function block DCALC1
1 CFG: LOAD 1000 FIXED0 z HIGH: Initial value at
DCALC1-SET is accepted
z DCALC1-LOAD has a higher
priority than DCALC1-HOLD
2 CFG: HOLD 1000 FIXED0 z HIGH = Keeps the achieved
diameter and resets the
integrators.
C1322 -36000 {1 rpm} 36000 Function block DCALC1  8.2-1
1 DIS: N-Line z Display of the signals linked in
C1327
2 DIS: N-WIND
C1325 DIS: SET -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block DCALC1
C1320
C1326 0 1 Function block DCALC1
1 DIS: LOAD z Display of the signals linked in
C1321
2 DIS: HOLD
C1327  Selection list 3 Configuration of input signals,  8.2-1
 function block DCALC1
1 CFG: N-Line 1000 FIXED0INC z Speed signal of the line drive
2 CFG: N-WIND 1000 FIXED0INC z Speed signal of the winding
drive
C1328 DIS: D-ACT -200 {1 mm} 200 Function block DCALC1
z Display of the current
diameter
C1330 PCTRL2 Tir 1.0 0.1 {0.1 s 6000.0 Acceleration time tir, function See System
Manual
block PCTRL2 (extension)
z Acceleration time for the
setpoint
a setpoint change of 0 ... 100 %
C1331 PCTRL2 Tif 1.0 0.1 {0.1 s} 6000.0 Deceleration time tif, function
block PCTRL2
z Deceleration time for the
setpoint
a setpoint change of 100 % ... 0
C1332 PCTRL2 Vp 1.0 0.1 {0.1 } 500.0 Gain Vp, function block PCTRL2 See System
Manual
C1333 PCTRL2 Tn 400 20 {1 ms} 99999 Integral-action time Tn, function (extension)
block PCTRL2
Setting of reset time Tn of PCTRL2
C1334 PCTRL2 Kd 0.0 0.0 {0.1 } 5.0 Differential component Kd,
C1335 bipolar/unipolar 0 Sphere of action, function block
PCTRL2
0 Bipolar z Output value is limited to See System
Manual
-100 ... 100 % (extension)
1 Unipolar z Output value is limited to
0 ... 100 %
8.3-66  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Code table 8.3

C1336 Tir overlay 1.0 0.1 {0.1 s} 6000.0 Fade-in time, function block See System
Manual
PCTRL2 (extension)
z Acceleration time of the ramp
generator
z Controls the influence of the
process controller
C1337 Tif overlay 1.0 0.1 {0.1 s} 6000.0 Fade-out time, function block
PCTRL2
z Deceleration time of the ramp
generator
z Controls the influence of the
process controller
Manual
 signals, function block PCTRL2 (extension)
1 CFG: RFG-SET 1000 FIXED0% z The process setpoint is shown
at PCTRL2-SET with a starting
value via a ramp generator
z PCTRL-RFG-LOAD = HIGH
activates the function
2 CFG: SET 1000 FIXED0% z Input for process value
3 CFG: ACT 1000 FIXED0% z Input for actual value
4 CFG: INFL 1000 FIXED0% z Evaluation (influence) of the
output signal
Manual
 signals, function block PCTRL2 (extension)
1 CFG: RFG-LOAD 1000 FIXED0 z HIGH = function of
PCTRL2-RFG-SET is active
2 CFG: I-OFF 1000 FIXED0 z HIGH = Switches of integral
action component
z LOW = switches on integral
action component
3 CFG: INACT 1000 FIXED0 z HIGH = deactivates process
controller
4 CFG: OVERLAY 1000 FIXED0 z HIGH = Shows influence
z LOW = hides influence
C1344 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block PCTRL2 See System
Manual
1 DIS: RFG-SET z Display of the signals linked in (extension)
C1340
2 DIS: SET
3 DIS: ACT
4 DIS: INFL
C1345 0 1 Function block PCTRL2
1 DIS: RFG-LOAD z Display of the signals linked in
C1341
2 DIS: I-OFF
3 DIS: INACT
4 DIS: OVERLAY
C1350 INT1 function 0 Function selection, function block See System
Manual
INT1 (extension)
0 PHI >= REF If INT1-IN ≥ INT1-REF, INT1-DOUT
is set to HIGH
1 |PHI| >= |REF| If |INT1-IN| ≥ |INT1-REF|,
INT1-DOUT is set to HIGH
C1351 INT1 scaling 65536 65536 {1} 1000000000 Scaling factor, function block
00 INT1
INT1 − IN [inc]
INT1 − AOUT [%] = ⋅ 100 %
C1351
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.3-67

8 Configuration
8.3 Code table

C1354 CFG: REF 1000 FIXED0INC  Selection list 3 Input signal configuration See System
Manual
 z Reference value (extension)
C1355 CFG: IN 1000 FIXEDPHI-0  Selection list 4 Configuration of input signal,
 function block INT1
z Angle of rotation
 signal, function block INT1
z HIGH = Sets the integrator to 0
C1357 DIS: REF -2000000000 {1 inc} 2000000000 Function block INT1 See System
Manual
C13554
C1358 DIS: IN -32767 {1 rpm} 32767 Function block INT1
C1355
C1359 DIS: RESET 0 1 Function block INT1
C1356
C1360 INT2 function 0 Function selection, function block See System
Manual
INT2 (extension)
0 PHI >= REF If INT2-IN ≥ INT2-REF, INT2-DOUT
is set to HIGH
1 |PHI| >= |REF| If |INT2-IN| ≥ |INT2-REF|,
INT2-DOUT is set to HIGH
C1361 INT2 scaling 65536 65536 {1} 1000000000 Scaling factor, function block
00 INT2
INT2 − IN [inc]
INT2 − AOUT [%] = ⋅ 100 %
C1361
C1364 CFG: REF 1000 FIXED0INC  Selection list 3 Input signal configuration See System
Manual
 z Reference value (extension)
C1365 CFG: IN 1000 FIXEDPHI-0  Selection list 4 Configuration of input signal,
 function block INT2
z Angle of rotation
 signal, function block INT2
z HIGH = Sets the integrator to 0
C1367 DIS: REF -2000000000 {1 inc} 2000000000 Function block INT2 See System
Manual
C13564
C1368 DIS: IN -32767 {1 rpm} 32767 Function block INT2
C1365
C1369 DIS: RESET 0 1 Function block INT2
C1366
C1370 FOLL max 100.00 0.00 {0.01 %} 199.99 Upper limit, function block FOLL1 See System
Manual
z Upper limit of the ramp (extension)
function generator
C1371 FOLL min -100.0 -199.99 {0.01 %} 0.00 Lower limit, function block FOLL1
0 z Lower limit of the ramp
function generator
C1372 FOLL Tir 10.0 0.1 {0.1 s} 6000.0 Acceleration time Tir and
deceleration time Tif of the ramp
C1373 FOLL Tif 10.0 0.1 {0.1 s} 6000.0 function generator, function
block FOLL1
8.3-68  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Code table 8.3

C1375  Selection list 1
Configuration of analog input See System
Manual
 signals, function block FOLL1 (extension)
1 CFG: SIGN 1000 FIXED0% z Negative value: signal
characteristic at FOLL1-OUT is
opposed to the one at
FOLL1-IN
z Positive value: signal
characteristic at FOLL1-OUT is
the same as at FOLL1-IN
2 CFG: IN 1000 FIXED0% If FOLL1-IN > FOLL1-REF, the ramp
function generator starts
3 CFG: REF 1000 FIXED0% Reference value
4 CFG: LOAD 1000 FIXED0% Initial value for the ramp function
generator
 signal, function block FOLL1
z HIGH: initial value at
FOLL1-LOAD is accepted
C1377 -199.99 {0.01 %} 199.99 Function block FOLL1 See System
Manual
1 DIS: SIGN z Display of the signals linked in (extension)
C1375
2 DIS: IN
3 DIS: REF
4 DIS: LOAD
C1378 DIS: SET 0 1 Function block FOLL1
C1376
magnetising current set in C0095
precontrol)
to which the motor
z C1583 = 100 % ≙ half the
C0089
C1751 0 {1} 65535 Inverter compensation  6.6-13
 characteristic (WRK)
z During the motor parameter
1 0 identification, the
characteristic is calculated
... ... from the measured motor
stator resistance and saved in
17 0
C1751/1 ... C1751/17
C1753 0 Data are not o. k. Internal data are o. k.
 z Motor data identification for
the inverter compensation
1 Data are o. k. characteristic has been
completed successfully
C1754 0 Data are not o. k. Internal data are o. k.
 z Motor data identification for
the motor leakage inductance
1 Data are o. k. has been completed
successfully
C1755 100 0 {1} 65535 Image of inverter compensation
 characteristic (WRK) on the
maximum current range
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.3-69

Configuration 8
Selection lists 8.4
Selection list 1: Analog output signals 8.4.1
8.4 Selection lists
8.4.1 Selection list 1: Analog output signals

Parameter Analog output signal () Parameter Analog output signal ()
000050 AIN1-OUT 005700 ANEG1-OUT
000055 AIN2-OUT 005705 ANEG2-OUT
000100 DFSET-NOUT 005750 FIXSET1-OUT
001000 FIXED0% 005800 LIM1-OUT
001006 FIXED100% 005850 ABS1-OUT
001007 FIXED-100% 005900 PT1-1-OUT
005000 MCTRL-nset2 005905 PT1-2-OUT
005001 MCTRL-NACT 005950 DT1-1-OUT
005002 MCTRL-MSET2 006100 MFAIL-NOUT
005003 MCTRL-MACT 006150 DB1-OUT
005004 MCTRL-IACT 006200 CONV1-OUT
005005 MCTRL-DCVOLT 006205 CONV2-OUT
005006 MCTRL-VACT 006210 CONV3-OUT
005007 MCTRL-FACT 006215 CONV4-OUT
005008 MCTRL-IxT 006230 CONVPHA1-OUT
005009 MCTRL-PHI-ACT 006300 S&H1-OUT
005010 MCTRL-M-TEMP 006350 CURVE1-OUT
005015 MCTRL-BOOST 006400 FCNT1-OUT
005050 NSET-NOUT 010000 BRK1-M-SET
005051 NSET-RFG-I 011000 DCALC1-D-OUT
005052 NSET-C10-C11 011001 DCALC1-OUT
005100 MPOT1-OUT 011050 PCTRL2-OUT
005150 PCTRL1-OUT 011100 INT1-AOUT
005250 NLIM1-OUT 011105 INT2-AOUT
005500 ARIT1-OUT 011150 FOLL1-OUT
005505 ARIT2-OUT 019500 FCODE-17
005510 ARIT3-OUT 019502 FCODE-26/1
005540 SQRT1-OUT 019503 FCODE-26/2
005550 ADD1-OUT 019504 FCODE-27/1
005555 ADD2-OUT 019505 FCODE-27/2
005600 RFG1-OUT 019506 FCODE-32
005610 SRFG1-OUT 019507 FCODE-37
005611 SRFG1-DIFF 019510 FCODE-108/1
005650 ASW1-OUT 019511 FCODE-108/2
005655 ASW2-OUT 019512 FCODE-109/1
005660 ASW3-OUT
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.4-1

8 Configuration
8.4 Selection lists
8.4.1 Selection list 1: Analog output signals
Parameter Analog output signal () Parameter Analog output signal ()
019513 FCODE-109/2 019552 FCODE-473/2
019515 FCODE-141 019553 FCODE-473/3
019521 FCODE-472/1 019554 FCODE-473/4
019522 FCODE-472/2 019555 FCODE-473/5
019523 FCODE-472/3 019556 FCODE-473/6
019524 FCODE-472/4 019557 FCODE-473/7
019525 FCODE-472/5 019558 FCODE-473/8
019526 FCODE-472/6 019559 FCODE-473/9
019527 FCODE-472/7 019560 FCODE-473/10
019528 FCODE-472/8 020101 CAN-IN1.W1
019529 FCODE-472/9 020102 CAN-IN1.W2
019530 FCODE-472/10 020103 CAN-IN1.W3
019531 FCODE-472/11 020201 CAN-IN2.W1
019532 FCODE-472/12 020202 CAN-IN2.W2
019533 FCODE-472/13 020203 CAN-IN2.W3
019534 FCODE-472/14 020204 CAN-IN2.W4
019535 FCODE-472/15 020301 CAN-IN3.W1
019536 FCODE-472/16 020302 CAN-IN3.W2
019537 FCODE-472/17 020303 CAN-IN3.W3
019538 FCODE-472/18 020304 CAN-IN3.W4
019539 FCODE-472/19 025101 AIF-IN.W1
019540 FCODE-472/20 025102 AIF-IN.W2
019551 FCODE-473/1 025103 AIF-IN.W3
8.4-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Selection lists 8.4
Selection list 2: Digital output signals 8.4.2
8.4.2 Selection list 2: Digital output signals

Parameter Digital output signal () Parameter Digital output signal ()
000051 DIGIN1 010520 AND5-OUT
000052 DIGIN2 010550 OR1-OUT
000053 DIGIN3 010555 OR2-OUT
000054 DIGIN4 010560 OR3-OUT
000055 DIGIN5 010565 OR4-OUT
000056 DIGIN6(ST) 010570 OR5-OUT
000065 DIGIN-CINH 010600 NOT1-OUT
000100 DFSET-ACK 010605 NOT2-OUT
000500 DCTRL-RDY 010610 NOT3-OUT
000501 DCTRL-CINH 010615 NOT4-OUT
000502 DCTRL-INIT 010620 NOT5-OUT
000503 DCTRL-IMP 010650 CMP1-OUT
000504 DCTRL-NACT=0 010655 CMP2-OUT
000505 DCTRL-CW/CCW 010660 CMP3-OUT
001000 FIXED0 010665 CMP4-OUT
001001 FIXED1 010700 DIGDEL1-OUT
002000 DCTRL-PAR*1 010705 DIGDEL2-OUT
002001 DCTRL-PAR*2 010750 TRANS1-OUT
002002 DCTRL-PAR-BUSY 010755 TRANS2-OUT
005001 MCTRL-QSP-OUT 010900 FLIP1-OUT
005002 MCTRL-IMAX 010905 FLIP2-OUT
005003 MCTRL-MMAX 011000 DCALC1-DMAX
005006 MCTRL-GSB-OUT 011001 DCALC1-DMIN
005050 NSET-rfg-i=0 011002 DCALC1-I=0
006000 DFRFG1-FAIL 011003 DCALC1-OVFL
006001 DFRFG1-SYNC 011100 INT1-DOUT
006100 MFAIL-STATUS 011105 INT2-DOUT
006101 MFAIL-I-RESET 013000 FEVAN1-BUSY
006400 FCNT1-EQUAL 013001 FEVAN1-FAIL
010000 BRK1-OUT 015000 DCTRL-TRIP
010001 BRK1-CINH 015001 DCTRL-MESS
010002 BRK1-QSP 015002 DCTRL-WARN
010003 BRK1-M-STORE 015003 DCTRL-FAIL
010250 R/L/Q-QSP 015010 MONIT-LU
010251 R/L/Q-R/L 015011 MONIT-OU
010500 AND1-OUT 015012 MONIT-EEr
010505 AND2-OUT 015013 MONIT-OC1
010510 AND3-OUT 015014 MONIT-OC2
010515 AND4-OUT 015015 MONIT-LP1
015016 MONIT-OH
015017 MONIT-OH3
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.4-3

8 Configuration
8.4 Selection lists
8.4.2 Selection list 2: Digital output signals
015018 MONIT-OH4 019545 FCODE-471.B24
015019 MONIT-OH7 019546 FCODE-471.B25
015020 MONIT-OH8 019547 FCODE-471.B26
015022 MONIT-Sd3 019548 FCODE-471.B27
015026 MONIT-CE0 019549 FCODE-471.B28
015027 MONIT-NMAX 019550 FCODE-471.B29
015028 MONIT-OC5 019551 FCODE-471.B30
015029 MONIT-SD5 019552 FCODE-471.B31
015030 MONIT-SD6 019751 FCODE-135.B0
015032 MONIT-H07 019752 FCODE-135.B1
015033 MONIT-H10 019753 FCODE-135.B2
015034 MONIT-H11 019755 FCODE-135.B4
015040 MONIT-CE1 019756 FCODE-135.B5
015041 MONIT-CE2 019757 FCODE-135.B6
015042 MONIT-CE3 019758 FCODE-135.B7
015043 MONIT-CE4 019763 FCODE-135.B12
015044 MONIT-OC3 019764 FCODE-135.B13
015045 MONIT-ID1 019765 FCODE-135.B14
015046 MONIT-ID2 019766 FCODE-135.B15
019500 FCODE-250 020001 CAN-CTRL.B0
019521 FCODE-471.B0 020002 CAN-CTRL.B1
019522 FCODE-471.B1 020003 CAN-CTRL.B2
019523 FCODE-471.B2 020005 CAN-CTRL.B4
019524 FCODE-471.B3 020006 CAN-CTRL.B5
019525 FCODE-471.B4 020007 CAN-CTRL.B6
019526 FCODE-471.B5 020008 CAN-CTRL.B7
019527 FCODE-471.B6 020013 CAN-CTRL.B12
019528 FCODE-471.B7 020014 CAN-CTRL.B13
019529 FCODE-471.B8 020015 CAN-CTRL.B14
019530 FCODE-471.B9 020016 CAN-CTRL.B15
019531 FCODE-471.B10 020101 CAN-IN1.B0
019532 FCODE-471.B11 020102 CAN-IN1.B1
019533 FCODE-471.B12 020103 CAN-IN1.B2
019534 FCODE-471.B13 020104 CAN-IN1.B3
019535 FCODE-471.B14 020105 CAN-IN1.B4
019536 FCODE-471.B15 020106 CAN-IN1.B5
019537 FCODE-471.B16 020107 CAN-IN1.B6
019538 FCODE-471.B17 020108 CAN-IN1.B7
019539 FCODE-471.B18 020109 CAN-IN1.B8
019540 FCODE-471.B19 020110 CAN-IN1.B9
019541 FCODE-471.B20 020111 CAN-IN1.B10
019542 FCODE-471.B21 020112 CAN-IN1.B11
019543 FCODE-471.B22
019544 FCODE-471.B23
8.4-4  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Selection lists 8.4
Selection list 2: Digital output signals 8.4.2
020113 CAN-IN1.B12 020223 CAN-IN2.B22
020114 CAN-IN1.B13 020224 CAN-IN2.B23
020115 CAN-IN1.B14 020225 CAN-IN2.B24
020116 CAN-IN1.B15 020226 CAN-IN2.B25
020117 CAN-IN1.B16 020227 CAN-IN2.B26
020118 CAN-IN1.B17 020228 CAN-IN2.B27
020119 CAN-IN1.B18 020229 CAN-IN2.B28
020120 CAN-IN1.B19 020230 CAN-IN2.B29
020121 CAN-IN1.B20 020231 CAN-IN2.B30
020122 CAN-IN1.B21 020232 CAN-IN2.B31
020123 CAN-IN1.B22 020301 CAN-IN3.B0
020124 CAN-IN1.B23 020302 CAN-IN3.B1
020125 CAN-IN1.B24 020303 CAN-IN3.B2
020126 CAN-IN1.B25 020304 CAN-IN3.B3
020127 CAN-IN1.B26 020305 CAN-IN3.B4
020128 CAN-IN1.B27 020306 CAN-IN3.B5
020129 CAN-IN1.B28 020307 CAN-IN3.B6
020130 CAN-IN1.B29 020308 CAN-IN3.B7
020131 CAN-IN1.B30 020309 CAN-IN3.B8
020132 CAN-IN1.B31 020310 CAN-IN3.B9
020201 CAN-IN2.B0 020311 CAN-IN3.B10
020202 CAN-IN2.B1 020312 CAN-IN3.B11
020203 CAN-IN2.B2 020313 CAN-IN3.B12
020204 CAN-IN2.B3 020314 CAN-IN3.B13
020205 CAN-IN2.B4 020315 CAN-IN3.B14
020206 CAN-IN2.B5 020316 CAN-IN3.B15
020207 CAN-IN2.B6 020317 CAN-IN3.B16
020208 CAN-IN2.B7 020318 CAN-IN3.B17
020209 CAN-IN2.B8 020319 CAN-IN3.B18
020210 CAN-IN2.B9 020320 CAN-IN3.B19
020211 CAN-IN2.B10 020321 CAN-IN3.B20
020212 CAN.IN2.B11 020322 CAN-IN3.B21
020213 CAN-IN2.B12 020323 CAN-IN3.B22
020214 CAN-IN2.B13 020324 CAN-IN3.B23
020215 CAN-IN2.B14 020325 CAN-IN3.B24
020216 CAN-IN2.B15 020326 CAN-IN3.B25
020217 CAN-IN2.B16 020327 CAN-IN3.B26
020218 CAN-IN2.B17 020328 CAN-IN3.B27
020219 CAN-IN2.B18 020329 CAN-IN3.B28
020220 CAN-IN2.B19 020330 CAN-IN3.B29
020221 CAN-IN2.B20 020331 CAN-IN3.B30
020222 CAN-IN2.B21 020332 CAN-IN3.B31
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.4-5

8 Configuration
8.4 Selection lists
8.4.3 Selection list 3: Phase signals
020400 CAN-SYNC-OUT 025111 AIF-IN.B10
025001 AIF-CTRL.B0 025112 AIF-IN.B11
025002 AIF-CTRL.B1 025113 AIF-IN.B12
025003 AIF-CTRL.B2 025114 AIF-IN.B13
025005 AIF-CTRL.B4 025115 AIF-IN.B14
025006 AIF-CTRL.B5 025116 AIF-IN.B15
025007 AIF-CTRL.B6 025117 AIF-IN.B16
025008 AIF-CTRL.B7 025118 AIF-IN.B17
025013 AIF-CTRL.B12 025119 AIF-IN.B18
025014 AIF-CTRL.B13 025120 AIF-IN.B19
025015 AIF-CTRL.B14 025121 AIF-IN.B20
025016 AIF-CTRL.B15 025122 AIF-IN.B21
025101 AIF-IN.B0 025123 AIF-IN.B22
025102 AIF-IN.B1 025124 AIF-IN.B23
025103 AIF-IN.B2 025125 AIF-IN.B24
025104 AIF-IN.B3 025126 AIF-IN.B25
025105 AIF-IN.B4 025127 AIF-IN.B26
025106 AIF-IN.B5 025128 AIF-IN.B27
025107 AIF-IN.B6 025129 AIF-IN.B28
025108 AIF-IN.B7 025130 AIF-IN.B29
025109 AIF-IN.B8 025131 AIF-IN.B30
025110 AIF-IN.B9 025132 AIF-IN.B31
8.4.3 Selection list 3: Phase signals

Parameter Phase signal () 020103 CAN-IN1.D1
000100 DFSET-PSET 020201 CAN-IN2.D1
001000 FIXED0INC 020301 CAN-IN3.D1
005000 MCTRL-PHI-ANG 025103 AIF-IN.D1
011100 INT1-POUT
011105 INT2-POUT
Parameter Phase signal ()

019521 FCODE-474/1
019522 FCODE-474/2
8.4.4 Selection list 4: Speed signals

Parameter Speed signal () Parameter Speed signal ()
000050 DFIN-OUT 005000 MCTRL-PHI-ACT
000100 DFSET-POUT 006000 DFRFG-OUT
000250 DFOUT-OUT 006220 CONV5-OUT
001000 FIXEDPHI-0 019521 FCODE-475/1
019522 FCODE-475/2
8.4-6  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Selection lists 8.4
Selection list 5: Function blocks 8.4.5
8.4.5 Selection list 5: Function blocks

Parameter Function block Parameter Function block
000000 empty 006300 S&H1
000050 AIN1 006350 CURVE1
000055 AIN2 006400 FCNT1
000070 AOUT1 010000 BRK1
000075 AOUT2 010250 R/L/Q
000100 DFSET 010500 AND1
000200 DFIN 010505 AND2
000250 DFOUT 010510 AND3
005050 NSET 010515 AND4
005100 MPOT1 010520 AND5
005150 PCTRL1 010550 OR1
005250 NLIM1 010555 OR2
005500 ARIT1 010560 OR3
005505 ARIT2 010565 OR4
005510 ARIT3 010570 OR5
005540 SQRT1 010600 NOT1
005550 ADD1 010605 NOT2
005555 ADD2 010610 NOT3
005600 RFG1 010615 NOT4
005610 SRFG1 010620 NOT5
005650 ASW1 010650 CMP1
005655 ASW2 010655 CMP2
005660 ASW3 010660 CMP3
005700 ANEG1 010665 CMP4
005705 ANEG2 010700 DIGDEL1
005750 FIXSET1 010705 DIGDEL2
005800 LIM1 010750 TRANS1
005850 ABS1 010755 TRANS2
005900 PT1-1 010900 FLIP1
005905 PT1-2 010905 FLIP2
005950 DT1-1 011000 DCALC1
006000 DFRFG1 011050 PCTRL2
006100 MFAIL 011100 INT1
006150 DB1 011105 INT2
006200 CONV1 011150 FOLL1
006205 CONV2 013000 FEVAN1
006210 CONV3 013100 OSZ
006215 CONV4 015100 MLP1
006220 CONV5 020000 CAN-OUT
006230 CONVPHA1 025000 AIF-OUT
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.4-7

8 Configuration
8.4 Selection lists
8.4.6 Selection list 10: error messages
8.4.6 Selection list 10: error messages

Parameter Error message Parameter Error message
000000 No fail 000091 EEr TRIP
000011 OC1 TRIP 000105 H05 TRIP
000012 OC2 TRIP 000107 H07 TRIP
000013 OC3 TRIP 000110 H10 TRIP
000032 LP1 TRIP 000111 H11 TRIP
000050 OH TRIP 000140 Id1 TRIP
000053 OH3 TRIP 000141 Id2 TRIP
000057 OH7 TRIP 000200 NMAX TRIP
000058 OH8 TRIP 001020 OU message
000061 CE0 TRIP 001030 LU message
000062 CE1 TRIP 001091 EEr message
000063 CE2 TRIP 002015 OC5 warning
000064 CE3 TRIP 002020 OV warning
000065 CE4 TRIP 002032 LP1 warning
000070 U15 TRIP 002054 OH4 warning
000071 CCr TRIP 002057 OH7 warning
000072 PR1 TRIP 002058 OH8 warning
000073 PR2 TRIP 002061 CE0 warning
000074 PEr TRIP 002062 CE1 warning
000079 PI TRIP 002083 Sd3 warning
000083 Sd3 TRIP 002085 Sd5 warning
000085 Sd5 TRIP 002086 Sd6 warning
000086 Sd6 TRIP 002091 EER warning
8.4-8  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8
Table of attributes 8.5
The attribute table describes the features of the codes used. It serves to
create your own programs for communicating with the controller.
How to read the table of attributes
Column Abbreviation Meaning

Code Cxxxx Name of the Lenze code
Index dec 24575 - Lenze code Index, under which the Is only required for control via InterBus-S,
number parameter is addressed Profibus DP or system bus (CAN)
The subindex of array variables
hex 5FFFh - Lenze code corresponds to the Lenze
number subcode number
Data DS E Data structure Single variable
(only one parameter element)
A Array variable
(several parameter elements)
DA xx Number of array elements
(subcodes)
DT B8 Data type 1 byte bit-coded
B16 2 bytes bit-coded
B32 4 bytes bit-coded
FIX32 32 bit value with sign;
decimal with four decimal positions
I32 4 bytes with sign
U32 4 bytes without sign
VS ASCII string
Format VD LECOM format ASCII decimal format
VH (see also Operating Instructions ASCII hexadecimal format
of the bus module)
VS String format
VO Octet string format for data blocks
DL Data length in byte The row ”Important” contains further
information
Access LCM-R/W Ra Access authorisation for LECOM Reading is always permitted
Wa Writing is always permitted
W Writing is restricted
Condition CINH Condition for writing Writing permitted only when controller is
inhibited
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.5-1

8 Configuration
Code Controller Index Data Access

EVF9321 EVF9335 dec hex DS DA DT Format DL LCM-R/W Condition
... ...
EVF9333 EVF9383
C0002 24573 5FFDh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0003 24572 5FFCh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0004 24571 5FFBh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0005 24570 5FFAh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0006 24569 5FF9h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0009 24566 5FF6h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0010 24565 5FF5h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0011 24564 5FF4h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0012 24563 5FF3h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0013 24562 5FF2h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0014 24561 5FF1h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0015 24560 5FF0h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0016 24559 5FEFh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0017 24558 5FEEh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0018 24557 5FEDh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0019 24556 5FECh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0020 24555 5FEBh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0021 24554 5FEAh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0022 24553 5FE9h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0023 24552 5FE8h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0025 24550 5FE6h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0026 24549 5FE5h A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0027 24548 5FE4h A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0030 24545 5FE1h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0032 24543 5FDFh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0033 24542 5FDEh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0034 24541 5FDDh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0036 24539 5FDBh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0037 24538 5FDAh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0038 24537 5FD9h A 6 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0039 24536 5FD8h A 15 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0040 24535 5FD7h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0042 24533 5FD5h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0043 24532 5FD4h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0045 24530 5FD2h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0046 24529 5FD1h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0049 24526 5FCEh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0050 24525 5FCDh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0051 24524 5FCCh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0052 24523 5FCBh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0053 24522 5FCAh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0054 24521 5FC9h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0056 24519 5FC7h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0057 24518 5FC6h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0058 24517 5FC5h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
8.5-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8

... ...
EVF9333 EVF9383
C0059 24516 5FC4h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0061 24514 5FC2h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0063 24512 5FC0h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0064 24511 5FBFh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0067 24508 5FBCh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0070 24505 5FB9h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0071 24504 5FB8h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0074 24501 5FB5h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0075 24500 5FB4h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0076 24499 5FB3h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0077 24498 5FB2h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0078 24497 5FB1h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0079 24496 5FB0h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0080 24495 5FAFh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0081 24494 5FAEh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0082 24493 5FADh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0084 24491 5FABh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0085 24490 5FAAh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0086 24489 5FA9h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0093 24482 5FA2h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0094 24481 5FA1h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0096 24479 5F9Fh A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0099 24476 5F9Ch E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0101 24474 5F9Ah A 15 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0103 24472 5F98h A 15 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0104 24471 5F97h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0105 24470 5F96h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0107 24478 5F94h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0108 24467 5F93h A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0109 24466 5F92h A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0114 24461 5F8Dh A 6 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0116 24459 5F8Bh A 32 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0117 24458 5F8Ah A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0118 24457 5F89h A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0121 24454 5F86h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0122 24453 5F85h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0125 24450 5F82h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0126 24449 5F81h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.5-3

8 Configuration

... ...
EVF9333 EVF9383
C0130 24445 5F7Dh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0132 24443 5F7Bh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0133 24442 5F7Ah E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0134 24441 5F79h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0135 24440 5F78h E 1 B16 VH 2
C0136 24439 5F77h A 3 B16 VH 2 Ra
C0140 24435 5F73h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0141 24434 5F72h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0142 24433 5F71h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0143 24432 5F70h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0144 24431 5F6Fh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0145 24430 5F6Eh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0146 24429 5F6Dh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0147 24428 5F6Ch E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0148 24427 5F6Bh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0149 24426 5F6Ah E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0150 24425 5F69h E 1 B16 VH 2 Ra
C0151 24424 5F68h E 1 B32 VH 4 Ra
C0155 24420 5F64h E 1 B16 VH 2 Ra
C0156 24419 5F63h A 7 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0157 24418 5F62h A 7 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0161 24414 5F5Eh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0167 24408 5F58h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0168 24407 5F57h A 8 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0169 24406 5F56h A 8 U32 VH 4 Ra
C0170 24405 5F55h A 8 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0173 24402 5F52h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0174 24401 5F51h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0178 24397 5F4Dh E 1 U32 VH 4 Ra
C0179 24396 5F4Ch E 1 U32 VH 4 Ra
C0182 24393 5F49h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0183 24392 5F48h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0190 24385 5F41h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0195 24380 5F3Ch E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0196 24379 5F3Bh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0200 24375 5F37h E 1 VS VS 14 Ra
C0201 24374 5F36h E 1 VS VS 20 Ra
C0202 24373 5F35h E 1 VS VS 20 Ra
C0203 24372 5F34h E 1 VS VS 20 Ra
C0204 24371 5F33h E 1 VS VS 20 Ra
C0206 24369 5F31h E 1 VS VS 20 Ra
C0207 24368 5F30h E 1 VS VS 20 Ra
C0208 24367 5F2Fh E 1 VS VS 20 Ra
C0209 24366 5F2Eh E 1 VS VS 20 Ra
C0220 24355 5F23h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
8.5-4  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8

... ...
EVF9333 EVF9383
C0221 24354 5F22h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0222 24353 5F21h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0223 24352 5F20h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0224 24351 5F1Fh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0234 24341 5F15h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0235 24340 5F14h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0236 24339 5F13h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0241 24334 5F0Eh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0244 24331 5F0Bh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0250 24325 5F05h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0252 24323 5F03h E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C0253 24322 5F02h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0260 24315 5EFBh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0261 24314 5EFAh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0262 24313 5EF9h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0263 24312 5EF8h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0264 24311 5EF7h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0265 24310 5EF6h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0267 24308 5EF4h A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0268 24307 5EF3h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0269 24306 5EF2h A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0325 24250 5EBAh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0326 24249 5EB9h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0327 24248 5EB8h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0328 24247 5EB7h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0329 24246 5EB6h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0332 24243 5EB3h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0333 24242 5EB2h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0336 24239 5EAFh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0337 24238 5EAEh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0338 24237 5EADh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0339 24236 5EACh A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0340 24235 5EABh A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0350 24225 5EA1h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0351 24224 5EA0h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0352 24223 5E9Fh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0353 24222 5E9Eh A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0354 24221 5E9Dh A 6 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0355 24220 5E9Ch A 6 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0356 24219 5E9Bh A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0357 24218 5E9Ah A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0358 24217 5E99h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0359 24216 5E98h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0360 24215 5E97h A 12 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0361 24214 5E96h A 12 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.5-5

8 Configuration

... ...
EVF9333 EVF9383
C0364 24211 5E93h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0365 24210 5E92h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0366 24209 5E91h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0367 24208 5E90h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0368 24207 5E8Fh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0369 24206 5E8Eh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0400 24175 5E6Fh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0402 24173 5E6Dh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0403 24172 5E6Ch E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0404 24171 5E6Bh A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0405 24170 5E6Ah E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0409 24166 5E66h A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0420 24155 5E5Bh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0421 24154 5E5Ah E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0425 24150 5E56h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0426 24149 5E55h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0427 24148 5E54h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0429 24146 5E52h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0432 24143 5E4Fh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0433 24142 5E4Eh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0434 24141 5E4Dh A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0439 24136 5E48h A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0443 24132 5E44h E 1 B8 VH 1 Ra
C0444 24131 5E43h A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0450 24125 5E3Dh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0451 24124 5E3Ch E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0458 24117 5E35h A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0459 24116 5E34h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0464 24111 5E2Fh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0465 24110 5E2Eh A 50 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0466 24109 5E2Dh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0470 24105 5E29h A 4 B8 VH 1 Ra/Wa
C0471 24104 5E28h E 1 B32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C0472 24103 5E27h A 20 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0473 24102 5E26h A 10 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0474 24101 5E25h A 2 I32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C0475 24100 5E24h A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
8.5-6  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8

... ...
EVF9333 EVF9383
C0497 24078 5E0Eh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0511 24064 5E00h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0517 24058 5DFAh A 32 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0520 24055 5DF7h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0528 24047 5DEFh A 2 I32 VH 4 Ra
C0529 24046 5DEEh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0530 24045 5DEDh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0531 24044 5DECh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0532 24043 5DEBh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0533 24042 5DEAh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0534 24041 5DE9h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0535 24040 5DE8h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0536 24039 5DE7h A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0537 24038 5DE6h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0538 24037 5DE5h A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0539 24036 5DE4h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0540 24035 5DE3h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0544 24031 5DDFh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0545 24030 5DDEh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0546 24029 5DDDh E 1 U32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C0547 24028 5DDCh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0548 24027 5DDBh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0549 24026 5DDAh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0560 24015 5DCFh A 15 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0561 24014 5DCEh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0562 24013 5DCDh A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0563 24012 5DCCh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0564 24011 5DCBh A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0570 24005 5DC5h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0571 24004 5DC4h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0572 24003 5DC3h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0573 24002 5DC2h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0574 24001 5DC1h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0581 23994 5DBAh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0582 23993 5DB9h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.5-7

8 Configuration

... ...
EVF9333 EVF9383
C0583 23992 5DB8h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0584 23991 5DB7h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0585 23990 5DB6h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0587 23988 5DB4h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0588 23987 5DB3h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0591 23984 5DB0h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0592 23983 5DAFh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0593 23982 5DAEh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0594 23981 5DADh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0595 23980 5DACh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0596 23979 5DABh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0597 23978 5DAAh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0598 23977 5DA9h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0599 23976 5DA8h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0600 23975 5DA7h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0601 23974 5DA6h A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0602 23973 5DA5h A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0603 23972 5DA4h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0604 23971 5DA3h A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0605 23970 5DA2h A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0608 23967 5D9Fh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0609 23966 5D9Eh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0610 23965 5D9Dh A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0611 23964 5D9Ch A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0612 23963 5D9Bh A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0613 23962 5D9Ah A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0620 23955 5D93h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0621 23954 5D92h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0622 23953 5D91h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0623 23952 5D90h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0630 23945 5D89h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0631 23944 5D88h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0633 23942 5D86h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0640 23935 5D7Fh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0641 23934 5D7Eh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0642 23933 5D7Dh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0643 23932 5D7Ch E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0644 23931 5D7Bh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0645 23930 5D7Ah E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0650 23925 5D75h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0651 23924 5D74h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0653 23922 5D72h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0654 23921 5D71h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
8.5-8  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8

... ...
EVF9333 EVF9383
C0655 23920 5D70h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0656 23919 5D6Fh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0658 23917 5D6Dh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0661 23914 5D6Ah E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0662 23913 5D69h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0671 23904 5D60h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0672 23903 5D5Fh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0674 23901 5D5Dh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0675 23900 5D5Ch E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0676 23899 5D5Bh A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0677 23898 5D5Ah E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0680 23895 5D57h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0681 23894 5D56h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0682 23893 5D55h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0683 23892 5D54h A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0684 23891 5D53h A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0685 23890 5D52h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0686 23889 5D51h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0687 23888 5D50h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0688 23887 5D4Fh A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0689 23886 5D4Eh A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0690 23885 5D4Dh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0691 23884 5D4Ch E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0692 23883 5D4Bh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0693 23882 5D4Ah A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0694 23881 5D49h A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0701 23874 5D42h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0704 23871 5D3Fh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0705 23870 5D3Eh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0706 23869 5D3Dh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0707 23868 5D3Ch E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0708 23867 5D3Bh A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0709 23866 5D3Ah A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0710 23865 5D39h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0711 23864 5D38h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0714 23861 5D35h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0715 23860 5D34h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0716 23859 5D33h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0719 23856 5D30h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.5-9

8 Configuration

... ...
EVF9333 EVF9383
C0720 23855 5D2Fh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0721 23854 5D2Eh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0723 23852 5D2Ch E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0724 23851 5D2Bh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0725 23850 5D2Ah E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0726 23849 5D29h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0729 23846 5D26h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0730 23845 5D25h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0731 23844 5D24h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0732 23843 5D23h A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0734 23841 5D21h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0735 23840 5D20h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0736 23839 5D1Fh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0737 23838 5D1Eh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0738 23837 5D1Dh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0739 23836 5D1Ch E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0740 23835 5D1Bh A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0741 23834 5D1Ah A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0742 23833 5D19h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0743 23832 5D18h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0744 23831 5D17h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0749 23826 5D12h A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0750 23825 5D11h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0751 23824 5D10h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0752 23823 5D0Fh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0753 23822 5D0Eh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0754 23821 5D0Dh E 1 U32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C0755 23820 5D0Ch E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0756 23819 5D0Bh E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C0757 23818 5D0Ah E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0764 23811 5D03h A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0765 23810 5D02h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0770 23805 5CFDh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0771 23804 5CFCh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0772 23803 5CFBh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0773 23802 5CFAh A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0775 23800 5CF8h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
8.5-10  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8

... ...
EVF9333 EVF9383
C0778 23797 5CF5h A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0784 23791 5CEFh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0785 23790 5CEEh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0786 23789 5CEDh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0787 23788 5CECh A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0788 23787 5CEBh A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0789 23786 5CEAh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0790 23785 5CE9h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0798 23777 5CE1h A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0799 23776 5CE0h A 13 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0800 23775 5CDFh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0801 23774 5CDEh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0802 23773 5CDDh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0803 23772 5CDCh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0804 23771 5CDBh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0805 23770 5CDAh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0808 23767 5CD7h A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0809 23766 5CD6h A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0810 23765 5CD5h A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0811 23764 5CD4h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0812 23763 5CD3h A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0813 23762 5CD2h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0815 23760 5CD0h A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0816 23759 5CCFh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0817 23758 5CCEh A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0818 23757 5CCDh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0820 23755 5CCBh A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0821 23754 5CCAh A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0822 23753 5CC9h A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0823 23752 5CC8h A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0825 23750 5CC6h A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0827 23748 5CC4h A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0829 23746 5CC2h A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0831 23744 5CC0h A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0832 23743 5CBFh A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0833 23742 5CBEh A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0834 23741 5CBDh A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.5-11

8 Configuration

... ...
EVF9333 EVF9383
C0835 23740 5CBCh A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0836 23739 5CBBh A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0837 23738 5CBAh A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0838 23737 5CB9h A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0839 23736 5CB8h A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0840 23735 5CB7h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0841 23734 5CB6h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0843 23732 5CB4h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0845 23730 5CB2h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0847 23728 5CB0h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0848 23727 5CAFh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0849 23726 5CAEh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0850 23725 5CADh A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0851 23724 5CACh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0852 23723 5CABh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0853 23722 5CAAh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0855 23720 5CA8h A 2 B16 VH 2 Ra
C0856 23719 5CA7h A 3 I32 VH 4 Ra
C0857 23718 5CA6h E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C0858 23717 5CA5h A 3 I32 VH 4 Ra
C0859 23716 5CA4h E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C0860 23715 5CA3h A 11 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0861 23714 5CA2h A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0863 23712 5CA0h A 6 B32 VH 4 Ra
C0864 23711 5C9Fh A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0865 23710 5C9Eh A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0866 23709 5C9Dh A 11 I32 VH 4 Ra
C0867 23708 5C9Ch A 3 I32 VH 4 Ra
C0868 23707 5C9Bh A 11 I32 VH 4 Ra
C0869 23706 5C9Ah A 3 I32 VH 4 Ra
C0870 23705 5C99h A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0871 23704 5C98h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0878 23697 5C91h A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0879 23696 5C90h A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0880 23695 5C8Fh A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0881 23694 5C8Eh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0884 23691 5C8Bh A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0885 23690 5C8Ah E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0889 23686 5C86h A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
8.5-12  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8

... ...
EVF9333 EVF9383
C0899 23676 5C7Ch E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0900 23675 5C7Bh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0901 23674 5C7Ah E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0905 23670 5C76h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0906 23669 5C75h A 6 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0907 23668 5C74h A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0909 23666 5C72h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0911 23664 5C70h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0912 23663 5C6Fh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0913 23662 5C6Eh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0940 23635 5C53h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0941 23634 5C52h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0943 23632 5C50h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0945 23630 5C4Eh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0946 23629 5C4Dh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0947 23628 5C4Ch E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0948 23627 5C4Bh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0950 23625 5C49h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0951 23624 5C48h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0953 23622 5C46h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0955 23620 5C44h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0956 23619 5C43h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0958 23617 5C41h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0960 23615 5C3Fh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0961 23614 5C3Eh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0962 23613 5C3Dh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0963 23612 5C3Ch E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0964 23611 5C3Bh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0965 23610 5C3Ah E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0966 23609 5C39h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0968 23607 5C37h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.5-13

8 Configuration

... ...
EVF9333 EVF9383
C0976 23599 5C2Fh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0977 23598 5C2Eh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0978 23597 5C2Dh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C0980 23595 5C2Bh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0981 23594 5C2Ah E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0982 23593 5C29h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0983 23592 5C28h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C0988 23587 5C23h A 7 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C0989 23586 5C22h A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1000 23575 5C17h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1002 23573 5C15h E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra/Wa
C1040 23535 5BEFh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1041 23534 5BEEh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1042 23533 5BEDh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1043 23532 5BECh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1044 23531 5BEBh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1045 23530 5BEAh A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1046 23529 5BE9h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1090 23485 5BBDh E 1 I32 VH 4 Ra
C1091 23484 5BBCh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1092 23483 5BBBh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1093 23482 5BBAh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1094 23481 5BB9h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1095 23480 5BB8h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1096 23479 5BB7h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1097 23478 5BB6h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1098 23477 5BB5h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1099 23476 5BB4h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1100 23475 5BB3h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1101 23474 5BB2h A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1102 23473 5BB1h A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1103 23472 5BB0h A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1104 23471 5BAFh A 3 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1160 23418 5B7Ah E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1161 23417 5B79h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1162 23416 5B78h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1163 23415 5B77h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1300 23278 5AEEh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1301 23277 5AEDh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1302 23276 5AECh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1303 23275 5AEBh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
8.5-14  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Configuration 8

... ...
EVF9333 EVF9383
C1304 23274 5AEAh E 1 VS VS 20 Ra
C1305 23273 5AE9h E 1 VS VS 20 Ra
C1306 23272 5AE8h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1307 23271 5AE7h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1308 23270 5AE6h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1309 23269 5AE5h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1310 23268 5AE4h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1311 23267 5AE3h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1320 23258 5ADAh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1321 23257 5AD9h A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1322 23256 5AD8h A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1325 23253 5AD5h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1326 23252 5AD4h A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1327 23251 5AD3h A 2 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1328 23250 5AD2h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1330 23248 5AD0h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1331 23247 5ACFh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1332 23246 5ACEh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1333 23245 5ACDh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1334 23244 5ACCh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1335 23243 5ACBh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1336 23242 5ACAh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1337 23241 5AC9h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1340 23238 5AC6h A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1341 23237 5AC5h A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1344 23234 5AC2h A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1345 23233 5AC1h A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1350 23228 5ABCh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1351 23227 5ABBh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1354 23224 5AB8h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1357 23221 5AB5h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1358 23220 5AB4h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1359 23219 5AB3h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1360 23218 5AB2h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1361 23217 5AB1h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1364 23214 5AAEh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1365 23213 5AADh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1366 23212 5AACh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1367 23211 5AABh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1368 23210 5AAAh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1369 23209 5AA9h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1370 23208 5AA8h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1371 23207 5AA7h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  8.5-15

8 Configuration

... ...
EVF9333 EVF9383
C1372 23206 5AA6h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1373 23205 5AA5h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1375 23203 5AA3h E 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1376 23202 5AA2h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1377 23201 5AA1h A 4 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1378 23200 5AA0h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra
C1583 22995 59D3h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/Wa
C1751 22827 592Bh A 17 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
C1753 22825 5929h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 Ra/W CINH
8.5-16  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Troubleshooting and fault elimination 9
Contents
9 Troubleshooting and fault elimination
Contents
9.1 Display of operating data, diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1-1

9.1.1 Display of operating data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1-1
9.1.2 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1-2
9.2 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2-1
9.2.1 Status display (LED’s on the controller) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2-1
9.2.2 Error analysis with the history buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2-1
9.3 Drive performance in case of errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3-1
9.4 Error elimination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4-1
9.4.1 Maloperation of the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4-1
9.4.2 Controller in clamp operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4-2
9.4.3 Behaviour in case of overvoltage in the DC bus (OU message) . . . . 9.4-3
9.4.4 Error messages at the keypad or in the parameter setting program
Global Drive Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4-5
9.5 Resetting error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5-1
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  9-1

Display of operating data, diagnostics 9.1
Display of operating data 9.1.1
9.1 Display of operating data, diagnostics
9.1.1 Display of operating data
Description Important operating parameters are measured by the controller. They can
be displayed with the keypad or PC.
Some operating data can be calibrated to be displayed or selected directly
with the unit of the process factor (e.g. pressure, temperature, speed).
 Note!
The calibration always affects all codes simultaneously.

MCTRL  8.2-48
z Display only
MCTRL  8.2-48
z Display only
z MCTRL-VACT = 100 % = C0090
MCTRL  8.2-48
z Display only
1000 V
z Read only
z MCTRL-IACT = 100 % = C0022
C0061 HEATSINK 0 {1 °C} 100 Heatsink temperature See System
Manual
TEMP z Read only (extension)
z If the temperature of the
heatsink > 85 °C the controller
sets TRIP OH
z Early warning is possible via
C0122
C0121
warning OH8
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  9.1-1

9.1 Display of operating data, diagnostics
9.1.2 Diagnostics

warning OC5
current
C0150 Status word Bit00 – Bit08 Status Code Read only See System
Manual
Bit01 IMP Bit09 Status Code Decimal status word when (extension)
Bit02 – Bit10 Status Code interface (AIF)
Bit03 – Bit11 Status Code z Binary interpretation indicates
Bit04 – Bit12 Warning the bit states
Bit05 – Bit13 Message
Bit06 n=0 Bit14 –
9.1.2 Diagnostics
Description Display codes for diagnostics

C0093 DRIVE IDENT Controller identification
z Read only
0 invalid Damaged power section
1 none No power section
9321 9321VC Display of the controller used
... ...
9333 9333VC
C0099 S/W version x.y Software version
x Main version z Display only
y Subversion
9.1-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Troubleshooting 9.2
Status display (LED’s on the controller) 9.2.1
9.2 Troubleshooting
Detecting failures The controller LED’s and the status information at the keypad immediately
indicate errors or operation problems.
Analysing errors You can analyse an error using the history buffer. The list “Error messages”
helps you to eliminate the error. ( 9.4-5)
9.2.1 Status display (LED’s on the controller)
During operation, the operating status of the controller is indicated by

means of two LED’s.
LED Operating status
red c green d
Off On Controller enabled
On On Mains is switched on and automatic
start is inhibited
Off Blinking Controller inhibited
slowly
Off On Motor data identification is being
performed
Blinking Off Undervoltage
quickly
Blinking Off Active fault
slowly
9.2.2 Error analysis with the history buffer
Retracing faults Faults can be retraced via the history buffer. Fault messages are stored in the
8 memory locations in the order of their appearance.
The memory locations can be retrieved via codes.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  9.2-1

9.2 Troubleshooting
9.2.2 Error analysis with the history buffer
Structure of the history buffer
Code Memory unit Entry Note

C0168/1 C0169/1 C0170/1 Memory unit 1 Active fault If the fault is not available anymore or has
C0168/2 C0169/2 C0170/2 Memory unit 2 Last fault been acknowledged:
z The contents of the memory locations 1 ... 7
C0168/3 C0169/3 C0170/3 Memory unit 3 Second to last fault are moved one memory location ”higher”.
C0168/4 C0169/4 C0170/4 Memory unit 4 Third last fault z The contents of memory location 8 is
deleted from the history buffer and cannot
C0168/5 C0169/5 C0170/5 Memory unit 5 Fourth-last fault
be retrieved anymore.
C0168/6 C0169/6 C0170/6 Memory unit 6 Fifth-last fault z Memory location 1 is deleted (= no active
C0168/7 C0169/7 C0170/7 Memory unit 7 Sixth-last fault fault).
C0168/8 C0169/8 C0170/8 Memory unit 8 Last but six fault
Explanations regarding the codes

C0168 Fault recognition and response to the reaction
z The entry is done as a LECOM error number
z If several fault with different reactions occur at the same time:
– Only the fault is entered the reaction of which has the highest priority
(1. TRIP, 2. message, 3. warning).
z If faults with the same reactions occur (e.g. 2 messages):
– Only the fault which occurred first is entered.
C0169 Time of the fault
z Reference time is the status of the power-on time meter (C0179).
z If a fault is immediately followed by another fault for several times, only
the time of the last occurrence is stored.
C0170 Frequency of the fault
z The time of the last occurrence is stored.
Delete history buffer Set C0167 = 1 to delete the history buffer.
9.2-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Drive performance in case of errors 9.3
9.3 Drive performance in case of errors
The controller reacts in different ways depending on the three possible types
of fault TRIP, message or warning:
TRIP TRIP (display of keypad XT:  )

ƒ Switches the power outputs U, V, W to a high resistance until TRIP is
reset
ƒ Entry of the fault indication into the history buffer as ”current fault” in
C0168/1.
ƒ The drive is coasting without control!
ƒ After TRIP reset ( 9.5-1):
– The drive accelerates to its setpoint along the set ramps.
– The fault indication is moved into C0168/2 as ”last fault”.
Messages Message (display of keypad XT:  )
ƒ Tristates the power outputs U, V, W.
C0168/1.
ƒ In case of a fault ≤5 s:
– The drive is coasting without control as long as the message is active!
– If the message is not active anymore, the drive accelerates to its
setpoint with maximum torque.
ƒ In case of a fault >5 s:
– The drive is coasting without control as long as the message is active!
– If the message is not active anymore, the drive accelerates to its
setpoint along the set ramps.
ƒ If the message is not active anymore, the fault indication is moved to
C0168/2 as ”last fault”.
Warning ”Heatsink overtemperature” (keypad XT:OH  )
ƒ The drive operates under control!
ƒ The warning signal goes off if the fault is not active anymore.
”Error in motor phase” (keypad XT:LP1)
”PTC monitoring” (keypad XT:OH51)
ƒ The drive operates under control!
C0168/1.
ƒ After TRIP reset the fault indication is moved into C0168/2 as ”last
fault”.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  9.3-1

Error elimination 9.4
Maloperation of the drive 9.4.1
9.4 Error elimination
9.4.1 Maloperation of the drive
Faulty behaviour Cause Remedy

An asynchronous motor The motor phases are reversed so that the rotating field z Check motor cable for correct phase
with feedback rotates in an of the motor is not identical anymore with the rotating position.
uncontrolled manner and field of the feedback system. The drive shows the z If possible, operate the motor with
with low speed following behaviour: deactivated feedback (C0025 = 1) and
z V/f characteristic control (C0006 = 5) check the direction of rotation of the
– The motor rotates faster than the speed setpoint by motor.
the value set in C0074 (influence of the speed
controller, Lenze setting 10 % of nmax). After the
controller is enabled it does not stop at zero speed
setpoint or quick stop (QSP).
– The setting motor current depends, among other
things, on the set value of the Umin boost (C0016)
and can rise to Imax (C0022). This may activate the
fault message OC5.
z Vector control (C0006 = 1)
– The motor rotates slowly with maximum slip speed
(depending on motor data and maximum current)
and does not react to a speed setpoint. The
direction of rotation is determined by the sign of
the speed setpoint.
– The motor current rises up to Imax (C0022). This
may activate the fault message OC5 with a time
delay.
Motor does not rotate Both terminal strips X5 are reversed. Since X5/A1 and Check the position of the terminal strips:
although the controller is X5/28 face each other, the controller can be enabled if z If you look at the connection terminal
enabled ( is off) and a the control terminals are internally supplied. All other in reading direction, the left terminal
speed setpoint has been connections, however, are assigned incorrectly so that strip X5 must be connected with the
specified. the motor cannot start. input signals and the right terminal
strip X5 must be connected with the
output signals.
The monitoring of the The function block MLP1 is not entered into the Enter the function block MLP1 into the
motor phases (LP1) does processing table. processing table. The function block MLP1
not respond if a motor requires 30 μs of calculating time.
phase is interrupted,
although C0597 = 0 or 2
If during high speeds During DC-injection braking the controller sets pulse Prolonging the duration of the pulse
DC-injection braking (GSB) inhibit for a short time (DCTRL-IMP) to reduce the inhibit:
is activated, the fault OC1 magnetisation in the motor before a DC voltage is z Apply the output signal DCTRL-IMP to
(TRIP) or OU (TRIP) occurs injected into the motor. At high speeds (e. g. in case of the function block TRANSx and adjust
mid-frequency motors) the residual voltage which the desired switch-off time there
develops from the residual magnetism and high speed (usually 500 ms). If DCTRL-CINH1 is set
can generate such a high motor current that OC1 or OU to HIGH, the duration of the pulse
is activated. inhibit is prolonged by the time
adjusted.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  9.4-1

9.4.2 Controller in clamp operation
9.4.2 Controller in clamp operation
The clamp operation is a permissible operating mode. But since, however,

pulse inhibit is set again and again, the controller cannot provide the
optimum power. Moreover, the fault OC3 (TRIP) can be activated.
If the output power is optimal, the output current mainly passes right below
the clamp threshold.
9300vec110
Fig. 9.4-1 Output current when starting a motor with high load (shown with the
oscilloscope in GDC)
 Clamp threshold
 Output current
Function
1. When the output current reaches 2.25 × IN, a software clamp is
activated.
2. The controller sets pulse inhibit for a short time. The motor current
decreases as a function of the inductance in the motor circuit.
– An internal counter is increased by the value one.
3. After max. 250 μs the pulse inhibit is deactivated.
4. If a software clamp reoccurs within 2 s, the internal counter is again
increased by the value one. Otherwise the counter is set to zero.
– If the counter reaches the value 4300, OC3 (TRIP) is activated.
9.4-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Behaviour in case of overvoltage in the DC bus (OU message) 9.4.3
9.4.3 Behaviour in case of overvoltage in the DC bus (OU message)
Description If the DC-bus voltage (UDC) exceeds the switch-off threshold OU, the pulse
inhibit is set. At the same time, an internal timing element starts for a delay
time (C0912).
The pulse inhibit is deactivated if the voltage falls below the switch-on
threshold OU and the delay time has elapsed.
Switching thresholds in case of overvoltage in the DC bus (OU):
Mains voltage range C0173 Switch-off threshold Switch-on threshold
OU OU
< 400 V Operation with / 0 770 V 755 V
without brake
chopper
400 V Operation with / 1* 770 V 755 V
without brake
chopper
460 V Operation with / 2 770 V 755 V
without brake
chopper
480 V Operation without 3 770 V 755 V
brake chopper
480 V Operation with brake 4 800 V 785 V
chopper
* Lenze setting

Æ depending on C0082, C0086,  9.4-3
C0087, C0088, C0089, C0090,
C0091, C0092
selected motor
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  9.4-3

9.4.3 Behaviour in case of overvoltage in the DC bus (OU message)
Adjustment UDC 0 1

t < C0912
t ³ C0912 t = C0912
IMP
9300vec142
Fig. 9.4-2 Influence of the delay time (C0912)

c Switch-off threshold OU
d Switch-on threshold OU
 The period of time between exceeding the switch-off threshold OU and
undershooting the switch-on threshold OU equals or is higher than the set
delay time in C0912.
After undershooting the switch-on threshold OU the pulse inhibit is
deactivated.
 The period of time between exceeding the switch-off threshold OU and
undershooting the switch-on threshold OU is lower than the set delay time
in C0912.
The pulse inhibit is deactivated after the delay time in C0912 has elapsed.
ƒ In C0912 the delay time is set in [ms].The Lenze setting can be changed
by the factor 0.5 ... 2.
9.4-4  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Error messages at the keypad or in the parameter setting program Global Drive Control 9.4.4
9.4.4 Error messages at the keypad or in the parameter setting program Global Drive Control
 Note!
If you use GDC or a fieldbus module to find out about the fault
(C0168/x), the error message will be represented by an error
number.
Error Error number Fault Cause Remedy

code x = 0: TRIP
x = 1: Message
x = 2: Warning
--- --- No fault – –
CCr x071 System fault Processor is overloaded or there is a Reduce processor load. Remove function
fault in the program processing blocks that are not needed from the
processing table
Strong interference on control cables Shield control cables
Ground or earth loops in the wiring Check wiring
CE0 x061 Communication Interference during transmission of Plug in automation module firmly, bolt
error control commands via automation down, if necessary
interface X1
CE1 x062 Communication CAN-IN1 object receives faulty data, or z Check cable at X4
error at the process communication is interrupted z Check transmitter
data input object z Increase monitoring time under
CAN-IN1 C0357/1 if necessary
CE4 x065 BUS-OFF state Controller has received too many z Check wiring
incorrect telegrams via system bus X4, z Check bus termination (if any)
and has disconnected from the bus z Check shield contact of the cables
z Check PE connection
z Check bus load
z Reduce baud rate (observe cable
length)
EEr x091 External fault A digital input assigned with TRIP-set z Check external encoder
(TRIP-Set) function has been activated (in the most z Check signal at the digital input
basic configurations the input X5/E4 X5/E4:
LOW- is active and linked with the – Either connect HIGH level or
TRIP-set function) – Change polarity in C0114 to
High-active. Caution! When
changing to HIGH level the
wire-break protection gets lost.
Both terminal strips at X5 are reversed Check the position of the terminal
strips:
z If you look at the connection terminal
in reading direction, the left terminal
input signals and the right terminal
output signals.
H05 x105 Internal fault Contact Lenze
H07 x107 Incorrect power During initialisation of the controller, an Contact Lenze
stage incorrect power stage was detected
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  9.4-5


code x = 0: TRIP
x = 1: Message
x = 2: Warning
H10 x110 Sensor fault - Sensor of the heatsink temperature Contact Lenze
heatsink detection indicates undefined values z Fault message can only be reset by
temperature mains switching
H11 x111 Sensor fault - Sensor of the indoor temperature Contact Lenze
indoor detection indicates undefined values z Fault message can only be reset by
temperature mains switching
ID1 x140 Errors during z No motor connected z Check motor connection
motor data z Stator resistance too high z Check motor data entry
identification z Controller inhibited externally z Enable controller and repeat motor
data identification. The controller
enable must be pending continuously
until the end of the identification
process.
ID2 x141 Errors during Motor too small z Check entered motor data
motor data – When setting parameters with
identification Global Drive Control use the input
assistant for motor data
z The measurements for the inverter
error characteristic and the stator
resistance are correct (save measured
values in C0003). In the operating
mode V/f characteristic control the
motor data identification can be
completed.
Controller inhibited externally Enable controller and repeat motor data
identification. The controller enable
must be pending continuously until the
end of the identification process.
LP1 x032 Motor phase A current-carrying motor phase has z Check motor
failure failed z Check supply cables
The current limit is set too high Set a lower current limit value under
C0599
This monitoring is not suitable for field Deactivate monitoring with C0597= 3
frequencies >480 Hz and synchronous
servo motors
LU x030 Undervoltage DC bus voltage is smaller than the value z Check mains voltage
fixed under C0173 z Check supply module
NMAX x200 Maximum system Active load too high Check drive dimensioning
speed exceeded Drive is not speed-controlled, torque If required, increase torque limit
(C0596) excessively limited
Current speed is detected incorrectly Check parameter setting of the
incremental encoder (C0025)
OC1 x011 Overcurrent Short circuit/earth fault z Remove cause for short circuit/earth
(Motor current > fault
2.25-fold rated z Check motor and cable
controller current, z If required, measure the insulation
hardware resistance
monitoring)
Capacitive charging current of the Use shorter or low-capacitance motor
motor cable too high (especially with cable
lower power)
Too short acceleration or deceleration z Increase the gain (P component) of
times in proportion to the load (C0012, the current controller (C0075)
C0013, C0105) z Reduce the integral-action time
(integral action component) of the
Imax controller (C0076)
9.4-6  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005


code x = 0: TRIP
x = 1: Message
x = 2: Warning
The drive is connected to the coasting z Activate flying restart circuit
machine. The coasting is caused by a z Operate with speed feedback in the
short-time pulse inhibit, e.g. at vector control operating mode
z OU (overvoltage in the DC bus)
z external or internal controller inhibit
z Encoder error z Check wiring of the encoder
z Tracks during encoder feedback of z In case of drive problems with
the motor speed are interchanged activated feedback the feedback can
be analysed. Here, the signal of the
feedback is not used for control. For
this test the function block DFIN must
be entered into the processing table.
In the Lenze setting, DFIN is entered
on position 1 of the processing table
(C0465/1 = 200).
– Deactivate feedback with
C0025 = 1
– Connect feedback at the master
frequency input DFIN (X9)
– Set DFIN constant (C0425) to the
number of increments of the
encoder
– In C0426, the speed detected by
the encoder is indicated
DC-injection braking at high speeds z See  9.4-1
OC2 x012 Earth fault One of the motor phases has earth z Check motor
contact z Check supply cables
Excessive capacitive charging current of Use motor cable which is shorter or of
the motor cable lower capacitance
OC3 x013 Overload during Too short acceleration or deceleration z Increase the gain (P component) of
acceleration times in proportion to the load (C0012, the current controller (C0075)
C0013, C0105) z Reduce integral-action time (integral
action component) of the Imax
controller (C0076)
z Increase ramp times
z  9.4-2, ”controller in clamp
operation (fault OC3)”
OC5 x015 I × t overload The efficiency of the controller exceeds Check drive dimensioning
100 % (C0064 > 100 %) z The efficiency of the controller is
calculated from the mean value of
the motor current over a time of
180 s. When operating with a rated
power (150 % overload capacity), the
controller can be operated at a
capacity of up to 100 %.
z When C0064 = 95 %, the warning is
cancelled.
When operating with increased rated
power (120 % overload capacity), the
efficiency of the controller may exceed
100 %. The warning can be ignored.
The efficiency of the controller exceeds Check drive dimensioning
140 % (C0064 > 140 %) z When C0064 = 95 %, the switching
z The switching frequency is reduced frequency reduction and the
when ”autochop“ is set (C0018 = 0 or reduction of the maximum current
6) are cancelled. The warning is
z The maximum current is reduced cancelled.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  9.4-7


code x = 0: TRIP
x = 1: Message
x = 2: Warning
Reversed motor phases when operating z Check the motor cable connection for
with feedback or reversed encoder correct phase position
tracks so that the direction of rotation z If possible, operate the motor with
has changed deactivated feedback (C0025 = 1) and
check the direction of rotation of the
motor.
OH x050 Heatsink Ambient temperature Tu > 40 °C or 50 °C z Allow controller to cool and ensure
temperature is better ventilation
higher than the z Check ambient temperature in the
value set in the control cabinet
controller
Heatsink very dirty Clean heatsink
Incorrect mounting position Change mounting position
OH3 x053 Motor temperature Motor too hot because of excessive Check drive dimensioning
is higher than the current or frequent and too long
value set in the acceleration
controller
NO KTY is connected to X8 Connect KTY or switch off monitoring
(C0583 = 3)
OH4 x054 Heatsink Ambient temperature Tu > 40 °C or z Allow controller to cool and ensure
temperature is 50 °C. better ventilation
higher than the z Check ambient temperature in the
value set in C0122 control cabinet
Heatsink very dirty Clean heatsink
Incorrect mounting position Change mounting position
The value entered in C0122 is too low Enter higher value
OH7 x057 Motor temperature Motor too hot because of excessive Check drive dimensioning
is higher than the current or frequent and too long
value set in C0121 acceleration
NO KTY is connected to X8 Connect KTY or switch off monitoring
(C0584 = 3)
The value entered in C0121 is too low Enter higher value
OH8 x058 PTC at terminals Motor too hot because of excessive Check drive dimensioning
T1, T2 indicates current or frequent and too long
motor overheating acceleration
Terminals T1, T2 are not assigned Connect PTC or thermostat or switch off
monitoring (C0585=3)
OU x020 Overvoltage in the Braking energy is too high. The DC-bus z Use a braking unit or regenerative
DC bus voltage is higher than set in C0173. module
z When using the braking units 935x,
check the settings of the switching
thresholds (see Operating
Instructions for 9350 braking unit)
z In case of parallel connection of 935x
braking units, check the settings for
master and slave (see Operating
Instructions for 9350 braking unit)
z If possible prolong the braking ramp
(C0013, C0105)
PEr x074 Program fault An error has been detected in the Contact Lenze
program run. The parameter set 1 is
loaded automatically. All parameter
data which have been changed before
but not saved will get lost.
PI x079 Initialisation error z A fault was detected during transfer Correct parameter set
of parameter set between the
controllers
z Parameter set does not match the
controller
9.4-8  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005


code x = 0: TRIP
x = 1: Message
x = 2: Warning
PR0 x075 Parameter set error Error while loading a parameter set. The z Correct parameter set
parameters saved are not suitable for z Save all parameter sets with C0003
the software version of the controller. and reset the fault message by mains
Caution! The Lenze setting is loaded switching
automatically.
PR1 x072 Parameter set error z Fault while loading a parameter set Set the required parameters and save
PR2 x073 z The transmission of parameter sets them with C0003
PR3 x077 with keypad XT has been interrupted
PR4 x078 (e.g. by an early disconnection of the
keypad XT)
Caution! The Lenze setting is loaded
automatically.
Sd3 x083 Encoder error at X9 Cable interrupted Check cable for wire breakage
Pin X9/8 is not assigned Assign pin X9/8 with 5 V or switch off
monitoring (C0587 = 3)
Sd5 x085 Encoder at X6/1, Current at X6/1, X6/2 < 2 mA z Check cable for wire breakage
X6/2 is defect z Check encoder
Sd6 x086 Sensor error at X8 KTY at X8 indicates undefined values z Check supply cable for firm
connection
z Switch off monitoring with C0594 = 3
if necessary
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  9.4-9

Resetting error messages 9.5
9.5 Resetting error messages
Eliminate the cause of TRIP After you have eliminated the cause of a TRIP fault message, you must reset
fault message the fault message with the command ”TRIP reset”. Only then the drive
restarts.
 Note!
A TRIP fault message can have several causes. Only if all causes
of the TRIP have been eliminated, the TRIP reset can be executed.
TRIP reset ƒ Keypad XT: press . Then press , to enable the controller.
ƒ Fieldbus module: set C0043 = 0
ƒ Control word: C0135
ƒ Terminal: X5/E5 = HIGH
ƒ Control word via AIF
ƒ Control word via system bus (CAN)
Mains switching always executes TRIP reset.

C0043 Trip reset 0 0 no/trip reset Reset actual error
1 trip active There is an error TRIP
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  9.5-1

DC-bus operation 10
Contents
10 Network of several drives
Contents
10.1 Decentralised supply (several supply terminals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-1

10.2 Central supply (one supply terminal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2-1
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  10-1

DC-bus operation 10
Decentralised supply (several supply terminals) 10.1
10.1 Decentralised supply (several supply terminals)
K10
L1
L2
L2
N
PE
S2
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
K10
S1
Z1 Z2
JRB
K10 Z3
F7 F8 F9 F10
RB1 RB2 PE +UG -UG L1 L2 L3 PE +UG -UG L1 L2 L3 PE +UG -UG
9352 9321-9333 9321-9333

U V W PE PE PE U V W PE 28
Z4 28 A4 A4
K10 K10
X1 X2
RFR RFR
M M
PE 3~ PE 3~
9300vec151
Fig. 10.1-1 Block diagram of a decentralised supply with brake chopper

F1 ... F10 Fuses
K10 Mains contactor
Z1, Z2 Mains filters
Z3 Brake resistor
Z4 Brake chopper
ƒ Design the components according to the requirements of the DC-bus

operation.
 Stop!
Set the DC-bus voltage thresholds of the controller (C0173) and
the brake chopper (see documentation of the brake chopper) to
the same values.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  10.1-1

DC-bus operation 10
Central supply (one supply terminal) 10.2
10.2 Central supply (one supply terminal)
K10
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
F1 F2 F3
Z1
F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9
L1 L2 L3 PE +UG -UG L1 L2 L3 PE +UG -UG L1 L2 L3 PE +UG -UG
9341 - 9343 9321-9333 9321-9333
PE U V W PE W
Z2 U V
X1 X2
M M
PE 3~ PE 3~
9300vec152
Fig. 10.2-1 Block diagram of a central supply with regenerative power supply module
F1 ... F9 Fuses
K10 Mains contactor
Z1 Mains filter
Z2 Regenerative power supply module
ƒ Design the components according to the requirements of the DC-bus

operation.
 Note!
ƒ If the supply power of the regenerative power supply module
is not sufficient, the system can be additionally supplied in
parallel via the mains connection of further controllers.
ƒ Before connecting the controllers read the Operating
Instructions of the regenerative power supply module.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  10.2-1

Safe standstill 11
Contents
11 Safe standstill
Contents
11.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1-1

11.1.1 Additional safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1-1
11.2 Operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2-1
11.3 Connecting relay KSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3-1
11.4 Functional test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4-1
11.4.1 Automatic cyclic monitoring of ”safe standstill” with PLC . . . . . . . 11.4-2
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  11-1

Safe standstill 11
Important notes 11.1
Additional safety instructions 11.1.1
11.1 Important notes
The controllers supports the ”safe standstill” safety function and protects
against unexpected start-up according to the requirements of EN 9541
Control category 3”, part 1.
2 The controllers are therefore equipped with two independent switch-off
paths.
11.1.1 Additional safety instructions
ƒ Only qualified personnel are permitted to install and set up the “safe
standstill function”.
ƒ All control components (switch, relay, PLC, ...) and the control cabinet
must correspond to the requirements of the EN 954-1 and ISO 13849-2.
This includes among other things:
– Switch, relay with enclosure IP54!
– Control cabinet with enclosure IP54!
– Further requirements can be obtained from the EN 954-1 and
ISO 13849-2!
ƒ Wiring with insulated wire end ferrules or rigid cables is absolutely
vital.
ƒ All safety-relevant cables (e. g. control cable for the safety relay,
feedback contact) outside the control cabinet must be protected, for
instance, by a cable duct. In this connection, make sure that short
circuits between the single cables cannot occur!
ƒ When using the “safe standstill” function, additional measures are
required for ”Emergency off”:
– Motor and controller are not isolated and not equipped with a service
switch or repair switch!
– An emergency-off function requires the isolation of the conductor to
the motor, e. g. by a central mains choke with emergency-off wiring.
ƒ If an external force is likely to act in case of ”safe standstill”,”e. g.
stalling of hanging loads), additional measures have to be provided (e.
g. mechanical brakes).
ƒ After the installation, the operator must check the ”safe standstill”
function.
ƒ The functional test must be repeated at regular intervals.
– Basically, the intervals to be selected depend on the application and
the risk analysis involved as well as on the total system (inspection
interval). The inspection interval should not exceed 1 year.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  11.1-1

Safe standstill 11
Operating mode 11.2
11.2 Operating mode
Internal wiring The ”safe standstill” circuit is created with a forcibly guided safety relay
inside the controller. This relay disconnects the supply of the drivers for
transmitting the pulse pattern to the power output stage. Three areas must
be observed for the implementation:
ƒ Pulse release via safety relay KSR
– Input for switching the safety relay
– Forcibly guided feedback for monitoring
ƒ Digital input X5/28 (controller enable) with optional feedback via the
digital output DIGOUT
ƒ Power output stage
5V

X11/34
X11/33 K SR
X11/K32
X11/K31
-
~
V
X5/28 W
µC
DIGOUT
PWM
PWM
9300vec100
Fig. 11.2-1 Internal circuit of the ”safe standstill” function with three isolated circuit areas
c Area 1: Safety relay KSR, pulse release and feedback
d Area 2: Controller enable, circuit for the internal control
e Area 3: Power output stage
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  11.2-1

11 Safe standstill
11.2 Operating mode
Description Two signals must be preset so that the ”safe standstill” state can be started
at any time:
ƒ Pulse enable: X11/33, X11/34 - safety relay KSR, activation of the driver
supply
ƒ Controller enable: X5/28
”Safe standstill” is started when both signals are deactivated.
As soon as the ”safe standstill” state is activated, the protective circuit
prevents the motor from restarting by the two different and independent
methods.
ƒ Disconnecting the supply voltage for the control modes of the power
section driver, i. e. pulses of the microcontroller system to the inverter
are not transmitted anymore.
– If X11/33, X11/34 is deactivated, the safety relay KSR is released. The
supply voltage for the control modules of the power section driver is
switched off. No pulses are transmitted to the inverter anymore.
ƒ Deactivating the pulses of the microcontroller system to the inverter
(controller inhibit).
– The input signal of X5/28 is lead to the microcontroller system and
the PWM unit.
– Every time the input signal changes to LOW, the pulse output is
inhibited in the microcontroller system.
A disconnection of the safety relay KSR must be monitored externally to be
able to identify a malfunction of the safety relay. For this purpose, the
position of the tripping contact is reported back to the contacts X11/K31,
X11/K32 in a forcibly-guided way. X11/K31, X11/K32 are NC contacts, i. e.
the contact is closed when the safety relay KSR (”safe standstill” active) is
released.
The monitoring of the function ”controller enable” is described in chapter
”functional test”. ( 11.4-1)
11.2-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Safe standstill 11
Connecting relay KSR 11.3
11.3 Connecting relay KSR
 Danger!
The electrical reference point for the coil of the safety relay KSR
must be connected to the PE conductor system (DIN EN 60204-1
paragraph 9.4.3)!
This is the only way to protect the unit from earth faults.
Terminal strip X11 Internal wiring / wiring of terminal strip X11

+5 V X11
3 4
3 4
K SR + 34 +
3 3
K 3 1 K 3 2 3 3
33 –
K 3 2 DC 24 V
K32
K 3 1
K31
9300vec103
Fig. 11.3-1 Safety relay KSR

Coil voltage at +20 °C DC 24 V (20 ... 30 V)
Coil resistance at +20 °C 823 Ω ±10 %
Rated coil power approx. 700 mW
Max. switching voltage AC 250 V, DC 250 V (0.45 A)
Max. AC switching capacity 1500 VA
Max. switching current (ohmic AC 6 A (250 V), DC 6 A (50 V)
load)
Recommended minimum load > 50 mW
Max. switching rate 6 switchings per minute
Electrical service life 105 switching cycle at 6 A
at 250 V AC
106 switching cycles at 1 A
(ohmic load)
6 × 103 switching cycles at 6 A
106 switching cycles at 3 A at 24 V DC
1.5 × 106 switching cycles at 1 A (ohmic load)
Mechanical life time 107 switching cycles
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  11.3-1

11 Safe standstill
11.3 Connecting relay KSR
Terminal assignment
Terminal Function Level / state Electrical data

X11/K32 Safety relay KSR Feedback - pulse inhibit Open contact: Pulse inhibit is See technical data of the
X11/K31 1. disconnecting inactive (operation) safety relay KSR
path Closed contact: Pulse inhibit is
active
X11/33 – coil of safety relay KSR Coil is not carrying any current:
Active pulse inhibit
X11/34 + coil of safety relay KSR Coil is carrying current: Inactive
pulse inhibit (operation)
X5/28 Controller inhibit Controller enable/inhibit LOW: Controller inhibited LOW: 0 ... +3 V
(DCTRL-CINH) HIGH: Controller enabled HIGH: +12 ... +30 V
2. disconnecting Input current at +24 V:
path 8 mA
Reading and processing
the input signals - 1/ms
(mean value)
Terminal data Regulation for wiring of the terminals X11/34, X11/33, X11/K32, X11/K31,
X5/28:
Cable type Wire end ferrule Cable Tightening Stripping
cross-section torque length
Rigid – 2.5 mm2 (AWG 14)0.5 ... 0.6 Nm
Flexibl (4.4 ... 5.3 lb-in 5 mm
2
with plastic sleeve 2.5 mm (AWG 14)
e )
11.3-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Safe standstill 11
Functional test 11.4
11.4 Functional test
 Stop!
If the functional test leads to impermissible states at the
terminals, commissioning is prohibited!
ƒ After the installation the operator must check the ”safe standstill”
function.
ƒ The functional test must be repeated at regular intervals.
– Basically, the intervals to be selected depend on the application and
the risk analysis involved as well as on the total system (inspection
interval). The inspection interval should not exceed 1 year.
Both disconnecting paths must be checked independently for their
disconnecting ability.
1. disconnecting path: Pulse The safety relay KSR is provided with a forcibly guided feedback contact
inhibit
(X11/K32, X11/K31). When the safety relay is disconnected, this feedback
must be evaluated.
X11/K32 Input ”safe standstill” X11/34 Feedback X11/K31
HIGH LOW HIGH
HIGH HIGH LOW
Monitoring can be executed continuously with a PLC. It must, however, at

least be carried out once in the defined inspection interval.
2. disconnecting path: This disconnecting path must be checked while the pulse release is activated
Controller enable
(X11/34 = HIGH by the safety relay KSR.
1. Inhibit the controller (X5/28 = LOW).
2. Enter a setpoint nset > 0; the motor must not rotate.
– It is possible to monitor the motor via visual inspection.
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  11.4-1

11 Safe standstill
11.4 Functional test
11.4.1 Automatic cyclic monitoring of ”safe standstill” with PLC
11.4.1 Automatic cyclic monitoring of ”safe standstill” with PLC
An alternative to the manual monitoring of the disconnecting paths is an

automatic monitoring with a PLC.
For this monitoring, a digital output of the controller (DIGOUT) is used as
example.
DC 24 V
9300
Z1 S2 S1
IN 1 X11/34
IN 2 X11/33 K SR
IN 3 X11/K32
IN 4 X11/K31
RFR
X5/28
µC
DIGOUT
PWM
PWM
9300vec104
Fig. 11.4-1 External wiring of the controller with PLC and automatic cyclic monitoring
S1, S2 Both disconnecting paths can be disconnected separately
DIGOUT If Imotor = 0, then DIGOUT = HIGH
If Imotor ≠ 0, then DIGOUT = LOW
Ctrl. Controller enable
enable
The following conditions must be fulfilled:

ƒ The PLC must be programmed so that the total system can be
immediately led into a safe state if the plausibility check results in an
impermissible state.
ƒ The output DIGOUT must be parameterised so that it can give
information about the output current Imotor of the drive. ( 11.4-3)
– If Imotor = 0, then DIGOUT = HIGH
– If Imotor ≠ 0, then DIGOUT = LOW
11.4-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Safe standstill 11
Functional test 11.4
Automatic cyclic monitoring of ”safe standstill” with PLC 11.4.1
Cyclic function test (in

inspection interval)
 Stop!
If the function test leads to impermissible states at the
terminals, you must switch off the drive.
1. Disconnecting path: Pulse inhibit by safety relay KSR
ƒ The following must apply for the safety relay KSR:
– If X11/34 = LOW, then X11/K31 = HIGH.
– If X11/34 = HIGH, then X11/K31 = LOW.
2. Disconnecting path: Controller enable
ƒ The following condition must be checked:
– If X5/28 = LOW and X11/34 = HIGH and nset > 0, then
DIGOUT = HIGH.
Example for parameter DIGOUT (is called DIGOUT4 in the example) is to present a feedback of the
setting of output DIGOUT
output current to the motor to check the efficiency of the controller enable.
The following example shows how to create a digital output signal
Imotor < Ithreshold.
All codes and parameters required for a configuration via keypad XT or
Global Drive Control (GDC) are indicated.
Sequence Code parameter setting
1. Configure function block CMP3 (comparator)
A Link CMP3-IN1 with MCTRL-IACT C0693/1 = 5004
B Link CMP3-IN2 with FCODE-472/1 C0693/2 = 19521
C Configure the function IN1 < IN2 C0690 = 3
2. Configure output signal of CMP3
A Link DIGOUT4 with CMP3-OUT C0117/4 = 10660
3. Enter function block CMP3 into the processing table
A Select a free place in the processing table
In the Lenze setting, for instance, place 2 in the processing C0465/2 = 10660
table is free.
4. Current threshold setting
A Set the current threshold for Irated_FI to 2 % C0472/1 = 2.00
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  11.4-3

Accessories (survey) 12
Contents
12 Accessories (Survey)
Contents
12.1 General accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1-1

12.2 Type-specific accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2-1
12.2.1 Operation with rated power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2-1
12.2.2 Operation with increased rated power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2-3
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  12-1

General accessories 12.1
12.1 General accessories
Accessories Designation Order number

Communication LECOM-LI (optical fibre) EMF2102IBCV003
modules LECOM-B (RS485) EMF2102IBCV002
LECOM-A/B (RS232/485) EMF2102IBCV001
LON EMF2141IB
INTERBUS EMF2113IB
INTERBUS-Loop EMF2112IB
PROFIBUS-DP EMF2133IB
DeviceNet/CANopen EMF2175IB
Operating module keypad XT EMZ9371BC
Diagnosis terminal (keypad XT in handheld design, IP20) 1) E82ZBBXC
Other Connecting cable 2,5 m E82ZWL025
5m E82ZWL050
10 m E82ZWL100
Parameterisation/operating software »Global Drive Control« ESP-GDC2
(GDC)
PC system bus adapter EMF2173IB
(Voltage supply via DIN connection)
PC system bus adapter EMF2173IB-V002
(Voltage supply via PS2 connection)
PC system bus adapter EMF2173IB-V003
(Voltage supply via PS2 connection, electrical isolation)
PC system bus adapter USB EMF2177IB
CAN repeater EMF2176IB
PC system cable RS232 5m EWL0020
10 m EWL0021
Optical fibre adapter (normal output power) EMF2125IB
Optical fibre adapter (high output power) EMF2126IB
Power supply unit for optical fibre adapter EJ0013
Optical fibre, single-core, black PE sheath (basic protection), EWZ0007
sold by the meter
Optical fibre, single-core, red PUR sheath (reinforced EWZ0006
protection), sold by the meter
Setpoint potentiometer ERPD0010k0001W
Rotary knob for setpoint potentiometer ERZ0001
Scale for setpoint potentiometer ERZ0002
Digital display EPD203
Encoder cable 2,5 m EWLE002GX-T
5,0 m EWLE005GX-T
10,0 m EWLE010GX-T
15,0 m EWLE015GX-T
20,0 m EWLE020GX-T
25,0 m EWLE025GX-T
30,0 m EWLE030GX-T
35,0 m EWLE035GX-T
40,0 m EWLE040GX-T
45,0 m EWLE045GX-T
50,0 m EWLE050GX-T
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  12.1-1

12 Accessories (survey)
12.1 General accessories
Accessories Designation Order number

Connecting cable for master frequency coupling 2,5 m EWLD002GGBS93
1) Additional connecting cable required
 Tip!
Current documentation and software updates for Lenze products
can be found on the Internet in the ”Downloads” area under
http://www.Lenze.com
12.1-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Type-specific accessories 12.2
Operation with rated power 12.2.1
12.2 Type-specific accessories
12.2.1 Operation with rated power

Accessories Order No.
Mains choke ELN3-0700H003 ELN3-0700H003 ELN3-0450H004 ELN3-0250H007
Built-on mains filter
Limit class A EZN3A2400H002 EZN3A1500H003 EZN3A0900H004 EZN3A0500H007
Limit class B EZN3B2400H002 EZN3B1500H003 EZN3B0900H004 EZN3B0500H007
Motor filter ELM3-030H004 ELM3-030H004 ELM3-030H004 ELM3-014H010
Sinusoidal filter EZS3-002A001 EZS3-002A001 EZS3-004A001 EZS3-007A002
Brake chopper EMB9352-E EMB9352-E EMB9352-E EMB9352-E
Brake resistor ERBM470R050W ERBM470R100W ERBM370R150W ERBD180R300W
Shield connection
Control cable EZZ0015 EZZ0015 EZZ0015 EZZ0015
Motor cable EZZ0016 EZZ0016 EZZ0016 EZZ0016
Mounting set for EJ0036 EJ0036 EJ0037 EJ0037
push-through
technique

Footprint mains filter – – E82ZN22334B230 E82ZN22334B230
Sinusoidal filter EZS3-013A001 EZS3-024A001 – –
Brake resistor ERBD100R600W ERBD047R01K2 ERBD033R02K0 ERBD022R03K0
Shield connection
push-through
technique
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  12.2-1

12 Accessories (survey)
12.2 Type-specific accessories
12.2.1 Operation with rated power

Mains choke ELN3-0055H055 ELN3-0038H085 ELN3-0027H105 ELN3-0022H130 ELN3-0017H170
Footprint mains filter E82ZN30334B230 E82ZN45334B230 E82ZN55334B230 E82ZN75334B230 E82ZN90334B230
Limit class A EZN3A0055H060 EZN3A0037H090 EZN3A0030H110 EZN3A0022H150 EZN3A0017H200
Limit class B EZN3B0055H060 EZN3B0037H090 EZN3B0030H110 EZN3B0022H150 EZN3B0017H200
Brake chopper EMB9352-E 2 × EMB9352-E 2 × EMB9352-E 3 × EMB9352-E 3 × EMB9352-E
Brake resistor ERBD018R03K0 2 × ERBD022R03K0 2 × ERBD018R03K0 3 × ERBD022R03K0 3 × ERBD018R03K0
Shield connection
Control cable EZZ0015 EZZ0015 EZZ0015 EZZ0015 EZZ0015
Motor cable EZZ0017 – – – –
Mounting set for EJ0011 EJ0010 EJ0010 EJ0009 EJ0009
push-through
technique
12.2-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Type-specific accessories 12.2
Operation with increased rated power 12.2.2
12.2.2 Operation with increased rated power

Sinusoidal filter EZS3-002A001 EZS3-004A001 EZS3-006A001 EZS3-009A002
Brake resistor ERBM470R050W ERBM470R100W ERBM370R150W ERBD180R300W
Shield connection
push-through
technique

Footprint mains filter – E82ZN22334B230 E82ZN30334B230 –
Motor filter ELM3-007H025 ELM3-004H055 – –
Sinusoidal filter EZS3-017A001 – – –
Brake resistor ERBD100R600W ERBD033R02K0 ERBD022R03K0 ERBD018R03K0
Shield connection
push-through
technique

Footprint mains filter E82ZN55334B230 – E82ZN90334B230 –
Brake chopper 2 × EMB9352-E 2 × EMB9352-E 3 × EMB9352-E 3 × EMB9352-E
Brake resistor 2 × ERBD022R03K0 2 × ERBD018R03K0 3 × ERBD022R03K0 3 × ERBD018R03K0
Shield connection of EZZ0015 EZZ0015 EZZ0015 EZZ0015
control cable
push-through
technique
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  12.2-3

Appendix 13
Contents
13 Appendix
Contents
13.1 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1-1

13.1.1 Terminology and abbreviations used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1-1
13.2 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2-1
EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  13-1

Appendix 13
Glossary 13.1
Terminology and abbreviations used 13.1.1
13.1 Glossary
13.1.1 Terminology and abbreviations used
 Cross-reference to a chapter with the corresponding

page number
AC AC current or AC voltage
AIF Automation interface

AIF interface, interface for communication modules
CE Communauté Européene
Controller Any frequency inverter, servo inverter or DC speed

controller
Cxxxx/y Subcode y of code Cxxxx

(e.g. C0404/2 = subcode 2 of code C0404)
DC DC current or DC voltage
DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung
Drive Lenze controllers in combination with a geared

motor, a three-phase AC motor and other Lenze
drive components
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EN European Standard
fN [Hz] Rated motor frequency
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
Imains [A] Mains current
Imax [A] Maximum output current
IP International Protection Code
IPE [mA] Discharge current
Ir [A] Rated output current
L [mH] Inductance
MN [Nm] Rated motor torque
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
PDC [kW] Power supplied by the DC bus when operating with

power-adapted motor
Pr [kW] Rated motor power
PV [W] Inverter power loss
R [Ω] Resistor
SN [kVA] Controller output power
UDC [V] DC supply voltage
EDSVF9333V EN 1.0-09/2004  13.1-1

13 Appendix
13.1 Glossary
13.1.1 Terminology and abbreviations used
UL Underwriters Laboratories
UM [V] Output voltage
Umains [V] Mains voltage
VDE Verband deutscher Elektrotechniker
Xk/y Terminal y on the terminal strip Xk (e.g. X5/28 =

terminal 28 on the terminal strip X5)
13.1-2  EDSVF9333V EN 1.0-09/2004

Appendix 13
Index 13.2
13.2 Index
A Changing parameters, Keypad EMZ9371BC, 7.2-5 , 7.2-7 ,

7.2-8 , 7.2-9 , 7.2-10
Acceleration, 6.10-1
Changing the direction of rotation, 6.10-5
Acceleration time Tir, additional setpoint of NSET, 8.3-19
Clamp operation, 9.4-2
Accessories, 12-1
Code, 7.1-1
- General, 12.1-1
- Type-specific, 12.2-1 Code table, 8.3-1
Activating the incremental encoder, 6.7-1 Cold plate, Requirements of the cooler, 4.1-3 , 4.2-4
Actual motor current, 8.2-27 , 8.2-50 , 8.3-6 , 9.1-1 Commissioning, 6-1

- before initial switch-on, 6.1-1
Actual motor voltage, 8.2-27 , 8.2-50 , 8.3-6 , 9.1-1
- Entry of motor data, 6.6-1
Actual speed value, 8.2-27 , 8.2-50 , 8.3-6 , 9.1-1 Configuration
Additional setpoint, 8.3-6 - Analog input signals, 6.5-4
Analog input signals, 6.5-4 - Analog output signals, 6.5-6
- Analog outputs, 6.5-6
Analog inputs
- changing the direction of rotation, 6.10-5
- setting input range with jumper X3, 5.9-8
- code table, 8.3-1
- terminal assignment, 5.9-8
- controller inhibit (DCTRL1-CINH), 6.4-1
Analog output signals, 6.5-6 - Current limits, 6.6-12
Analog outputs - Digital input signals, 6.5-1
- Configuration, 6.5-6 - Digital output signals, 6.5-3
- terminal assignment, 5.9-8 - Digital outputs, 6.5-3
- Display functions, 9.1-1
Application, as directed, 1.2-1
- Maximum field frequency, 6.10-1
Application as directed, 1.2-1 - Minimum field frequency, 6.10-1
Application datum, Display, 9.1-1 - motor data collection, 6.6-13
Auto-TRIP reset, 9.5-1 - Oscillation damping, 6.11-3
- Quick stop (QSP), 6.10-4
- Relay output, 6.5-3
B - Slip compensation, 6.11-1
Basic function, 8.3-2 - switching frequency of inverter, 6.9-1
Boost correction, influence of, 6.11-5 , 6.11-10 , 8.3-8 - table of attributes, 8.5-1
- Umin boost, 6.8-6
Braking, 6.10-1
Conformity, 1.2-1 , 3.1-1
C Control cables, 5.2-3
Cable cross-sections, 3.5-1 Control terminals

- changing the assignment of X5, 6.5-1
Cable type (CAN), 5.10-1
- changing the assignment of X6, 6.5-1
Cables
Control word (AIF), 8.3-13
- for control connections, 5.2-3
Controller
- for motor connection, 5.2-1
- application as directed, 1.2-1
Calibration, Application datum, 9.1-1
- in clamp operation, 9.4-2
CAN bus identifier, 8.3-23 - labelling, 1.2-1
Capacitance per unit length (CAN), 5.10-1 Controller inhibit, drive behaviour, 6.4-1
CE conformity, 1.2-1 Current characteristic, current derating, 3.4-1
CE-typical drive system, 5.4-1 , 5.5-1 , 5.6-1 , 5.7-1 Current derating, 3.4-1
Central supply. Siehe DC-bus connection Current limits, 6.6-12
EDSVF9333V EN 1.0-09/2004  13.2-1

13 Appendix
13.2 Index
D E
DC injection braking (GSB) Electrical installation, system bus (CAN), 5.10-1
- automatic, 8.2-43 , 8.2-71 EMC, 3.1-2
- manual, 8.2-41 , 8.2-69 - what to do in case of interferences, 5.2-6
DC supply, 5.2-1 , 5.4-4 , 5.5-4 , 5.6-4 , 5.7-4 Emergency-off, controller inhibit, 6.4-1
DC-bus connection Enclosure, 3.1-2
- Central supply, 10.2-1
Entry of motor data, 6.6-1
- Decentralised supply, 10.1-1
Error analysis, 9.2-1
DC-bus voltage, 8.2-27 , 8.2-50 , 8.3-6 , 9.1-1
Error elimination, 9.4-1
Deceleration, 6.10-1
Error message, Reset, 9.5-1
Deceleration time Tif, additional setpoint of NSET, 8.3-19
Error messages, 9.4-5
Decentralised supply. Siehe DC-bus connection
Explanations, code table, 8.3-1
Definition of notes used, 2.4-2
Definitions, Terms, 13.1-1
F
Degree of pollution, 3.1-1
Fault messages, OC3 in clamp operation, 9.4-2
Derating, 6.6-13 , 6.9-1 , 6.11-3 , 8.2-46 , 8.2-74
Feedback system, wiring, 5.11-1
device control, 8.3-2
Field controller, 6.8-8 , 8.3-8
Device protection, 2.3-1
Field frequency
Diagnostics, 7.2-11 , 9.1-1 , 9.1-2 - maximum, 6.10-1
Diameter calculator (DCALC1), 8.2-1 - Minimum, 6.10-1
Digital frequency input, connection to X9, 5.12-1 Flying restart circuit, 2.3-1
Digital frequency output, connection to X10, 5.12-1 Function blocks, 8.2-1
Digital input signals, 6.5-1 - diameter calculator (DCALC1), 8.2-1
- internal motor control, vector control (MCTRL2), 8.2-48
Digital inputs, Terminal assignment, 5.9-8
- master frequency input (DFIN), 8.2-5
Digital inputs/outputs, Terminal assignment, 11.3-2 - master frequency output (DFOUT), 8.2-8
Digital output signals, 6.5-3 - master frequency processing (DFSET), 8.2-18
Digital outputs - master frequency ramp-function generator (DFRFG1),
8.2-13
- Configuration, 6.5-3
Fuses, operation with rated power, 400 V (UL), 3.5-2 ,
3.5-3 , 3.5-4
Dimensions, 4.1-2 , 4.1-4 , 4.2-3 , 4.2-5 , 4.3-3 , 4.4-3
Direction of rotation, inhibiting, 8.2-47 , 8.2-75 G
Display General accessories, 12.1-1
- Application datum, 9.1-1
General data, 7.2-1
- Operating status, 9.2-1
Display functions, 9.1-1
H
- Possible values, 9.1-1
History buffer, 9.2-1
Display of operating data, 9.1-1
- Assembly, 9.2-2
Display values, 9.1-1 - delete, 9.2-2
- Calibration, 9.1-1 Humidity class, 3.1-1
Drive behaviour
- controller inhibit, 6.4-1
- Influence of the motor cable length, 5.1-3
Drive performance, in case of errors, 9.3-1
13.2-2  EDSVF9333V EN 1.0-09/2004

Appendix 13
Index 13.2
I K
Imax limit in motor mode, 6.6-12 , 8.2-27 , 8.2-50 , 8.3-4 Keypad EMZ9371BC, Changing parameters, 7.2-5 , 7.2-7 ,
- in generator mode, 6.6-12 , 8.2-27 , 8.2-50 , 8.3-4 7.2-8 , 7.2-9 , 7.2-10
Incremental encoder KTY motor monitoring, 6.6-10

- at X8, 5.11-2 , 6.7-2
- at X9, 5.11-3 , 6.7-2 L
- operation with, 8.2-58
Labelling, controller, 1.2-1
- with HTL level, 5.11-3 , 6.7-2
- with TTL level, 5.11-2 , 6.7-2 LED display, 9.2-1
Initial switch-on, check before initial switch-on, 6.1-1 LED’s, 9.2-1
Input signals Legal regulations, 1.2-1

- Analog, Configuration, 6.5-4 Liability, 1.2-2
- digital, Configuration, 6.5-1
Inputs M
- digital, Response times, 6.5-1
Mains connection, 5.2-1 , 5.4-4 , 5.5-4 , 5.6-4 , 5.7-4
- KTY, 6.6-10
- PTC, 6.6-8 Mains supply, 3.5-2
Installation Maloperation of the drive, 9.4-1

- Mechanical, ”Cold plate” technique, 4.1-3 , 4.2-4 Manufacturer, 1.2-1
- mechanical
Thermally separated mounting (push-through technique) Master frequency input (DFIN), 8.2-5
15 ... 30 kW, 4.2-3 Master frequency output (DFOUT), 8.2-8
Thermally separated mounting (push-through technique)
45 ... 55 kW, 4.3-3 Master frequency processing (DFSET), 8.2-18
Thermally separated mounting (push-through technique)
75 ... 90 kW, 4.4-3 Master frequency ramp-function generator (DFRFG1),
8.2-13
Installation height, 3.1-1
Maximum speed, 6.10-1 , 8.2-26 , 8.2-49 , 8.3-3
- Reduce rated current, 3.1-1
Insulation resistance, 3.1-2 Mechanical installation
- ”Cold plate” technique, 4.1-3 , 4.2-4
Interferences, eliminating EMC interferences, 5.2-6
- Cold plate technique, Requirements of the cooler, 4.1-3 ,
Internal motor control 4.2-4
- V/f characteristic control (MCTRL1), setting of V/f - Thermally separated mounting (push-through technique)
characteristic, 8.2-33 15 ... 30 kW, 4.2-3
- with vector control (MCTRL2) - Thermally separated mounting (push-through technique)
torque control with speed limitation, 8.2-63 45 ... 55 kW, 4.3-3
torque limitation, 8.2-60 - Thermally separated mounting (push-through technique)
Internal motor control (MCTRL) 75 ... 90 kW, 4.4-3
- inhibiting the direction of rotation, 8.2-47 , 8.2-75 Menu structure, XT EMZ9371BC keypad, 7.2-12
- limiting output current, 8.2-62 Minimum speed, 6.10-1 , 8.2-26 , 8.2-49 , 8.3-3
- limiting speed setpoint, 8.2-33 , 8.2-57
Monitoring, of safe standstill with PLC, 11.4-2
- limiting the output current, 8.2-35
- quick stop (QSP), 8.2-40 , 8.2-68 Motor, thermal monitoring, with PTC thermistor, 6.6-8 ,
- speed control, 8.2-34 , 8.2-58 6.6-10
- speed setpoint selection, 8.2-33 , 8.2-57 Motor cable, influence of the length, 5.1-3
- with vector control (MCTRL2), 8.2-48 Motor cables, 5.2-1
Motor cos phi, 6.6-2 , 6.6-14 , 6.8-9 , 8.2-52 , 8.3-9
J
Motor data, identification, 6.6-13
JOG setpoint, 8.3-5
Motor data collection, 6.6-13
Jumper X3, for input range of analog setpoint selection,
5.9-8 Motor leakage inductance, 8.2-52 , 8.3-9
EDSVF9333V EN 1.0-09/2004  13.2-3

13 Appendix
13.2 Index
Motor magnetising current, optimising in case of vector Output signals

control, 6.11-9 - Analog, Configuration, 6.5-6
Motor potentiometer - digital, Configuration, 6.5-3
- acceleration time Tir, 8.3-21 Outputs
- Analog, 6.5-6
- deceleration time Tif, 8.3-21
- digital, 6.5-3
Motor protection, 2.3-1 Overspeed, 2.3-1
Motor rotor resistance, 8.2-51 , 8.3-8 Overview, Accessories, 12-1
Motor stator inductance, 6.6-14 , 6.8-9 , 8.2-52 , 8.3-9
P
Motor stator resistance, 6.6-14 , 8.2-52 , 8.3-9 Parameter setting, 7-1
Mounting position, 3.1-1 - code, 7.1-1
- with bus system, 7.1-2
- with XT EMZ9371BC keypad, 6.3-1 , 7.2-1
N Password, 8.3-10
Network of several drives, 10-1 Protection measures, 3.1-2
- Several drives, 10-1 Protection of persons, 2.3-1
Noise emission, 3.1-2 Protective insulation of control circuits, 3.1-2
Noise immunity, 3.1-2 PTC motor monitoring, 6.6-8
Noise optimised operation, 6.9-1 Q
Notes, definition, 2.4-2 QSP (quick stop), 8.2-40 , 8.2-68
Quick stop, 6.10-4
O Quick stop (QSP), 8.2-40 , 8.2-68
Operating behaviour Quick stop deceleration time, 6.10-4 , 8.2-29 , 8.2-53 ,
8.3-11
- Optimise, 6.8-1
- Optimising, 6.11-1 R
Operating conditions, 7.2-1 Rated data
- Operation at rated power, Rated data 400 V, 3.2-1 , 3.3-1
Operating mode
- for standard applications, 6.1-2 , 6.8-3 - Operation with increased rated power, 3.3-1
- Select, 6.8-1 - Operation with rated power, 3.2-1
- select, 6.1-1 , 6.8-1 Rated data 480 V, 3.2-4
- V/f characteristic control, 6.8-4 Rated motor current, 6.6-1 , 6.6-14 , 6.8-9 , 8.2-52 ,
commissioning example, 6.3-1 8.3-9
- vector control, 6.8-8 Rated motor frequency, 6.6-1 , 6.6-14 , 6.8-9 , 8.2-29 ,
commissioning example, 6.3-5 8.2-52 , 8.3-9
Operating status, Display, 9.2-1 Rated motor power, 6.6-1 , 6.8-8 , 8.3-8
Rated motor speed, 6.6-1 , 6.6-14 , 6.8-9 , 8.2-29 , 8.2-52
Operation, noise optimised, 6.9-1
, 8.3-9
Operation with increased rated power, 12.2-3 Rated motor voltage, 6.6-2 , 6.6-14 , 6.8-5 , 6.8-9 ,
Operation with rated power, 12.2-1 8.2-29 , 8.2-52 , 8.3-9
Reaction times of digital inputs, 6.5-1
Oscillation damping, 6.11-3 , 8.2-46 , 8.2-74
Relay output, Configuration, 6.5-3
- Reduction of speed oscillations, 6.11-3
Reset, Error message, 9.5-1
Output current, limiting, 8.2-35 , 8.2-62
13.2-4  EDSVF9333V EN 1.0-09/2004

Appendix 13
Index 13.2
Residual hazards, 2.3-1 Stability, of the motor, 8.2-60

Running optimisation, 6.11-1 Status word AIF, 8.3-15 , 9.1-2
Stopping, 6.10-1
S Supply forms, 3.1-2
Safe standstill, 11-1
Switching frequency, automatic current-depending
- Active function, 5.9-3 change-over, 6.9-2 , 8.2-27 , 8.2-49 , 8.3-4
- additional safety instructions, 11.1-1
Switching frequency of inverter, 6.9-1
- automatic cyclic monitoring with PLC, 11.4-2
- noise optimised, 6.9-1
- deactivated function, 5.9-6
- internal wiring, 11.2-1 Switching frequency reduction, 6.9-2
Safety instructions, 2-1 System bus (CAN), wiring, 5.10-1

- definition, 2.4-2
- design, 2.4-2 T
- for ”safe standstill”, 11.1-1
Table of attributes, 8.5-1
Safety relay, connector X11
Technical data, 3-1
- current characteristic, device protection by current
- wiring, 11.3-1
derating, 3.4-1
Safety relay KSR - Operation with rated power, Rated data 480 V, 3.2-4
- Terminal assignment, 5.9-8
technical data, Operation with rated power, 3.2-1
Technicaldata
Selecting the operating mode, speed mode, setting
acceleration and deceleration times, 6.10-3 - Operation at rated power, Rated data 400 V, 3.2-1 , 3.3-1
Selection, operating mode, 6.1-1 , 6.8-1 - Operation with increased rated power, 3.3-1
Selection of motor type, 6.6-1 , 8.2-29 , 8.2-52 , 8.3-9 Temperature detection, 8.2-59
Selection of the feedback system, 6.7-1 , 8.2-50 , 8.3-4 Temperature ranges, 3.1-1
Setting integral action component, 8.2-59 - Reduce rated current, 3.1-1
Setting the acceleration time, 6.10-3 Terminal assignment
Setting the deceleration time, 6.10-3 - analog inputs, 5.9-8
- analog outputs, 5.9-8
Setting the feedback system, 6.7-1
- digital inputs, 5.9-8
Setting the speed feedback, 6.7-1 - digital inputs/outputs, 11.3-2
Slip compensation, 6.11-1 , 8.2-47 , 8.2-75 - digital outputs, 5.9-8
Specific resistance (CAN), 5.10-1 - Safety relay KSR, 5.9-8
- safety relay KSR, 11.3-2
Speed control, 8.2-34 , 8.2-58
- adapting the speed controller, 8.2-58 Terminal data, 5.9-2 , 11.3-2
- at vector control (MCTRL2), adapting the speed Terms
controller, 8.2-34 - controller, 13.1-1
- with vector control (MCTRL2) - Definitions, 13.1-1
setting integral action component, 8.2-59
speed feedback, 8.2-58 - drive, 13.1-1
temperature detection, 8.2-59 Thermal monitoring, motor, with PTC thermistor, 6.6-8 ,
Speed feedback, 8.2-58 6.6-10
Speed mode, setting acceleration and deceleration times, Tn current controller, 6.8-8 , 8.2-28 , 8.2-51 , 8.3-8
6.10-3
Tn slip controller, 6.11-1 , 8.2-29 , 8.3-8
Speed oscillations, 6.11-3
Tn speed controller, 8.2-28 , 8.2-51 , 8.3-7
Speed setpoint limitation, 8.2-33 , 8.2-57
Torque control with speed limitation, in case of vector
Speed setpoint selection, 8.2-33 , 8.2-57 control (MCTRL2), 8.2-63
EDSVF9333V EN 1.0-09/2004  13.2-5

13 Appendix
13.2 Index
Torque limitation in the field weakening range, with Vibration resistance, 3.1-1
vector control (MCTRL2), 8.2-60
Voltage boost, optimising via boost correction, 6.11-5
TRIP reset, 9.5-1
Voltage drop, 3.5-1
Troubleshooting, 9.2-1
Voltage supply, via internal voltage source, 5.9-4 , 5.9-6
- Drive performance in case of errors, 9.3-1
- Error analysis with history buffer, 9.2-1 Preface, 1-1
- Error messages, 9.4-5 Vp current controller, 6.8-8 , 8.2-28 , 8.2-51 , 8.3-8
- Maloperation of the drive, 9.4-1
Vp speed controller, 8.2-28 , 8.2-51 , 8.3-7
- Resetting error message, 9.5-1
Troubleshooting and fault elimination, 9-1
W
Type-specific accessories, 12.2-1
Warranty, 1.2-2
U Waste disposal, 2.1-3
Umin boost, 6.8-6 Wiring

- digital frequency input to X9, 5.12-1
V - digital frequency output to X10, 5.12-1
- system bus (CAN), 5.10-1
V/f characteristic, setting of, 8.2-33
Wiring according to EMC, 5.4-1 , 5.5-1 , 5.6-1 , 5.7-1
V/f characteristic control, 6.8-4
- boost correction, 6.11-5
- commissioning example, 6.3-1 X
Vector control, 6.8-8 XT EMZ9371BC keypad
- commissioning example, 6.3-5 - Menu structure, 7.2-12
- optimising motor magnetising current, 6.11-9 - Parameter setting, 6.3-1 , 7.2-1
13.2-6  EDSVF9333V EN 1.0-09/2004

Lenze 9300 Vector Manual 0-37-90kW v3 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Lenze 9300 Vector Manual 0-37-90kW v3 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Lenze 9300 Vector Manual 0-37-90kW v3 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

EDSVF9333V

9300 vector 0.37 ... 90 kW

EVF9321 ... EVF9333

1.1 How to use this System Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-1

EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  1-1

1.1 How to use this System Manual

1.1.1 Information provided by the System Manual

EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  1.1-1

1.1-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

1.1.2 Products to which the System Manual applies

This documentation applies to 9300 frequency inverters as of version:

Type no. / power

EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  1.1-3

1.2 Legal regulations

Labelling Lenze controllers are unambiguously designated by the contents of the

Manufacturer Lenze Drive Systems GmbH, Hans-Lenze-Straße 1, D-31855 Aerzen,

CE conformity Conforms to the EC Low-Voltage Directive

Application as directed 9300 vector frequency inverter and accessories

EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  1.2-1

1.2-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  2-1

2.1 General safety and application notes for Lenze controllers

(According to: Low-Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC)

General Lenze controllers (frequency inverters, servo inverters, DC controllers) and

EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  2.1-1

Operation If necessary, systems including controllers must be equipped with additional

2.1-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Disposal Recycle metal and plastic materials. Ensure professional disposal of

EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  2.1-3

2.2 General safety and application instructions for Lenze motors

(According to: Low-Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC)

EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  2.2-1

2.2-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  2.2-3

2.3 Residual hazards

EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  2.3-1

2.4 Definition of notes used

Safety instructions Structure of safety instructions:

Pictograph and signal word Meaning

Application notes Pictograph and signal word Meaning

 Note! Important note to ensure troublefree operation

 Tip! Useful tip for simple handling

 Reference to another documentation

2.4-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

3.1 General data/operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-1

EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  3-1

3.1 General data/operating conditions

Standards and application Field Values

EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  3.1-1

General electrical data Field Values

3.1-2  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

Open loop and closed Field Values

EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005  3.1-3

Safety relay KSR Field Values

3.1-4  EDSVF9333V EN 3.0-06/2005

3.2 Operation with rated power (normal operation)

3.2.1 Rated data for 400 V mains voltage

Typical motor power Pr [kW] 0.37 0.75 1.5 3.0

Dimensions H [mm] 350 350 350 350